JP7313178B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, various marks such as model name, function name, and warning display are displayed at positions visible from the front side. In the past, these marks were often fixedly displayed near the center of the game machine, for example, in the game area of the game board, but in recent years, the size of the game machine body has increased, especially the amount and range of protrusion to the front and upper sides. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a model name is displayed above a frame (front frame).

JP 2018-175949 A

By the way, the player plays the game while sitting right in front of the game machine, and spends most of the time watching the image display means arranged substantially in the center of the game area. For example, if a mark consisting of a model name, etc. is placed on the upper part of the frame (front frame), etc., the visibility from a position a little away from the game machine is enhanced, so that the function of identifying one's own and other's products is more likely to be exhibited. In addition, even if a mark made up of a warning display or the like is out of the player's field of view during the game, it cannot fully exhibit the function of calling attention to the player during the game if the player's attention is not directed to it even if it is in the player's field of view.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of fully exhibiting the functions of marks placed on the game machine even for a player who is playing the game.

The above objects of the present invention are achieved by the following means.

(1) operation means that can be operated by a player;
display means capable of displaying various effects including demonstration effects;
a display control means capable of controlling display by the display means;
a first mark that is composed of a plurality of individual elements and is arranged at a position visible to the player and that indicates the model name;
a first lighting control means capable of controlling lighting of the first mark;
an operation valid period control means capable of setting an operation valid period for the operation means;
a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is established;
In a gaming machine configured to be able to transition from a gaming state to a non-gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
The display control means is
When a specific condition is satisfied after the transition to the non-gaming state, the demonstration effect can be executed and controlled,
The non-gaming state includes a non-demonstration effect period in which the demonstration effect is not performed and a demonstration effect period in which the demonstration effect is performed,
The demonstration effect period includes at least a first period during which the model name is not displayed on the display means and a second period during which the model name is displayed on the display means ,
The first lighting control means is
During the non-demonstration production period and during the second period of the demonstration production period, all the individual elements of the first mark are lit in the same system color or all the individual elements are extinguished.
During the first period of the demonstration effect period, only a part of the individual elements of the first mark are lit, or all the individual elements of the first mark are lit so as not to be the same system color.
The first mark is configured such that the period of the first mode in the non-gaming state is longer than the period of the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

(2) provided with a measuring means capable of measuring the elapsed time after shifting to the non-gaming state;
The specific condition that triggers the execution of the demonstration effect includes at least the value measured by the measuring means reaching a predetermined value,
The measuring means resets the measured value when the player operates the operating means before the measured value reaches the predetermined value,
With the above configuration,
The period during which the first mark is in the second mode in the non-playing state when the operation means is operated is configured to be shorter than the period when the operation means is not operated,
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:

According to the present invention, it is possible to allow the player who is playing the game to fully exhibit the function of the mark arranged on the game machine.

1 is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game board and an effect button. It is a block diagram which shows a control apparatus. It is a figure where it uses for description of hit classification and game state transition. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device; It is a game flow for explaining game contents (usually, time saving, ST mode). This is a game flow for explaining game contents (Omen, Ceiling, Heaven mode). 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side; It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. 10 is a flowchart showing special symbol management processing in FIG. 9; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 10 ; 11 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 10; 13 is a flowchart showing ceiling function management processing in FIG. 12; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 12 ; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing game state transition preparation processing in FIG. 12; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a front part of processing during a special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 10. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the latter part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 10. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric accessary product management process in FIG. 9; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a jackpot end process in FIG. 17; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table selection table for big hits. It is a figure which shows a game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for ceilings. It is a figure which shows a hit fluctuation|variation pattern distribution table (general, an omen, a ceiling, heaven time reduction use). It is a figure which shows the per variation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST beginning stage, ST middle stage, and ST end stage). It is a figure which shows a loss fluctuation|variation pattern distribution table (general, an omen, a ceiling, heaven time reduction use). It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table for ST (for the early stage of ST, the middle stage of ST, and the end stage of ST). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the game mode type, the internal game state type, the variation pattern allocation designation number, and the game state determination number. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in ST mode which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in ST mode based on the 1st modification of the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in ST mode based on the 2nd modification of the same embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-reading notice according to the embodiment; It is explanatory drawing where it uses for description of the modification of a privilege provision form. It is explanatory drawing where it uses for description of the modification of a privilege provision form. It is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine used in another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention (model name on board); It is a front view showing the appearance of a game machine according to another embodiment of the present invention (model name in the frame). FIG. 36B shows a front view and a side view of the gaming machine, where (A) shows the case where the player's line of sight is at the standing position, and (B) shows the case where the player's line of sight is at the seated position. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "model name" on a game machine as a type of identification information made up of a mark. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "function name" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of marks. It is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "performance display" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of marks. It is a diagram showing an example of displaying a "warning display" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of a mark. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying an “intellectual property right license” on a gaming machine as a type of identification information consisting of a mark. It is a diagram showing an example of displaying "other display" on the gaming machine as a type of identification information made up of a mark. It is the figure which illustrated the case where "other display" is displayed on a display means. It is the figure which showed the example of the production|presentation which a movable accessory moves. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the “luminescence mode of the model name logo” changes according to the progress of the game (while symbols are stopped, while symbols are fluctuating, and when symbols are stopped). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (during a big win) in which the “light emission mode of the model name logo” changes according to the progress of the game; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (waiting for customers) in which the “light emission mode of the model name logo” changes according to the progress of the game; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which various marks are displayed on the display means according to the progress of the game; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the fonts of various marks displayed on the display means are different according to the progress of the game; It is the figure which showed the example which displays various marks on a display means according to a big-hit expectation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying various marks on the display means in accordance with the degree of advantage of the player; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the amount of information of various marks displayed on the display means differs depending on the display timing; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of an embodiment (another embodiment 5) in which the “arrangement” of the constituent elements of identification information is devised on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of the embodiment (another embodiment 5) in which the “arrangement” of the constituent elements of the identification information is devised on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is the figure which illustrated about embodiment (another embodiment 6) which devises "how to make it light" of the identification information arrange|positioned other than a liquid crystal display screen. Some examples (a) to (c) of the fifth and sixth embodiments are shown in list form. The rest of the examples (d) to (g) of the fifth and sixth embodiments are shown in list form. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of an embodiment (another embodiment 6) in which the “how to illuminate” a constituent element of identification information is devised on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (i). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (b). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (c). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (d). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (e). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (f). It is the figure which expanded and showed Example (g). It is the figure which showed an example of embodiment (another embodiment 7) which makes the specific identification information arrange|positioned other than a liquid crystal display screen conspicuous. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of the embodiment (alternative embodiment 7) in which specific identification information arranged on a screen other than the liquid crystal display screen is conspicuous. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an embodiment (another embodiment 8) in which non-specific identification information is not conspicuous. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a list of the relationship between the second identification information and the arrangement location when the first identification information is arranged in the “front frame” (Example 1) as an example of another embodiment 7 and 8; FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "front frame" in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67; 68 is an enlarged view showing a case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67; FIG. FIG. 68 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a list of the relationship between the second identification information and the arrangement location of the second identification information when the first identification information is arranged on the “game board” as examples of the seventh and eighth embodiments (example 2). FIG. 72 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “front frame” in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71; 72 is an enlarged view showing a case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71; FIG. 72 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a list of the relationship between the arrangement location of the second identification information and the arrangement location of the second identification information when the first identification information is arranged in the “liquid crystal display device” (example 3) as examples of the seventh and eighth alternative embodiments. 76 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "front frame" in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75; FIG. 76 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75; FIG. FIG. 76 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75; FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating fonts that can be used for identification information; It is the figure which illustrated the embodiment which gave setting machine information to the gaming machine. It is the figure which illustrated the setting machine mark. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggesting effect (during symbol fluctuation to demo screen display); It is a figure which shows the example of setting suggestion production|presentation (example of production|presentation in reach). It is a diagram showing an example of the setting suggestion effect (during the jackpot to the start of symbol fluctuation). It is a figure which shows the game board which concerns on another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (accessory) of the setting suggestion production|presentation by LED. It is a figure which shows the example (surrounding LED) of the setting suggestion production|presentation by LED. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect by a united accessory. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggesting effect by a separable accessory. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect using the operation means;

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments described below, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of the game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Configuration overview: Figures 1 and 2>
An overview of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of a game board.

A pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "game machine 1") shown in FIG. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Also, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and when a key is inserted into the key cylinder and operated to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is released, and when operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 is released and opened to the front side.

Under the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 is pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

The upper receiving tray unit 8 is provided with a ball ejecting button 14 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9 to the lower part of the game machine 1, a ball lending button 11 for requesting a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side to put out the game balls, and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the value medium inserted in the game ball lending device.

In addition to the push-button effect button 13 (first operating means), the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) which is composed of a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d, and which can be input in up, down, left, and right directions. The effect button 13 and the direction key 75 function as operation means that can be operated by the player, and during a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, a "player-participation type effect" described later), reception of operation input is enabled, and when a predetermined operation (for example, one-time press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the effect can be changed before and after the operation. In addition, these operation means are also used when the player makes the desired game settings on a "game setting screen" related to waiting for customers (during "demonstration start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demonstration display)" to be described later). The game setting screen is, for example, a menu screen on which the player can set game settings such as sound volume and light intensity. A built-in lamp (button LED 13b) is provided inside the effect button 13, and it is possible to notify an operation reception valid period (for example, lighting or blinking in a predetermined color) and an operation reception invalid period (for example, while extinguishing) due to the difference in light emission mode of the button LED 13b.

A firing operation handle 15 for operating a firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7 . This launching device 32 employs one having a launching performance of about 100 rounds per minute.

Speakers 46 are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the shooting operation handle 15 to produce a sound effect (sound effect). In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (directive LEDs) are provided at appropriate locations of the game machine, for example, inside the decorative member on the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 and the center decorative body 48 (see FIG. 2) to exhibit light performance effects by light decoration.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described. On the game board 3, as shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding a shot game ball is annularly mounted as a board surface partitioning member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, and four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects by means of images, including a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, three decorative patterns of left, middle, and right patterns (see FIG. 5)) independently of numbers, characters, and symbols in a predetermined display area (design variable display area).

In the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long way. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, and is integrally provided with a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3, and an armor frame part 48b that forms the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and distributes the flow channel of the game ball to the left or right according to the strength or stroke length of the game ball. work as In this embodiment, a floating area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball shot into the upper part of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 is distributed to the left and right at the upper part of the armor frame part 48b, and flows down either the left downflow path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 or the right downflow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display portion, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged side by side in correspondence with the upper start port 34 (for the first special pattern) and the lower start port 35 (for the second special pattern). Special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a 'special symbol variable display game' is executed by a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a "special symbol" represented by 7 segments. In the above liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns by the special pattern display devices 38a and 38b, and the 'decorative pattern variable display game' is executed along with various advance notice effects (effect images). Details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

In addition, in the various function display units, next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display device) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged. The reason why it is called composite is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having five display functions: display of the number of pending balls in operation of special symbol 1, display of the number of pending balls in operation of special symbol 2, display of the number of pending balls in operation of normal symbols, and notification of the state of the variable time reduction function (during time saving) and high probability state (during high probability).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the normal symbols represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, normal patterns by LEDs are alternately turned on and off like a seesaw, and by stopping with one side turned on, the propriety of the normal pattern variable display game is determined.

A right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b informs whether "right-handed hitting" is advantageous so that the game ball passes (flows down) the right flowing path 3c or "left-handed hitting" is advantageous so that the game ball passes (flows down) the left flowing path 3b, by a combination of ON/OFF states of the LEDs. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is notified that right-handed shots are advantageous, and if it is unlit, it is notified that left-handed shots are advantageous.

In addition, a round number display device 39c is provided adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b, in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged. The number-of-rounds display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit by combining the ON/OFF states of a plurality of LEDs.

Under the center ornament 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided above and below a normal variable winning device 41, and detection sensors 34a, 35a (upper starting port sensor 34a, lower starting port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of game balls are formed inside each.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is a winning port related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as “special symbol 1”, and in some cases is abbreviated as “special symbol 1”) in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device), and is configured as a “fixed winning rate winning device” that does not have a “starting port opening and closing means” that enables the opening or expansion of the starting port. In this embodiment, due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center ornament 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b can easily enter (win a prize) into the upper start port 34, whereas a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c is difficult or impossible to enter.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a "variable winning rate type winning device" capable of varying the winning rate of the game ball at the starting opening by the opening opening/closing means. In this embodiment, a pair of left and right movable winglets (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting opening opening/closing means, and the lower starting opening 35, which is the second special symbol starting opening, can be opened or enlarged by opening and closing the movable winglets 47.

In addition, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is a winning port related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2", and sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). It is converted into an open state (easy winning state) and a closed state (difficult winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than in the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (non-winning state) is maintained in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable prize winning device 41, a total of five general prize winning ports 43, four (43a to 43d) on the left side and one (43e) on the right side, are arranged, and a general prize winning port sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general prize winning ports 43a to 43e individually) for detecting passage of the game ball is formed inside each of them.

In addition, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) consisting of a passage gate through which game balls can pass is provided diagonally above the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle part of the right flow path 3c. The normal symbol starting port 37 is a prize winning port related to the variable display operation of normal symbols in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is formed therein. In this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side, but may be formed on both flow paths.

A special variable prize winning device 52 (special electric accessory) configured to be able to open or enlarge the big prize winning port 50 by a projecting open door 52b is provided in the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, and a big winning prize sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the big winning port 50 is formed inside.

A bulge (ornamental member) 55 bulges out from the surface of the game board 3 around the big winning hole 50. An upper side 55a of the bulge 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right downstream path 3c. When the large prize winning port 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large winning port closed state), a part of the downstream guide portion (upper side 55a) of the right downstream path 3c is formed by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55. Further, in the downstream region of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, a flow path correction plate 51d is protruded substantially parallel to the flowing direction of the game balls, and functions to bring the flowing game balls closer to the big winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the big winning hole 50 is as follows. A game ball passing through a floating area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 flows down along the top surface (upper side) 55a of a bulging part 55 projecting from the game board 3 and functioning as a guide for the game ball. Then, the game ball contacts the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the game board 3 surface, thereby correcting the flowing direction of the game ball to the direction of the big winning hole 50 (downward). At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the projecting open door 52b (large winning opening closed state), the game ball rolls on it and is guided toward the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting opening 35) by a gauge configuration (arrangement of game nails) (not shown). At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a prize winning state (starting port open state), the game ball can enter the lower starting port 35, but if the open door 52b is retracted in the game board surface and the big winning port 50 is open (large winning port open state), the game ball is guided into the big winning port 50.例文帳に追加In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the shooting position on the side of the special variable winning device 52 (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c), the game ball is difficult or not guided to the upper start port 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, it is difficult or impossible to win the respective starting openings 34 and 35.例文帳に追加

Classifying whether the above-described prize winning means belongs to the left or right flow path, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win a prize, the prize means belonging to the left flow path 3b includes the upper starting port 34, the lower starting port 35, and the left general winning ports 43a to 43d. 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. In addition, when the movable wing 47 is open (starting opening open state), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, and a prize can be won from either the left or right flow path. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 has its operating condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a (winning a prize), it can be said that it belongs only to the right flow path 3c substantially. Also, the big winning hole 50 belongs only to the right-flowing path 3c, and only game balls from the right-flowing path 3c can win.

(Composition favorable to right-handed hits under specific conditions)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is hit to the right so as to pass through the right flow path 3c, the game ball is likely to enter the normal symbol start port 37, but the game ball is difficult or not guided to the upper start port 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates, it is difficult or impossible to win the respective starting openings 34, 35. However, this movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening/closing pattern that is more advantageous than at least the normal state (normal game state) when the later-described "state with electric sapo (state of electric sapo)" occurs. Therefore, under non-electric sapo (state without electric sapo to be described later), instead of "right hitting" aiming for the game ball to pass through the right flowing path 3c, "left hitting" aiming for the game ball to pass through the left flowing path 3b is advantageous. That is, depending on the game state, whether the game progresses favorably or disadvantageously for the player depending on which of the left-flowing path 3b and the right-flowing path 3c the game ball is allowed to flow down, and whether the hitting method of "left-handed" or "right-handed" results in an advantageous situation for the player (game progress is advantageous for the player) changes depending on the game state, and the game state (for example, normal state or latent state) with a non-electrical support state. state), "left-handed" is advantageous, and "right-handed" is advantageous in a game state (for example, time-saving state or probability variable state) accompanied by an electric sapo state.

Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning openings 43a to 43e functions as winning means arranged in the game area 3a, and the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43h (each of the general winning openings 43a to 4 3e) and other detection switches (winning detection switches) function as winning detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the winning means. It should be noted that the number, shape, formation position, etc. of each of the prize winning means described above can be appropriately changed according to the game characteristics. In addition, regarding each winning means, it is possible to appropriately change whether the game ball flowing down either the left flow path 3b and/or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, impossible to win, or possible to win.

When a game ball wins in each winning hole, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning hole is paid out from a game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, 3 upper starting holes 34, 1 lower starting hole 35, 0 normal symbol starting holes 37 (no prize balls), 15 big winning holes 50, and 3 general winning holes 43a-e are paid out. The game balls that have not won the winning openings are ejected from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. FIG. Here, "winning" means that the prize is not a structure in which a playball ball is incorporated inside or the winning entrance is not a structure in which a gambling ball is incorporated inside, but a prize -type gate (for example, a normal pattern pattern starting port 37), the gate is actually passed through the gate, and in fact, each prize -out switch for each prize. If a gaming ball is detected, it will be treated as a prize at the winning entrance. A game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball".

<Movable role>
In the game area 3a, a plurality of movable accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of game balls. In this embodiment, the first movable accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side in the center decoration body 48, and the second movable accessory 90 is arranged on the obliquely lower right side thereof. The first movable accessory 80 has a clock panel part 81 consisting of a number display section divided into 12 number sectors with numbers from 'I' to 'XII' in Roman characters, and a clock hand 82 consisting of a short hand and a long hand rotatably formed on the clock panel part 81, and forms a 'wall clock part' as a whole. In this sense, the first movable accessory 80 is also called a "clock-shaped accessory". The clock panel part 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector section indicated by a short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED, and each number sector can independently emit light in a different color.

The second movable body accessory 90 has a corolla composed of a plurality of petals arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is arranged around the outside of the corolla to form a double perianth. In addition, the flower-shaped part 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate around the flower center as a central axis. This flower-shaped accessory 90 is usually stationary at an original position (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge of the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen, and when a predetermined operating condition is established, the arm 92 tilts and moves to a position (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 2) where the flower-shaped part 91 covers the liquid crystal screen together with the arm 92. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petals are illuminated from behind by lamps or full-color LEDs, and can be beautifully colored. When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its action, it returns from the performance position indicated by the dashed line to the original position indicated by the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can perform a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal-rotating motion, and the arm 92 can perform a plurality of types of motion patterns, such as full-open tilting motion tilting up to the dashed line portion, quasi-tilting motion tilting up to a predetermined tilting angle, vibrating motion in which the arm rattles, and inching motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hands 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for notifying performance and also for executing (appearing) setting suggesting performance, which will be described later.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling game operations of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing the outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as “main control unit 20”) that controls overall game operations (game operation control); A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of balls, and a power board (power control means (not shown)) that generates and supplies necessary power (including backup power) from an external power supply to each board of the gaming machine. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control section 24 . A power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor containing a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is equipped with a ROM 202 (main control ROM) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes the game operation control procedure, and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 includes a CTC that provides the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a constant cycle pulse output generation function (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function; an interrupt controller circuit that performs interrupt permission/disable functions such as a timer interrupt that provides an interrupt signal to the CPU; It also has an out-of-area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within the designated area, and a counter circuit that generates random numbers (hard random numbers) within a certain range in terms of hardware. In addition, at least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power failure signal) from a power supply board (not shown), thereby starting backup processing prior to power cutoff, so that the game operation before power cutoff can be resumed after power is restored (backup function). In this game machine 1, it is possible to hold each memory content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generating circuit for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit for sampling random numbers from the random number generating circuit at a predetermined timing, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. A CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to a processing state, acquires a numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as a random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big win (size of random number: 65536)), and uses the random number for a big win lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number in order to prevent fraudulent actions such as hitting a winning target.

The main control unit 20 also includes an upper starting hole sensor 34a that detects winning to the upper starting hole 34, a lower starting hole sensor 35a that detects winning to the lower starting hole 35, a normal symbol starting hole sensor 37a that detects the passage of a game ball to the normal symbol starting hole 37, a large winning hole sensor 52a that detects winning to the big winning hole 50, and a general winning hole sensor 43a that detects winning to the general winning hole 43. are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning hole the game ball has won (entered).

The main control unit 20 is also connected to an OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting game balls (so-called out balls) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each prize winning port, and the main control unit 20 can receive a detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The main control section 20 has counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. If the player continues to shoot the game balls from the shooting device 32, the number of out balls increases regardless of whether or not the start ports 34 and 35 are won, that is, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation display game is executed. Since the shooting performance of the shooting device 32 according to the present embodiment is 100 shots per minute, for example, if "Today's cumulative number of out-balls is 30,000", it is possible to obtain operation information (total number of out-balls (number)/shooting performance (100 shots per minute)) that the gaming machine 1 has been in operation for 300 minutes today. The count result of the out ball by ) is used to calculate a base value (one of the game performance information), which will be described later.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected with a fraud detection sensor (for example, a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity on the gaming machine 1, and the main control unit 20 can monitor fraudulent activity on the gaming machine based on a detection signal from the fraud detection sensor.

In addition, the main control unit 20 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. The main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for driving and controlling these.

A special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of normal symbols.

In addition, the main control unit 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling the display of various information displayed on these devices.

A frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 can transmit predetermined game information (outer end signal) to an external device such as a "data counter DT" or a "hall computer HC" provided outside the gaming machine via the frame external terminal board 21. Predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start/end information, winning information, special symbol variation start/variation stop information, number of winning balls information, various security information (fraud detection information, RAM clear, door opening, setting change, etc.). The “data counter DT” is a game information reporting device capable of reporting specific information related to the gaming machine, such as the number of big wins, the number of game executions (the number of symbol variations), and the number of game executions between big wins, based on the game information contained in the outer end signal, and is usually installed above the gaming machine. The hall computer HC is a management computer dedicated to amusement halls that monitors and collects the game information of the game machines based on the game information contained in the above-mentioned outer end signal, and comprehensively manages the operation status of the game machines installed in the pachinko hall.

Also connected to the main control unit 20 are a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203, a setting key switch 94 for switching to a setting change allowable state in which setting values can be changed, which will be described later, a setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value in the setting change allowable state, and a setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95. The main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these switches. are

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, setting change switch 95, and setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. The setting key switch 94 is a key switch capable of switching between a setting change permitted state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and turning it ON/OFF. These switches 95, 96, and 98 are formed at appropriate locations inside the game machine from the viewpoint of preventing cheating (fraudulent acts) such as illegally changing set values, and cannot be turned ON/OFF from outside the game machine unless the front frame 2 is opened.

A setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information about setting values is connected to the main control section 20, and the main control section 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display. The setting display 97 according to this embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control section (main control board) 20 . In addition, the setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but can be provided at an appropriate place inside the game machine, such as the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, the relay board (relay board that relays the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: not shown), or the effect control section (effect control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24.

(About setting value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit to be given to the player, such as the payout rate (so-called machine discount, payout rate), for each stage. The "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This setting value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is set appropriately by the pachinko hall clerk exclusively based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game parlor).

The 'set value' defines, for example, the lottery probability (winning probability) of a big win (a winning type for which a condition device to be described later is to be activated) by stages, and the higher the set value is, the higher the lottery probability (big win winning probability) of the big win is set, which works favorably for the player. At least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value) can be provided for such set values. In the present embodiment, six levels of set values are provided for settings 1 to 6. For example, when the probability is low, setting 1 is 1/240, setting 2 is 1/231, setting 3 is 1/222, setting 4 is 1/210, setting 5 is 1/198, setting 6 is 1/189, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big win (higher machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the "set value" is a value that defines an event that affects machine allocation by stages, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of occurrence of a special event such as a big win. That is, the lottery probability of the big win at the time of low probability and/or the lottery probability of the big win at the time of low probability can be configured to differ according to the set value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the later-described special symbol probability variation function operates), the probability can rise to a value that does not exceed 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, when the probability of a big win lottery at a low probability is 1 to 6 = 1/240 to 1/189 and the increase rate is 3 times, the probability of a big win lottery at a high probability is 1 to 6 = 1/80 to 1/63.

Also, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or more types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning all of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. All set values for jackpots 2 to 4 have a common winning probability). Further, it may be configured such that the higher the set value is, the higher the combined winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 is. Also, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the big hit described above.

(Regarding setting value change operation)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, and the setting change permission state is set. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change permitting state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is cyclically switched and displayed in the use range of settings 1 to 6 like "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→...". Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (setting confirmation operation), the currently displayed value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area (setting value storage area) of the RAM 203. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change permitting state is ended, and thereafter the game is started under the established set values. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment includes setting value selection means for selecting one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and setting value setting means for setting the setting value selected by the setting value selection means. It should be noted that the game machine may be a "non-setting game machine" that does not have the setting function as described above.

In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information on the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. However, the main control part 20 only transmits a signal to the performance control part 24 in order to prevent an act of shaming from the outside, and has a configuration of one-way communication in which the signal from the performance control part 24 cannot be received.

(About the performance indicator 99)
Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance display device 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter referred to as “performance information”) related to the game result for a predetermined period (specific game period), and the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment consists of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs. Specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment indicators 99a to 99d) in which the display section and the circuit section are unitized are arranged side by side. Each 7-segment LED also has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above-mentioned "performance information" is mainly used by pachinko parlors and related government agencies for confirmation and investigation. For example, it is information for investigating whether there is an abnormality in the ball payout performance due to illegal adjustment of the game nail or fraud, or whether the game machine's original ball payout performance (designed ball payout performance) is properly demonstrated. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggesting effect, which will be described later. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location visible to the player, but is mounted at a location within the gaming machine that is easily visible, for example, on the control substrate or on the substrate case that protects it.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts (normal number of payouts) in the normal state (low probability of jackpot lottery (normal probability) and no electric sapo described later) and the cumulative number of out balls (normal number of outs) in the normal state are measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of normal payouts by the number of outs in normal time multiplied by 100 (the number of payouts in normal time / the number of outs in normal time x 100) is used as the above-mentioned "performance information". The display 99 displays in a predetermined manner. The base value is displayed on the performance indicator 99 as a value rounded off to the first decimal place. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out-balls being measured reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60000), the measurement is temporarily terminated, the base value at the end of the measurement is stored as history information in the RAM 203 (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60000)", which triggers the end of measurement, is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the cumulative number of outs (the number of outs in all states) measured during all game states (including during winning games) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. A processing program for display control and base values on the performance indicator 99 and its work area are defined in an area (outside memory) different from the area (inside memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. Also, the performance information is not limited to the base value of the normal state described above, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20. The payout control board 29 is connected with a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for delivering game balls.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and send information (state signal) regarding the payout operation state to the main control unit 20. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command (“payout control command” specifying the number of prize balls) regarding the payout to the payout control board 29 when the ball needs to be put out.

The payout control board 29 is connected with a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the storage state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether the upper tray 9 is full or not) and a door opening sensor 61 (ON when open/OFF when closed) for detecting the open/close state of the front frame 2 and/or the front operation panel 7, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from a supply shortage detection sensor 19a provided in the game ball payout device 19 for detecting a supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls (prize balls) to be paid out, and the like. The payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c of the game ball payout device 19 (motor for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls).

Based on detection signals from various sensors such as full detection sensor 60, door open sensor 61, out-of-supply detection sensor 19a, and ball counting sensor 19b, the payout control board 29 outputs a "ball clogged signal" indicating a full state, a "door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, a "supply-out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, and a "counting error" indicating an abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout). signal”, and a “payout completion signal” indicating that the payout operation has been completed. Based on these state signals, the main control unit 20 monitors whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are in an open state (door open error), whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (prize ball error), and whether the upper receiving tray 9 is full (ball clogging error).

A launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29 , and a launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28 . The shooting control board 28 controls energization of a shooting solenoid (not shown) provided in the shooting device 32 based on the shooting control signal, and realizes a game ball shooting operation by operating the shooting operation handle 15 . In addition, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is configured mainly by a microcomputer equipped with a microprocessor that incorporates a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores effect data required for effect control processing, and a RAM 243 (effect control RAM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory. A 6-bit counter, an 8-bit counter), an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, and the like are provided to control the entire effect operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps time, and serves as clock means for providing real-time time information such as the current time ("what is the current hour, minute, and second") and/or calendar information regarding dates (month, day, day of the week). In addition, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and software random number generating means (for example, random number generating means for the lottery for effect).

The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection and determination of production based on the production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, light emission control of various production LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other production LEDs), and operation control of various movable body accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90).

The effect control section 24 also includes a display control section (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36 . This display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) for which the VDP performs image expansion processing, a VRAM (video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data expanded by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a liquid crystal control CPU that stores a program describing the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control. It is mainly composed of a ROM and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory.

In order to execute image display effects, light effects, sound effects, movable body effects, etc., the effect control part 24 controls the light display device 45a including various effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 and the button LED 13b, the sound control part (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and the movable object motors 80c, 91c, and 92c that operate the movable objects (clock-type object 80, flower-shaped portion 91, and arm 92). It includes a drive control section (motor drive circuit) and the like.

A position detection sensor 82a that monitors the motion of the movable body role is connected to the production control unit 24, and the production control unit 24 controls the operation mode of the movable body role while monitoring the current operating position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The effect control unit 24 also monitors malfunctions in the motion of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and performs predetermined error notification processing if malfunctions occur.

The effect control unit 24 is connected with a effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and direction key switches 75a' to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d).

A performance control part 24, when receiving a performance control command sent from a main control part 20, randomly or uniquely determines a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance based on information included in the command, controls various performance means at necessary timing, and makes a desired performance appear. As a result, the display of a performance image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display performance), the reproduction of sound from the speaker 46 (sound performance), and the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and other LEDs for performance (light performance) are realized, and various performance patterns (variation display operation of decorative patterns, advance notice performance, etc.) are developed in a time-series manner, thereby realizing a "performance scenario" in a broad sense. In addition, the effect control unit 24 is configured to be able to identify what kind of operation has been performed on the effect button 13 and/or the direction key 75 (for example, press, long press, repeated hits, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up, down, left, and right directions) based on operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a' to 75d' during a predetermined operation acceptance valid period (operation identification means).

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE is ON and Bit 7 of EVENT is OFF. When transmitting these information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and transmits the first strobe signal after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the transmission of this strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive commands.

Also, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing, and acquires the effect control command in this interrupt processing. Further, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 interrupts the interrupt processing based on another interrupt (timer interrupt processing which is periodically executed) to perform the command reception interrupt processing even during execution of the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing which is executed periodically), and even if other interrupts occur simultaneously, the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation of the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special Symbol Variation Display Game, Decorative Symbol Variation Display Game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a "jackpot lottery" is performed by a random number lottery in the main control unit 20 based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, the game ball entering (winning) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35. - 特許庁A main control part 20 variably displays special patterns 1 and 2 on special pattern display devices 38a and 38b based on the result of the lottery to start a special pattern variation display game, derives and displays the result on the special pattern display device after a predetermined time elapses, and ends the special pattern variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big-hit lottery based on winning the upper starting port 34 and the big-winning lottery based on winning the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the big-hit lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived from the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big-hit lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived from the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that the game ball enters the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the big win lottery result is a "big hit", the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "big hit" mode, if the big win lottery result is a "small hit", in a predetermined "small win" mode, and otherwise in a predetermined "losing" mode. A winning lottery result) is derived.

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38b may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". In addition, ``special pattern 1'' and ``special pattern 2'' may be referred to simply as ``special pattern'' (or abbreviated as ``special pattern'' in some cases), and ``special pattern variation display game 1'' and ``special pattern variation display game 2'' may be referred to as ``special pattern variation display game'' without distinguishing between them.

When the above-mentioned special pattern variable display game is started, the decorative pattern variable display game is started by variably displaying the decorative patterns (performance game patterns) on the liquid crystal display device 36, and various performances are developed accordingly. When the special pattern variation display game is finished, the decoration pattern variation display game is also finished, and a predetermined special pattern showing the big win lottery result is derived and displayed on the special pattern display device, and a decoration pattern reflecting the big win lottery result is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.例文帳に追加In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (the result of the big win lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, when the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol display device in a display mode indicating a big win (for example, the display state of "7" in the 7 segment), the liquid crystal display device 36 stops and displays the decorative symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" display areas in a display mode reflecting the "big win" (hit symbols: for example, in the "left", "middle" and "right" display areas, the three decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode of "7", "7" and "7"). be done.

When the "big win" occurs, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly. As a result, after the symbol mode of the "big win" is derived and displayed, the special variable winning device 52's large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) operates to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined pattern. Hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the winning area is opened or expanded until the opening time of the big winning opening by the open door 52b elapses a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds), or until the number of winning balls into the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (upper limit number of winning balls allowed for the opening opened or enlarged by one operation of the accessory: for example, 10), and either of these conditions is satisfied. is closed (satisfaction of a round game end condition (closing condition)).

When the jackpot game is started, an opening performance is first performed by using a start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT is finished, a round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) as an upper limit. Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, an ending effect is performed using an end interval time (end INT), and a series of big winning games is completed. When the current round game ends, the next round game is started after a predetermined interval time (INT between rounds). In addition, during the round game, the "in-round effect" appears, and during the round game (during the INT between rounds), the "INT effect between rounds" appears. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period with the maximum number of rounds as the upper limit, and an ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 draws a lottery to determine whether a ``big hit'', ``minor win'' or ``losing'' on the condition that the game ball enters (wins) the upper start hole 34 or the lower start hole 35, specifically, the game ball is detected by the upper start hole sensor 34a or the lower start hole sensor 35a and the start condition (start condition related to the special pattern) is established. A jackpot lottery including a winning lottery' and a 'symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' that draws the type of the jackpot if it is a ``big hit'', the type of the jackpot if it is a ``small hit'', and the type of loss if it is a ``losing'' (if there is one type of jackpot, small win or loss, the lottery can be omitted because there is no need to perform the pattern lottery), and based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special pattern and the final result. A special symbol (special stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. Then, as a performance control command specifying a processing state, a ``variation pattern specification command'' containing at least special pattern variation pattern information (for example, a big win lottery result, information about a special symbol variation time, etc.) is transmitted to the performance control part 24 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control section 24 . In this embodiment, a "decorative design designation command" including information on special stop designs (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the performance control unit 24 in order to provide a wide variety of performances.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result, the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information can include information specifying the execution of a specific advance notice effect (for example, a reach effect and a pseudo-continuous effect (including the number of pseudo-continuous) to be described later). Specifically, the variation patterns of the special symbols are broadly classified into a "hit variation pattern" for winning and a "losing variation pattern" for losing, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. These variation patterns include, for example, a "reach variation pattern" that designates the execution of the ready-to-win effect (including designation of the type of reach), a "normal variation pattern" that does not designate the execution of the ready-to-win effect, a 'pseudo-continuous reach change pattern' that designates the execution of both the pseudo-run effect and the ready-to-win effect, A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a “normal variation pattern with pseudo-continuation” that designates the execution of pseudo-continuous effects and does not designate the execution of ready-to-win effects. In addition, regarding the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, basically, a longer variation time is set than the variation time of the normal variation pattern in order to secure the effect time of the advance notice effect.

A performance control part 24 determines performance contents (performance scenario) to be developed chronologically during a decorative pattern variable display game, decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), etc. based on information contained in a performance control command (here, a variable pattern designation command and a decorative pattern designation command) sent from a main control part 20, and controls advance notice performance and decorative pattern variable display performance during a decorative pattern variable display game according to a time schedule based on the variable pattern of special patterns. Thus, the decorative patterns are variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns by the special pattern display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special pattern variable display game and the period of the decorative pattern variable display game have substantially the same time width. Also, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect), sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting and blinking of effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 (light effect) are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36 .

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decoration symbol variation display game, so these two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above-described two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise specified. Further, the number of executions (the number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly, the special symbol variation display game) may be referred to as "the number of symbol variations" or "the number of variations" or "** rotation (for example, 1 rotation, 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.)" for convenience of explanation.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variation display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning a prize), the main control unit 20 performs an "assisting winning lottery" by random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, normal patterns represented by LEDs are variably displayed on a normal pattern display device 39a to start a normal pattern variable display game, and after a predetermined variable time elapses, the result is stop-displayed by a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LEDs. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assist hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, two LEDs 39 are all lit).

When the "auxiliary hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, thereby opening the movable wing piece 47 in the shape of an inverted "V" to open or enlarge the lower starting opening 35 to make it easier for game balls to flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated. In this normal electric open game, the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is operated (opening operation), and when the opening time (starting opening open state time) of the lower starting port 35 has passed the maximum opening time (for example, 6 seconds at maximum), or until the number of winning balls into the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 at maximum), the winning area is controlled to be opened or expanded. The lower starting port 35 is closed. Note that the lower starting port 35 can be opened once or multiple times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation retention ball)
In this embodiment, when winning occurs during the symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big win game, the small win game, or the normal symbol start port 37, that is, when there is a detection signal input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition is established, this is used as data relating to the right to start the variable display game, Except for those related to the variable display, the memory is reserved up to the maximum number of reserved memories, which is a predetermined upper limit. The data on hold which is not provided for the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the data on hold is also referred to as "suspended operation ball". In order to make the number of the operation reserve balls clear to the player, a dedicated reserve display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place of the game machine 1 or a reserve display provided as an icon image in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is lighted and displayed.

Also, in this embodiment, up to four operation reserve balls relating to special design 1, special design 2, and normal design are reserved and stored in corresponding storage areas of RAM 203, respectively, and reserved as the number of determinations of special design or normal design. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reservation memory number) of each operation reservation ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Also, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol operation retention balls are respectively referred to as "special symbol 1 operation retention ball", "special figure 2 operation retention ball", and "normal symbol operation retention ball".

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the game state will be explained. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of game states in addition to the big win which is the special game state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the generation of various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" of which the main control section 20 (CPU 201) serves as the functional section. There are two types of probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and normal symbol probability variation function (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special pattern probability changing function is a function for generating a ``high-probability state (big-win high-probability state)'' more advantageous than the normal state by varying the big-win lottery probability from a low probability (ordinary probability) to a high probability. Under the game state (high-probability state) in which this special symbol probability variation function is in operation, the big-hit lottery probability becomes high, so that the big-hit is likely to occur. As already described, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ according to the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal pattern probability changing function is a function for generating a ``variable auxiliary winning probability state'' more advantageous than the normal state by changing the auxiliary winning lottery probability from a low probability (ordinary probability) to a high probability (for example, changing from 1/256 to 255/256). Under the game state (auxiliary winning probability variable state) in which the normal pattern probability variable function is in operation, the auxiliary winning lottery probability becomes high probability state, so that the auxiliary winning is likely to occur, the general electric open game occurs frequently, and the operating rate improvement state is achieved in which the operating rate of the movable wing pieces 47 per unit time is improved more than in the normal state.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "fluctuation time reduction function (shortening of working hours function)" for which the main control unit 20 serves as the functional unit. There are two types of this, a time-saving function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time-saving function") and a time-saving function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time-saving function").

The special pattern time saving function is a function for generating a ``special pattern time saving state'' for shortening the average time required for one special pattern variation display game (average time from when the special pattern starts to change until it is stopped and displayed). Under the game state in which the special symbol time saving function is in operation (special symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the special symbols in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for reach-less loss variation is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of lotteries is increased in which the number of times of jackpot lotteries per unit time is improved more than in the normal state.

The normal pattern time reduction function is a function for generating a ``normal pattern time reduction state'' for shortening the average time required for one normal pattern variation display game (average time from the start of normal pattern variation to stop display). Under the game state in which the normal pattern time saving function is in operation (ordinary pattern time saving state), the average variation time of the normal symbols in one normal pattern variation display game is shortened (for example, shortened from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds), and the number of lotteries is improved in which the number of times of drawing per unit time per unit time is improved more than in the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment also has an "open extension function" for which the main control section 20 serves as the functional section. This open extension function is a function of generating an "extended open state" in which the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (open time of the movable wing 47) is extended from the normal state. In the extended open state, the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 (starting opening open state time) is extended, for example, from 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the extended open function is not in operation) to twice (when the extended open function is in operation), resulting in an improved operating rate state in which the operating rate of the movable wing 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function operates, the frequency of winning prizes to the lower starting port 35 increases, so that the frequency of establishment of the condition for starting the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big win is higher than in the normal state, and the game state becomes advantageous for the player compared to the state in which the opening extension function does not operate (non-operating). In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric tube support state (electric support state)".

By activating one or more of the above functions, the internal game state (internal game state) of the gaming machine can be changed. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the game state in which the special symbol probability variable function, the special symbol time reduction function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function operate is referred to as "probability variable state", and the game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed from these functions is referred to as "time reduction state", and at least the special symbol probability change function operates, and the open extension function does not operate (In this embodiment, the game state in which only the special symbol probability change function operates. ) is called the “latent state”, and the state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is called the “normal state”. Therefore, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability in these game states, the jackpot lottery probability is 'low probability state (normal probability)' when the game state is 'time saving state' or 'normal state', and the jackpot lottery probability is 'high probability state' when the game state is 'potential state' or 'variable probability state'. A winning game is generated by opening and closing the big winning hole during the big winning related to the operation of the conditional device, but all the above functions are deactivated, basically the game state is the same as the above normal state, and the variable display of the special symbols is interrupted.

(High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal design, that is, the three functions of the normal design probability variation function, the normal design time saving function, and the open extension function operate at the same opportunity. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing 47 is improved and the frequency of winning to the lower start port 35 is increased (becoming easier to win). High base gaming state (advantageous state for starting entrance ball)”. In addition, the "high base game state" here refers to a game state when a function related to normal symbols (at least one function of normal symbol probability variable function, normal symbol time saving function and open extension function) is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to the special symbols (the special symbol probability variable function and the special symbol time saving function) individually, when the special symbol probability changing function operates, the probability of winning the lottery is higher than in the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high base gaming state" in which the frequency of fulfillment of conditions for starting the special symbol variation display game is higher than in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the "high base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the opening extension function is provided is treated as the "high base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing pieces 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the prize winning rate to the lower start port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased, so that the game state becomes advantageous to the player as compared with the case of not being in the electric chew support state (low base game state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the game state is ``normal state'' or ``latent probability state'', it is ``no electric chew support state'', and if the game state is ``time saving state'' or ``variable probability state'', it is ``with electric chew support state''. In this specification, "without electric support state" is referred to as "state without electric support" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric support state" is referred to as "state with electric support" or "state".

(3-2-1. Internal game state (game state determination number YJ): Fig. 28)
Regarding the operation status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability variable function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) that determines the game state, the operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the flag corresponding to these functions on the main control unit 20 side. A game state focused on the operation status of each function is also called an "internal game state". What kind of internal game state the current internal game state is is managed using an identifier "game state determination number YJ". For example, when the game state determination number YJ is ``00H'', it designates 'normal state', when it is '01H', it designates 'probability variable state', when it is '02H', it designates 'time saving state', and when it is '03H', it designates 'potential state'.

(3-2-2. Variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode): Fig. 28)
Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-described internal game state, it is possible to further classify and manage one internal game state. Details will be described later, but for example, the normal state includes multiple types of normal states such as “general” and “precursor”, and the variable probability state includes multiple types of variable probability states such as “ST beginning”, “ST middle”, and “ST end”. These are managed as different game states using an identifier “variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode”. The entity of this variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode) used when selecting a “variation pattern allocation table” (see FIGS. 24 to 27 described later) corresponding to the current gaming state. Therefore, for example, if the variable probability state (game state determination number YJ = 01H) is classified into "ST early stage", "ST middle stage" and "ST end stage", that is, if the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode corresponding to the probability variable state (YJ = 01H) is defined as "ST early stage (Tcode = 02H)", "ST middle stage (Tcode = 03H)", and "ST end stage (Tcode = 04H)" (See FIG. 28), it is possible to select different variation pattern distribution tables.

The "variation pattern allocation table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbols relating to the symbol variation display game, and one or a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation patterns of the special symbols) are determined in association with at least the current game state (variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode) and the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the general mode is designated, and when it is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is designated. That is, even if the internal game state is the same "normal state", if the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is "00H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern allocation table for the general mode is selected, and if the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is "01H", the variation pattern related to the precursor mode variation pattern allocation table will be selected (see S413 in FIG. 12 described later, FIGS. 24 to 27, etc.).

Also, due to this, a plurality of types of ``performance modes'' related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode are provided, and the performance control part 24 side can make the performance appear (execute) under each performance mode. Details of the effect mode will be described later.

Therefore, when focusing on the operation status of each function (special symbol probability variable function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) regarding the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of an electric sapo, that is, the "internal game state", even though it is the same "normal state", with respect to the variation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to select a variation pattern corresponding to a different variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, such as "general" or "sign". An effect related to the allocation designation number Tcode can be displayed.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the types of the "internal gaming state" include normal state, time-saving state, and variable probability state (see column "YJ" in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the game state related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the types of the game state related to the “variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode” when focusing on the determination of the effect include “general”, “prediction”, “ceiling”, “heaven”, “time reduction”, “ST early stage”, “ST middle stage”, and “ST end stage” (see “Tcode” column in FIG. 28).

In this way, the ``internal game state'' when focusing on each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of an electric sapo is managed as different from the ``variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode'' focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (determination of performance), so that even if the internal game state is the same (for example, normal state), it is possible to select a variation pattern corresponding to a different variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode (for example, during general and during omen). As a result, even under the same internal game state, the digestion time of the symbol variation display game (variation time of the special symbols) and the performance related thereto can be greatly changed, and the variation of the performance under the same internal game state can be enriched.

In this specification, at least the game state related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode will be referred to as a "game mode" unless otherwise required (see the "game mode type" column in FIG. 28). As shown in FIG. 28, this game mode can be treated as a game state related to "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode and game state determination number YJ (internal game state)", in other words, "a game state as a whole game machine". For convenience of explanation, the internal game state and the game mode may be simply referred to as "game state" without distinguishing between them. In addition, the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode will be referred to as a "variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)" and will be abbreviated as "Tcode" as appropriate.

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the "hit" according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning type, a winning game operation mode, and a transition destination game state (shift destination game mode) after a winning game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of types of hit types such as probability variable jackpots 1 to 6 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 are provided as jackpot lottery target hit types. These hits are hits that belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the condition device, and are different from hits that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the condition device (minor hits). Here, the term "conditional device" refers to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device (device for continuously operating the special electric accessory) for playing a round game, and is activated when a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or when a game ball passes through a specific area in the large winning opening (excluding those that win the large winning opening while the accessory continuous actuating device is in operation). In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing a state with electric sapo (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal game state to another internal game state).

Therefore, when a small win is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous actuating device does not operate, so there is no transition of the internal game state (transition control of the internal game state resulting from the winning of the small prize is not performed). In addition, in the winning game by the small winning (small winning game), since the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, a round game like a big winning is not executed, but a ``pseudo round game'' that behaves as if the round game is being executed can be realized by determining the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening. The operation mode of the small winning game is basically the same as that of the big winning game except that the round game is not executed, and after the lapse of a predetermined start INT, the ``opening/closing operation game'' for opening the big prize winning opening is executed, and when the opening/closing operation game is finished, the series of small winning games is finished through a predetermined end INT. Such a small win differs from mere "losing" in that, like the big win, it is a winning type that serves as a transition opportunity (execution opportunity) to a winning game (special game state) involving the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening.

Further, when a small hit is won, the transition to the internal game state is not performed, but the transition to the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. By utilizing such transition mode, for example, when the game state after the small win game and the game state after the other big win game are shifted to the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), both can be made to stay in the performance mode in which the same performance is performed. In addition, it is possible to shift from the first variation pattern selection mode to the second variation pattern selection mode or to re-shift from the second variation pattern selection mode to the first variation pattern selection mode due to the small winning. In addition, although "small hit" is not provided in this embodiment, one or more types of small hits can be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game characteristics.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the variable probability big hits 1 to 3 and the short time jackpots 1 and 2 are the target of the big hit lottery on the side of the special symbol 1, and the variable probability big hits 4 to 6 are the target of the big hit lottery on the side of the special symbol 2. Also, the symbol lottery probability is as illustrated.

(4-2. Winning game)
Next, the contents of the winning game based on each winning described above will be described.

The notations of "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and time-saving jackpots 1 to 2 in the column of "win content" in FIG. Each big win of the present embodiment is a big win in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is set to a ``long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)'' in which the possibility that the number of winnings to the big winning opening reaches the maximum winning number (10) can be sufficiently expected. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game can be determined freely. For example, the opening pattern of the big winning openings related to at least a part of the round game (the round game of a specific number of rounds) may be set to a "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" shorter than the long opening time or an even shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)." Also, during the maximum opening time, the big prize opening may be kept open, or an opening pattern involving one or more closings (for example, "open for 1.3 seconds + close for 0.5 seconds + open for 27 seconds") may be used. The profit state (profit degree) during the jackpot game increases as the maximum number of rounds is relatively large, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening is higher than that when the maximum opening time is short. In the case of this embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each big win is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit status during the big win game.

(4-3. Transition destination game state after winning game: Fig. 4)
Next, a description will be given of the game state (game mode) to be shifted after the end of each big hit game. In the column of ``game state at the time of winning/game state to shift to'' shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, the game state after the big win game is determined based on at least the jackpot type won and the game state (internal game state) at the time of winning. Specifically, when a jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot game is determined based on the game state (internal game state or game mode) at the time of winning and the jackpot type that was won (see the game state transition table selection table in FIG. 21 and the game state transition table in FIG. 22, which will be described later). 4 indicates the game mode (corresponding internal game state in parentheses), and "transfer destination game state" indicates the transition destination game mode (corresponding internal game state in parentheses).

In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, the internal game state to be shifted after the jackpot game will be described. The details of the game mode transition mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG.

(4-3A. If you win the time-saving jackpot (time-saving jackpot 1-2))
First, the case of winning the time saving jackpot 1 (5R time saving A) and the time saving jackpot 2 (5R time saving B) will be described. When these time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, at least the internal game state is shifted to "time-saving state (YJ=02H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are called “time-saving jackpots” in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time-saving state.

When the game is shifted to the ``time-saving state'', the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of pattern variations) is continued until a predetermined prescribed number of times is completed, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big win within the specified number of times (however, except for a small win that does not trigger the transition to the internal game state), the time-saving state is terminated and the next game is shifted to the ``normal state (YJ=00H)''. Whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of times the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are executed (the same applies to counting the number of STs and the number of ceiling games, which will be described later). That is, when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbols 1 and 2) is completed for a specified number of times without a big hit, the time saving state is terminated.

When the time-saving big win 1 is won, the number of times of time-saving is set to 100 times (time-saving A) as the specified number of times, and when the time-saving big win 2 is won, the number of times of time-saving is set to 50 times (time-saving B). That is, the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 of the present embodiment are finite time-saving jackpots that give a finite number of time-saving times. In addition, a jackpot (infinite time-saving jackpot) may be provided to continue the time-saving state until the next jackpot election (the number of times of time-saving is infinite). Also, the number of times of time saving big hits 1 and 2 may be the same, or there may be only one kind of time saving big hits.

(4-3B. If you win the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot 1 to 7))
Next, the case where the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 are won will be described.

When one of the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 is won, at least the internal game state is shifted to the "variable probability state (YJ=01H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The variable probability big hits 1 to 7 are called "variable probability big hits" in that they are the big hits that trigger the transition to the variable probability state.

In the case of shifting to the "probability variable state", as in the case of shifting to the above-mentioned time saving state, it continues until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of symbol variations) ends a predetermined specified number of times, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big hit within the specified number of times, the probability variation state is terminated. To be precise, after the big win lottery probability is shifted to a game state (probability variable state or latent probability state) with at least a high probability state, when the specified number of times ends without winning the big win, the high probability state is ended and the big win lottery probability is shifted to a low probability state. The upper limit number of times that this high probability state continues is called "ST number". Therefore, after being shifted to the definite variable state, when the ST number ends, the definite variable state ends and shifts to the normal state (YJ = 00H) (variable probability A described later), and the case where only the high probability state ends when the ST number ends, For details, from among the "special symbol definite variable function, special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol definite variable function, normal symbol time-saving function, and open extension function" Only the "special symbol definite variable function" ends and the "time-saving state (YJ = 0) 2H)” includes cases (probability variation B, probability variation C described later).

In the variable probability state of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of variable probability state (variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C) with different numbers of times of ST are provided, and the state is shifted to any one of variable probability A, variable probability B, and variable probability C according to the jackpot type won. Although the details will be described later, when focusing on the game mode, ST100 mode when shifting to probability variation A, ST75 mode when shifting to probability variation B, ST25 mode when shifting to probability variation C It is designed to shift to a game mode corresponding to probability variation A to C, such as ST25 mode (see FIG. 6).

(Probability A, probability B, probability C)
The "probability variation A", "probability variation B", and "probability variation C" will be described.

(B) Probability A (ST100 mode)
The probability variation A is a probability variation state in which the number of times of ST is set to 100 times. In the present embodiment, when the probability variable large 1, the probability variable big hit 4, or the probability variable big win 7 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable A. In the case of shifting to variable probability A, when 100 times of ST are completed without winning a jackpot, the "variable probability state" is ended, and the internal game state is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game.
(B) Probable variation B (ST75 mode)
The probability variation B is a probability variation state in which the number of STs is set to 75 times (the number of STs of the probability variation B<the number of STs of the probability variation A). In this embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot 2 or the probability variable jackpot 5 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable B. In the case of shifting to variable probability B, when 75 times of ST are completed without winning a jackpot, the ``variable probability state'' is terminated, and from the next game, the game is shifted to the ``time saving state'' with 25 times of time saving. More specifically, after shifting to a variable probability state after a jackpot game, when a predetermined number of times of ST is completed, only the high probability state is terminated (a special pattern probability variable function is turned OFF), and the game state is shifted to a ``low probability state + electric sapo state'', that is, a ``time saving state'' (here, probability variable B = ``ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times''). Then, when the number of times of time saving ends 25 times without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the game is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game. Therefore, the electric sapo itself is designed to be given 100 times like the above-mentioned probability variation A, but the probability variation B is shifted to the time saving state after the predetermined number of STs is completed.
(C) Variable probability C (ST25 mode)
The variable probability C is a variable probability state in which the number of STs is set to 25 times (the number of STs of the variable probability C<the number of STs of the variable probability B). In this embodiment, when the probability variable jackpot 3 or the probability variable jackpot 6 is won, the game is shifted to the probability variable C. In the case of shifting to variable probability C, the ``variable probability state'' ends when the number of times of ST is 25 times is completed without winning a big hit, and from the next game, the game is shifted to the ``time-saving state'' of 75 times of time saving (here, variable probability C = '25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving'). Then, when the number of times of time saving ends 75 times without winning a jackpot, the "time saving state" ends, and the game is shifted to the "normal state" from the next game. Like the probability variation A and B, the probability variation C is also given 100 electric sapo times.

In addition, the variable probability big hits 2, 3, 5, and 6 are jackpots (variable time-saving big hits) that give a “variable state of a predetermined number of ST times and a short time state of a predetermined number of times”. Therefore, to be precise, there are "variable probability big hit" that does not give the time saving state and "variable time saving big hit" that gives the time saving state.

The variable probability A, the variable probability B, and the variable probability C each have the same number of electric sapo times (the number of times in which the electric sapo is present) (100 times), but at least one of the variable probability A, the variable probability B, and the variable probability C may have a different number of electric sapo times. For example, the variable A can be 200 electric sapo, the variable B can be 150 electric sapo, the variable C can be 100 electric sapo, the variable A can be 200 electric sapo, the variable B can be 150 electric sapo, and the variable C can be 150 electric sapo. In addition, the variable probability B and the variable probability C have been described as shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state, but the variable probability state may not be shifted to the time saving state, that is, the variable probability state may be accompanied by a predetermined number of STs. In other words, the variable probability big hits 2, 3, 5 and 6 may be defined as the same “variable probability big hits” as the variable probability big hits 1 and 7 instead of the “variable probability big hits in short time”. Further, at least a part of the variable probability big hit of the present embodiment may be a latent probability big hit (latent probability state transition opportunity big hit). For example, the probability variation jackpot 1 to 3 on the special figure 1 side can be set as the latent probability jackpot.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes related to the game state (internal game state and/or variation pattern selection mode). For example, a plurality of types of performance modes related to each game state are provided, such as a ``normal performance mode'' for performance related to the ``normal state'', a ``time reduction performance mode'' for performance related to the time saving state, a ``probability variable performance mode (ST performance mode)'' for performance related to the variable probability state, and a ``time reduction performance mode'' for performance related to the time reduction state. The effect control unit 24 executes the effect based on the current effect mode, thereby realizing the effect related to the current game state. In each performance mode, the background display (background performance), BGM, etc. as the background of the variable display screen of decorative patterns are controlled to switch to performance modes related to the game state so that the player can grasp the performance mode corresponding to what kind of game state. Details of each effect mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG.

The performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (performance state transition control means) that is configured to be capable of controlling transitions between each performance mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, and that performs transition control between a plurality of types of performance modes. The effect control unit 24, among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), the effect control command including information on the game state, specifically, specifying the current game state or specifying that the game state is shifted Based on the information contained in the specific effect control command, grasp the game state (internal game state (YJ) and / or fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and maintain consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side. It is configured to be able to control the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between a plurality of types of production modes) according to the processing state. The above-mentioned specific effect control commands include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, a specific command (jackpot start command, jackpot end command) transmitted during a hit, and the like.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice effect will be described. The performance control unit 24 is configured to be able to control the appearance of various "forecast performances" related to the jackpot lottery result based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command (in this embodiment, the information included in the variation pattern designation command and/or the decorative pattern designation command) (forecast performance appearance control means). The main role of the notice effect is the suggestion (notice) of the expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (the well-known "winning expectation"), and the expectation of occurrence of a specific notice effect (specific notice occurrence expectation). Many of the advance notice effects work as a "promotion effect" for arousing the player's expectation of winning. Typical advance notice effects include "reach effect", "pseudo-continuous effect", "player participation type effect", "pre-reading notice effect", etc. There are various advance notice effects (so-called step-up effect, cut-in effect, etc.) that occur in combination (simultaneously or repeatedly) or independently with these effects.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The “ready-to-win effect” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a ready-to-win state (so-called tenpai state), and more specifically, to an effect mode in which the game result can be derived and displayed via the ready-to-win state. Among the ready-to-win effects, when a specific ready-to-win effect appears, the degree of expectation for winning is relatively higher than when a normal ready-to-win effect (N reach (normal reach) appears). Such a ready-to-win effect is called "SP reach (super reach)." , including multiple types of reach associated with winning odds.

When the game results in winning, most of the winning symbols (for example, matching symbols) are derived and displayed via this ready-to-win effect. That is, in the process of deriving and displaying the winning symbols, some kind of ready-to-win effect can appear. Therefore, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect is a clue for the player to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, a plurality of types of "notice effects" are provided as an effect mode for foretelling (suggesting) the possibility of occurrence of the ready-to-win effect, in other words, as an effect mode for more clearly foretelling the degree of expectation for winning. This "notice effect" plays a role as an agitation effect that foretells the expectation of winning, but it also plays a role of making a possibility that a specific effect (for example, a reach effect or a pseudo-reunion) will occur or definitely notifying the occurrence of a specific effect. Therefore, for example, in the ready-to-win effect scenario, there is a case where a certain advance notice effect occurs before the ready-to-win effect occurs to announce the possibility of occurrence of the ready-to-win effect and the degree of winning expectation. In other words, when the ready-to-win effect is accompanied by another notice effect, the degree of expectation for winning is more clarified than when the ready-to-win effect occurs alone, and the player's expectation for winning can be aroused. In addition, the foretelling performance may be generated by combining (simultaneously and overlappingly) one or more types of expected foretelling performances in relation to the result of the jackpot lottery, and by combining the plurality of types of expected foretelling performances, a clearer winning expectation is shown. For example, if a low-expectation notice performance with a low win expectation is combined with a high-expectation notice performance with a high win expectation, the win expectation is further increased, and if a plurality of high-expectation notice performances are combined, the win expectation is dramatically increased.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous))
“Pseudo-continuous” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo-continuous-variation display state of decorative symbols (so-called “pseudo-variation”). This ``pseudo-variation'' means a variable display mode in which a part or all of the decorative patterns are once temporarily stopped during the decorative pattern variable display game, and the display operation of performing the re-variable display operation of the decorative patterns from the temporarily stopped state is repeated once or more. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "predictive effect" that can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. The rate of occurrence of "pseudo-runs" is basically determined such that the higher the number of pseudo-changes, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is two times rather than once, the expectation of occurrence of the announcement effect (for example, SP reach) with high expectation of winning is increased. Therefore, in the case of the performance scenario including the ready-to-win performance, the ``pseudo-run'' is mainly generated in the stage before the formation of the ready-to-win state (the stage before the ready-to-win performance), and after one or more times of pseudo variation, the ready-to-win performance as the main variation is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In this specification, when pseudo N is used, it means the total number of pseudo fluctuations M times and the main fluctuation. For example, "pseudo 2" means "one pseudo fluctuation + main fluctuation", and "pseudo 3" means "two pseudo fluctuations + main fluctuation".

(5-2-3. Player Participation Production)
``Player-participation-type presentation'' is a presentation mode belonging to the so-called ``button announcement presentation'', and is a presentation presentation mode in which, when a predetermined operation (for example, pressing once, long-pressing, repeated hitting, etc.) is performed on the operation means (the presentation button 13 and/or the direction key 75), the content of the presentation can be changed based on the details of the operation. In the player-participation type performance, an ``operation instruction performance'' for instructing a predetermined operation to the operation means appears during a predetermined button valid period, and when the player operates the operation means during the button valid period, the present performance changes to another performance (operation-time performance) based on the details of the operation, and depending on the performance mode (performance content) before and after the operation, it is possible to notify the winning expectation, winning or losing, setting suggestion information, or the like. The performance control unit 24 includes a functional unit (operation effective period setting means) for setting an operation effective period (button effective period) during which the operation of the operation means is valid based on a predetermined set condition (for example, a predetermined timing during a player participation type performance), a pre-operation effect control means capable of controlling the appearance of a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button effective period, and an operation-time effect control means capable of executing and controlling a predetermined operation-time effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation effective period.

(5-2-5. Look-ahead notice effect)
"Forecasting notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "forecasting notice") is an effect mode in which the winning expectation degree of the operation reserved ball can be notified in advance mainly by using the reservation display mode (holding change type prediction notice) or the effect in the symbol change display game executed earlier in time series (symbol change type prediction notice) for the operation reserve ball (undigested operation reserve ball) that has not yet been subjected to the execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols).

An overview of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment, including the pre-reading notice, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to this embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative pattern), there is a reservation display area 76 that displays the number of special-figure 1 operation reserve balls and a reservation display area 77 that displays the number of special-figure 2 operation reserve balls. Information is reported.

The display regarding the presence or absence of this pending ball (hereinafter referred to as "suspended display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (in the order of prize winning), and in each pending display area 76, 77, the leftmost pending ball is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) pending ball in operation on the time axis among all the pending balls in the pending display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is provided with a holding display portion a1 to d1 (corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) consisting of holding icons (icon images) provided by the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum holding storage number. These suspension display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 normally switch the display mode to the operation state (lighting state) for the same number as the number of operation suspension balls that exist at the time of pre-reading determination, for example, three. Therefore, this holding display portion works as holding display means for displaying the number of operation holding balls. However, when the later-described pre-reading notice is executed, the holding display mode of one of the holding display parts a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display form (special holding display mode), thereby working as a means for generating the pre-reading notice.

Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active holding ball currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game pending K currently being played is placed on the icon of the strike seat J appears. That is, when the variable display of the special pattern 1 or the special pattern 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest pending a1 or a2 displayed in the pending display areas 76, 77 moves to the icon of the receiving seat J in the variable display area 78 as the icon of the pending K during game execution, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5, a sub-display area 79 is provided as a display area for sub-effects separate from the main effects such as decorative patterns and advance notice effects, which can display the operation reserved balls of special figures 1 and 2, the number of operation reserved balls of normal figures, the information on the variable display operation of special figures 1 and 2, and the information on the variable display operation of normal figures. The information in the sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative pattern and/or the reserved display part is hidden in displaying the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to identify from the information in the sub-display area 79 whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently being performed and how many balls are pending operation. In addition, depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), in the case of the first game state (for example, normal mode (normal state)), the reserved display area 76 is displayed preferentially (cooperatively) over the reserved display area 77 (one is displayed and the other is not displayed, or the transmittance of one is reduced and the transmittance of the other is increased, one is displayed relatively larger than the other, an effect image is attached to one and not attached to the other, etc.), and during the second game state. (For example, in the case of later-described time saving mode (time saving state) or ST mode (variable probability state)), the pending display area 77 can be preferentially displayed over the pending display area 76 . Further, both the reserved display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed during the first game state, and the reserved display area 77 can be preferentially displayed during the second game state.

(About advance notice)
Next, a look-ahead notice will be described. With respect to the appearance control related to this pre-reading notice, first, when an operation-reserving ball is generated (when the starting condition is satisfied), before the operation-reserving ball is provided for the execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols), the main control unit 20 carries out "pre-reading hit determination" to determine in advance the big hit lottery result related to the operation-reserving ball (steps S318 to S320 of FIG. 11 (random number determination processing to special stop symbol data creation processing), steps of FIG. 12). S410-S410 (see random number determination processing for special electric role product operation determination-special stop symbol creation processing)).

Further, by using the result of the above-mentioned "prediction hit determination", "prediction variation pattern determination" is performed to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) of the special symbols when the operation reserve ball is used in the execution of the symbol variation display game in the future (see step S320 of FIG. 11 (random number determination processing at the time of start-up winning)). This pre-determined special symbol variation pattern is referred to as a "forecast variation pattern". In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance whether it will be a reach variation pattern that goes through what kind of reach state, or whether it will be a normal variation pattern that does not go through a reach state. Thus, a series of processes for determining a look-ahead variation pattern through a look-ahead hit determination is referred to as "look-ahead determination".

When the information about the look-ahead determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing regarding the look-ahead notice. In the case of this embodiment, a "holding addition command" capable of specifying the number of pending balls in operation at the time of prefetch determination (the number of pending balls in operation including the ball that has been activated this time) and the above-mentioned prefetch variation pattern information (at least the information obtained by prefetching the result of winning or losing) is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the production control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 11 described later). As, effect control processing related to pre-reading notice is performed.

Specifically, when the performance control part 24 receives the pending addition command, it performs a "prefetching notice lottery" regarding whether or not to execute (appear) the prefetching notice based on the prefetching fluctuation pattern information, decides a production scenario related to the prefetching notice when the prefetching notice is to be executed, and makes the prefetching notice appear according to the production scenario (for example, see FIG. 32 to be described later). The execution probability of the foreseeing advance notice lottery is higher for "big win" than for "losing", and for the foreseeing variation pattern type with relatively high winning expectation. Therefore, the winning expectation is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice is generated. In addition, the pre-reading notice for the current operation-reserving ball can appear at the timing when the operation-reserving ball is generated, at the same time as the start of the pattern variation display game performed earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during the game. In addition, the pending addition command consists of 2 bytes, the upper byte side data that can specify the special figure type information (special figure 1 and 2), and the lower byte side data that can be specified with the operation suspension ball number information at the time of prefetch determination. In addition, the pending addition command consists of 2 bytes, the upper byte side data that specifies the result of winning and the lower byte side data that can specify the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern as look-ahead determination information (see FIGS. 24 to 27).

The information about the result of the prefetch determination is game information obtained when the main control unit 20 predetermines the result of the big win lottery (the result of the big win lottery at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation reserve ball is used in the symbol variation display game, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, and the like. Therefore, the information about the look-ahead determination result includes at least the look-ahead determination result (pre-read win-lose result) information of the win-lose lottery result at the start of variation, and in addition, the look-ahead determination result (look-ahead pattern result) information of the pattern lottery result and the look-ahead determination result (look-ahead variation pattern) information about the variation pattern at the start of variation can be included. For example, the look-ahead variation pattern information may include not only information on whether it is a "hit variation pattern" at the time of winning or a "loss variation pattern" at the time of losing (information on the result of a win-lose lottery), but also execution information of a specific advance notice performance, such as information on the result of look-ahead determination of the result of a symbol lottery (read-ahead pattern result) information, information on the presence or absence of a reach (if there is a reach, the type), or information on the presence or absence of a pseudo-run (if there is a pseudo-run, the number of times). What kind of information is included in the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be determined as appropriate according to the content of the notice to be notified. For example, the ``prediction variation pattern'' obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation pending ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the ``variation pattern at the start of variation'' obtained when the operation pending ball is subjected to the variable display operation. For example, in the case of a variation pattern that specifies "N reach 1" at the start of variation, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the reach type "N reach 1" itself, but the essence "N reach type (N reach 1 or N reach 2)".

(Prize-winning time-based look-ahead notice: pending change notice)
In this embodiment, when a pre-reading notice is executed (when a pre-reading notice lottery is won), among the holding icons of the holding display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (for example, the icon shown in note 3 in FIG. 29 described later, the alien icon shown in FIG. 32, etc.), the holding icon targeted for the pre-reading notice is changed from the white of the normal holding display (normal holding display mode) to the special holding color or color of blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow. A pending change notice that changes to a pending display (a special pending display mode) can be executed. This pending change notice can appear at the time of winning (holding display) as a trigger, so it is also referred to as "pre-reading notice of winning timing".

As this hold change notice, FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation hold ball of the hatched hold display portion b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of white blinking, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors of the pending icon means that the expectation of winning is high in the order of these colors, and especially the display of the rainbow-colored pending icon is a premium pending icon (notice of reservation) that is a big hit confirmation (accurate) display. The white blinking icon display is a pending icon that suggests the possibility of occurrence of a "step-up pending change notice" described later, and makes us expect what the final pending color will be (the pending color may remain blinking white without changing). In the case of blinking white, if the reserved display is left as it is, the degree of winning expectation is the lowest among the special reserved displays, but if it changes to another reserved color, the degree of winning expectation due to that reserved color increases.

In the present embodiment, regarding the notice effect, as a notice effect with a high winning expectation such that when the jackpot lottery result is a loss, the result is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and when the big win is a big win, it is selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). In the case of change notice, if the winning expectations of blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors are 1%, 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, and 100%, respectively, ``green, red, and rainbow colors'' belong to the high-expectation notice effect, and the others (white blinking, blue, and yellow) belong to the low-expectation notice effect.If a look-ahead notice occurs, during the pattern variation display game for the ball with the operation pending, the high-expectation notice ( If a high number of pseudo-runs, SP reach, etc.) occurs, the expectation of winning will be further increased in combination with the content of the pre-reading notice effect.

The existing operation pending balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game as a trigger. At this time, in order to express that one operation reservation ball has been consumed, the display position of the reservation display unit corresponding to the existing operation reservation ball is advanced (sequentially shifted to the left), and display control (shift display) is performed such that the number of displays is reduced. In this regard, the look-ahead notice is different from the notice performance performed during one pattern variation operation such as pseudo-run in that a dedicated notice performance can appear over a plurality of symbol variation display games (a plurality of symbol variation display operations).

The special pending display related to the pending change notice is (A) a case of appearing when winning a prize, in other words, a case of appearing at the timing of the pending display, (B) the normal pending display (white) at the time of winning, but changing from the normal pending display to a special pending display (blue, etc.), (C) changing to a special pending display with a relatively higher winning expectation than the current special pending display (for example, changing from blue to yellow or higher pending color in a step-up manner). In the case of (B) or (C), it is possible to change from one suspension display mode to another suspension display mode at a predetermined timing during the shift display, a predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, a predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific advance notice effect, and during a player participation type effect for the hold change notice (for example, during the effective period of button operation). Note that a hold change notice that changes to a hold display with a higher winning expectation like the above (B) or (C) is referred to as a "step-up hold change notice".

Further, when the game pending K is placed on the receiving seat J, basically the same display mode as the pending display mode in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the player can be notified of the pre-reading notice (special pending display) for the operation pending balls related to the current pattern variation display game even during the game, but the pending display mode of the game execution pending K may change to another pending display mode at a predetermined timing during the pattern variation display game. Such a change in the display mode of the game execution suspension K is also treated as belonging to the step-up suspension change notice.

In principle, there is no "downgrade of special hold display" that changes from the current hold color to a hold color with a relatively low winning expectation, but if an exception occurs, the operation hold ball is accurate. An example of a case of a successor is a case where the pending display changes to a pending display with a lower winning expectation than the current pending display, such as "blue→white" or "red→blue". In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display (static display mode) by a still image, but the hold icon display by a moving image (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon is rotated, vibrated, swayed, or blinked (high-speed blinking or low-speed blinking). It may be displayed).

(Pattern change mid-system pre-reading notice: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "winning timing" look-ahead forewarning effect, it is possible to appear a "fluctuation foreseeing forewarning" triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game. Unlike the pending change notice described above, this predictive notice during fluctuation can appear at a predetermined timing during the display of the symbol fluctuation, so it is also called "predictive notice during fluctuation (change system at the start of fluctuation)".

This "varying pre-reading notice" is, for example, a pre-reading notice such that a pre-reading-only notice image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and this is executed (singly or continuously displayed) in the pattern change display game one or more times. That is, in the variable pre-forecast notice, when a game ball enters a start hole during a certain symbol change display game and a starting condition is established, the right to execute the symbol change display game related to the establishment of the start condition is temporarily reserved and stored, and a pre-read notice lottery is performed as to whether or not the pre-read notice effect is to be executed. can be expressed with some relevance. For example, during the game for all or part of the pattern variation display relating to the existing operation-reserving balls from the oldest operation-reserving ball to the operation-reserving ball targeted for pre-reading notice in memory order, a pre-reading-only notice image (for example, a notice image simulating lightning in FIG. 5B) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36.例文帳に追加In this case, in each symbol variation display game, all or part of different pre-reading notices may be displayed. For example, when three symbol variation display games are made to appear, the first symbol variation display game can be a thundercloud image, the second symbol variation display game can be a rain image (image display expressing how rain falls from a thundercloud) or a thundercloud image, and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning image. Also, the winning expectation may differ according to the preview image. In the above example, the thundercloud image may be of low expectation, the rain image may be of medium expectation, and the lightning image may be of high expectation. In this case, if the game ends with only the thundercloud image, the expectation of winning is low. Further, a step-up type pre-reading notice may be used in which the degree of expectation develops step by step (the degree of expectation increases) in the order of "thundercloud image→rain image→lightning image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

It should be noted that the effect means used for the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the content of the effect can be appropriately determined. For example, in the case of image display, a combination of background images and decorative patterns exclusively for read-ahead may be used, and in addition to this image display, dedicated sound effects, light effects, or movable body effects may be combined.

In the present embodiment, the prefetch notice during fluctuation and the pending change notice can appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for execution of the pending change notice and the lottery for execution of the prefetching notice during fluctuation are independent lotteries. Therefore, there are a case where the pending change notice occurs alone, a case where the prefetching notice during fluctuation occurs singly, and a case where the pending change notice and the prefetching notice during fluctuation occur simultaneously (overlapping). It should be noted that the effect means and the content of the effect used when executing the pre-reading notice during fluctuation can be appropriately determined.

(4-2-6. Setting Suggestion Effect)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to present an effect mode (setting suggesting effect) that suggests information about the "set value". For example, it is a setting suggestion production such as the following (a) to (b).
(a) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(k) A "high setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(g) "Even number setting suggestion effect" to suggest even number setting (settings 2, 4, 6).
(U) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" to suggest odd number setting (settings 1, 3, 5).
(m) "Specific setting confirmation effect" for deterministically notifying a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, a "setting N confirmation effect" that definitely notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal setting value definitely. The reason for this is that, like confirmation of setting 1 and setting 2, anything that definitely suggests a low setting region reduces the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is preferable to let one of the settings 4 to 6 of the high setting area be notified definitely. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect appears in which a high setting such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(m) "Specific setting denial effect" for deterministically notifying that the specified setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 is acceptable).
(H) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests a set value in a specific range. For example, settings 3 to 5 (α≦set value≦β) are suggested, settings 4 or more (α≦set value) are suggested, and a plurality of specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6” are suggested. In addition, by varying the appearance rate according to the set value, it is possible to indicate the high/low possibility of a certain set value, such as setting 1, which is difficult to appear, setting 4, which is moderately appearing, and setting 6, which is likely to occur.

Note that the appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the set value is relatively low. Moreover, there is no particular limitation on the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect, and one or a plurality of effects out of sound effect, light effect, image display effect, and movable body effect can be used.

Also, the setting suggestion effect can be displayed at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game, for example, combined with or independently of the advance notice effect. In addition, it can be made to appear not only during the symbol variation game, but also during the jackpot game, "demo start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demonstration display)", which will be described later, while waiting for the start of the game.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to a set value, the notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, by changing the appearance rate of at least one of a specific ready-to-win performance, a specific pseudo-run (a specific pseudo-run mode and a specific number of pseudo-runs), a specific player participatory performance, and a specific pre-reading announcement according to a set value, the announcement performance itself can function as a ``set suggestion performance''. For example, if a specific SP reach is likely to appear at the time of failure, "high setting rich" is likely to appear. Also, by using the effect of the pre-reading notice, it is possible to make the pre-reading notice mode dedicated to the setting suggesting effect appear. For example, when the hold icon blinks at high speed, high setting rich is suggested, and when one or all of the hold icons change to a dedicated hold icon (dedicated character or item image), "high setting rich" is suggested.

<6. Directing means>
Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine. Such directing means may be stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a staging effect by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations, and includes light generating (light emitting) means (light effect means) such as decorative lamp 45 and LED device, sound generating device (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressure device that transmits contact pressure to the body of the operator, vibration device that vibrates the player (for example, the firing operation handle 15 shakes), and the player. Typical examples are a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the body, and a movable accessory that exerts a visual presentation effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the sense of sight like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not depend on images (for example, a 7-segment display device). When it is called an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that produces an effect (image display effect) by image display, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the above-mentioned effect display device.

<7. Game mode transition form: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the contents of the "game mode" related to the variation pattern selection mode and transition control between each game mode (between each game state) will be described. 6 and 7 are game flows showing an outline of a game mode and an effect mode related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a plurality of game modes such as General, Omen, Ceiling, Heaven, and ST (ST beginning, ST middle, ST end) are provided, and the progress of the game is controlled under these game modes.

(About 7-1A. “Normal mode”)
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state, and this normal mode is an initial game mode that is started when the RAM is cleared (for example, when the RAM is cleared, when settings are changed, etc.).

The normal mode includes a "general mode" with a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "00H" and a "precursor mode" with a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "01H". The ``general mode'' is a game mode in which the player can stay for the longest while the game is in progress, and basically, a big win is won from this general mode and the game mode is shifted to another game mode (ST mode, time saving mode, etc., which will be described later).

(7-1A-1. About production in normal mode)
During the general mode, it is shifted to a "general production mode" that produces productions related to the general mode. The general performance mode according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of general performance modes, and for example, the player can switch to a preferred general performance mode by operating the operating means (the performance button 13 or the direction key 75) while waiting for a customer. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the normal mode block frame in FIG. 6, any one of three types of production modes (player selectable production modes) of "normal mode (normal A production mode)", "simple mode (normal B production mode)", and "premium mode (normal B production mode)" can be selected. However, what should not be confused is that these production modes are production modes under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode=00H), and it does not mean that the player can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. Therefore, depending on the difference between the normal mode, the simple mode and the premium mode, different effects may appear, but since the variation pattern of the internally selected special symbols (variation pattern distribution table) does not change, the time of the symbol variation display game (the variation time of the special symbols) itself does not change.

'Normal mode' is a default presentation mode, and 'Simple mode' is a presentation mode in which the appearance rate of a specific announcement presentation is low or does not appear at all (appearance rate 0%) compared to the normal mode (specific announcement presentation appearance rate change mode).
In the 'simple mode', for example, (a) the appearance rate of a specific high-expectation announcement with a relatively high winning expectation (for example, winning expectation of 30% or more in normal mode) when losing is lower than in the normal mode, and when the specific high-expectation announcement appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the excitement at the appearance of the high-expectation announcement is heightened. In addition, (b) the probability of appearance of a specific low-expectation notice with a relatively low winning expectation (for example, a performance with a winning expectation of less than 30% in the normal mode, a look-ahead notice) is lower than in the normal mode (including 0%), and there is little excessive fanning performance (performance at the time of failure), and it is suitable for players who like simple performances. In addition, (c) the probability of appearance of the player participation type performance is lower than that in the normal mode (including 0%), and the probability of appearance of the performance accompanying the operation of the performance button is low, so that it is suitable for players who like calm games.
In the 'premium mode', the probability of appearance of performances of the winning probability system (performance of rich winning of the jackpot (for example, expectation of winning 90% or more) or performance of confirmation of winning of the jackpot) is higher than those of the normal mode and the simple mode, and the probability of appearance of one or a plurality of specific low expectation notices is low (including 0%). Therefore, this production mode is suitable for players who want to enjoy the appearance of a premium production that predicts the accuracy.
The appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be set to the same probability in any of the normal, simple, and premium effect modes, or may be different.

In addition, in each production mode of normal, simple, and premium, since it is possible to identify which mode it is in, a unique production corresponding to each production mode is displayed. Specifically, at least one of image display effects (for example, background image (background display), characters appearing in advance notice effects, decorative patterns, etc.), sound effects (for example, BGM, sound effects), and light effects (for example, specific lighting modes of LEDs for effects) change corresponding to each effect mode. This makes it possible to identify which of the normal/simple/premium production modes is being used. In this embodiment, the background display (background effect) according to at least each production mode is based on the "daytime background image" in which the sun shines in the general mode, the background image in the "normal mode" is associated with the season "spring" (for example, the background image including cherry blossom trees), the background image in the "simple mode" is associated with the season "summer" (for example, the background image including the sea and sandy beach), and the background image is associated with the season "autumn" in the "premium mode" (for example, the background image includes mountains and trees with autumn leaves). switching is controlled. In addition, under other game modes, it is possible to switch between at least two production modes of normal, simple and premium modes. Also in this case, as described above, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to visually identify which mode it is in.

(7-1B. Premonition mode)
Also, the above-mentioned "prediction mode" is a game mode that is shifted to when the "ceiling (harm relief function)", which will be described later, is about to be reached, and for example, it is provided as a game mode for executing a "prediction effect" that notifies that the ceiling is about to be reached. This portent mode is shifted to when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a jackpot in the normal mode (normal state). In the case of this embodiment, when 989 games are played in the normal mode, the game is shifted to the precursor mode from the 990th game (see the block frame (α) of the "precursor mode" in FIG. 7). Details of the "ceiling" will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when 1000 games (1000 spins) are addicted (continuously lost) in the normal mode (at least when the internal game state is normal), the ceiling function is activated and a special benefit (ceiling privilege) is awarded (see column of example of ceiling privilege in note 2 of FIG. 7).

(7-1B-1. Regarding production during omen mode)
During the omen mode, a transition is made to an "omen production mode" that produces an production (omen production) related to the omen mode. During the omen effect mode, the "daytime background image" of the sun shining in the normal mode is switched to the "night background image" of the stars shining, and it is notified that the omen mode is on. In addition, it is possible to switch between normal/simple/premium mode even during the omen effect mode (refer to block frame (γ) of omen mode in FIG. 7). In addition, during the omen effect mode, for example, a countdown display appears as an effect (residual ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of remaining games (number of remaining ceilings) until the ceiling is reached (see the block frame (δ) of the omen mode in FIG. 7). This remaining ceiling count display effect may appear during a part of the period during the omen mode, for example, the remaining ceiling count display effect may start (countdown display starts) from the 996th game when the ceiling is near. For example, considering the maximum number of reserved memories of 4, a countdown display (eg, suggesting a count of zero in the ceiling game) can be made between the 996th game and the 999th game, or between the 995th and 1000th game including the ceiling game. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a performance advantage that the player can prevent wasteful beating until the ceiling is reached.

In addition, during the indication production mode, at least a suspension display mode (suspension icon) different from that in the general mode appears. For example, in the general effect mode, the pending display mode is based on the simple "round icon" shown in FIG. 5, but in the portent effect mode, a dedicated pending display mode based on the "character icon" appears (the block frame (ε) of the portent mode in FIG. 7, see FIG. 32). In the general mode, one or a plurality of pending displays existing immediately before the transition to the portent mode (989th game) may be changed all at once to a dedicated pending display (character icon) after the transition to the portent mode (990th game), or only the pending display to be digested during the portent mode may be changed to a dedicated pending display. To explain the latter configuration in detail, for example, in the case where there are three balls with pending activation during the execution of the 988th game, the pending display related to the 989th to 991st games can be ``round icon (suspended target to be digested during normal mode: 989th game)'', ``character icon (suspended target to be digested during precursor mode: 990th game)'', and ``character icon (suspended target to be digested during precursor mode: 991st game)''. In addition, the same suspension display (round icon) as in the general presentation mode may be performed from the start of the omen presentation mode until a predetermined number of games are completed, and when the ceiling is about to be reached (for example, between the 996th game and the 999th game in consideration of the maximum number of pending memories of 4), the display may be switched to the suspension display (character icon) dedicated to the omen. Further, during the portent effect mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling count display effect" and/or "holding display dedicated to portents" may appear.

(Regarding selection of normal/simple/premium mode in Omen mode)
Although it has been described that it is possible to switch to any of the ``normal/simple/premium modes'' during the omen effect mode of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the switching is impossible (control is performed in a state in which switching is disabled). That is, during the sign effect mode, the effect mode selectable by the player can be fixed. For example, it can be fixed to the production mode selected in the general mode, or forced to be fixed to one of the normal/simple/premium modes (for example, the default normal mode) (the same applies to heaven mode, which will be described later). In this case, the fact that the effect mode that was switchable in the general mode becomes unswitchable makes the player feel uncomfortable and makes the player know that the ceiling is about to be reached. In particular, when the omen effect mode and the general effect mode are made to be in a hidden state in terms of effect (for example, the omen effect mode and the general effect mode are set to a common background image, the effect mode is common to the omen mode and the general mode (internally the effect mode is the effect mode, but the effect mode is the general effect mode), the effect mode itself is not provided, etc.), it is possible to inform the player that the ceiling reaching (ceiling game) is approaching by giving the player a sense of incompatibility such as "a state in which the effect mode cannot be switched".

(7-2. About “ST mode”)
The ST mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the variable probability state (YJ=01H), and in this ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) includes ``02H'' ``ST early stage mode'', ``03H'' ``ST middle stage mode'', and ``04H'' ``ST final stage mode''. This ST mode is shifted to when one of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won.

In the case of the present embodiment, depending on which one of the variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 is won, any of the "variable probability A" to "variable probability C" is shifted, so the mode of transition of the game mode is also different. More specifically, the following transition modes (A-1) to (A-3) are used.

(A-1: If you win a variable hit 3, 6 (5R variable ST25, 7R variable ST25) that gives a variable C (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving))
When one of the variable probability jackpots 3 and 6 is won, the game is shifted to "variable probability C" as already explained in FIG. In this case, the transition form of the game mode stays in the "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th games (early stage within the ST number), and stays in the "time saving mode" until the 26th to 100th games (within the time saving number). Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ time-saving mode", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 3, 6 is won is also called "ST 25 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(A-2: If you win the probability variation jackpot 2, 5 (5R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation ST75) that gives probability variation B (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving))
When one of the probability variable jackpots 2 and 5 is won, the game is shifted to the above-mentioned "probability variable B", and "ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the transition mode of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (early stage within the ST number), stay in the "ST middle mode" until the 26th to 75th games (middle stage within the ST number), and stay in the "time saving mode" until the 76th to 100th games (within the time saving number). Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 50 times) ⇒ time-saving mode", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 2, 5 is won is also called "ST 75 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(A-3. If you win the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, 7 (5R probability variation ST100), 10R probability variation ST100, special 7R probability variation) that gives probability variation A (ST number of 100 times))
When one of the probability variable jackpots 1, 3, and 7 is won, the game is shifted to the above-mentioned "probability variable A", and "ST number 100 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the mode of transition of the game mode in this case is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" until the 1st to 25th games (early stage within the ST number), stay in the "ST middle stage mode" until the 26th to 75th games (middle stage in the ST number), and stay in the "ST end mode" until the 76th to 100th games (end stage in the ST number). Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 75 times) ⇒ ST final stage mode (ST 25 times)", the game mode that is shifted when the probability variable jackpot 1, 3, 7 is won is also called "ST 100 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(B. Continuous performance of variable A to variable C (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode))
Since the "ST number" differs depending on which of the above-mentioned probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, that is, whether it is shifted to one of "variable probability A to variable C", the pullback rate (so-called "continuous rate") of the jackpot during the state with electric sapo in the variable probability A to variable probability C (variable probability state or time saving state) is also different. That is, the degree of advantage to the player (the state of profit (degree of profit) given to the player) is different. For example, in the case of setting 6 (1/189 at low probability, 1/63 at high probability), the probability variable A (ST number of 100) consecutive rate, that is, ST intermediate rate is about 79.8%. In addition, the probability variable B ("ST 75 times + time saving 25 times" electric sapo 100 times) has a continuous rate of about 70% for the ST rate, about 12.4% for the short time rate, and about 73.6% for the whole (75 times for ST + 25 times for time saving). In addition, the probability variable C (100 electric sapo with "25 times of ST + 75 times of time reduction") has a continuous rate of about 33% for ST, about 32.8% for short time, and about 55% for the whole (with electric sapo). In addition, the continuous rate in the case of the time-saving jackpot (time-saving medium rate) is about 41.2%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of probability variable jackpots with different numbers of STs are provided, the degree of consecutive wins during the ST can be varied according to the type of jackpot won. In particular, as in the present embodiment, the number of times the power supply is present (power supply number) is the same (for example, 100 times), but the number of STs is different (for example, ST 25 times, ST 75 times, ST 100 times). As a result, the degree of freedom in game play is increased, and the amusement of the game can be further improved. In addition, the degree of freedom of the production (ST production mode, which will be described later) related to the ST mode is also improved, and the production can be diversified.

(7-2-1. Fluctuations at the beginning of ST, middle of ST, and end of ST)
As already described, the "ST early stage mode", the "ST middle stage mode", and the "ST final stage mode" have different variation pattern selection modes (Tcode) (see FIG. 28). As a result, it is possible to select a variation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 25 and 27) corresponding to each ST mode, so that each ST mode can create its own characteristic ST mode. For example, in the variation pattern distribution table for the ST early stage mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected with a high probability, in the variation pattern distribution table for the ST middle stage mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected with a high probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table for the ST final mode, a variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability. The average execution time of the symbol variation display game per unit time or the number of executions of the symbol variation display game per unit time: hereinafter also referred to as "average execution time") can be adjusted. It should be noted that the average duration of the pattern variation display game (average duration) is at least the average duration at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the variation pattern of failure" in each ST mode.

In the case of this embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion times in the ST mode is determined so as to satisfy "ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early stage mode" (see FIG. 27). That is, ST early stage mode is controlled under "high speed fluctuation state (fastest in all game modes (shortest average digest time))", ST middle stage mode is "medium speed fluctuation state", and ST final stage mode is controlled under "low speed fluctuation state". If the average digestion time (digestion speed) in each mode satisfies the relationship of "ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early stage mode", the time is not particularly limited. However, the ST mode is a game mode related to the variable probability state, and since the ``special pattern time saving function'' works during the ST mode, the average digestion time of the pattern variation display game is shorter than at least the normal mode (normal state) in any variation state. Each of the above fluctuation states (high speed, medium speed and low speed fluctuation states) has the following characteristics.

The above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) in which emphasis is placed on game characteristics, such as "increase the average speed of the game to improve the time efficiency of the progress of the game." During the ST mode (probable change state), it becomes "Denpo -supported state + high probability status (special pattern probability change function operation) + special map time shortening state (special pattern time -short function operation)", at least the average digestion time of the design fluctuation display game is relatively shorter, and it is designed to make it easier to win a large hit. However, when it comes to such a game, many of the players want to get a big hit faster than enjoying the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the ST early stage mode, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected to generate a "high-speed variation state".

On the other hand, in the "middle-speed fluctuation state" or "low-speed fluctuation state" in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected as compared with the "high-speed fluctuation state", the average execution time of the pattern fluctuation display game is longer than in the "high-speed fluctuation state".

(7-2-2. Regarding effects during ST mode)
The ST mode according to the present embodiment includes the “ST early stage mode”, the “ST middle stage mode”, and the “ST final stage mode” as described above. Therefore, as production modes (ST production modes) corresponding to these ST modes, there are provided an "ST early stage production mode" in which an production related to the "ST early stage" (an ST early stage production) appears, an "ST middle stage production mode" in which an production related to the "ST middle stage" (ST middle stage production) appears, and an "ST final stage production mode" in which an production related to the "ST end stage" (ST final stage production) appears.

(7-2-3. Example of production in ST mode: Fig. 29)
FIG. 29 shows examples of effects in the ST opening stage effect mode, ST middle stage effect mode and ST end stage effect mode.

Referring to FIG. 29, the "ST early stage production mode" according to the present embodiment is an "underwater acoustic battle mode" that produces a production that expresses a battle between submarines, the "ST middle stage production mode" is a "surface battle mode" that produces a production that expresses a battle between fleets, and the "ST end stage production mode" is a "land battle mode" that produces a production that expresses a battle between tanks. In other words, the ST mode period is divided into three stages of the ST beginning stage, the ST middle stage, and the ST end stage according to the number of remaining STs, and which of the three ST divisions the player stays in is notified to the player as an ST division effect, mainly by a dynamic change in the variation pattern (change in the variable state of high speed, medium speed, and low speed) and accompanying effect (switching of the background effect, advance notice effect, etc.). It should be noted that the display of "Right shot ⇒" shown in the figure is a launch guidance notification effect (right stroke instruction effect) that urges the player to hit right. Further, the reserved icon is shown only in the example of presentation (example of presentation relating to the ST100 mode) in FIG. In addition, although the figure shows that the decorative patterns are being displayed in a stopped state, for the sake of convenience of explanation, this shows that the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed once the game is finished, and in fact, if there is an operation pending ball, naturally the decorative patterns are variably displayed under the current performance mode.

As for the "ST classification effect" that divides the effect mode during the ST period, in each effect mode of "ST beginning effect mode", "ST middle effect mode", and "ST end effect mode", it is switched to battle mode effect such as underwater acoustic warfare mode, surface warfare mode, land warfare mode, etc., and thereby it is notified that the number of times of ST is approaching the final time step by step.

In this embodiment, even if any of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the production mode is started from the "underwater sound warfare mode" of the ST early stage production mode. That is, the ST opening production mode (underwater acoustic warfare mode) is common to each ST mode (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) as shown. However, each ST mode differs in the transition form of game mode, and the transition form of production mode also differs accordingly.

(In case of ST25 mode: Fig. 29 (C))
In the case of ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving), as shown in FIG. Then, when the 25th game of the ST final is completed, the game mode is shifted from the ST early stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also shifted from the ST early stage production mode (underwater sound battle mode) to the time saving production mode ("air battle mode" that produces a production that expresses the battle between fighters) (The details of the time saving mode and the time saving production mode will be described later). This time-saving production mode (air combat mode) stays for 26 games to 100 games (time-saving final game). Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the time saving mode ends (the state with the electric sapo ends) and shifts to the normal mode, and along with this, the production mode also shifts from the time saving production mode to the normal production mode (general production mode) (similar to the ST75 mode described later).

(For ST75 mode: Fig. 29 (b))
In the case of ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), as shown in FIG. 29(b), between 1st and 25th games, stay in ST early stages production mode (underwater sound warfare mode). When the 25th game ends, the game mode is shifted from the ST early stage mode to the ST middle stage mode, and along with this, the performance mode is also shifted from the ST early stage performance mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the ST middle stage performance mode (water battle mode), and stays in this ST middle stage performance mode (water battle mode) until the 75th game. Then, when the final 75th game of the ST is finished, the game mode is shifted from the ST middle stage mode to the time reduction mode, and along with this, the production mode is also shifted from the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to the time reduction production mode (air battle mode). In the case of the ST75 mode, this time-saving production mode (air combat mode) stays for 76 games to 100 games (time-saving final game).

(For ST100 mode: FIG. 29 (a))
In the case of the ST100 mode (100 times of ST), as shown in FIG. 29A, up to the 75th game, the same game mode and effect mode transition as the above-described ST75 mode. However, when the 75th game is finished, the game mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode and the ST final stage mode, and along with this, both the performance mode and the performance mode are shifted from the ST middle stage performance mode (water battle mode) to the ST final stage performance mode (land battle mode). In the case of the ST100 mode, all 100 games until the end of the state with the electric sapo are ST (probability variable), and this land battle mode is a special production mode that occurs only in the ST100 mode. In addition, in the case of the ST100 mode, since the background is sequentially switched in the entire section of the ST mode, the player's sense of tension increases each time the production mode switches to the underwater acoustic battle (ST early stage), the surface battle (ST middle stage), and the ground battle mode (ST final stage), and becomes the strongest when the land battle mode is reached at the end of ST. Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the ST mode ends (the state with the electric sapo ends) and shifts to the normal mode, and along with this, the performance mode also shifts from the ST final stage performance mode to the normal performance mode (general performance mode).

In this way, in this embodiment, when any jackpot is won, the game is started from "ST early stage mode+ST early stage effect mode". That is, the start performance mode (initial performance mode) after the big win game is common regardless of the transition destination game state (probability change A to probability change C) of the big win game, in other words, regardless of the initial remaining number of STs (number of STs to be given).

(Modifications related to ST mode: FIGS. 30 and 31)
It should be noted that the transition of the ST mode and the ST effect mode in the state of progress of the game is not limited to the above-described embodiment (FIG. 29), and can be configured to follow the transition shown in modified examples 1 and 2 below. Modifications 1 and 2 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG.

(Modification 1 related to ST mode: FIG. 30)
FIG. 30 shows Modification 1 according to the ST mode of this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 30, the pending icon corresponding to the production mode is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 31 described later).

In the case of this example (variation 1) as well, although the ST mode is divided into a plurality of modes, the start performance mode differs depending on each ST mode (depending on the jackpot type won), and different performance modes are started according to the number of remaining STs.

Referring to FIG. 30, in the case of ST100 mode, as shown in FIG. 30(a), the same mode transition as in the above embodiment (FIG. 29(a)) is followed.

However, in the case of ST75 mode (75 ST times + 25 times of time saving), focusing on the point that the initial remaining ST times is 75 times, as shown in the figure (b), the following mode transition (ST mode, transition of the corresponding production mode) is to be traced.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST middle stage mode + ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode)"
"Between 26 and 75 games": "ST end mode + ST end stage production mode (land battle mode)"
“Between 76 and 100 games”: “Time-saving mode + Time-saving production mode (air combat mode)”

In addition, in the case of ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 50 times of time saving), focusing on the point that the initial remaining number of ST is 25 times, as shown in the figure (C), the following mode transition It is designed to follow.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST end mode + ST end stage production mode (land battle mode)"
“Between 26 and 100 games”: “Time-saving mode + Time-saving production mode (air combat mode)”

In this example, the "ST early stage mode" exists only in the ST100 mode, and the "ST middle stage mode" exists in the ST100 mode and the ST75 mode. The ST final stage mode exists in common in each ST mode. This example differs from the above-described embodiment in the following points.

In the case of this example, focusing on the fluctuation state, in the ST75 mode, the fluctuation state is started from the "middle speed fluctuation state" because the ST middle stage mode (surface warfare mode) is started. Further, in the ST25 mode, since the ST final stage mode (land battle mode) is started, the fluctuation state is started from the "low speed fluctuation state". That is, in the case of this example, as the number of STs in the initial stage is relatively small, the game mode is started from a game mode in which the average completion time of the symbol variation display game is slow. Therefore, the section corresponding to the "high-speed fluctuation state" at the beginning of the ST in the above embodiment (between 1 to 25 games) is the section of the medium-speed fluctuation state or the low-speed fluctuation state, so even if the number of STs is small, there is an advantage that the ST period can be enjoyed for a long time without the fear that the ST period will end quickly.

(Modification 2 related to ST mode: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 shows Modified Example 2 of the ST effect mode according to the present embodiment. This example is started from the common "ST production mode" regardless of the number of times of ST, and is shifted to the "time saving mode" when the time saving state is transferred. In the drawing, an example starting from the ST middle stage mode is representatively shown.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 31(a) to 31(b), ST25, ST75 and ST100 modes all have common ST mode and ST effect mode (naval warfare mode). That is, during the ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode is the same ("03H" in ST middle stage mode in this example), and at least the variation state (average digest time) does not change according to the remaining ST number. In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-described embodiment and Modification 1. However, in the case of the ST25 mode or the ST75 mode, when the number of times of ST ends, the ST mode is shifted to the time saving mode (the variation pattern selection mode is updated to '05H' of the time saving mode), and the performance mode is also shifted from the ST middle stage performance mode to the time saving performance mode. In other words, in the ST25 and ST75 modes, the game mode (variation pattern selection mode) shift occurs while the power supply is present, and in the ST100 mode, the game mode (variation pattern selection mode) shifts while the power supply is present.

In the case of this example, since the ST production mode (ST mode) does not change according to the number of STs, for example, the number of STs is relatively small such as "5 times, 10 times, 15 times". This is because when the number of times of ST is small, the player feels annoyed if the performance mode or the variation pattern selection mode is changed recklessly.

In the ST mode, the "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode" described in the normal mode may be configured to be non-switchable, or like the normal mode, the player may be configured to be switchable (the same applies to other game modes (time saving mode and heaven mode described later)). In the case of a switchable configuration, in each production mode of "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode", the background display color is changed to a specific color (for example, dark color) that is determined so that the background image color becomes darker in this order. Weapon images related to each ST mode (submarines, ships, tanks, fighters (in the case of the time-saving production mode described later)) display colors and patterns are changed in each production mode of normal / simple / premium mode. It can be configured to be identifiable to which production mode is switched. Also, how to determine the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in each mode is arbitrary. In the present embodiment, the relationship of "ST end mode<ST middle mode<ST early stage mode" has been described, but it may be configured like the variation state of Modifications 1 and 2, or the relationship may be such that the variation state relatively slows down according to the number of STs, like the relationship of "ST early stage mode<ST middle stage mode<ST end stage mode".

The following (1) to (10) can be used for the "remaining ST number of times notification effect" for notifying the remaining ST number and the "remaining power supply number of times notification effect" for notifying the remaining number of power supply support.
(1) In each ST production mode (each ST mode), it is possible to produce a “remaining ST number of times notification effect” and/or a “remaining power supply number of times notification effect”.
In addition, (2) when displaying the remaining ST number informing effect, the remaining ST number of each effect ST mode may be notified. For example, if it is in ST early stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times, if it is in the ST middle stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 50 times, and if it is in the ST final stage mode, the countdown display is performed from the remaining 25 times.
Further, (3) a configuration in which the remaining ST number informing effect is not displayed (a configuration in which the remaining ST number cannot be grasped) may be adopted. In this case, only the residual electric power support number informing effect may be displayed.
Also, (4) the remaining ST count notification effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed from the start of the ST. For example, the countdown display may be started five games before the end of the ST.
Also, (5) the remaining ST number informing effect may appear only in a specific ST mode. The specific ST mode may be any of ST25, ST75, and ST100, but since the player tends to enjoy the game while paying attention to the number of remaining STs as the number of remaining STs increases, it is preferable to make the mode appear in ST75 or ST100 mode other than ST25 mode.
Also, (6) during the ST performance mode (ST mode), the remaining ST number of times notification effect may be displayed, and during the time reduction performance mode (time reduction mode), the remaining power supply number of times notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (7) the remaining ST number of times notification effect and the remaining electric power sapo number of times notification effect may not be separately displayed, but may be used as a countdown display, for example. For example, using the same countdown display, the number display is set to "white" during the ST mode and "red" during the time saving mode, or during the ST mode, a predetermined effect image (for example, light (glow effect, shadow effect), gradation, blur, embossing, etc.) is displayed around the number image, but no effect is provided during the time saving mode.

(7-3. About “time saving mode”)
Returning to the description of FIG. The time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the time saving state (YJ=02H), and in the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is one type of "05H". In addition to the time-saving jackpots 1, 2 (5R time-saving A, 5R time-saving B), the time-saving mode is a game mode that is shifted even after the number of times of ST is completed when winning the variable probability jackpots 2, 3, 5, 6 (5R variable probability ST75, 5R probability variable ST25, 7R probability variable ST75, 7R probability variable ST25). After the end of the time saving mode (after the end of the time saving number of times), it is shifted to the "normal mode" (see the upward bold arrow in the block frame of the time saving mode in FIG. 6).

(7-3-1. Regarding the fluctuation state during the time saving mode)
During the time-saving mode, it becomes "low probability (special symbol probability variable function not activated) + electric sapo state + special symbol time-saving state", but regarding the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game, it is free to make it the same or substantially the same as the high speed variation state, medium speed variation state, or low speed variation state related to the ST mode, or a variation state with an average digestion speed different from these. However, the time saving mode is also shifted from ST mode, specifically, in the case of ST25 mode, it shifts from "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" to "time saving mode", and in the case of ST75 mode, "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" and "ST middle stage mode (medium speed fluctuation state)" and transition to "short time mode", and during the time saving mode, the probability of a big hit lottery is low. However, it is preferable that the time-saving mode be positioned as a game mode emphasizing game characteristics such as "enjoying performance". Therefore, it is preferable that the fluctuation state (average digestion time) during the time saving mode is set to "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode < the high speed fluctuation state during the ST mode", more preferably "the fluctuation state during the time saving mode ≤ the medium speed fluctuation state during the ST mode". In addition, like the ST mode, the time saving mode may be configured so that a plurality of time saving modes can be shifted, and in this case, a plurality of variation pattern selection modes for the time saving mode may be provided.

(7-3-2. About production during time saving mode)
During the time saving mode, it is shifted to the "time saving production mode" in which the production related to "during the time saving state" appears. In the time-saving production mode, it becomes an "air battle mode" that produces a production that expresses the battle between fighters, and is distinguished from each game mode (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage mode) in the above ST mode. In the present embodiment, in addition to winning the time-saving jackpots 1 and 2, even when shifting to the time-saving mode after the ST of the probability variable jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 is completed, the same shift to the time-saving performance mode is made, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the machine may shift to a time-saving performance mode (eg, time-saving A performance mode when time-saving big win 1 is won, and time-saving B performance mode when time-saving big win 2 is won) in which different performances are made for time-saving big win 1 and time-saving big win 2.例文帳に追加In addition, the time-saving performance mode at the time of winning the time-saving jackpot and the time-saving performance mode (time-saving performance mode related to ST25 and ST75) after the end of the ST at the time of winning the probability variable jackpot may be different.

(7-4. "Ceiling mode": Figure 7)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in the event of a serious addiction. This ceiling function is a function of providing a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) to save the player when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning the jackpot. The ceiling privilege is provided with a profit state that is at least more advantageous than the normal state in terms of the hamari relief function. The ceiling game number of this embodiment is the number of games (ceiling game number) considering the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of setting 1 to 6, and is the 1000th game in the normal mode (about 3 to 4 times the low probability), and the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in the 1000th game. It should be noted that the number of ceiling games can be determined as appropriate. For example, if the jackpot lottery probability in the normal state is a relatively high probability (about 1/100) of the "sweet digital type", the ceiling number of games can be about 300 to 500 games. In this embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game can be different for all or part of each setting value. For example, settings 1 to 6 may have different number of ceiling games (for example, 1100 to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of ceiling games), the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) may have 1000 ceiling games, and the medium and low setting areas (settings 1 to 3) may have 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, setting 6 at the highest setting) may have a different number of ceiling games from other setting values.

First, the types of ceiling benefits will be explained. As the types of ceiling benefits, as shown in the list of "examples of ceiling benefits" in Note 2 of FIG. If these benefits are broadly classified, “Infinite time saving” and “Limited time saving” are “Ceiling time saving type”, “Infinite probability change” and “Limited probability change” are “Ceiling probability change type”, “Infinite probability” and “Limited probability” are “Ceiling probability type”, “Force hit” is a ceiling privilege belonging to “Ceiling hit type”. These ceiling privilege types will be sequentially described below.

(Infinite reduction of working hours)
(A) “Infinite reduction in working hours” is a benefit that gives a reduction in working hours until the next big hit. In the case of infinite time reduction, the number of times of time reduction is "no number limit (infinite)", but the number of times of time reduction that will substantially reach the next big hit, for example, 10000 times or 65536 times, etc. If there is no possibility of ending the time reduction state due to reaching the number of times of time reduction (if it is considered to be 0%), or if the number of times of time reduction that cannot be digested within the business hours of the pachinko hall is given (for example, 65536 times), the present invention is infinite. It can be treated as belonging to a short time.

(limited working hours)
(B) "Limited time saving" is to provide a time saving state within a predetermined number of times of time saving so as to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. In this respect, it differs from the above-mentioned infinite reduction of working hours, which does not have a limited number of times. Typical examples of the number of times of time saving to be provided are, for example, the same number of times of time saving 100 times as the time saving jackpots 1 and 2, or 75 times of time saving times. In addition, even if the number of times of time reduction that becomes "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite time reduction" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this limited time reduction in that there is a limit on the number of times, but as described above, in the present invention, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction.

(Specific example of giving finite time reduction)
Here, when giving a finite time saving, the following giving forms (1) to (4) (finite time saving giving forms 1 to 4) can be used.

(Limited time saving form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of times of time saving due to a big hit (the number of times of time saving (time saving state) given due to winning a jackpot), but the number of times of time saving due to ceiling benefits (time saving state) is set to a smaller type (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured so as to satisfy the relationship "the number of types B<the number of types A".

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time saving A) and 50 times (time saving B) for the number of times of time saving by big hits (number of types A). In addition, if the relationship of "the number of types B<the number of types A" is satisfied, the number of times of time saving (for example, 150 times) different from the number of times of time saving due to the big hit may be provided. When two or more types of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) by the ceiling privilege are provided (in the case of "2 ≤ number of types B < number of types A"), one of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) can be determined by a predetermined lottery.

(Limited time saving form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) by the ceiling privilege, one of the number of times of time saving (time saving state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery).
For example, it can be determined by lottery from among a plurality of times of time saving (50 times and 100 times in this embodiment) given due to winning a big hit. In this case, the number of time reductions equivalent to the jackpot can be given. Of course, it may be determined by lottery from among a plurality of times of time saving (for example, 100 times, 75 times and 25 times) including times of time saving different from the number of times of time saving given due to a big hit. In this case, the number of time reductions different from the jackpot can be awarded. In addition, the lottery probability (selection rate) of the lottery target ceiling privilege type (here, each time saving number of times) may be the same or substantially the same, and all or part may be different. Further, the lottery targets may include "ceiling privilege lost" for which no ceiling privilege is given. When the ceiling privilege loss is included, the ceiling privilege is not necessarily given even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, "execution of the ceiling privilege lottery" plays a role as a hamari relief function.

Moreover, you may determine the lottery probability according to a "setting value", and may determine the number of times of time saving (time saving state) by predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery according to a setting value). For example, as the set value increases, a relatively large number of times of time saving (time saving state) is likely to be selected. In other words, as the set value increases, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit is likely to be awarded (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Specifically, when "100 times, 75 times, 50 times" are provided as the types of the number of times of time saving, "25%, 35%, 40%" when the lottery probability is "setting 1", and "45%, 30%, 25%" when "setting 6". However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the more addicted to it, the lower the set value, the more likely the number of time reductions to be selected. In other words, as the set value becomes lower, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit is likely to be granted (the same applies to other ceiling privileges described later). Moreover, it is good also as a structure of "when a specific ceiling privilege is provided, a specific setting value is fixed." For example, when the number of times of time saving is given 25 times, it is "setting 6 fixed", and when 75 times is given, it is "setting 4 or more fixed". In this way, the ceiling privilege determination method related to the setting value can provide the player with useful information in the form of a setting guessing element, and is therefore useful in increasing the willingness of the player who encounters a addiction to play.

(Limited time saving form 3)
(3) When the average number of times of reduction of time is N due to the time reduction jackpot and the average number of times of reduction of time is M due to the ceiling privilege, it can be configured to satisfy the relationships of the following (formula 1) to (formula 3).
(Formula 1) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average number of times of reduced working hours N<average number of reduced hours of working hours M”. In the case of the present embodiment, since the average number of times N of time saving due to the big hit is 75 times, the average number of times M of time saving due to the ceiling privilege is set to a number of times of time saving greater than this. In the case of this example, since the ceiling privilege is relatively higher in the degree of profit than the normal jackpot winning, it is a pleasant privilege for a player who is addicted to the game and has a significantly reduced desire to play. In addition, the average number of times of reduction of working hours M may be an infinite number of times. When the average number of times of shortening of working hours M is infinite, it is equivalent to the case of giving the above "infinite shortening of working hours".
(Formula 2) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of times of reduced working hours N = average number of reduced hours of work M". In this case, the degree of profit from the big hit (the number of times of time reduction) and the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Formula 3) Configured so as to satisfy the relationship of “average number of times of reduced working hours N>average number of reduced hours of working hours M”. In this case, the degree of profit from the big hit is relatively lower than the degree of profit from the ceiling privilege, and it is possible to avoid giving excessive privileges.

(Limited time saving form 4)
(4) As with the above (Formula 3), focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, at least the number of time savings that satisfies the relationship of "number of times of time savings due to ceiling benefits ≤ maximum number of times of time savings due to big hits" is set. If it is this embodiment, the number of times of time saving by a ceiling privilege is below the number of times of time saving of "time saving A" by time saving big hit 1, for example, is 100 times, 90 times, etc. In addition, focusing on the minimum number of times of saving time due to the big hit, it may be the number of times of saving time that satisfies the relationship of "minimum number of times of saving time due to the big hit ≤ the number of times of saving time due to the ceiling privilege < maximum number of times of saving time due to the big hit". In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving by the ceiling privilege is more than the number of times of time saving B by time saving jackpot 2, less than the number of time saving times of "time saving A" by time saving jackpot 1, for example, 50 times, 60 times.

(Infinitely variable)
(C) “Infinite probability variation” is a benefit that gives a probability variation state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite probability variation, the ST number is "no number limit (infinite)", but like the above "infinite short time" and the same event, the ST number (for example, 10000 times or 65536 times) that will be substantially until the next big hit may be given.

(finite variable)
(D) “Limited probability variation” is different from the aforementioned infinite probability variation, and provides a probability variation state within a predetermined number of STs so as to achieve an appropriate jackpot winning rate. For example, 100 times, 75 times, or 25 times, etc. are given as the number of times of ST, like the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7. Of course, the number of times may not be the same as the number of STs of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7, and 50 times, 150 times, etc. may be given. It should be noted that even if the number of STs that becomes "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite probability variation" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite probability variation in that there is a limit on the number of times.

(Specific example of giving finite probability variation)
Here, when giving a finite probability variable, the following ceiling privilege grant form (finite probability variable grant form) 1 to 4 can be used, like the contents described in the finite time reduction grant forms 1 to 4 of the above "limited time reduction". In addition, the following finite probability variable grant forms 1 to 4 are described in the above "finite time reduction grant forms 1 to 4""Time saving number" as "ST number", "time saving state" as "probable variable state" etc. Since it is substantially the same as the content (concept) that has been read as appropriate, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the content will be described while omitting it as appropriate to avoid duplication.

(Finite probability variation grant form 1)
(1) The number of STs due to a big hit (the number of STs (probability variable state) given due to winning a big hit has a plurality of types (type number A), but the number of STs (probability variable state) due to the ceiling privilege is less than that (type number B).

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs (variable probability state) given due to winning the variable probability jackpot is 100 times (variable probability A), 75 times (variable probability B), and 25 times (variable probability C).

(Finite probability variation grant form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of ST numbers (variable probability state) due to ceiling benefits, one of the ST numbers (variable probability state) is determined by a predetermined lottery. Regarding this point, the “time saving number” explained in “(Limited time saving form 2)” in the above finite time saving is “ST number”, and the “time saving state” is appropriately read as “variable state”. It is substantially the same as the content.

(Limited probability variation grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to the variable probability big hit is N, and the average number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is M, the relationship of the following (Equation 4) to (Equation 6) can be satisfied. Regarding this (Formula 4) to (Formula 6), the wording of “time saving number” in (Formula 1) to (Formula 3) described in “(Limited time saving form 3)” in the above finite time saving is substantially the same as the content of reading “ST number” wording.
(Formula 4) It is constructed so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N<average number of STs M". Note that the average number of STs M may be an infinite number of times. If the average number of STs M is infinite, it is equivalent to the above-mentioned "infinite variation".
(Equation 5) Configure so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N=average number of STs M".
(Formula 6) The configuration is made so as to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N>average number of STs M".

(Finite probability variation grant form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point of not giving excessive benefits, the number of STs is determined to satisfy at least the relationship of "the number of STs due to ceiling benefits ≤ the maximum number of STs due to big wins". In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or less than the number of STs due to the probability variable jackpot 1 or the like, for example, 100 times, 90 times, or the like. Also, focusing on the minimum number of STs due to a big hit, the number of STs may satisfy the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to a big hit ≤ number of STs due to a ceiling privilege<maximum number of STs due to a big hit". In this embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is more than the number of STs due to the variable probability jackpot 6, etc., and less than the number of STs due to the probability variable jackpot 1, etc., for example, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times (the same ST number as ST75).

(Infinite potential)
(E) "Infinite Potential" is a benefit that gives a potential state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite probability, the number of STs is "no number limit (infinite)", but the number of STs that will be substantially until the next big hit may be given in the same way as the above-mentioned infinite time reduction and infinite probability variation.

(finite latency)
(F) “Limited probability” is different from the infinite probability mentioned above, in which a probability state is given within a predetermined number of STs so as to achieve an appropriate winning rate. In this embodiment, there is no latent probability big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability state, but if a part of the probability variable big hit is the latent probability big hit, the same configuration as the finite probability variable grant forms 1 to 4 described in the finite probability variable (configuration regarding the granting of the number of STs) can be used. Regarding this point, since it is substantially the same as the finite probability variation (contents in which the wording of "probability variation state" is appropriately read as the wording of "latent probability state"), detailed explanation is omitted to avoid duplication.

(forced hit)
(G) "Forced winning" means to forcibly award a jackpot regardless of the jackpot lottery. ``Irrelevant to the big win lottery'' means that the big win lottery itself is not executed, or even if the big win lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and it is not limited to the meaning that the big win lottery is completely irrelevant.

The types of forced hits may be definite variable jackpots (finite definite variable jackpots, infinite definite variable jackpots), short-time jackpots (limited definite short-time jackpots, infinite short-time jackpots), or latent definite jackpots (limited definite latent jackpots, infinite definite latent jackpots). Also, the maximum number of rounds or a round game mode can be determined as appropriate. In addition, it is also possible to appropriately determine the destination game state after the forced hit. For example, it may be the same transition destination game state as when the big hit shown in FIG.

However, in order not to give excessive benefits, it is preferable that the forced win be one of the jackpot lottery targets (in the present embodiment, one of the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and the short-time jackpots 1 to 2). More preferably, the degree of profit should not be higher than the total jackpot. The profit here means "profit from the jackpot game" or "profit including the jackpot game and the transition destination game state". In the present embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the relationship of "profit from forced win≦profit from probability variable jackpot 4 (jackpot with the highest degree of profit among all jackpots)".

Since the above-described ceiling privilege can provide a profit that is the same as or different from the profit level provided by the jackpot lottery result, it is useful as a addictive relief function.

Moreover, although various ceiling privileges have been described above, it is free to adopt any ceiling privilege. In addition, the ceiling privilege is provided with multiple types of benefits with different characteristics (for example, finite time reduction and finite probability variation), or benefits with the same character but different advantages (profit status) (for example, 100 times the number of times of time reduction). In this case, it is possible to appropriately determine what kinds of ceiling privileges (two or more ceiling privileges) are to be provided. For example, a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation are provided, and which ceiling privilege is given can be determined by a predetermined lottery. In this case, the same lottery probability may be set regardless of the set value, but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value, as in the above-described "ceiling privilege lottery". Specifically, the higher the set value, the higher the benefit with a relatively high degree of profit (for example, if you draw a lottery between a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation, the "limited probability variation" side), and on the contrary, the higher the set value, the lower the benefit that the degree of profit is ((for example, if you draw a lottery between a finite reduction time and a finite variation, the "limited time reduction" side). For example, there is a case of ``providing at least two of the time-saving jackpot, the probability variable jackpot, and the latent probability jackpot'', and the like, and the case of ``providing a plurality of types of benefits with the same character but different advantages (profit status)'', for example, ``a case of providing a plurality of jackpots with different times of shortening time (short-time jackpots)'' and a case of ``providing a plurality of jackpots with different ST times (variable probability jackpots or latent probability jackpots)''.

Further, after the ceiling privilege is provided, the game state (game mode) relating to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is consumed or until the jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite system privilege" such as a finite time reduction, a finite probability change, or a finite probability, the ceiling privilege is not granted until the jackpot is won and the specified time reduction number or ST number is completed, or the jackpot is won. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite system privilege" such as infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite probability, the privilege state will be continued until the next big win, and the privilege state will be terminated with the winning of the big win.

In addition, when the ceiling privilege is finitely variable, it may be a “finitely variable short time type” ceiling privilege that shifts to a time saving state (limited time short or infinite time short) when the specified ST number is completed, such as ST75 mode or ST25 mode. This “finite variable time-saving type” includes the following types (A) to (D).
(A) When the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, the ceiling privilege of the “finite probability variable / limited time reduction” type that shifts to a finite time reduction (for example, 100 times of time reduction).
(B) Ceiling privilege of “finite probability variable / infinite time reduction” type that shifts to infinite time reduction when the prescribed number of STs is completed.
(Hei) When the first specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) ends, only the electric sapo state ends, and the second specified number of STs (for example, 100 times) is shifted to a finite probability. "Limited probability variable / limited probability" type ceiling privilege (the first prescribed ST number and the second prescribed ST number may be the same number or different numbers).
(D) When the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric sapo state ends and the ceiling privilege of the “finite probability variation / infinite probability” type that shifts to infinite probability.

Returning to the description of the ceiling mode in FIG. Here, as a representative example, a configuration in which "limited working hours" (100 times of the maximum number of working hours due to a big hit) is adopted as the ceiling privilege will be described.

The ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the time saving state, the probability variable state, etc. according to the ceiling privilege, but here an example in which "limited time saving" is given is explained, so the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ = 01H). However, in the ceiling mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to dedicated "06H" in order to select the ceiling-dedicated variation pattern. Here, when reaching the ceiling (during the ceiling game), a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (ceiling variation pattern) is selected in order to secure the performance time width of the "ceiling effect" described later. In this embodiment, the longest variation pattern is selected during all game modes (during all variation pattern selection mode) (see column of "ceiling variation" in FIG. 26). The ceiling variation pattern is not particularly limited as long as the performance time width of the ``ceiling effect'' can be secured, but it is preferable to select a variation pattern having a variation time of at least the SP reach during the normal mode (at least the SP reach without the pseudo run).

Since the jackpot lottery is executed as usual in the 1000th game (ceiling game), when the jackpot is won in the 1000th game, the jackpot game is started as usual after the 1000th game is finished. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by chance in the ceiling game, activation of the ceiling function is restricted (prohibited) (see ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 13 described later). When a small win is provided, even if a small win is won in the 1000th game, a ceiling privilege is provided in the same manner as a loss. This point is not limited to when the ceiling privilege is finite time saving, but the same is true for infinite time saving, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latent probability, or finite probability. However, when the ceiling privilege is a ``forced win'', the game is forcibly controlled to a jackpot winning state, so that the jackpot lottery itself of the 1000th game is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is invalidated and processed as if the jackpot for the ceiling is won. Therefore, when the ceiling privilege is ``forced win'', after the end of the 1000th game, a jackpot game (forced jackpot game) relating to the jackpot for the ceiling is started in the same way as when a normal jackpot is won. The performance during winning during the forced big winning game may be the same as the usual big winning (same as one of the short-time big winning 1 and the variable probability big winning 1 to 7), or the performance during winning dedicated to the forced big winning may be displayed.

(7-4-1. Regarding effects during ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, a transition is made to a "ceiling effect mode" in which an effect (ceiling effect) for notifying that the player has reached the ceiling is displayed. This ceiling effect mode is a effect mode dedicated to the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, is a effect mode limited to one game (limited to one rotation). As an example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode, for example, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern for the ceiling) at the time of the ceiling appears, at least a decorative pattern different from that in the normal mode (number patterns of 1 to 9). The reason why "at least a decorative pattern different from the normal mode" is set is that the ceiling is reached when a large hook is encountered in the normal mode, and it is appropriate to display a decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern that has appeared in the normal mode for a long time to notify the ceiling reaching.

Specifically, the decorative pattern for the ceiling is a dedicated pattern (decorative pattern for the ceiling) that displays a special character, item, or character, and the decorative pattern for the ceiling is preferably a design that has a strong impact, for example, the decorative pattern 778 shown in Note 1 of FIG. There are usually three decorative pattern rows, a right pattern, a middle pattern, and a left pattern (see FIG. 5), but the ceiling decorative pattern row does not necessarily have to be three pattern rows. For example, it is possible to have four symbol rows of "heaven", "well", "to" and "till", or two symbol rows of "heaven" and "well". Also, in order to emphasize that the ball has reached the ceiling, a giant decorative pattern having a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern, or a pattern with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, as for the decorative patterns relating to the ceiling game, normal decorative patterns (all or part of which are the same decorative patterns) may be used during the variable display, and only the decorative patterns to be finally stopped (decorative stop patterns) may be used as ceiling decorative patterns.

A dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 is a special effect that appears only in the ceiling game. In addition, as one of the characteristic effects, when the symbol variation display game is started, a "right-hand shot instruction image 779 (shooting guidance notification effect)" appears to prompt a right-hand shot.

The reason for displaying the right-handed instruction image 779 is as follows. When a finite reduction in time is given as a ceiling privilege (the same applies when infinite reduction in time, finite probability change, or infinite probability change is given), a “state with electric support” occurs at the start of the 1000th game. For this reason, it is intended to immediately inform the player that hitting to the right is advantageous so as not to give a disadvantage to the player. In this embodiment, a right-handed instruction image 779 appears at the same time or substantially at the same time as the symbol variation display game is started. Considering that the "state with electric sapo" occurs at the ceiling (the 1000th game), it is preferable to display an effect (pre-launch guidance notification effect) that informs that a "right-handed" will soon occur during the omen mode or during a part of the period (for example, the game immediately before the omen mode (final omen mode)).

Further, in the case of "losing" in the symbol variation display game at the ceiling (1000th game), it is preferable not to display the specific notice effect. For example, at least the high-expectation-level announcement effect does not appear, or at least one of the simulated series, ready-to-win effect, and player-participation type effect does not appear. The reason for this is that there is no need for an exaggerated forewarning effect that arouses the expectation of winning the jackpot at the peak. However, this is not the case when a simulated series, a ready-to-win effect, or a player participation type effect is provided as a preview effect dedicated to the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to display the advance notice performance that arouses the expectation of winning, so when the advance notice performance such as pseudo-run, ready-to-win performance, or player-participation type performance is to be displayed, it is preferable to adopt a performance mode exclusively for the ceiling, which is different from the performance modes appearing in other performance modes. Also, as a privilege for reaching the ceiling, a setting suggestion effect may appear. This is because providing the player with useful information such as the setting guessing element is useful for increasing the player's willingness to play when he encounters a addiction. In addition, when the setting suggesting effect is displayed at the ceiling, the appearance rate may be 100%, or may be displayed by a predetermined lottery.

On the other hand, in the ceiling game (the 1000th game), when a jackpot is won by chance, the performance related to the ceiling performance mode is not displayed, but the notice performance that can be displayed when the jackpot is won in the normal performance mode (for example, in the general mode or the omen mode) is displayed (refer to the "Ceiling" column in FIG. 24). This is because if a ceiling effect is displayed even when a jackpot is achieved in the ceiling game, it becomes unclear whether a jackpot or a ceiling privilege is given, and the player is confused.

(7-5. Heaven Mode)
The heaven mode is a game mode that is shifted to the next game (1001th game) of the ceiling game, and according to the ceiling privilege, the internal game state becomes a game mode related to the time saving state, the variable probability state, etc. Here, since an example in which "limited time saving (time saving number of times 100 times)" is given is described, the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ = 01H). Further, during the heaven mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to dedicated "07H" so as to select a variation pattern dedicated to heaven. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is a case of ceiling benefits other than "forced hit" (limited time reduction, infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, finite probability change, infinite probability, or finite probability).

The heaven mode is terminated when a jackpot is won, or when the prescribed number of times of time reduction or ST number is completed without winning a jackpot in the case of the ceiling privilege of the finite system. Here, since the ceiling privilege is explained as ``finite time saving (100 times of time saving)'', the heaven mode is ended when 100 times of time saving is finished or when a jackpot is won during the time saving times. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. When the ceiling privilege is finite probability variation or finite probability probability, it is terminated when the number of times of ST ends or when a jackpot is won within the number of STs, and when the ceiling privilege is infinite short time, infinite probability variation and infinite probability, it is terminated when a big win is won.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-described high speed fluctuation state, medium speed fluctuation state, low speed fluctuation state, and the like can be employed. However, it is preferable to determine the variable state during heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, if the ceiling privilege is finite time reduction or infinite time reduction, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes game characteristics such as "enjoying production" as in the time reduction mode. That is, the fluctuation state in the heaven mode when the finite time reduction or infinite time reduction is given is "the fluctuation state in the heaven mode < the high speed fluctuation state in the ST mode" or "the fluctuation state in the heaven mode ≤ the medium speed fluctuation state in the ST mode". However, in consideration of the point that there is no limit to the number of times of time saving when giving infinite time saving, it may be in a high speed fluctuation state.

On the other hand, when the finite probability variation or the infinite probability variation is provided, the probability of the jackpot lottery is high in addition to the state with the electric sapo, so it is preferable to make the variation state the same or substantially the same as the high-speed variation state in the ST mode. On the other hand, when the infinite or finite probability is given, the probability of the jackpot lottery is high, but since the control is performed without the electric sapo, it becomes difficult to generate an operation pending ball as in the normal state. Considering this point, in the case of infinite or finite latency, it is preferable to have the same or substantially the same fluctuation state as the normal mode, or at least a slower fluctuation state than the short time mode (average digestion time is relatively long fluctuation state). That is, the relationship is set to satisfy "fluctuation state in normal mode≦variation state in infinite or finite latency <variation state in time-saving mode".

(7-5-2. Regarding production during heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, a transition is made to a "heaven effect mode" for performing a effect (heaven effect) related to the heaven mode. This heaven effect mode is a special effect mode after the next game of the ceiling (after the 1001st game), and ends when the heaven mode ends. During this paradise production mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" representing outer space) to notify that the paradise mode is on.

In addition, as a ceiling privilege, when giving finite time saving or infinite time saving, the above-mentioned "time saving production mode (air battle mode)" related to time saving state may be adopted as heaven production mode.

In addition, when giving finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite probability, or infinite probability as the ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "ST production mode" related to the probability variation state may be adopted as the heaven production mode. In this case, as in the ST production mode, the ST production mode may be shifted to a different ST production mode according to the number of times ST is consumed. Specifically, according to the number of ST digests, the production mode can be sequentially shifted like "ST production early stage mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) ⇒ ST production middle stage mode (water battle mode) ⇒ST production end mode (land battle mode)". In the case of infinite probability change or infinite probability, there is no limit on the number of STs, so after the ST101st time, the ST end stage production mode may be continued as it is, or a separate new ST production mode (ST continuation production mode) may be shifted. In addition, it is also possible to return to the ST presentation early stage mode in ST101 and loop the transition of "ST presentation early stage mode ⇒ ST presentation middle stage mode ⇒ ST presentation final stage mode" again.

In addition, during the heaven production mode, it may be configured to be switchable to any of the normal/simple/premium modes as in the same phenomenon as the contents of the already explained "foreshadowing production mode" and "ST production mode", or it may be configured to disable switching between the normal/simple/premium modes (control under the non-switching state).

In addition, as part of remedial measures for a player who is very addicted, during the heaven mode, the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects may be made higher than in other game modes. For example, the heaven mode can be configured to have a higher probability of appearance of the setting suggestion effect (the setting suggestion effect that can appear during the pattern variation display game) than at least the normal mode (general mode and/or omen mode). In particular, if the ceiling privilege is a privilege with an electric sapo (ceiling privilege other than infinite potential and finite potential), the player is placed in a high base state during the heaven mode, so the player can proceed with the game without reducing the balls (game media owned by the player, game value based on it, etc.) too much or maintaining the status quo. Therefore, it is conceivable that there are many players who want to learn advantageous information by being addicted to it, contrary to the normal mode, such as ``it is okay to be a little addicted until you see the setting suggestive effect''. Considering such a point, it is preferable to change the appearance rate of setting suggestion effects with high probability during the heaven mode to function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone". As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play after becoming hooked.

<8. About the game progress mode: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a specific game progress mode related to the gaming machine 1 will be described while paying attention to the game mode transition control and the presentation aspect.

It should be noted that the manner in which the player should play to obtain an advantageous situation basically changes according to the internal game state (when focusing on the game mode, it changes according to the game mode related to the internal game state). As already explained, if the game ball is in the normal state (normal mode), it is advantageous to hit "left" to aim so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b. In the following, it is assumed that the player follows an advantageous beating method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, the “special figure 1 side symbol variation display game 1” is executed in the case of the left-handed advantage (normal state), and the “special figure 2-side symbol variation display game 2” is performed in the case of the right-handed advantage (probability variable state, time saving state). Also, the game mode will be described as starting from the "normal mode" which is the initial game mode.

When a big win is won in the normal mode, it becomes a so-called "first win", and a big win game corresponding to the won big win is started (see "first win" block frame in FIG. 6). The hitting method during the big win is "right hitting" aiming at the big prize winning opening 50 side.

Focusing on the aspect of performance, when the variable probability big win 1 (5R probability variable ST100: special figure 1 side maximum profit big win) is won in the normal mode, the decorative patterns stop at ``seven patterns (777)'', and it is reported that the big win bringing the maximum profit has been won. As for the performance during winning at the time of winning one probability variable jackpot, the ``ST rush determination performance'' for deterministically informing the ST mode entry appears, and the determination of the shift to the ST100 mode is reported. After the big hit game, the mode is shifted to ST100 mode.

On the other hand, when winning probability variable big wins 2 and 3 and time-saving big wins 1 and 2 are won in the normal mode, decorative patterns are stopped except for ``seven patterns are aligned'', and in the current pattern variation display game, it is not reported whether it is a probability variable big win or a short-time big win. When the game is stopped other than ``seven patterns are arranged'', ``ST rush challenge performance'' of player participation type performance is developed in the performance during winning during the subsequent big winning game, and the big winning type is informed by the result of this performance. In this ST rushing challenge presentation, when the success presentation appears, it is decidedly notified that the probability variable big win is shown, and when the failure presentation appears, the time saving big win is announced. In addition, two kinds of success performances, ``great success performance'' and ``ordinary success performance'', are prepared, and when the ``great success performance'' appears, it is informed that the player wins the probability variable jackpot 2 (ST75 mode), and when the ``normal success performance'' appears, the fact that the probability variable jackpot 3 (ST25 mode) is won is reported. On the other hand, there are two types of failure performances, ``big failure performance'' and ``ordinary failure performance'', and when the ``big failure performance'' appears, it is notified that the time reduction jackpot 2 (time reduction B: 50 times of time reduction) has been won, and that the winning of time reduction jackpot 1 (time reduction A: 100 times of time reduction) has been won when the ``normal failure performance'' appears.

When winning probability variable jackpots 1 to 3, the machine is shifted to the corresponding ST mode after the jackpot game (see block frame of ST mode in FIG. 6), and when winning time-saving jackpots 1-2, it is shifted to the time-saving mode after the jackpot game (see block frame of time-saving mode in FIG. 6). Then, during the ST mode and the time saving mode, as described above, the "right-handed advantage" is obtained, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the side of the special figure 2 is executed. When the big win is won on the side of the special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 4, all the big wins are probability variable big wins, so as long as the big win continues to be won during the ST mode or the time saving mode, the ST mode is looped to bring a great profit to the player.

When one of the probability variable jackpots 4 to 7 is won during the ST mode, the decoration pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed. For example, when winning ``probability variable jackpot 4 (10R probability variable ST100)'' of the highest profit jackpot (highest profit jackpot among all jackpots) on the special figure 2 side, a special decorative pattern (for example, a pattern displaying a character instead of a number pattern) which is not displayed in the normal mode is stopped to congratulate the winning of the jackpot. In addition, the profit degree is lower than the probability variable jackpot 4 (10R probability change ST100), but the profit degree is higher than the probability change jackpot 6 (7R probability change ST25). has become It should be noted that during the jackpot game, a hit-during effect corresponding to the jackpot type appears.

(Regarding the case of winning the "variable jackpot 7 (special 7R variable)")
However, when "variable odds jackpot 7 (special 7R odds)" is won, "odd number matching" or "even number matching" is stop-displayed with a predetermined probability. When winning that the even pattern matching stops, during the subsequent jackpot game, the production during the hit that is at least partially common with the above-mentioned variable probability jackpot 5 (7R probability variation ST25) and/or probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST75) is displayed, and information (for example, entry into ST mode (ST100 mode) is confirmed) regarding the winning of probability variation jack 7 at a predetermined timing of the production during the winning, for example, during the production during a specific round or during the ending production. Notification (promotion notification) is performed. As a result, even if the "matching of even-numbered patterns" stops, the possibility of entering the ST100 mode, in which a high profit can be expected, remains, and the expectation of entering the ST mode can be aroused by the performance during the win.

However, in the performance during the winning, it is possible to display the performance during the winning that is common (identical) with the variable probability big win 5 (7R probability variable ST25) and/or the probability variable big win 7 (7R probability variable ST75) without performing the promotion notification, conceal the winning of the probability variable big win 7 (special 7R probability variable), and inform the winning of the probability variable big win 7 (special 7R probability variable) in the ST mode after the big win game.

When the promotion notification is performed during the ST mode (ST production mode), it may be during the period until the ST early stage mode ends (until the ST number of times is 25), but it is preferable to notify during the ST early stage mode end game (25th rotation during ST). Specifically, until the 1st number of STs (for example, 25 times of the probability variable big hit 5 wins) or the 2nd ST number of times (for example, the number of STs 100 times of the probability of the variable big hit 7), whichever is smaller (for example, until the number of games in the ST reaches 25 times), the display can be controlled so as not to directly indicate whether the first win (for example, the probability variable big win 5) or the second win (for example, the probability variable big win 7). However, the notification timing is not limited to such timing, and the timing of the promotion notification may be, for example, the start of the next game after the end of the ST opening production mode or a predetermined timing during the ST middle stage mode. Also, a "step-up"-like promotion notification may be performed in which the first promotion notification is performed in the ST early stage production mode, and the second promotion notification is performed in the ST middle stage production mode. In this case, the first promotion notification is a promotion notification that notifies that entry into the ST75 mode or above is definite, and the second promotion notification is a promotion notification that definitely notifies entry into the ST100 mode. In this way, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension as to whether the winning jackpot type is any one of probability variable jackpots 5 to 7 over a long period of time from the jackpot game to the ST mode. In other words, it is possible to maintain the expectation of transition to the ST100 mode. Incidentally, it is possible to determine whether to notify the promotion during the performance during the winning or to notify the promotion during the ST mode by a scenario lottery or the like when determining the performance scenario during the winning at the start of the big winning game.

(transition to ceiling mode)
Also, in the normal mode, if a big win is not won until the 989th game, the game is shifted to the "precursor mode" from the 990th game (see the block frame of the precursor mode in FIG. 7). When the game reaches the 1000th game without winning a jackpot even in the omen mode (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to the "ceiling mode" and the ceiling function is activated. In this embodiment, in the case of a loss, the ceiling privilege "Limited time reduction" is given, and the 1001st and subsequent games are shifted to heaven mode.

<9. Regarding the function for prohibiting the specific advance notice effect during the omen mode: Fig. 32>
Here, in the present embodiment, a specific advance notice effect prohibition function (specific notice effect prohibition means) works during the portent mode. Specifically, by paying attention to the point that the portent mode is a game mode related to the notification that the ceiling is approaching and the point that the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of the ceiling privilege, the appearance of the specific notice performance is prohibited in the portent mode (sign performance mode) and the ceiling mode (ceiling performance mode). In the case of this embodiment, as the prohibition function, there is provided a "means for prohibiting the prediction of prefetching notice (specific prefetching notice prohibition means)" for prohibiting the execution of the prefetching notice. Hereinafter, the "means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32 .

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where a prefetching notice is prohibited by the prefetching notice prohibiting means in the sign. In FIG. 32, a form in which "holding change notice" is treated as a prohibited object by means for prohibiting prefetching notice during a sign will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prohibition target can be "holding change notice" and/or "prefetching notice during fluctuation".

(A. A configuration without provision of means for prohibiting prefetching advance notice in the sign (normal case): FIG. 32 (b))
The "normal case" will be described with reference to FIG. This "normal case" refers to a configuration in which no means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign is provided, and is shown as a comparative example with a configuration provided with a means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during a sign, which will be described later ((C-1) and (C-2) in the figure). The illustrated holding icon 770 is "normal holding display (white holding)", holding icon 771 is "high expectation holding display" of special holding display (normal holding change notice), and holding icon 772 indicates "ceiling holding display (ceiling holding change notice)". In addition, the pending icon 771 here indicates a "rainbow colored pending (this reserved pending display)" that can appear when a big win is won among the special pending displays.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. (A) representatively shows a case where, for the sake of explanation, there are three activated suspended balls in the 997th to 999th games, and an activated suspended ball related to the 1000th game (ceiling game) (hereinafter referred to as a "ceiling game suspended ball") is generated as the fourth activated suspended ball.

In the case of the comparative example shown in FIG. (A), since the "means for prohibiting prefetching advance notice during the omen" is not provided, regardless of whether there is a special hold display (hereinafter referred to as "normal hold change notice") before the ceiling game is reached, execution of the hold display for the ceiling (hold change notice for the ceiling) is permitted for the 1000th game hold display. Here, "allowing" the suspension display for the ceiling means that it may appear either when it always appears or when it appears when a predetermined lottery is won (the same applies to (b) (ha-1) (ha-2) described later). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a reservation change notice of the third rainbow color reservation (this reservation reservation), the reservation display of the fourth ceiling game reservation ball can be changed to Fujimaru's reservation icon 772 (ceiling reservation display).

However, if the jackpot is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function is not activated (the number of ceiling games is reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the ceiling suspension display. In addition, when the reservation change notice (special reservation display) for notifying the degree of winning expectation and the ceiling change notice (ceiling reservation display) for notifying that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, the notice displays having different characteristics appear at the same time, which may rather confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a means for prohibiting pre-reading advance notice during a sign is provided to solve these problems.

(B. Configuration example in which pre-reading advance notice prohibiting means is provided in omen: FIG. 32 (b), (ha-1), (ha-2))
Hereinafter, a configuration example in which the above-mentioned "means for prohibiting pre-reading foreknowledge in a sign" is provided will be described. This has a form of "a case of preferential execution of normal pre-reading notice" shown in FIG.

(Case where normal pre-reading notice is preferentially executed: Fig. 32 (b))
FIG. 32(b) shows "a case in which the normal pre-forecast notice is preferentially executed", specifically, "a case in which the pre-read notice for the ceiling is prohibited when there is a hold before reaching the ceiling game (a case in which the pre-read notice for the ball held in the ceiling game is prohibited)". Here, similarly to the case of FIG.

In the case of this example, when there is a hold before the ceiling game is reached, the hold display of the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the hold display for the ceiling (hold change notice for the ceiling), but the ``normal hold display'' appears. In other words, the configuration is such that the "prefetching prohibited target suspension" by the prefetching foreknowledge prohibition means in the omen is set to the "ceiling game suspension ball".

The reason why the prefetching prohibition target hold is set as the "ceiling game hold ball" is as follows. If there is a hold before the ceiling game, the jackpot is won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling privilege is given), so there is little need to display the ceiling reservation display. In addition, when the holding display for the ceiling is prohibited when there is a fixed hold, if the hold display of the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, it is possible to give the speculation element that 'there is a fixed hold before the ceiling game is reached', and the player who knows this can prevent useless hitting until the ceiling is reached. However, if the reservation display for the ceiling is not prohibited at all when this reservation exists, but if the reservation change notice (rainbow color reservation) related to this reservation does not appear, that is, if the pre-reading notice lottery for this reservation is "losing", the reservation display for the ceiling may appear (allow). This is because the player cannot know the existence of the reserved reservation before reaching the ceiling game when the reservation change notice relating to the reserved reservation does not appear, but even if the reservation display for the ceiling appears, the player will not be particularly disadvantaged if a big win is won before the ceiling game is reached. In addition, instead of prohibiting the appearance of the ceiling hold display when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this secure hold appears, the appearance of the ceiling hold display may be prohibited when the hold change notice of the high expectation hold change notice or more (for example, the green hold or more) has appeared.

(Case of priority execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling: Fig. 32 (Ha-1) (Ha-2))
Next, the “case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling” will be described.

Fig. 32 (H-1) is an example of "a case of preferential execution of pre-reading notice for ceiling",
(α) A configuration example of “while prohibiting part of the normal pre-reading notice during the omen mode, permitting the pending change notice for the ceiling (holding display for the ceiling)”;
(β) shows a configuration example of "in the foreshadow mode, the normal pre-reading notice is completely prohibited, but the ceiling pending change notice (ceiling pending display) is allowed".
The configuration example shown in this figure (H-1) is a configuration example in which the look-ahead prohibited target suspension is not the "ceiling game suspended ball" as shown in the above figure (B), but the look-ahead prohibited target suspension is set only to "the operation suspended ball digested during the omen game", and the ceiling game suspended ball is excluded from the prohibited objects.

In the above (α), ``prohibit a part of the normal foreseeing notice'' means, for example, of the normal hold change notice (special hold display), the appearance of the low-expectation hold change notice is allowed, while the high-expectation hold change notice is prohibited. Specifically, the following configurations 1 and 2 are used.
(Configuration 1) Appearance of hold change notice of yellow hold or lower (blue hold and yellow hold) is allowed, and appearance of hold change notice of green or higher (green hold, red hold and rainbow hold) with higher winning expectation than the yellow hold is prohibited.
(Configuration 2) A configuration that permits the appearance of hold change notice (hold display other than rainbow-colored hold) indicating other than accuracy, and prohibits the appearance of hold change notice hold indicating accuracy.

The above "configuration 1" prohibits only high-expectation hold change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of this reservation. On the other hand, the above "configuration 2" prohibits only the "rainbow color hold" of the current hold display of the high expectation hold change notice. Therefore, in the case of configuration 2, occurrence of hold change notices other than "rainbow hold" indicating accuracy is allowed.

"Totally prohibit pre-reading notice" in the above (β) means that normal pre-reading notice (here, hold change notice) is completely prohibited, and appearance of ceiling change notice (ceiling hold display) is permitted. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration (β), no normal pre-reading notice is displayed during the precursor mode, and only the appearance of the pending change notice for the ceiling (holding display for the ceiling) is permitted.

The reason for the arrangement shown in Fig. (H-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the appearance of the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is blindly allowed, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display are displayed at the same time, causing confusion for players (particularly game beginners) regarding the hold display. In particular, if the high expectation pending change notice and the ceiling pending change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player increases. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the look-ahead announcement itself, or at least prohibit the high-expectation pending change announcement. Also, when part or all of the look-ahead notice is prohibited during the omen mode, the player does not know that there is a high possibility of the existence or existence of the reservation before the ceiling game is reached, but even if the high-expectation hold change notice indicating such fact does not appear, the player will not be particularly disadvantaged if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached. In addition, if the pre-reading notice itself during the omen mode is completely prohibited, it also leads to a reduction in the effect control load.

FIG. (Ha-2) is a configuration example in which, unlike FIG. (Ha-1), the suspension change notice for the ceiling is preferentially executed by setting a part of the period in the precursor mode as the look-ahead prohibited section. FIG. (H-2) shows, as a representative example, an example in which the maximum number of held balls before the ceiling game (the interval between the 996th and 999th games) is set as the look-ahead prohibition interval. In the case of this example, the pre-reading notice is completely prohibited in the section from the 996th to the 999th game. However, instead of completely prohibiting the pre-reading notice in the section, it may be configured to "prohibit part of the pre-reading notice" as shown in (α) of the above diagram (H-1).

Any of (A), (B), (Ha-1) and (Ha-2) in FIG. 32 can be configured to notify the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games by a specific notification effect such as the above-mentioned "countdown display (residual ceiling number display effect)". Here, the countdown display itself does not give notice of the degree of expectation of winning, but merely informs the remaining ceiling game, and does not fulfill a notice function such as a look-ahead notice. However, it is also possible to announce the degree of expectation for winning by using the effect mode of the countdown display, that is, to inform the possibility of the existence of this reservation. For example, in the case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling in FIG. For example, if the normal countdown display uses a white number image, the special countdown display changes the number image to a color other than white (red) or enlarges the number image.

The present embodiment can include, for example, the following configuration regarding pre-reading notice.
Acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information based on the establishment of the starting condition (initiated by the detection of the game ball by the starting means);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery related to winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) for performing a variable display operation of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of symbols;
Reservation storage means (reservation storage area of RAM 203, S311 to S314 in FIG. 10) for reserving and storing the game information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined maximum reservation storage number as an upper limit until it is provided for the variable display operation of game patterns in the symbol display means;
a prefetch determination means (S318 in FIG. 11) for prefetching and determining a lottery result of at least the lottery means before the variation display operation of the game symbols based on the reserved memory is executed;
Prefetching notice effect control means (production control unit 24, S1008 in FIG. 19) configured to be capable of controlling the execution of prefetching notice that notifies information related to the result of prefetching determination by the prefetching determination means;
pre-reading notice prohibition control means (FIG. 32) for prohibiting the execution (display) of the pre-reading notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition;
ceiling privilege control means (S420, S421, S412 in FIGS. 7 and 12, FIGS. 13 to 15, etc.) that grants a ceiling privilege more advantageous than a normal state (executes and controls the ceiling privilege) based on a predetermined granting condition;
a ceiling privilege pre-notification control means for executing and controlling a ceiling pre-notification effect (for example, the ceiling suspension change notice (ceiling suspension display) in FIG. 32) that notifies in advance that the ceiling privilege will be granted (for example, that the ceiling game is imminent, that the ceiling privilege will be granted within the number of the existing activated suspended balls, or that the ceiling privilege will be granted when the symbol variation display game related to the target activated suspended ball is executed), and a plurality of types of game states (game modes) can be controlled. Can be configured. The pre-reading notice prohibiting means prohibits the execution of the pre-reading notice during the entire period or a part of the period during the specific game mode (FIG. 32 (b) (Ha-1) (Ha-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before reaching the ceiling game (before shifting to the ceiling mode). Further, the ceiling privilege control means specifically provides a ceiling privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state when the number of symbol changes (the number of games) executed in the gaming state with the low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (the number of ceiling games) without generating a winning game (or without winning the jackpot) after a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after the end of the electric support, after the jackpot game, or after shifting to the gaming state with the low probability state). It works as a functional part that controls to the privilege game state).

(Game mode related to latent state)
In the case of providing the latent certainty state, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, it is sufficient to set different data values for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) corresponding to the other game state and the game state determination number YJ. In addition, all the ST modes according to the present embodiment have been described as game modes corresponding to the "variable probability state", but all or part of the ST mode can be treated as a game mode corresponding to the "potential state". The variable state under the latency mode (latency state) is preferably the same or substantially the same variation state as in the normal mode, or at least a variation state slower than the time-saving mode (a variation state with a relatively long average digestion time), as described in the above “(7-5-1. Variation state related to heaven mode).”

<Processing on main control unit side: FIGS. 8 to 18>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 18, game operation processing on the side of the main control unit 20 of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side consists mainly of an infinite loop main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 8) and a timer interrupt processing that is activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 9).

<12. Main processing on main control side: Fig. 8>
Main processing (main control side main processing) on the main control unit 20 side will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. Triggers for starting the main processing on the main control side include the occurrence of a system reset when recovering from a power outage or power supply failure, or the watchdog timer (WDT) function being exhibited due to a runaway control program to forcibly reset the CPU (WDT reset). In either case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control section 20 (CPU 201) first executes an initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as part of the power-on process (step S011).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not it is in a setting change mode transition state in which setting values can be changed (step S014). In the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 is powered on while the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are ON (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON) in a state where the power to the game machine 1 is off and the door is open (the door opening sensor 61 is ON (open detection)), the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied, and the setting change allowable state (setting change mode transition state) is controlled so that the setting value can be changed.

If it is in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), a setting change process for managing the change operation of the setting values (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, it is determined whether or not the setting value Nc (setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the internal RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6). If the game operation is normal, the set value data (set value Nc) of one of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 is stored in the set value storage area. However, it is possible that the set value data is corrupted due to some trouble, and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 is set (setting error). Therefore, when the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero to return to the initial value of 00H (here, setting 1).

If the initial value is restored or if the value is normal, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97 . After that, the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current set value Nc is changed (updated) every time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. As already described, the setting value during setting change (during setting change operation) is cyclically switched in the range of settings 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, and the current setting value during setting change is displayed on the setting display 97. Then, when it is confirmed that the setting change completion switch 96 has been turned ON, the current setting value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 assuming that the setting value is confirmed. This exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to the intra-area RAM clear processing (step S031) described later.

Alternatively, the RAM clear switch 98 may function as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95 . Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, one of setting values 1 to 6 can be selected. Alternatively, the setting key switch 94 may function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96 . In this case, the setting change operation can be terminated by turning off the setting key switch 94 .

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether there is an abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it checks whether the set value data (set value Nc) in the set value storage area is a normal value, whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value, and the like. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), a power re-on waiting process (step S020) in the event of a RAM abnormality, which will be described later, is executed.

If the contents of the RAM are normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is ON (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the internal RAM when the backup process is executed normally in the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9), which will be described later. Therefore, in normal operation, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, the backup flag BF may not be a normal value (≠5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, if the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the process of waiting for the power to be turned on again is executed (step S020).

In the power re-on waiting process of step S020, control is performed to a game stop state in which progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. When this power re-on waiting process is executed and the game is stopped, the power to the game machine 1 is turned on again, and when the power is turned on again, the setting change mode transition state is set so that the currently occurring RAM error state cannot be eliminated unless the setting change process (step S023) is executed. In the present embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the setting value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting error), the area RAM clearing process of step S031, which will be described later, is executed to substantially clear the entire area of the RAM 203 (except for the RAM area related to performance display (outside RAM area)). As a result, the RAM 203 is returned to its initial state, and the RAM error is resolved.

If the backup flag BF is ON (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In this embodiment, when the game machine 1 is powered off, the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF (not operated to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON (setting key switch signal OFF, RAM clear signal ON).

If it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: YES), the in-area RAM clear processing is executed (step S031). In this area RAM clearing process, at least the storage areas of the RAM 203 excluding the outside RAM area related to the performance display and the setting value storage area of the inside RAM area are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set at the time of power shutdown are both cleared to zero in this process. Also here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, a "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM is cleared, a "customer waiting command", etc.) are sent to the effect control unit 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it executes the initialization notification performance for notifying the RAM clear, and sets the performance mode to "normal performance mode" as the performance mode in the initial state. That is, when the intra-area RAM clearing process is executed, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the performance mode is also set to the normal performance mode related to the normal mode (for example, normal (normal A performance mode), simple (normal B performance mode), or premium mode (normal C performance mode)).

When the RAM clearing process in the area of step S031 is finished, the initial setting process (initial data setting process at power-on) at the time of RAM clearing is executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process at power-on, for example, 30000 ms is set to a timer for transmitting a RAM clear signal (one of security signals), and the missing design data is set as the special design (special design 1 stop design, special design 2 stop design) data to be displayed on the special design display devices 38a and 38b. Then, a CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, if it is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether or not it is in the setting confirmation mode transition state (setting confirmation allowable state) in which the current set values can be confirmed (step S026). In the case of this embodiment, when the power to the game machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF).

If it is in a setting confirmation mode shift state (step S026: YES), a setting confirmation process (step S027) for controlling a setting confirmation state in which the current setting value can be confirmed is executed, and after the setting confirmation process is finished, a backup return process (step S028) for restoring the game process from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure is executed. In the setting confirmation process of step S027, a display process for displaying the current setting values on the setting display 97 (setting confirmation display) is performed. The display of the setting values is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036), which will be described later, is performed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, if the gaming machine 1 is simply turned on, the backup recovery process (step S028) is performed, and the game process at the time of backup is recovered based on the backup data.

After any one of the setting change process (step S023), the area RAM clear process (step S031), the setting confirmation process (step S027), and the backup restoration process (step S028) is executed, the CTC setting process is executed (step S036). Here, a CTC setting process is executed for periodically generating a timer interrupt every 4 ms. As a result, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller thereafter, and the main control side timer interrupt processing (4 ms interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that a game startable state is ready, a shooting control signal (shooting permitting signal ES) for permitting the shooting operation of the shooting device 32 is set from an OFF state (shooting prohibiting state) to an ON state (shooting permitting state), and a game start command is transmitted to a performance control part 24.例文帳に追加This permits the shooting operation of the game ball from the shooting device 32 . Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it performs an initial operation (initialize operation) regarding the movable accessory. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decoration lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check when power is turned on for the movable accessory.

After executing the backup restoration process in step S028 and before executing the CTC setting process in step S036, the "operation confirmation setting process" necessary for confirming whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally may be executed. In the confirmation operation of the performance indicator 99, for example, the display mode of the four 7-segment indicators 99a to 99d is controlled to the "all blinking display (operation confirmation display)" mode that periodically repeats all lighting and all extinguishing for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check defects such as missing segments. In this case, the display processing related to the operation confirmation is performed in the performance display monitor processing (step S102: outside area program) during the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Since the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is performed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is not performed at this stage during the setting change process (step S023) or the setting confirmation process (step S027). Utilizing this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 may be configured to be usable as the setting indicator 97, and the performance indicator 99 may be configured to temporarily function as the setting indicator 97. In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be substituted for the setting indicator 97, which contributes to reduction of control burden and cost.

After completing the series of power-on processes, an infinite loop process of steps S040 to S045 relating to normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game-startable state in which the game can be progressed. When the loop process is entered, first, the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040), and various random number update processes are executed (step S041). In this random number update processing, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating within a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a random number for special symbol determination used for symbol lottery and a random number for auxiliary winning lottery (random number for auxiliary winning determination used for winning/losing lottery for assistance, random number for normal symbol determination used for symbol lottery for assistance) are updated.

When the various random number updating processes (step S041) are finished, then the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the out-of-area program is executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregate division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor tabulation division process of step S043 is finished, the interrupt permission state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and thereafter the processes of steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed (main loop process). The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number updating processes and performance display monitor tallying and dividing processes, except during timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 9>
Next, timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt processing is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the execution of the main control side main processing.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the power abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the level of power supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored, and when a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs, a backup flag BF is set (BF←5AH), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value (here, an 8-bit addition calculation process for the RAM in the area), and a backup process including storage of the calculation result are performed. The power failure check process functions as backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power is cut off.

Then, timer management processing is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for game operation control of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, an input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, based on detection information from various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1, various counters (for example, winning counters for counting winning balls provided for each winning hole) are updated. Also here, based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29, the input data is created. If any of the status signals indicates an abnormality, predetermined error processing is performed in error management processing (step S089), which will be described later.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting error check process, it is determined whether or not the setting value data is a normal value (a value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is determined that an error has occurred in the setting value data, and the setting error flag is set to the ON state (5AH). Then, a set value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check process is exited. In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when the setting error check process is executed again, the process ends without doing anything.

Next, a timer interrupt internal random number management process is executed (step S085). In the timer interrupt random number management process, the random numbers associated with each variable display game are periodically updated. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for auxiliary hit determination, etc. are updated (+1 is added at each interruption), and the start value of the random number counter is changed each time the random number counter makes one cycle. The random number for internal lottery (random number for judging a big hit) is generated by the random number generating circuit, so it is not updated here.

Then, error management processing is executed (step S089). In this error management process, it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation based on detection information relating to various switches and sensors, status signals from the payout control board 29, etc., and when an error has occurred, an error command capable of identifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control section 24, and error processing corresponding to the error type is executed. Also, when the error is canceled, an error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error cancellation processing is executed.

Next, a prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this winning ball management process, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command designating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29 . When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, it controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation of the designated number of prize balls.

Then, normal design management processing is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processes are executed for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation). Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for auxiliary hit determination, etc.) required for the auxiliary winning lottery is acquired (normal figure random number acquisition processing), and the game information is retained and stored up to the maximum retention memory number (here, 4) as retention data (normal figure operation retention ball) (normal figure retention storage processing). Then, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, an auxiliary winning lottery based on the normal pattern operation reserved ball is carried out, and based on the auxiliary winning lottery result, a variation pattern of the normal pattern is selected and a stop display mode of the normal pattern (ordinary stop pattern) is determined. Further, here, in order to variably display normal symbols, LED display data for variable display is created if the symbols are in variation, and LED display data for stop display are created if the symbols are not in variation (normal symbol display data updating process).

Next, a normal electric accessary product management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric accessary product management process, a process necessary for executing the normal electric open game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary winning lottery is a hit, the process of setting solenoid control data for the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. The solenoid control data set here is converted into an excitation signal in the solenoid management process of step S100, which will be described later, and the excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c. Thereby, the opening/closing operation pattern of the opening/closing lid 47 is controlled.

Next, a special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, a process relating to a special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special pattern management processing, a big hit lottery is mainly performed in a look-ahead judgment and a special pattern variation display game, and based on the lottery result, a variation pattern of special symbols (a look-ahead variation pattern, a variation pattern at the start of variation), a special stop pattern, etc. are determined. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a special electric accessary product management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessary product management processing, mainly based on the result of the jackpot lottery, the processing necessary for the jackpot game such as the execution control of the jackpot game according to the winning prize and the setting processing of the transition destination game state after the jackpot game is performed. The special electric auditors management process works as special game control means for controlling the execution of a winning game according to the winning type. The details of the special electric accessary product management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a right hitting notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, LED data for turning on the right-handed display device 39b is created when the game state is ``right-handed advantage'' (during a winning game, during a state with an electric sapo (time-saving state or probability variable state)), and LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created when it is under a ``left-handed advantage'' game state (normal state).

Next, an LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) to various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right-handed display device 39b is executed. A control signal based on the LED display data created in the normal symbol management process (step S091), the special symbol management process (step S093), the right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output in this LED management process.

Next, an external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21, and output control is executed for an external device such as a hall computer HC.

Next, a solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric auditors management process (step S092) and the special electric auditors management process (step S094), the normal electric auditors solenoid 41c and the big winning opening solenoid 52c are subjected to output control of the excitation signal. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are driven and controlled, and the opening and closing operations of the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are realized.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), performance display monitor processing belonging to the outside program is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing regarding calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 99 and display control is executed.

Next, the WDT count value is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

After completing the processing of steps S081 to S104, the timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Special Symbol Management Processing: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs a "special figure 1 start opening check process" for the special figure 1 side (upper start opening 34 side) (step S301), and then executes a "special figure 2 start opening check process" for the special figure 2 side (lower start opening 35 side) (step S302). The details of this special figure 1 starting opening check processing and special figure 2 starting opening check processing will be described later in FIG.

After completing the start opening check process of steps S301 to S302, the state of the small hit flag is determined (step S303). This 'small winning medium flag' is a flag for designating whether or not a small winning game is being played, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that a small winning game is being played, and when the flag is OFF (00H), it indicates that a small winning game is not being played. In addition, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not provided, but in the following description, it is assumed that the hit type includes a "small hit".

When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303: ≠5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This 'condition device operation flag' is a flag for designating whether or not a big win game is being played, and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that a big win game is being played, and when the flag is OFF (00H), it indicates that a big win game is not being played.

During the small winning game (step S303:=5AH) or when the big winning game is being played (step S304:=5AH), without performing the processing related to the variable display operation of the special symbols in steps S306 to S308, the special symbol display data update processing of step S309 is proceeded as it is. Therefore, during either the small winning game or the big winning game, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. That is, during the winning game, the stop display mode of the special symbols is held while being confirmed and displayed as the small winning symbols or the big winning symbols.

On the other hand, in step S304, if the condition device operation flag is OFF (00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, if neither a small hit game nor a big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), a process according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H) is performed. It should be noted that the "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol.

In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, one of steps S306 to S308 is executed depending on whether the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", "varying (02H)" or "confirming (03H)". Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", special symbol variation start processing (step S306) is performed, when "varying (02H)", special symbol variation process (step S307) is performed, and when "confirmation (03H)", special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is performed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, "during fluctuation" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is fluctuating (variation display), and "confirming" indicates that the fluctuation of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (fixed) (during special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the variable display operation of the special symbols (the display operation of setting the start of variation and the stop of variation) is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start process (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308), which are deeply related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 16A to 16B.

After completing any one of the above steps S306 to S308, the special symbol display data update processing of step S309, which will be described later, is performed. In this special pattern display data update processing, it is determined whether or not the special pattern is fluctuating, and if the special pattern is fluctuating, data of the special pattern that repeats flashing at predetermined time intervals (varying 7-segment flashing display data) is created, and if the special pattern is not fluctuating, stop display data (7-segment flashing display data during stop display) is created. The special symbol display data created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 9, and the variable display and stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data update process is finished, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessary product management process of step S095 in FIG. 9 is executed.

<11. Special figure 1 starting port check process: Fig. 11>
With reference to FIG. 11, the special figure 1 start opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 start opening check process. This special figure 1 starting opening check processing plays a role as winning processing executed on the basis of establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly composed mainly of processing related to reservation storage when a game ball wins in the upper starting opening 34 and processing related to look-ahead determination. In addition, the special figure 1 starting opening check process and the special figure 2 starting opening check process differ only in whether the processing contents are related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplication description, it will be described focusing on the special figure 1 start opening check process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a prize (winning ball) has been detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (special figure 1 side starting port) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is less than the maximum reservation memory number (here, 4 pieces). In addition, when there is no winning detection of the upper starting port 34 (step S311: NO), nothing is done and the special figure 1 starting port check process is exited.

When the number of reserved balls for operation of special figure 1 is 4 or more, that is, when over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved memories occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command (B006H for special figure 1, B106H for special figure 2) for designating over-winning is transmitted to the performance control part 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number is not 4 or more, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added to the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number (+1) (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

When proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation pending ball generated this time are obtained (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the random number for big hit determination, the random number for special symbol determination, and the random number for variation pattern are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number is stored in the reserve storage area of the area RAM. This reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the pattern variation display game as operation reserved balls (reserved data), and in this reservation storage area, the various random numbers as the reserved data are reserved and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are established (in the winning order) until the variable display operation of the special pattern 1 is performed (until the special pattern variation display game 1 is executed). In addition, in the above-mentioned reservation storage area, a reservation storage area corresponding to the special design 1 side and the special design 2 side (special design 1 reservation storage area (first reservation storage area) corresponding to special design 1 and special design 2 reservation storage area (second reservation storage area) corresponding to special design 2) is provided, and reservation data for the maximum number of operation reservation balls can be stored.

Next, prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting prefetching determination is acquired from the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the above "reserved addition command" (step S315), and then it is determined whether or not the "prefetching prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "prefetching prohibition condition" is a condition (special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition) that prohibits prefetching judgment (prohibition of prefetching notice) for the special figure 1 operation reserve ball side during the special figure 1 start opening check process (special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition). In this embodiment, if it is a ``game state with an electric sapo (time saving state or probability variable state)'' in which the special figure 2 operation reserved ball can occur at a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation reserved ball, it is ``special figure 1 prefetching prohibited'', and conversely, if it is a ``game state with no electric sapo state (normal state or latent certainty state)'' in which the special figure 1 operation reserved ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 2 operation reserved ball, it is ``special figure 2 prefetching prohibited''. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probability variable state, the determination result becomes 'YES' as the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is established. Further, as a prefetching prohibition condition, it is possible to prohibit prefetching during a specific game mode (for example, during the portent mode).

In this embodiment, the current game mode is identified by the floating pattern selection mode (TCODE) type (see the TCODE column in FIG. 28), so when judging the game mode, it is only necessary to judge the value of the floating pattern selection mode (TCODE), but the floating pattern selection mode (TCODE) is separate. In addition, an identifier that can identify each gaming mode itself (for example, a gaming mode judgment number YM) may be determined, and the current game mode may be determined. For example, when "general mode A" and "general mode B" are provided as game modes belonging to the general mode, they have the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), but are managed as different game modes. In any case, when performing some processing based on the current game state (internal game state or game mode) (when performing a game process that requires information about the game state), the current internal game state, the current variation pattern selection mode, or one or more identifiers that can identify the current game mode (game state determination number YJ, variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode, game mode determination number YM, etc.) may be used as appropriate, and the game operation can be processed. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the game mode can be specified by the value of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

If the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), skip the prefetching determination processing (steps S317 to S321) and proceed to the processing of step S322 described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation hold ball this time is not executed, and a hold addition command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S322 described later). As a result, the execution of the pre-reading notice of the current operation-reserving ball is controlled to be prohibited (the pre-reading notice targeting the current operation-reserving ball is not executed).

If the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). If the setting error flag is ON (step S317:=5AH), that is, if a RAM error (setting error) has occurred, the processing relating to prefetch determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S322, which will be described later. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the current operation-holding ball is not executed, and a hold addition command with look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, whereby the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the prefetching prohibition data (9FH) can also be said to be data designating that the processing related to prefetching determination (steps S318 to S321) has not been executed.

If the setting error flag is not ON (step S317: ≠5AH), after transmitting the "setting value command", random number determination processing is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the 'prediction determination' process, and here, 'prediction success determination' is performed to determine in advance the 'win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation (step S410 in FIG. 12 described later)' which is executed when the current operation holding ball is provided for the variable display operation.

(Set value command)
The "set value command" includes information that can specify the current set value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 to control the appearance of an advance notice effect (a setting suggestion effect to be described later) based on the set value. This set value command is transmitted each time an operation pending ball is generated in the starting port check process. As a result, on the effect control unit 24 side, based on the correct set value information, it is possible to control the appearance of the notice effect related to the operation pending ball (for example, the setting suggestion effect related to the look-ahead notice effect).

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, a "hit random number determination table (not shown)" is obtained, and a random value for big hit determination is obtained. Then, based on the acquired random number value for judging a big hit and the winning random number judging table, a winning lottery (prefetching winning judgment) is executed for the current operation reserve ball, and the lottery result (forereading winning result) is acquired.

In the hit random number determination table, a hit random number determination table (special figure 1 hit random number determination table, special figure 2 hit random number determination table) corresponding to each of the special figure 1 operation reserved ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation reserved ball (special symbol variation display game 2) is provided. During the special figure 1 start opening check process, the "special figure 1 hit random number determination table" is referred to, and during the special figure 2 start opening check process, the "special figure 2 hit random number determination table" is referred to. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a win-lose lottery in the "random number determination process for special electric role product operation determination (step S410 in FIG. 12)" described later.

In these hit random number determination tables, a determination area (determined value) for determining a hit/loss type (big hit, small win, or lose) for each jackpot lottery probability state (high probability and low probability) and a random value for jackpot determination (magnitude of random number for jackpot determination: 65536) are defined in association with each other. are

In the case of this embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table with at least a different lottery probability of a big win depending on the settings 1 to 6). In the case of this embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability/low probability) is the same for each set value, and the ratio is set to a value not exceeding 10. For example, setting 6 “1/189 at low probability, 1/63 at high probability”, setting 5 “1/198 at low probability, 1/66 at high probability”, . Note that the probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process of step S318, next, a special stop symbol data creation process is executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, 'pre-reading symbol determination' is performed to determine in advance the "symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation (step S411 in FIG. 12 to be described later)" which is executed when the current operation reserve ball is used for the variable display operation.

In the special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table (not shown)" corresponding to the look-ahead win-loss result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type to be processed this time (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired random number value for special symbol determination, a pattern lottery (prefetching pattern determination) targeting the current operation reserve ball is executed, and the lottery result (prefetching pattern result) is acquired.

The ``symbol table'' includes a ``big win pattern table'', a ``small win pattern table'' and a ``losing pattern table'' for determining the big win type, the small win type and the losing type, and each pattern table is provided corresponding to the special pattern type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12), which will be described later.

In the symbol table, a determination area (determination value) for determining a winning type (symbol type) and a special symbol determination random number (for example, the size of the special symbol determination random number: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number belongs to, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate, and special symbol determination data and a special stop symbol number are obtained as data indicating the lottery result. In this embodiment, in the case of a big win, one of the big wins is determined according to the symbol lottery rate shown in FIG. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the loss type on the special figure 1 side is provided with loss A and loss B, and the symbol lottery rate is 95% for loss A and 5% for loss B. When losing B is selected, reach other than N reach (for example, SP reach or more reach) is selected with a high probability (see FIG. 26). In addition, the loss type on the special figure 2 side is one type of loss A. The type of failure is not particularly limited, and one or a plurality of failures can be provided.

The above-mentioned "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and losing type), specifically, the winning type (probability variable big hit 1 to 7, time-saving big hit 1 to 2) and the losing type (losing A, losing B) not shown It is data for identifying which one was won. This special symbol determination data is used in processes that require winning type information (for example, the game state transition preparation process in step S412 of FIG. 12 described later, the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, and the process related to the execution control of the big hit game (special electric role product management process in FIG. 17). It is used to specify the type of stop symbol of the pattern.In addition, the normal symbol is provided with the normal symbol determination data and the normal stop symbol number in the same manner as the special symbol.

In addition, although a common pattern table may be defined for all settings, a pattern table may be defined according to the settings. For example, it can be configured as shown in (A) and (B) below.
(A) In some or all of the set values, one or more winning types have different symbol selection rates. For example, the symbol lottery rate for the probability variable jackpot 1 can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) In all or part of each set value, the probability variable entry rate (at least the combined symbol lottery rate of the jackpot with a high probability state (variable probability jackpot and/or latent probability jackpot)) is different. For example, the probability variable rush rate on the special figure 1 side is 50% (refer to the pattern lottery probability of the probability variable jackpot 1 to 3 in FIG. 4), but for example, the variable rush rate of settings 1 to 6 is, for example, "40%, 42%, 44%, 46%, 48%, 50%". In addition, the same applies to the time-saving rush rate (total symbol selection rate of the time-saving jackpot).
In any case, the higher the setting, the better the payout performance (machine discount) for the player.

When the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 is finished, then, the start opening winning random number determination process is executed (step S320). This random number determination process at the time of start-up winning is also performed as part of the 'prediction determination' process, and here, 'prediction variation pattern determination' is performed to determine in advance the 'variation pattern at the start of variation' when the current operation holding ball is provided for the variation display operation. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12 described later is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, the result of the pre-reading symbol determination obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) (at least the win-lose lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the random number for the variation pattern (the magnitude of the random number: 10000) obtained in step S314 are used to pre-read and determine the "variation pattern at the start of variation" related to the current operation holding ball. Since the look-ahead pattern determination is to determine the variation pattern at the start of variation in advance, a separately provided "pre-read determination table" that has the same basic configuration as the variation pattern allocation table used at the start of variation is performed. However, in the case of the present embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is provided as "both used at the time of winning (at the time of prefetching determination) and at the start of variation", and at both the time of winning and the start of variation, the variation pattern distribution table is referred to, and based on the random value for variation pattern acquired in the process of step S314, the variation pattern at the time of variation start is determined in advance.

The look-ahead determination regarding the variation pattern at the start of variation will be described using the "hit variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. In FIG. 24, the notation of "probability" means a variable probability big hit, the notation of "time" means a short-time big hit, the notation of "probability 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7" means a variable-probability big hit 1 to 7, and the notation "time 1, 2" means a short-time big hit 1, 2. Referring to FIG. 24, for example, if the current look-ahead symbol result is "probability variable jackpot 1 (probability 1)", the current game state (variation pattern selection mode Tcode is "general mode (00H)", and the variation pattern random number is a value that belongs to the determination value (determination area 0 to 49) of "normal variation direct hit", EVENT1 "21H" shown in the figure is obtained ("normal variation direct hit" EVENT1 The Arabic numerals shown in the figure indicate the determination value (the size of the determination area) (the same applies to FIGS. 25 to 27), for example, if the random number for the variation pattern belongs to the determination values 0 to 49, "normal variation direct hit" is selected (selection rate: 50/10000), and if it belongs to the determination values 50 to 129, "normal medium N reach B" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000), and the determination values are 130 to 209. If it belongs to , "normal middle SP reach A" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000), ..., if it belongs to the judgment value 9850-9999, "special reach" is selected (selection rate: 150/10000).

The above "EVENT1" is data (win command data 1) used for creating a pending addition command, and is data of the second byte (lower byte) of the pending addition command. As a result, the prefetching prohibited data "9FH" obtained in step S315 is updated to a data value specifying the content of the prefetching variation pattern in this process, and the prefetching variation pattern is specified. The data of the first byte (upper byte) of the pending addition command (data relating to the number of active pending balls) is acquired in step S322, which will be described later.

It should be noted that, in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, the number of balls withheld in operation at the time of look-ahead determination is not considered. The reason is as follows. In the step of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of pending balls in operation (for example, see the columns of the number of pending balls in FIGS. 26 and 27). However, at the time of look-ahead determination, the number of suspended balls in operation at the time of look-ahead determination does not necessarily match the number of suspended operations at the start of variation, so it is not possible to accurately determine the variation pattern (detailed pattern) at the start of variation. Therefore, in the look-ahead variation pattern determination, the variation pattern type (basic pattern), which is the skeleton of the variation pattern at the start of variation, is determined without considering the number of balls withheld in operation at the time of look-ahead determination. For example, referring to the columns of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal middle N reach A in the "losing fluctuation pattern distribution table" shown in FIG. Data (EVEN1 "01H") common to medium N reach A is obtained.

After completing the random number determination process at the time of start-up winning in step S320, next, the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is acquired based on the current number of operation pending balls and the special symbol type. Here, "B6H-B9H" is obtained according to 1 to 4 special figure 1 operation reserved balls, and "BBH to BEH" is obtained according to 1 to 4 special figure 2 operation reserved balls.

Then, based on the acquired winning command data 2 (MODE: the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation including the balls that have been activated this time) and special symbol type information) and the winning command data 1 (EVENT: look-ahead fluctuation pattern information) on the lower byte side, create a "holding addition command" (step S322), and send it to the effect control unit 24 without storing it in the RAM 203 (because data related to the holding addition command is unnecessary thereafter) (step S3). 23). In the present embodiment, the look-ahead variation pattern information and the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls and special symbol type information) at the time of pre-reading determination are transmitted by one command (holding addition command), but the present invention is not limited to this. The look-ahead variation pattern information, the number of pending balls in operation and the special symbol type information may be transmitted by separate commands. Specifically, a first command (winning command) capable of specifying the look-ahead variation pattern information and a second command (holding addition command) capable of specifying the number of pending balls in operation and special symbol type information may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control unit 24 may be configured to be able to execute effect processing (such as a pre-reading notice lottery, which will be described later) regarding the pre-reading notice when the first command and the second command are received.

When prefetching is prohibited or when an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the prefetching prohibition data ``9FH'' is maintained as it is, so a pending addition command having ``prefetching prohibition data'' is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see the processing route of steps S315→S322 or S316→S322).

When the reserve addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 receiving the command performs a lottery (prefetch prediction lottery) as to whether or not the prefetch prediction can be executed if the information included in the reserve addition command is 'other than the prefetch prohibition designation', and when the lottery is won, creates a prefetch prediction performance scenario, and based on the scenario, controls the appearance of the prefetch prediction for the current operation reserve ball. On the other hand, if it is 'pre-reading prohibition designation', the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed, but the lottery result is forcibly treated as a loss, and the occurrence of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this embodiment, a pending addition command specifying prefetching prohibition is transmitted both when prefetching is prohibited and when a setting error occurs. The reason for this is as follows.

In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped. The first reason is that, as already explained, the abnormal setting error can be resolved by changing the setting, but changing the setting during business hours is highly likely to be prohibited from the viewpoint of legal requirements as it encourages gambling. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting error occurs, the player will feel distrustful of the sudden stop of the game. For example, when a pattern variation display game in progress is executed during normal operation or during a jackpot game, if an abnormal setting error happens to occur and the game is controlled in a state where the game cannot be played immediately, the profit that the player should originally obtain disappears, causing the player's distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when an abnormal setting error occurs, only an error notification is given, and although the game progress itself is conditional, the game proceeds as it is. The reason why the expression "conditionally" is used is that when a setting error occurs, the advance notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (see the processing route of step S317 (=5AH) in FIG. 11 and step S409 (=5AH) in FIG. 12 described below).

By the above, the special figure 1 starting opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 starting opening check process (step S302) is executed.

<21. Special symbol variation start process: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reserved ball number is zero (step S401), and when the special figure 2 operation reserved ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), the processing (steps S403 to S416) at the time of the fluctuation start targeted for the special figure 2 operation reserved ball number is executed. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 operation is zero (step S401: YES), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 operation is zero (step S402). By the processing of steps S401 and S402, the "priority fluctuation order" of which of the special figure 1 operation reservation ball and the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially used for the fluctuation display operation (which operation reservation ball is digested) is determined. In this embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

In addition, when the number of both the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number and the special figure 1 operation reservation number of balls are zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state is "no operation reservation ball". This state of "no operation pending ball" is a state in which the special symbol is on standby and there is no pending memory. Therefore, when it becomes "no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the above "no operation pending ball" state (step S417).

When the special symbol operation status when the state of "no operation pending ball" is reached is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (see step S472 during special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 16A to be described later), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as an effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. When the performance control part 24 receives the customer waiting command, a ``customer waiting performance (demonstration display)'' in which a demo movie for explanation and introduction (demonstration) of the game related to the game machine 1 is played is displayed based on a predetermined execution condition. Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) elapses without starting a game, that is, without generating an operation reservation ball (without receiving a reservation addition command) after receiving a customer waiting command, a customer waiting performance is displayed. Until the standby time (180 seconds) until the start of the customer waiting performance elapses, the display state of the decoration stop pattern stopped after the end of the current pattern variation display game is continued to be displayed, the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern, the speaker 43 shows a ``demonstration start waiting performance'' in which the sound is muted (predetermined sound performance may be executed), and this state is maintained until the start of the customer waiting performance. In addition, the performance control part 24 ends the customer waiting performance and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode shifting condition) is satisfied after the customer waiting performance (demonstration display) is started. In the case of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the start of the customer waiting effect (demonstration display) without the operation pending ball being generated and without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen), the effect mode is shifted to the power saving mode, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display a power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving" on the liquid crystal screen), and a part or all of the decoration lamp 45 and other effect LEDs are extinguished (power saving control). .

If the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number or special figure 2 operation reserved ball number is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), step S403 to S416 are executed sequentially. It should be noted that, regarding the method of processing steps S403 to S416 described below, the only difference is whether the special figure 1 operation reserved ball is targeted or the special figure 2 operation reserved ball is targeted, and the contents are substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplication of description, unless there is a particular need, the description will be made without distinguishing which of the operation retention balls is the target of the processing.

When the process proceeds to step S403, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation pending balls on the side of the special figure used for the current variable display operation (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including information on the number of operation pending balls after subtraction is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol classification on the current variation start side, and if the special symbol 1 is the variation start side, ``00H'' is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data, and if the special symbol 2 is the variation start side, ``01H'' is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 and S407, the pending data stored in the pending storage area (holding 1 storage area) corresponding to the pending storage number n=1 is read out and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the internal RAM, and the pending data stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to the pending n storage areas (n=2, 3, 4) are stored in the pending storage areas corresponding to 'n-1' respectively (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free area (step S4). 07). As a result, the order of starting the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n (n=1, 2, 3, 4) of the operation reserve balls, it is specified to which reserve storage area the operation reserve ball acquired at the time of winning the starting hole corresponds, and the reserve storage of the new operation reserve ball is possible.

Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a “game state designation command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . The game state specification command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. When the game state designation command is received, the performance control part 24 grasps the game state based on the information included in the command, and manages the performance mode in a form of maintaining consistency with the game state managed by the main control part 20 side. The game state information to be included in the game state designation command may be the minimum necessary information when performing the target game process, for example, "internal game state (game state determination number YJ)" and/or "fluctuation pattern allocation designation number Tcode". Also, as the game state designation command, it is possible to transmit an "internal game information command" capable of specifying the game state determination number YJ and/or a "distribution mode designation command" capable of specifying the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

Also here, if necessary, a "time saving number command" including information on a special pattern time saving number counter (time saving number information) and a "ST number command" including information on a special pattern probability variable number counter (ST number information) are transmitted. The performance control part 24 grasps the number of remaining time reductions and the number of remaining STs based on the information included in these commands, and is configured to be able to control the appearance of ``remaining number of times display performance (for example, countdown display)'' for notifying the number of remaining time reductions or the number of remaining STs in a performance. Specifically, as the remaining number of times display effect, if it is in the time saving mode, the "remaining time saving number of times display effect" appears, and if it is in the ST mode, the "remaining ST number of times display effect" appears. In addition, since the time reduction command and the ST count command transmitted in this process are transmitted with the counter value from which the current game is not subtracted (the counter subtraction process is performed during the special symbol confirmation time (S479, S484) in FIGS. 16A to 16B related to the end of the game), the effect control unit 24 appropriately performs the decrement process on the grasped counter value, and is configured to be able to appear the remaining number display effect (the same applies to the ceiling number command described later). However, in the case of this embodiment, the time saving number command is transmitted when the special pattern time saving number counter is other than zero (the time saving number counter ≠ 0), and the ST number command is also transmitted when the special symbol probability variation number counter is other than zero (the probability variation number counter value ≠ 0). Of course, even if a counter value is zero, it is good also as a structure which transmits the number-of-time commands and ST number-of-times command containing the information which is zero.

In addition, depending on the game state, it is possible to determine whether to send only the time saving command, only the ST number command, or to send both commands. However, when an infinite ceiling privilege is granted, specifically, "infinite time reduction" without a limit on the number of times of time reduction, "infinite variable" or "infinite potential" without a limit on the number of STs, or when the number of times (65536 times etc.) is set and the number of times of time reduction and the number of STs can be regarded as "infinite number" Infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite probability is granted, in the game state (in this embodiment, heaven mode) during the privilege, in order to reduce the control burden. , It is good also as a structure which does not transmit a time-saving frequency|count command and ST frequency|count command. In addition, when the time saving state or probability variable state given by winning the jackpot continues until the next big win, similarly, the time saving number command and the ST number command may not be transmitted.

Further, the above-mentioned "residual number display effect" can be configured to appear in any of the game modes of the time saving mode, the ST mode and the heaven mode. In addition, it is preferable that the remaining number of times display effect related to the infinite system is an effect mode informing that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, if it is an image display effect, it is "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit".

(Regarding the remaining ceiling count display effect)
In addition, in the gaming state information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling count command" including remaining ceiling game number information (information relating to a ceiling counter, which will be described later) is also transmitted. Based on the information included in the number-of-ceilings command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached, and controls the appearance of the "residual number-of-ceilings display effect". In the case of this embodiment, the remaining ceiling count display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the omen mode (omen effect mode).

The above-mentioned "residual ceiling number display effect" can appear during all or part of the monitoring target (counting target) period of the ceiling game. In this embodiment, it can appear "during normal mode" and/or "during precursor mode". Further, when the remaining ceiling count display effect is displayed in the normal mode, different effects can be provided in the general mode and the portent mode. For example, during the general mode, the number of remaining ceilings is indicated in a small display area in the corner of the liquid crystal screen (the countdown display is displayed in a small size), and in the sign mode, the number of remaining ceilings is indicated in a wide display area in the center of the liquid crystal screen (the countdown display is displayed in a large size).

(Processing route when setting values are normal: Processing route following S420)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not ON (step S409: ≠5AH), the "setting value command" is transmitted to the effect control section 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 13 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling Function Management Processing: FIG. 13>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process for managing the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901). This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is used as a counter for managing the number of games that triggers the setting of data relating to ceiling award granting (steps S903 to S904 described later (ceiling flag ON), step S915 in FIG. 15 showing details of game state transition preparation processing (step S412) in FIG. 12). The "ceiling counter" functions as counting means for counting the number of executions, establishments, or occurrences of a specific event, and functions as a functional unit that monitors the arrival of a ceiling trigger opportunity (ceiling privilege provision trigger). The "specific event" referred to here is the execution of a symbol variation display game (hit variation or loss variation), the winning of a big win, small win or loss, transition to a specific game state (shift to a specific game mode, transition to a specific variation pattern selection mode, or transition to a specific internal game state), execution of a big win game or a small win, and other specific events such as establishment of specific conditions related to games. In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine the arrival of the ceiling function activation trigger. Such a counting means is used as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger or a predetermined privilege provision trigger, for example, in Modification 1 and Modification 2 (FIGS. 33 and 34, granting modes (α) to (μ)) of privilege granting modes described later.

If the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the process exits the ceiling function management process without doing anything. The ceiling counter is set to the initial value when the RAM is cleared by clearing the area RAM (step S031) during the main control side main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S902). If the result of the subtraction is not zero (step S903: NO), the ceiling function management process is exited. This ceiling flag is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process at step S412 (see step S915 in FIG. 15). As a result, the ceiling function management process is exited.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling function management process of step S420 is finished, then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric auditors product is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, using the big hit determination random number value, the "win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed for the operation reserve ball used for the current fluctuation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the random number determination process in step S318 of FIG. 11, which has already been described.

In this special electric role product operation determination random number determination process, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table of the current processing target side (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the processing target, the hit random number table for special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the random number for judging a big hit stored in the random number storage area for judging is obtained, and a lottery is executed based on the random number for judging a big hit and the random number judging table. If the lottery result is ``big win'' win, the big win determination flag is set to ``5AH'', if the ``minor win'' win, the small win determination flag is set to ``5AH'', and if neither the ``big win'' nor the ``small win'' is won, that is, in the case of ``losing'', both the big win determination flag and the small win determination flag are set to ``00H''.

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 14 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling Activation Management Processing: Fig. 14>
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. In this ceiling activation management process, a necessary setting process relating to the granting of the ceiling privilege is performed.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the big hit determination flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current game result is a "big hit" (step S920).

If the jackpot determination flag is not ON (step S911: ≠5AH), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation flag is ON (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for specifying whether or not to activate the ceiling function (whether or not to give the ceiling privilege), and when the flag is ON, it specifies that the ceiling privilege is to be given, and when the flag is OFF, it specifies that the ceiling privilege is not to be given. The ceiling activation flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the ceiling counter reaches zero in the game state transition preparation process of step S412 described later (steps S915 to S916 in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process). When the ceiling activation flag is ON, it is determined that the ceiling activation opportunity has arrived in the current game (step S921:=5AH), and the processing necessary to provide the ceiling privilege (steps S922 to S925) is executed. On the other hand, if the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921: ≠5AH), it is determined that the ceiling activation opportunity has not arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything.

When the ceiling activation flag is ON (step S921:=5AH), a process necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the value of each state buffer set in the later-described game state transition preparation processing (step S412) is set to the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting processing). Thereby, it is controlled to the designated ceiling privilege state. In the case of this embodiment, a finite time saving (time saving state of 100 time saving times) is specified, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "01H" in the precursor mode to "06H" in the ceiling mode. Then, as the end processing for granting the ceiling privilege, each state buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processing for ceiling activation), and then the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H) (steps S924 to S925). Next, the game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed, and the ceiling activation management process is exited. In the game state information transmission process here, a game state designation command including finite time reduction (time reduction state) information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 . As a result, when the current game (1000th game) is started, it is controlled to a finite time-saving state, and a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected in special symbol variation pattern creation processing (step S413) to be described later, and the performance under the ceiling performance mode will appear.

Returning to the description of step S911, when the jackpot determination flag is ON (step S911:=5AH), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, when a big win is won, even if it is a ceiling game, it is controlled to the "ceiling activation inhibited state", and the process when a big win is won is preferentially executed. Therefore, in order to give the ceiling privilege, it is a condition that the player has been addicted to the game for 1000 games. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of addictive games (number of consecutive failures) is monitored during 1000 games in the normal mode (normal state), and if the player is addicted between these games, a ceiling privilege is awarded.

(Modified example 1 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
Incidentally, when a big hit is won, a ceiling privilege may be provided without controlling the ceiling function to be in a prohibited state. However, in this case, the ceiling privilege is only for this game (only for one game). This is because the jackpot game is started after the end of the current game. However, even if it is a ceiling privilege for one game only, if a time-saving state or a probability variable state with an electric sapo is given, the benefit of the electric sapo can be received until the current pattern variation display game is finished. Specifically, there is an advantage that it becomes easy to win a prize to the lower starting port 35, and the operation holding ball on the special figure 2 side is likely to occur. When a game state with an electric sapo is provided as a ceiling privilege, it is preferable to display at least a "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG.

(Modified example 2 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
In the present embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling privilege is provided upon game start, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which a ceiling privilege is provided upon game end. In other words, the configuration is such that the timing of the end of the ceiling game is used as the ceiling activation trigger. In the case of this modification, the ceiling privilege is awarded immediately after the pattern variation display game ends. For example, when the ceiling privilege is limited time reduction, it can be in the time reduction state immediately after the end of 1000 games. Further, when the ceiling privilege is "forced win", after 1000 games are completed, a big win game (forced win game) by forced win is started. In the case where the timing of ending the game is used as the trigger for triggering the ceiling, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be executed after the step S495 during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 16B), which will be described later, relating to the process at the time of ending the symbol variation display game.

(Modified example 3 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the ceiling privilege is given at the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling privilege may be given based on the fact that the second giving condition is met after the first giving condition is met. For example, when addicted to 1000 games (the first granting condition is established), the right to grant the ceiling privilege is established, and the ceiling privilege is granted after a predetermined number of premonitory games are completed (granting of the ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended and scheduled for a plurality of games ahead). In this case, it is possible to provide a plurality of numbers of precursor games (for example, 1 to 16 games) and determine the number of precursor games by lottery (lottery for the number of precursor games). When the number of precursor games is determined by lottery, the lottery probability for each number of precursor games may be the same for all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value. For example, if the lottery probability of each predictive game number is determined according to the set value such that a relatively small number of games is likely to be selected as the set value is high, and a relatively large number of games is easily selected as the set value is low, the player can be given setting guessing factors according to the difference in the number of games. Also, when a specific number of precursor games (for example, 7 games) is selected, it is possible to determine the lottery probability according to the set value, such as high setting confirmation or setting 6 confirmation.

(Modified example 4 of the generation timing of the ceiling privilege)
In the above-described modification 3, an example has been described in which the right to grant the ceiling privilege is once suspended until the predetermined number of precursor games are played, that is, the example in which the right suspension period depends on the number of times the game is executed. However, the right reservation period may not depend on the number of game executions, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, it is a "time-limited" ceiling grant form in which a ceiling privilege is awarded when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, the ceiling privilege is given at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game related to the ceiling game. In this case, by using the interval time from the start of the ceiling game to the start of the ceiling privilege, a production for informing in advance that the finite time reduction will soon occur, for example, a "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, after finishing the ceiling activation management process of step S421, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "symbol lottery at the start of variation" is executed using the winning/losing lottery result of step S410 and the random number for special symbol determination. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) shown in FIG.

Here, first, a symbol table (any one of a big win symbol table, a small winning symbol table, and a losing symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the win/lose lottery result of step S410. For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the big hit determination flag is 5AH, that is, when the current variation start side is the 'special figure 1 side' and the result of winning/losing lottery is 'big hit', the ``special figure 1 big hit pattern table'' is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired, a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number, which are the result of the lottery, are stored in corresponding areas of the RAM in the area.

After finishing the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, next, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: Fig. 15>
The game state transition preparation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process.

This game state transition preparation process is divided into a process (steps S911 to S914) for storing data for designating the transition destination game state after the big win (see FIG. 4) in a predetermined buffer (state buffer) when a big win is won, and a process for storing data for designating a ceiling privilege in a predetermined buffer (steps S915, S916, S917) when the ceiling flag is ON due to loss. are First, the processing contents of the former "when winning a jackpot" will be described.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is ON (step S911:=5AH), the "game state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 22 is obtained (step S912). Next, with reference to the acquired game state transition table selection table for the big hit, acquire a game state transition table (any of JTTBL-1 to 5) corresponding to the current game state (game state at the time of winning (game state determination number YJ in this embodiment)) and hit type (special symbol determination data) (step S913), and store the data determined in the acquired game state transition table in various state buffers (step S914: state buffer setting processing) . The game state transition table defines various data for transitioning to a desired game state. JTTBL-1 to 5 are provided in the game state transition table according to the present embodiment, and in detail, as shown in FIG.

The value stored in the state buffer is read out in the jackpot end processing (see step S509 in FIG. 17 and step S592 in FIG. 18 showing details thereof) shown in FIG.

The roles of the various status buffers are as follows.
(α) "General electric role open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time reduction transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time reduction state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
ON/OFF designation data for each function for designating an internal game state is set. Specifically, a general electric role product open extension state flag that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, a normal symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function, a normal symbol probability changing state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function, a special symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, and a special symbol probability changing state flag that specifies the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function are set.
(β) “Special pattern time saving counter buffer”
Data (data for special symbol time saving number counter) for designating the number of times of time saving (number of times of electricity support) is set (see steps S478 to S481 in FIGS. 16A to 16B).
(γ) “Special symbol probability variation counter buffer”
Data for designating the number of ST (data for the special symbol probability variation counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 16B).
(δ) “Special symbol variation counter 1 to 3 buffers”
Data for designating the number of continuations of a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) (data for a special symbol variation number counter) is set.
(ε) “Variation pattern distribution designation number 1 to 3 buffers”
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode) specifying a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set.

For example, when the current game state is the “normal state (YJ=00H)” and “variable probability jackpot 2 (5R variable probability ST75)” is won, based on the game state transition table selection table shown in FIG. In this case, ``5AH (designated ON)'' is set in the general electric role opening extension transition state buffer to the special pattern probability variation transition state buffer, respectively, ``100 times (electric support frequency 100 times)'' is set in the special symbol time reduction counter buffer, and ``75 times'' is set in the special symbol probability variation frequency counter buffer. As a result, the transition destination game state after the big hit game is specified as "75 times of ST + 25 times of time reduction" (after completion of 75 times of probability change state, shift to 25 times of time reduction state). As the game mode transition designation data, "02H (ST early stage designation)" is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number 1 buffer, "25 times (ST early stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol variation number counter 1 buffer, "02H (ST middle stage designation)" is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number 2 buffer, and "50 times (ST middle stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol variation number counter 2 buffer. As a result, the game mode transition form of "25 times in ST early stage mode 50 times in ST middle stage ⇒ time saving mode" is specified.

(S. Modified example of ST number / time saving number: case where ST number or time saving number differs depending on the setting value)
In this embodiment, it is assumed that the same game state transition table is selected regardless of the set value when the same jackpot is won. That is, even if the current setting is any one of 1 to 6, for example, when winning the variable probability jackpot 1, the state is shifted to the variable probability state (variable probability A (ST100 mode)) specified by JTTBL-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the same jackpot is won, it may be shifted to a variable probability state with different ST times or to a time saving state with different times of time saving according to the set value. In this case, at least the data values related to the special symbol probability variation number counter and/or the special symbol time saving number counter may be configured to be able to select different game state transition tables according to the set values.

In the above description, the case in which the same jackpot wins was explained, but it is also possible to focus on different jackpots and make the following configuration. For example, depending on the set value, the presence or absence of a specific number of STs or the presence or absence of a specific number of times of reduced working hours may be determined. Specifically, in the case of the first set value, there is a specific jackpot giving a specific number of STs, and in the case of the second set value, the specific jackpot does not exist. That is, in the case of the first set value, the big win lottery targets include the "specific big win", but in the case of the second set value, the big win lottery targets do not include the "specific big win".

With the configuration as described above, when a specific probability variable jackpot (which may be a latent probability jackpot) or a specific time-saving jackpot is won, the following (SA) and (SB) game characteristics can be created.

(SA) For example, when a specific variable probability jackpot is won, each setting value (settings 1 to 6) may set a different number of STs (transition to a variable probability state with a different number of STs), or at least 1. A different number of STs may be set for each setting value (at least 1 setting value is shifted to a variable probability state with a different number of STs from other setting values). As a representative example, in the former example, when the same variable probability jackpot is won, for example, ``100 times to 105 times for the number of STs of settings 1 to 6'' (a case where one of the set values is found according to the number of STs) can be done. In the latter example, if the same probability variable jackpot is won, for example, "Settings 1 to 5 are 100 ST times, setting 6 is 101 times" (in the case of 101 ST times and setting 6 is confirmed), "Settings 1 to 4 are 100 ST times, settings 5 and 6 are 101 times" (101 ST times and high setting is confirmed), "At least the first set value is 100 ST times, and the second set value is 105 times". I can.
In addition, in the case of focusing on a different probability variable jackpot, for example, ``out of the winning types to be targeted for the jackpot lottery, if the 1st win is won, the 1st ST count (e.g., 100 times) is set;
In the case of these configurations, when a certain probability variable jackpot is won, the number of STs differs depending on the set value, so setting suggestions can be made according to the number of STs. Specifically, if it is a specific number of STs, one of settings 1 to 6 is found, or a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 denied, setting 6 confirmed, etc.). In other words, it is possible to create novel game characteristics such as creating the function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion effect by using the "number of STs".

(SB) Similarly, when a specific time-saving jackpot is won, a different number of times of time-saving may be set for each setting value (settings 1 to 6), or at least one setting value may be different. In addition, in the case of focusing on a different probability variable jackpot, for example, "out of the winning types to be the jackpot lottery, if the first win is won, the number of time reductions is the first number (for example, 100 times), and if the second win is won, the second number of times of time reductions (for example, 105 times) is different from the first number of times of time reductions, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second winning is not included". In these cases, similarly to the configuration of (SA) described above, when the number of times of time saving is a specific number of times, it is one of the settings 1 to 6, or a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 denial, setting 6 confirmation, etc.).

It should be noted that the particular jackpot in this example may be one or more jackpots. The specific jackpot is preferably the jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate (for example, variable probability jackpot 1) or the jackpot with the lowest degree of advantage (profit status). The reason is as follows. A jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate is positioned as a "rare jackpot" that is rarely won. Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information such as "suggestion of settings" as a privilege. In addition, the jackpot with the lowest degree of advantage (profit state) has a low profit even if the player wins the jackpot with great effort, and the player is disappointing with the jackpot, and there is a fear that the player's willingness to play will decrease. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information such as "suggestion of settings" to prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

The configuration of (SA) above can be, for example, the configuration of (SA-1) below.
(SA-1)
A lottery means for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits when the starting means detects a game ball;
a symbol display means for performing a variable display of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stationary display mode of the symbols;
a winning game execution control means for controlling execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning;
After the winning game is completed, until the number of pattern variations reaches a predetermined upper limit, a high probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is higher than a predetermined normal probability (specifically, a game state accompanied by a high probability state: a definite variable state or a latent definite state).
A gaming machine having different probabilities that the result of the winning lottery will be a predetermined result according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The stochastic variation control means is
When the set value is the first set value, when the first winning is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the high probability state can be controlled until a second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached.

Also, the above (SA-1) may be configured as the following (SA-2).
(SA-2)
The stochastic variation control means is
When the first win is won by the lottery means, control to the high probability state until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the second win is won by the lottery means, control to the high probability state until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second win may not be included in the result of the lottery by the lottery means.

In the case of the above (SB) configuration, instead of the probability variation control means, "advantageous game state control means for controlling the ball entry state to the starting means to an advantageous game state (time reduction state) accompanied by an advantageous state (electrical support state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state (normal state)" is provided. and,
The advantageous gaming state control means is
When the set value is the first set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the advantageous game state is controlled until the first upper limit number of times is reached,
When the set value is the second set value, when the first win is won by the lottery means, the advantageous game state is controlled until the second upper limit number of times different from the first upper limit number of times is reached.

(If the jackpot is not won (losing) and the ceiling flag is ON)
Returning to the description of FIG. 15 again. When the jackpot determination flag is not ON (5AH) (step S911: ≠5AH) and the ceiling flag is ON (step S915:=5AH), the ceiling activation flag is set to ON (5AH) as part of the ceiling activation start preprocessing (preprocessing for giving a ceiling privilege) (step S916). The ceiling activation flag set to the ON state in this process is confirmed in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the “ceiling game state transition table” shown in FIG. 23 is acquired (step S917). In FIG. 23, JTTBL-6 to JTTBL11 (limited time reduction to infinite potential) are exemplified as ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling benefits. In practice, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be provided according to the type of ceiling privilege.

Next, the data determined in the obtained game state transition table for the ceiling are stored in the above-described state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting processing). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (step S421, see step S922 in FIG. 14), and stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to each status buffer), as in the case of winning the jackpot. As a result, the gaming state relating to the ceiling privilege is designated. Note that "* (times)" and "* (H)" shown in the figure are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set according to the playability and design values. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, "Limited time reduction (time reduction number of times 100)" is representatively described as the ceiling privilege, so in this case, the data value as shown in the illustrated "Limited time reduction" column is set.

When both the big hit determination flag and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (when step S911 is ≠5AH and step S915 ≠5AH), nothing is done and the game state transition preparation process is exited.

Returning to the description of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 12 again. After finishing the game state transition preparation process of step S412, next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 to 27) corresponding to at least the current game state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) in step S411 is acquired, and the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired variation pattern allocation table and the random number value for the variation pattern (variation pattern lottery). In the case of this embodiment, a "variation pattern allocation table" corresponding to the current set value, the current variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the pattern lottery result, and the number of balls in operation (excludes balls in operation to be used for the current variation display operation, and the number of balls in operation is 0 to 3: see step S403) is acquired. .

(Variation pattern allocation table: Fig. 24 to Fig. 27)
24 to 27 show fluctuation pattern distribution tables. Fig. 24 shows a per-variation pattern distribution table for "general use, omen use, ceiling use, time reduction use, heaven time reduction use", Fig. 25 shows a per variation pattern distribution table for "ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end game", Fig. 26 shows each loss fluctuation pattern allocation table for "general use, omen use, ceiling use, time reduction use, heaven time reduction use", Fig. 27 is for ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST end stage Each "losing fluctuation pattern distribution table" is shown. In addition, "FB1 to FB17" shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 indicate the winning variation pattern distribution table type selected when winning, and "FH1 to FH22" shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 indicate the winning variation pattern distribution table type selected when losing.

In addition, about the "heaven time saving" (refer to the "time saving/heaven time saving" column) of the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 26, it is a common table with the time saving mode. The reason for using a common table is to reduce the control load. When the same game state as the ceiling privilege is provided, a variation pattern distribution table common to the ceiling privilege and the game state can be provided. Of course, a dedicated variation pattern distribution table may be provided according to the ceiling privilege. For example, in the case of finite time reduction and infinite time reduction, "heaven time reduction dedicated variation pattern distribution table", in the case of finite probability variation and infinite probability variation, "heaven probability variation dedicated variation pattern distribution table", and in the case of finite probability and infinite probability, "heaven probability variation pattern distribution table".

Further, although not shown, the variation pattern apportionment table is provided with variation pattern apportionment tables corresponding to set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, there are cases where the probability of drawing one or a plurality of specific variation patterns differs depending on the set value, and, for example, a setting guess element can be given due to the difference in the appearance rate of the performance related to the specific variation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, in each variation pattern allocation table, one or more types of variation patterns are defined in association with the game state (variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)), the number of pending balls in operation (the number of pending balls in operation, excluding the balls that are currently in operation and used for the variable display operation this time), the result of the symbol lottery, and the random number for the variation pattern. As for the types of variation patterns, various variation patterns are provided as illustrated. The relationship between the high and low of the winning expectation is as follows. The relationship between the same kind of reach is "N reach A<N reach B" between N reaches, and "SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C" between SP reaches. The relationship between different types of reach is the relationship of "N reach A<N reach B<SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C<special reach". In addition, "flicker reach" is mainly provided as a special reach that is selected when there is a prize at the lower start port 35, which is the special figure 2 side start port, in the normal mode.

In addition, when a pseudo series or other advance notice effect is executed in a complex manner, the degree of winning expectation may change. For example, even in SP reach A with a relatively low winning expectation, such as "SP reach B<pseudo 3+SP reach A", the probability of winning may be higher than SP reach B or SP reach C when pseudo-relationships are involved. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, when pseudo 4 is involved, the occurrence of SP reach B or more is determined. In addition, in the figure, N reach is "no pseudo-run", but in reality, N reach with pseudo-run, for example, pseudo 2-3 + N reach A, pseudo 2-3 + N reach B, etc. are included.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process is basically the same as the random number determination process (step S320 in FIG. 11) at the time of start-up winning, which is the look-ahead variation pattern determination process described above. Here, the variation pattern distribution table is referred to, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number value is determined (variation pattern designation command data COM2 shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is acquired). When the variation pattern is determined, the corresponding variation time is determined (see the "TIME" column in the drawing). This variable time (execution time of the symbol variable display game) is set in the "special symbol role product operation timer" which is the timer management area of the area RAM. Then, in order to notify the content of the determined variation pattern to the performance control part 24 side, a ``variation pattern specification command'' containing variation pattern information capable of specifying the variation pattern content is created as a performance control command and transmitted to the performance control part 24 side. Specifically, in the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the following (A) to (D) processes are included as processing related to determining the "variation pattern designation command" for designating the variation pattern at the start of variation.

(A) "Variation start fluctuation pattern distribution table determination processing" for determining the "fluctuation pattern distribution table";
(B) “Variation pattern designation command data acquisition processing” (variation pattern lottery processing) for determining a variation pattern based on the number of balls to be activated and the variation pattern random number acquired in the process of step S314 with reference to the “variation pattern allocation table (FIGS. 24 to 27)” determined in (A) above, and acquiring the command data (COM2) of the corresponding variation pattern designation command;
(C) "Variation time setting process" to determine the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination process and set it in the "special symbol role product operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area;
(D) includes a “command transmission process” for transmitting the variation pattern designation command acquired in (B) above to the effect control unit 24 .

The information about the variation pattern determined in this way can include at least another winning/losing lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current game state, variation time information, execution designation information of a specific advance notice effect (whether or not there is a ready-to-win effect and its type, pseudo-continuous designation information, etc.). The main control part 20 transmits a ``variation pattern specification command'' capable of specifying its contents to the performance control part 24, and the information included in this variation pattern specification command is used when the performance control part 24 side decides the performance scenario (variation display of decorative patterns, various advance notice performances, setting suggestion performance during variation, etc.) related to the current pattern variation display game.

(Regarding characteristic elements related to fluctuation patterns)
Here, the characteristic elements related to the variation pattern will be described, focusing on having multiple types of ST modes and having a ceiling function.

(About fluctuating state)
The fluctuation states (high-speed, medium-speed, low-speed fluctuation states) in each game mode are realized exclusively by the fluctuation pattern group and its selection rate defined in the losing fluctuation pattern apportionment table shown in FIGS. For example, referring to the "losing variation pattern distribution table for ST middle" shown in FIG. 27, in the early stages of ST, the variation time of the normal variation on the special figure 2 side (variation pattern belonging to the normal variation pattern) is 2 s (seconds). In addition, in the ST middle stage and the ST end stage, a variation pattern with a longer variation time (ST middle stage normal variation 3s, ST end stage normal variation 4s) is selected with a high probability, thereby realizing a medium speed variation state and a low speed variation state. Also, as shown in FIG. 27, at the time of losing, the reach fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected in the order of "ST end, ST middle, ST early stage" mode (in this embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern selection rate is zero during the ST early stage), and the fluctuation time is also relatively long. From this point as well, the average duration of the symbol variation display game is relatively long in this order of ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage mode.

Also, in the ST early stage mode, only normal variation types (ST early stage normal variation 2s, 8s) are selected at the time of loss. In other words, during the early stages of the ST (within 1 to 25 games), when the reach hits, the game becomes "accurate" (when the jackpot is won, "direct hit reach" is selected (see FIG. 25)). In this embodiment, when winning in the ST early stage mode, the common variation pattern distribution table "FB9" is selected regardless of the winning type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a different variation pattern distribution table may be selected according to the winning type as in the ST middle stage mode and the ST final stage mode.

Also, by utilizing the fact that there are a plurality of types of ST modes, the following configuration (I) or (II) is possible.
(I) A configuration may be adopted in which a Tcode dedicated to the final round of the ST mode is provided, and a specific fluctuation pattern (final swing fluctuation) can be selected for the final round. The Tcode dedicated to the final round can be provided in at least one ST mode of the ST early stage mode, the ST middle stage mode, and the ST final stage mode. For example, "ST early stage final stage A, ST middle stage final stage A, ST final stage stage A" shown in notes 2 to 4 in FIG. In this case, the following effects can be produced. Representatively, taking the final game of the ST early stage mode (the 25th game in the ST) as an example, in the final game, "ST early stage final stage A" is selected in the case of a big hit, and "ST early stage final stage B" is selected in the event of a loss. At this time, in any of the pattern variation display games related to the final stage A and B of the ST early stage, during a predetermined time from the start of the game (until the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the game), a common specific performance is displayed, and whether it is a loss or a big hit is kept secret for a while to arouse the player's sense of tension. If the game is lost, the game is stopped at the ``losing pattern (loose pattern)'' without applying the reach, and if the game is a big hit, the game is stopped at the ``matching pattern (hit pattern)'' after applying the reach. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, since it is certain at the beginning of the ST when ``reach'' is applied, if a performance that incites whether or not a reach is applied as the above-mentioned common specific performance is displayed, the player's tension and expectation for winning can be aroused. The variation time of the final boost A (at the time of winning) and the final boost B (at the time of loss) may be the same, but it is preferable to make the variation time at the time of the big hit longer than at the time of loss, and to display a specific performance such as a blessing performance to congratulate winning after the ready-to-win performance, or a promotion display capable of informing promotion display from even pattern matching to odd pattern matching or non-promotion display from even pattern matching to even pattern matching according to the type of the winning jackpot.

(II) When the winning jackpot type (which may be one or more specific jackpot types) is hidden for the purpose of production, and the transition destination gaming state is hidden (when the winning jackpot type is hidden in the performance during the symbol variation display game and the winning performance), for example, in the final game of the ST early stage mode (ST25th game), at the time of loss, the ST early stage final excitement is used to determine whether the ST mode will end or continue. appear. For example, when the current game mode is the ST25 mode, as a result of the continuous fanning performance, a continuation failure performance informing ST non-continuation is produced, and in the case of the ST75 or ST100 mode, a continuation success performance informing ST continuation is produced.

In any of the configurations (I) and (II) above, it is possible to increase the player's sense of tension in the ST final game and improve the fun of the game in the ST mode. Further, the above-mentioned "final swing variation" may be configured to be selectable in all ST modes or part of ST modes. However, it is preferable to configure the final swing fluctuation to be selectable in the ST mode, which has a "high-speed fluctuation state" such as the ST early stage mode. In the case of the "high-speed fluctuation state", if the game continues to lose without winning a big win, the ST (probability change state) will end in no time, and the player will feel disappointed. Therefore, it is preferable to allow the player to select the "final swing change" in the final round so as to maintain the player's sense of tension, in order to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, it is also possible to continuously select the "final blow" from the game one or more games before the final game, not limited to the ST final game. For example, during the three games from ST23 to ST25, the "Final Encouragement" is continuously selected.

(Regarding the fluctuation pattern related to the ceiling mode)
Also, referring to the losing fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the ceiling mode, as shown in the "ceiling" column in the illustration, a common "ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of the special figure type and the number of operation pending balls. However, in the case of this embodiment, since there are multiple types of loss types, "common ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of "special figure type, number of balls in operation, and loss type". The reason for doing so is as follows. First, at the time of reaching the ceiling, it is preferable to make a common ceiling effect appear regardless of at least the special figure type and the number of operation pending balls, and to notify the ceiling activation (granting of the ceiling privilege). Secondly, it is not preferable from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden to prepare a plurality of types of variation pattern apportionment tables and to present effects based on them for one ceiling game only (one rotation only). Also, in the case of winning, as in the case of "losing" described above, the following configuration is adopted from the viewpoint of performance and control load reduction. As already explained, in the ceiling game (the 1000th game), when a jackpot is won by chance, it is preferable not to display the effect related to the ceiling effect mode, but to display the effect at the time of winning during the normal effect mode (for example, during the normal mode or the omen mode) (see the description of "7-4-1. Effects during the ceiling mode"). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the losing variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, "FB2" is selected from among the winning variation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 during the normal mode (general mode and/or portent mode) when a big hit is won. Any of FB1 to FB4 may be used instead of "FB2".

(Regarding fluctuation patterns related to omen mode)
Also, focusing on the "precursor mode" of the losing variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the case of this embodiment, the precursory mode is set to a high-speed variation state (a game mode with the fastest average digestion time in the normal mode) in which the variation state is the fastest among the normal modes. This takes into consideration the state of mind of the player. It is thought that many of the players, when approaching the ceiling, have a strong desire to "get to the ceiling as soon as possible" and "get the ceiling privilege as soon as possible." Therefore, in this embodiment, the average digestion time during the precursor mode is sped up. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the omen mode, as shown in FIG. 24, the hit fluctuation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 common to the general mode are adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a hit fluctuation pattern distribution table dedicated to the omen mode may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a "forecast hit variation" as a winning variation exclusively for the omen mode (see Note 2 "Omen hit variation" in FIG. 24).

Also, if the final game in the omen mode is "losing", a specific variation pattern (variation pattern with a relatively long variation time) may be selected in order to cause the above-mentioned "preliminary firing guidance notification effect" (see remark 2 "Omen final variation" in FIG. 26). This pre-launch guidance notification effect is a production that instructs "how to hit" in the game before the game in which the electric sapo occurs. Acting has a different character. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification effect is a unique effect of a gaming machine equipped with a ceiling privilege.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again. After finishing the special symbol variation pattern creation process of step S413, next, the in-varying flag corresponding to the current variation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "fluctuation flag" is a flag indicating which of the special patterns 1 and 2 is fluctuating. When the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the special pattern is fluctuating, and when the flag is OFF (00H), it indicates that the special pattern is stopped. In this embodiment, "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 1 and "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special figure 2 are handled. For example, if the special figure 1 side is the current processing target (variation start side), the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative design designation command capable of specifying the design lottery result information obtained in the special stop design preparation process of step S411 is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative design specification command includes information about the special design type and winning type (design lottery result) on the fluctuation side. This decorative pattern specifying command is mainly used to determine a combination of decorative patterns when forming a ready-to-win state (symbol types with ready-to-win patterns as constituent elements), a combination of decorative patterns to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop patterns), and an advance notice effect corresponding to a winning type in a pattern variation display game. When receiving the variation pattern designation command and the decoration pattern designation command, the performance control part 24 starts the current decoration pattern variation display game based on the information included in these commands, and controls the appearance of various performances during the pattern variation display game.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "varying (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the judgment random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416).

As described above, when this special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) of FIG.

(Regarding the case where a setting error occurs: processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, in step S409, if the setting error flag is ON (5AH), that is, if a setting abnormality error is occurring (step S409: = 5AH), skip the random number determination process (winning lottery) for determining the operation of the special electric auditors in step S410, and execute the special stop symbol creation process in step S411. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the win-lose lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the win-lose lottery result of this time is always processed as "losing" (forced losing control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, it is preferable to provide and select an error-specific variation pattern, but it may be configured to select an existing specific variation pattern. When selecting an existing variation pattern, it is preferable to select only a normal variation pattern type without selecting a reach variation pattern type that arouses the expectation of winning, considering that a serious error called "setting error" has occurred. In addition, under the situation of forced loss, since the game no longer makes sense, it is preferable to select the long variation pattern type, more preferably, select only the longest normal variation pattern (normal variation 16s in this embodiment). Further, in the case of a setting abnormality error, it may be configured such that "the game cannot be continued" and the symbol variation display game itself is not started (the symbol variation is not started). In this case, the error notification is continued until the power of the game machine is turned off. In this embodiment, until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting error is cleared, the error notification continues even if the power is turned on again.

<A. Processing during special symbol fluctuation: Fig. 10>
Next, the processing during special symbol fluctuation (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described.

In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time T set in the special symbol role product operation timer has elapsed. If the variation time T has not passed (variation time T≠0), the special symbol is in the process of being varied, so nothing is done and the processing during special symbol variation is exited. When the fluctuation time T of the special symbols has passed (variation time T=0), a "variation stop command (BF01H)" indicating the end of the fluctuation of the special symbols is transmitted to the performance control part 24 as a performance control command. When receiving the variation stop command, the performance control part 24 grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbols has passed, and stops and displays (determines) the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, when the special symbol variation display game is terminated, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, the special symbol operation status is switched to "confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the OFF state is stored in the special symbol fluctuation flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol is finished, the process during the special symbol fluctuation is exited. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing output time of a special symbol confirmation signal for informing that a special symbol has been confirmed and displayed from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC. Further, the "fixed display time" is the time (stop display time) during which the stop display is maintained when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

After exiting the above special symbol changing process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessary product management process of step S095 of FIG.

<16. Special symbol confirmation time processing (fluctuation stop processing): FIGS. 16A and 16B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) in FIG.

In FIGS. 16A and 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S471). In the special symbol role product operation timer here, "fixed display time" is set (see step S307 of the above special symbol fluctuation process). Until the special symbol role product operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), nothing is done and the special symbol confirmation time processing is exited.

When the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status) (step S472), and the current game state information is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(If the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
When it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes at the time of stopping the big hit pattern are performed (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the big hit determination flag is set to OFF state (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to ON state (5AH) assuming that the big win has been won, and the state of low probability and no electric support state during the big win game is set (various flags and counters are cleared). Also, the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is in the OFF state)
In the determination of step S474, if the big hit determination flag is OFF (00H) (step S474:≠5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). If the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠5AH), that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit design is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small-hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small-hit medium flag as various setting processes (processing before the start of the small-hit game) when the small-hit symbols are stopped. After completing the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small winning symbols, the process proceeds to step S478.

When proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time saving number counter (remaining time saving number) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time saving number counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, if the special symbol time-saving number counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time-saving number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the number of fluctuations this time, and it is determined whether the special symbol time-saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time saving counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the special symbol time saving state end count has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving number counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends has been reached, and setting processing at the time of time saving end is performed (step S481).

(Setting process at time of time saving end: step S481)
Here, as a setting process at the time of the time saving end, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variable function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) is set to OFF state (general electric role open extension state flag, normal symbol time reduction state flag, normal symbol probability change state flag respectively set to 00H), and transition setting to "no electric support state" is performed. In addition, in order to terminate the operation of the special symbol time-saving function, the special symbol time-saving function is set to the OFF state (the special symbol time-saving state flag is set to 00H), and 00H that specifies the non-special symbol time-saving state is stored in the game state notification LED output number (state notification data of the composite display device 38c) (in the case of "01H", the special symbol time-saving state is specified).

The case where the “setting process at the time of ending time saving” in step S481 is executed is the case where the game mode shifts from the “time saving mode” to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal game state is the case where the “time saving state” shifts to the “normal state”. Accordingly, here, as the game shifts to the normal state (general mode) from the next game, an initial value (999 times) is set in the ceiling counter so as to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games. In this embodiment, the game with zero ceiling counter values is a game (999th game) just before the ceiling game (999th game), and in the game just before the ceiling game, various setting processing before the start of the ceiling benefits, specifically, the ceiling -activated flag is set in the ON state (5AH) in the above -mentioned gaming state migration preparation process (step S412 in Fig. 12). The data for specifying the ceiling benefits is stored in each state buffer (step S915 to S917, S914) in each state buffer. Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 12) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set to various flags and counters related to game state designation (S921 to S926 in FIG. 14). As a result, the ceiling privilege is given when the ceiling game starts. In addition, "1000" may be set to the ceiling counter as an initial value. In this case, it is monitored whether or not the ceiling counter becomes zero, that is, whether or not it is the 1000th game.

(Control processing in the case of granting the ceiling privilege with the game ending as an opportunity)
Here, in the case of providing the ceiling privilege at the end of the game (when the symbols are stopped), as already described, the subroutine "ceiling activation management process (step S421)" may be executed, for example, after the last process (step S495 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time process (step S495 described later) related to the termination of the symbol variation display game, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be executed. In this case, when the ceiling counter is set to 999 as in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 999 games, and when 1000 is set to the ceiling counter, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 1000 games. In any case, the specific event (here, the number of times of failure in the normal state) regarding the game is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function trigger or the ceiling privilege may be provided. If the processing method of the present embodiment (see FIGS. 12 to 16B) is adopted, the ceiling activation trigger is set at the start of the game in the old model, but in the new model, if the ceiling activation trigger is set at the end of the game, there is an advantage that the design change can be easily made and the compatibility between the old model and the new model can be improved.

When the setting process at the end of the time saving in step S481 is finished, then the game state update process is executed (step S482). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "05H" of the time saving mode to "00H" of the general mode. The updated game state information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by a game state designation command in step S495 described later. Therefore, when the setting process at the end of time saving in step S481 is executed, the game state designation command transmitted in step S495 described later includes information designating the “general mode”, and by this game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving mode (time saving state) has ended in the current game, and grasps that the next game will shift to the general mode (normal state). As a result, in the next symbol variation display game, a special symbol variation pattern based on the "general mode" is selected, and an effect under the "general effect mode" is displayed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation number counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S483). When the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation number counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation number counter after the subtraction is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), since the ST number has not ended, the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. However, when the special symbol probability variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of times of ST has ended, and the setting process at the time of probability variation end is executed (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the time of ending the variable probability state, the function related to the variable probability state is set to the OFF state to end the variable probability state. However, the processing contents differ according to the value of the special symbol time saving number counter. Details will be described below.

(1) "When the special symbol probability variable number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is not zero", in this case, the ST number is zero in this game and the ST mode ends. However, since the time saving number remains, it is a case of shifting to the time saving mode from the next game. That is, when 25 ST times are completed during the ST25 mode, or when 75 ST times are completed during the ST75 mode (see "JTTBL-4, 5" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, in this case, only the special symbol probability variable function is set to OFF state (00H) (00H is stored in the special symbol probability variable state flag) to set the shift from the probability variable state to the time saving state, and the game state judgment number YJ is updated to "02H (time saving state)". When this process is executed in ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated in subsequent step S491.

(2) On the other hand, "when the special symbol probability variable number counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time saving number counter is also zero", in this case, the ST number is zero in this game, and the time saving number is also zero. Therefore, in this case, as a process required to end the probability variable state, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variable function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) is set to OFF state (general electric role open extended state flag, normal symbol time reduction state flag, normal symbol probability change state flag 00H is stored respectively), and the special symbol time reduction function and special symbol probability change function are turned OFF (special symbol time reduction state flag and special symbol probability change state flag are set to 00H). H), the game state notification LED output number 00H is stored, the initial value is set in the ceiling counter, and the game state determination number YJ is updated to "00H (normal state)". It should be noted that the same applies when ending the latent probability state (when a finite latent probability jackpot is provided). As a result, the ST100 mode (probability variable state) is ended, and the next game is shifted to the normal mode (general mode). In the case of ST100 mode, if the special pattern probability variable number counter becomes zero, the special pattern time saving number counter will also be zero (if the ST number becomes zero in this game, the time saving number will also be zero). Only the variable function is turned off, and all functions related to the variable probability state (special symbol probability variable function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) may be set to OFF. Also, the setting of the ceiling counter may be set to the initial value (999 times) in the above-mentioned "setting process at the end of time saving (step S481)", or may be set in this process.

When the setting process at the end of probability variation in step S486 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S488). The determination processing of the special symbol variation number counter here is mainly monitoring of the switching game (update game) of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode.

If the special symbol variation number counter is zero (step S488: YES), nothing is done and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation number counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the number of variations this time, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation number counter after the subtraction is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is determined that it is not an update game of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and nothing is done, and the process during the special symbol confirmation time is exited.

When the special symbol variation count counter after the subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is determined that an update game of variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and game state update processing is executed (step S491). Here, update processing of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode is performed. The fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated when (α) ST early stage mode ends, (β) ST middle stage mode ends, (γ) ST final stage mode ends, and the like. More precisely, update processing is performed according to the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes.

In the case of ST25 mode, since it shifts to the time saving mode when the ST early game mode ends, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "02H" of the ST early game mode to "05H" of the time saving mode.

In the case of the ST75 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, the mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode (first update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "02H" in the ST early stage mode to "03H" in the ST middle stage mode. Then, when the ST middle stage mode ends, it shifts to the time saving mode (second update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "05H" in the time saving mode.

In the case of the ST100 mode, when the ST early stage mode ends, the mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode (first update), so the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "02H" in the ST early stage mode to "03H" in the ST middle stage mode, as in the case of the ST75 mode described above. After that, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST final stage mode (second update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "04H" in the ST final stage mode. Then, when the ST endgame mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST endgame mode (third update), so at this time, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "04H" in the ST endgame mode to "00H" in the general mode.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode update means for updating (changing) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition.

Next, when the gaming state update process of step S491 is finished, next, a special figure fluctuation number counter update process is performed (step S492). Here, (1) After 25 ST times of ST early stage mode are digested, processing to set the duration of ST middle stage mode (50 ST times) (processing to set the value of special symbol variation counter 2), (2) After 50 ST times of ST middle mode are digested, processing to set the duration of ST end mode (ST number of 25 times) (processing to set the value of special symbol variation counter 3) (Regarding the value of the special symbol variation counter to be updated) , refer to the column of special symbol variation counters 1 to 3 buffers in the game state transition table of FIG. 22). In this embodiment, the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage modes are realized by the processing of steps S488 to S491.

Next, a portent mode transition management process is executed (step S493). In the portent mode transition management process, the ceiling counter is checked to determine whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the portent mode transition trigger game number. In the case of this embodiment, since the portent mode is entered from the 990th game (see FIG. 7), when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in the current game (ceiling counter N=10), the transition setting processing to the portent mode is performed. Specifically, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" of the general mode to "01H" of the precursor mode. As a result, the game is shifted to the portent mode from the 990th game of the next game, the variation pattern of the special symbols based on the portent mode is selected, and the performance under the portent performance mode is displayed.

When the portent mode transition management process of step S493 is completed, next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S495). This game state information transmission process transmits a game state designation command, like the game state information transmission process (step S408) during the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. However, the game state designation command transmitted here is information regarding the game state at the end of the game, that is, information including the contents updated in steps S482, S491, S494, and the like. Therefore, according to the game state designation command transmitted in this process, the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not the game state transition occurs, and control the transition of the effect mode at the end of the current game. For example, even if the 989th game is not started after the 989th game is finished, it is possible to switch and display the daytime background of the general presentation mode to the night background of the omen mode immediately after the 989th game is finished.

When the game state information transmission process of step S495 is completed, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG.

<23. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 17>
Next, the special electric accessary product management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing details of the special electric accessary product management process in step S095.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the flag during a small hit (step S501). When the small hit medium flag is ON (step S501:=5AH), small hit processing is performed (step S504), and this special electric auditors product management processing is exited. In this small-hit process, necessary processing for controlling the small-hit game operation is executed.

When the small hitting flag is OFF (step S501: ≠5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the conditional device operation flag is OFF (step S502: ≠5AH), in this case, it is not during the small winning game (step S501: ≠5AH) and it is not during the big winning game, so nothing is done and this special electric auditors management process is exited.

When the conditional device operation flag is ON (step S502:=5AH), the processing corresponding to the special electric auditors product operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric auditors product status branching process). It should be noted that the "special electric role product operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, this status value is changed according to the processing state, stored in the special electric role product operation status storage area of the area RAM. The special electric accessary product operation status includes "start processing (00H)" to designate that it is in a standby state before the start of the big hit game, "processing to start operation (01H)" to designate that it is in a standby state before the start of the round game, "in operation (02H)" to designate that the round game is being executed, "continue judging (03H)" to designate that it is being judged whether to continue the next round game, end processing at the end of the big hit game. It includes "during jackpot end processing (04H)" that designates that it is in the middle.

In the special electric auditors product operation status branching process of step S503, the special electric auditors product operation status value is "starting processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", "continuing determination (03H)", "jackpot end processing (04H)". These processes are processes for controlling the execution of a big hit game, and through the processes of steps S505 to S509, a winning game corresponding to various hits is realized. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Jackpot Start Processing)
The "jackpot start process" in step S505 will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessary product operation status is set to the initial value "in process of starting (00H)". Therefore, when a "jackpot" is achieved, this "jackpot start process" is executed first.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as a setting process (setting process at the start) necessary when starting the jackpot game. As a result, the continuous operation of the special electric accessory (round game) becomes a permissible state. Then, the special electric accessary product operation status is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H that specifies the first 1R is set to the "continuous number counter" that counts the number of rounds. Next, ``maximum number of rounds'' corresponding to the current jackpot and ``start interval time'' for the special symbol accessory operation timer are set in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area according to the type of winning this time (special symbol determination data). The “start interval time (start INT)” is an interval interval from when the special symbol confirmation display time has passed (see step S471 in FIG. 16A) and when the big hit is confirmed until the special variable winning device 52 is activated (until the 1st round game is started), and is the time width defining the opening effect interval.

Next, a "jackpot start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and this jackpot start process is exited. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening performance, the ``jackpot start command'' includes information capable of specifying the current jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won, and is also used in the performance control unit 24 when determining a series of winning performances developed during the big win game (opening performance, round performance, round end performance, ending performance, etc. corresponding to each jackpot type). Thus, a jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessories operation start processing)
Next, the "special electric accessary product operation start process" of step S506 will be described.

When entering the special electric role product operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol role product operation timer is zero. The interval time before round start is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here. As this interval time, in the first round (1st R), the ``start interval time (start INT)'' set in the ``jackpot start process (step S505)'' is monitored, but when the main process (step S506) is passed after the 2nd round, the ``interval time before opening'', specifically, the interval time between rounds (INT between Rs) from the end of the current round game to the start of the next round game is monitored. Since the current round game has not ended until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero, nothing is done and the special electric role product operation start processing is exited.

On the other hand, if the special symbol role product operation timer is zero, that is, the interval time before opening (in the case of the 1Rth, the start interval time) has elapsed, the opening/closing operation pattern of the big winning hole 50 is set according to the big win type (special symbol determination data) and the current number of rounds (consecutive times counter value) (large winning hole opening/closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening and closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol role product operation timer, and solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large winning opening opening and closing operation pattern data to be executed corresponding to the number of rounds) is set.

In addition, along with the operation for starting the opening of the big winning opening, a command to open the big winning opening is transmitted to the effect control section 24. - 特許庁This "big prize opening opening command" includes the current round number information, and is used in the effect control section 24 to display the mid-round effect corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric role product operation status is switched to "in operation (02H)", and this special electric role product management process is exited. As a result, the big winning opening 50 is opened up to the upper limit of the opening/closing operation time of the big winning opening, and the current round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessories)
Next, the "special electric accessary product in operation process" of step S507 will be described.

When the special electric role product operation processing is started, the CPU 201 first monitors whether or not the number of winning balls into the big prize winning port 50 reaches the maximum winning value, and when the maximum winning value is reached, the special symbol role product operation timer is cleared to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the ``special electric accessory operation start process (step S506)'' is forcibly set to zero, and when the maximum number of prizes is reached, the open big prize opening 50 is closed. Also, here, every time a prize is won in the special prize opening 50, a “special prize prize prize command” is transmitted to the effect control section 24.例文帳に追加This big winning hole winning command includes winning occurrence information and prize ball number information for the big winning hole (may also contain set value information), and is used for winning performance notifying the winning of a big winning hole 50, and is also used for appearance control of setting suggesting performance using the winning performance. For example, when there is an over-win that exceeds the maximum number of wins, a special over-win-win effect is produced in place of the normal over-win-win effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, until the special symbol role product operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or until the maximum winning number is reached, nothing is done, and the special electric role product operation processing is exited as it is.

When the maximum winning number is reached or the maximum open time elapses and the special symbol role product operation timer becomes zero, the current round game is considered to be completed, the special electric role product operation status is switched to 'continuous determination (03H)', and the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol role product operation timer. This "remaining ball ejection time" refers to the extra time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the closing of the large winning opening. In addition, an inter-round interval command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 along with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game). This "inter-round interval command" includes round game end information and current round number information, and is used in a performance control part 24 when rendering a performance (inter-round interval performance) during an inter-round interval (R-interval INT) until the next round. By the above, this special electric accessary product in operation processing is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation determination process)
Next, the "special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process" of step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the closing of the big winning opening is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not this remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero, nothing is done and the special electric role product operation continuation determination process is exited.

When the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapsed), the value of the consecutive number counter is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. When the maximum number of rounds is not reached, 1 (+1) is added to the continuous number counter as processing for continuing the round game, ``interval time before opening'' is stored in the special symbol role product operation timer, and the special electric role product operation status is switched to ``in operation start processing (01H)''.

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, 'end interval time (end INT)' is stored in a special symbol accessory operation timer as setting processing at the end of the final round, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to 'finishing (04H)'. The above-mentioned "end interval time" is an interval period from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has passed, and refers to the time width that determines the ending effect period.

Then, a "jackpot end command" instructing the start of the ending production is transmitted to the production control unit 24, and the special electric accessary product operation continuation determination process is exited. Thereby, the round game of the maximum round number is ended. The big win end command contains information about the current big win type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of specifying the game state after the big win game ends, and is also used in the performance control part 24 when determining the performance mode after the big win game.

(9-5. Jackpot ending process: Fig. 18)
Next, the "jackpot ending process" in step S509 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot ending process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol auditors product operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol role product operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol role product operation timer reaches zero (step S591: NO), nothing is done, and this big hit ending process is exited.

On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors product operation timer becomes zero (end interval time elapsed) (step S591: YES), the state flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" already described is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer. Thereby, the game state after the jackpot game is designated.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the jackpot are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game state notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric accessary product operation status is switched to "start processing (00H)".

When the big-hit ending process is finished, a series of control processes relating to the big-hit game is finished, and the current big-hit game is finished. It should be noted that the series of control processing relating to the jackpot game explained above is the same when a "forced hit" is given by the ceiling privilege.

<19. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 19 to 20>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 20, the effect control processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 of this embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the production control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main processing (production control side main processing: FIG. 19) and a timer interruption processing (production control side timer interruption processing: FIG. 20) which is started by a regular interruption from the CTC.

<19. Effect control side main processing: Fig. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing main processing on the side of the effect control section (main processing on the side of effect control). The effect control unit 24 starts main processing on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main process of the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first performs necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S1001). Here, as initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body role, initial setting of CTC, permission of timer interrupt, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. are performed.

After the initial setting process is finished, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed every predetermined time (16ms) as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect software random number update process of step S01012 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value>15) that triggers execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the later-described effect control side timer interrupt process executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the main loop processing is performed every 16 ms. In the determination processing of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), the processing of steps S1003 to S1011 is executed assuming that the execution timing of the main loop processing has arrived. The number is updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for the error notification during the error, the error cancellation processing when the error is canceled, and the like are executed. Errors relating to the rendering means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, a demonstration/power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demonstration/power-saving mode process, setting processes necessary for the demonstration start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the power saving mode are executed.

Then, effect switch input processing is executed (step S1007). In this production switch input process, the operation state of the operating means (production button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, production control processing corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored in the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 20, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis processing, whether or not the performance control command is stored in the command reception buffer is monitored, and if the performance control command is stored, the command is read and performance processing corresponding to the read performance control command is executed. When an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs, command reception interrupt processing (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interruption processing, production control command is acquired, the data is housed in the command reception buffer of RAM243.

In the command analysis process, for example, when a variation pattern designation command is received, the content of the command is first analyzed, and the variation pattern information of the special symbol, which is the content thereof, is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 . The effect during the pattern variation display game is not yet determined at this time, and is determined when the decorative pattern designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information (design lottery result information) included in the decorative design designation command, the performance scenario (decorative design variation display, advance notice performance, etc.) in the design variation display game (decorative design variation display game) is determined. For example, when a variation pattern specification command and a decorative pattern specification command are received, one or a plurality of kinds of performance patterns are determined based on information (variation pattern information and winning type information) included in these commands in command analysis processing. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Subsequently, a time schedule is determined as to what timing and with what duration of performance time width the determined performance pattern (parts performance) is to appear, a performance scenario is constituted by this, and data of the performance scenario are stored in a prescribed area of a RAM 243. - 特許庁Various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or a plurality of them simultaneously, thereby realizing a "production scenario" in a broad sense. In the present embodiment, the effect scenario during the pattern variation display game is determined based on the information included in the variation pattern specification command and the decorative pattern specification command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be determined based on at least the information included in the variation pattern specification command. Since the variation pattern designation command includes winning/losing information and variation pattern information, when the winning type (symbol lottery information) itself is not required, a performance scenario in the symbol variation display game can be constructed based on the variation pattern designation command.

For example, when a 'holding addition command' is received, it is decided by a pre-reading notice lottery whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice (a holding change notice and/or a pre-reading notice during fluctuation), and when the pre-reading notice is to be executed, the performance scenario is decided, the data of the production scenario is stored in the corresponding area of a RAM 243, and appropriately used when executing the pre-reading notice. Similarly, in the case of displaying other pre-reading notice, for example, the notice of change in suspension for the ceiling (Fig. 32), when the notice of change in suspension for the ceiling is executed, the data of the performance scenario is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 243, and appropriately used when executing the notice of suspension change in the ceiling. This realizes the appearance of normal pre-reading notice (suspension change notice, pre-reading notice during fluctuation) and pre-reading notice exclusively for the ceiling (hold change notice for ceiling).

After the command analysis process is completed, scenario update process is executed (step S1009). In this scenario updating process, the content of the timer required for executing the production scenario is updated, and the process of progressing the production scenario based on the timer value is executed. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule regarding the generation timing of effects. For example, in a variation period (decorative pattern variation period) in which a decorative pattern is variably displayed, which is substantially the same period as a variation period (special pattern variation period) in which a special pattern is variably displayed, the timer manages a temporal schedule as to what performance pattern is to be displayed with what time width and by what performance means on the time axis. Such a production scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) and the production accessory action update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, the effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the generation time of one effect arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243 . Note that the LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable accessory is created in the performance accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output processing, the sound data created in the scenario update processing of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, based on the sound data set for each sound channel, data such as phrases and volumes are output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and sound effects are produced from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, a sound effect in line with the effect scenario is realized.

Next, LED drive data update processing is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for the optical display device such as the decorative lamp 13 and various LEDs for various effects is created based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are lit and blinked through the light display control unit. As a result, a light effect in accordance with the effect scenario is realized.

After the main loop processing is finished as described above, the performance software random number update processing of step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update period arrives.

<31. Production control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This effect control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (1 ms), and is executed by interrupting during execution of the effect control side main process.

In FIG. 20, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S1051), and then executes button input state update processing (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (the effect button 13, the direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. This operation detection information is used in the scenario updating process (step S1009) in FIG. 19 when displaying player participation type effects, menu screens, information related to menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is also possible to detect a single press, a long press, repeated presses, and the like.

Then, a performance accessory operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this performance accessory operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable accessory is performed based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output process, the control data for the movable accessory created in the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body role product motor of the movable body role product to be operated to control the operation thereof. As a result, a movable object production using the movable object (clock-type object 80, flower-type object 90, etc.) in accordance with the production scenario is realized.

Next, liquid crystal command transmission processing is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission processing, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update processing (step S1009) of FIG. As a result, an image effect is realized in accordance with the effect scenario.

Next, RTC information acquisition processing is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) clocked by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when presenting an effect based on the RTC information.

Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0-15.

When the processing of step S1057 is completed, the content of the saved register is restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the effect control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[Modified Example 1 of Privilege Grant Form: Fig. 33]
In the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined number of games are executed without winning a jackpot during the normal mode (at least when the internal game state is the normal state), the ceiling privilege is given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following application forms (α) to (ζ) can be applied.

<Grant form (α): Fig. 33 (a)>
(α) Regardless of the game mode or the internal game state, the number of executed games is counted, and if the number of games counted reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big win, a ceiling privilege is given (see FIG. 33 (a)). In the case of this configuration, not only the normal mode (normal state) but also the number of games executed during the time saving mode (time saving state) and the probability variable mode (variable probability state) are counted. Therefore, the ceiling privilege can be given purely according to how many games the player has been addicted to since the big hit this time.

<Grant form (β): Fig. 33 (b)>
(β) Count the number of games in a ``game state with a low probability state (low probability game state)'', and give a ceiling privilege when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big win. In the case of this example, the number of games executed during a game state accompanied by a high probability state (high probability game state) is excluded from the count target. Here, "game state with low probability state" corresponds to "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal game state, and "normal mode" or "time saving mode" when focusing on the game mode.

FIG. 33 (b) typically shows a case in which time-saving jackpot 1 (shift destination game state is time-saving A), probability variable jackpot 3 (shift destination game state is ST25 mode (variable probability C)), probability variable jackpot 2 (shift destination game state is ST75 mode (variable probability B)), and probability variable jackpot 1 (shift destination game state is ST100 mode (variable probability A)) are applied to this example (given form (β)). It is a thing. In the illustration, for easy comparison of the three, all of them show "a big hit that gives 100 electric sapots". For each jackpot, the number of games required from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) is as follows.

With reference to FIG. 33 (b), in the case of time saving A jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the state is shifted to a time saving state of 100 times of time saving, and this 100 times of time saving is counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time saving A" in FIG. 33(b)).
On the other hand, in the case of the ST mode shift trigger jackpot, the number of games from the end of the power supply until reaching the ceiling differs depending on the ST mode. Specifically, referring to "ST25", "ST75", and "ST100" in FIG.
In the case of the ST25 mode (25 times of ST + 75 times of time saving), 75 times of time saving after completion of ST25 are counted, so the required number of games X is "925 games".
In the case of the ST75 mode (75 times of ST + 25 times of time saving), 25 times of time saving after completion of ST75 are counted, so the required number of games X is "975 games".
In the case of the ST100 mode (100 ST times), the 100 games are in the ST mode until the end of the electrical support, so these 100 games are excluded from the count. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In the case of the ST mode, the number of games required from the end of the electrical support until the ceiling number of games decreases as the degree of profit is relatively low in the ST mode.

To summarize the relationship shown in the figure, the above-mentioned "required number of games X" has a relationship of "time saving A (time saving number of times: 100 times)<ST25 mode<ST75 mode<ST100 mode". That is, the more the game mode (internal game game state) with a relatively lower profit degree is shifted, the more the number of games required to reach the ceiling after the end of the electric support (the number of games required in the normal mode (normal state)) is reduced. This "reduced number of games to be executed in the normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a rescue function with a different character than the ceiling privilege.

<Grant form (γ): Fig. 33 (c)>
(γ) The number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and if the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games without winning a jackpot, a ceiling privilege is awarded. In order to facilitate understanding of this example, as a virtual game machine, as a game mode corresponding to the normal mode, a game machine capable of transition control of a plurality of types of game machine modes including two game modes of "normal A mode" and "normal B mode" with different variation pattern selection modes will be described as an example. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(C), for example, the number of executed games in the "normal B mode" is counted. In this case, since the games executed in the 'normal A mode' are not counted, the ceiling privilege is not awarded no matter how many games are executed in the normal A mode, but the ceiling privilege is awarded when the number of games executed during the 'normal B mode' reaches a predetermined number. The conditions for transitioning between the "normal A mode" and the "normal B mode" (conditions for transitioning to the variation pattern selection mode) include, for example, "mode transition when winning a small prize" or "mode transition according to the number of games played (number of variations)". Using this example, it is possible to create a game property such as the following (A) or (B).

[(A) A case in which the shift of the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to the small winning]
A case will be described in which the transition to the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to a small hit. As an example of this case, for example, a small win (winning probability 1/50) is provided on the special figure 1 side, and regarding the transition of the variation pattern selection mode, if a small win (promotion lottery) is won in the "normal A mode", it is shifted to "normal B" (shifts to normal B mode after the small win game), and if a small win is won again in "normal B mode" (dropping lottery), it is shifted to "normal A mode" (shifts to normal A mode after the small win game). ). As for giving the ceiling privilege, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) are played without winning a small win or a big win in the ``normal B mode'' (when 70 games are continuously lost in the normal B mode), the ceiling privilege is given. In this case, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how many games are played in the normal A mode, but the ceiling privilege is given when 70 games are played in the normal B mode. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege giving chance period", that is, a "chance zone", which is advantageous to the player. A plurality of small wins may be provided, for example, when the first small win is won during the normal A mode, the mode is shifted to the normal B mode, and when the second small win is won during the normal B mode, the normal A mode may be shifted. In this case, the winning probabilities may be different between the first minor win and the second minor winning, or may be the same. In addition, it is possible to determine the odds of winning a small prize according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning the first small win (small win that triggers the shift to the normal B mode (chance zone)), and the lower the probability of winning the second small win (the small win that triggers the shift to the normal A mode), the higher the set value, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. In other words, it is possible to create a game feature in which the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of granting the ceiling privilege is. Incidentally, the odds of winning a small prize, the variation pattern selection mode to be counted, and the number of games to be given the ceiling privilege can be appropriately determined in consideration of the playability.

[B: A case where the change pattern selection mode is caused to change due to the number of fluctuations]
Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the variation pattern selection mode is caused due to the number of variations. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition to the variation pattern selection mode, when the first number of games (for example, 50 games) are executed in the normal A mode, the transition is made to the "normal B mode", and when the second number of games (for example, 40 games) are executed during the "normal B mode", the transition is made to the "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 400 games), a ceiling privilege is given. In this example, 400 games, which is the number of games that reach the ceiling, can be reached by switching to the normal B mode 10 times. Instead of fixing the number of games to reach the ceiling, for example, a plurality of game numbers such as 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games may be provided, and any number of games may be determined by lottery. In this case, the number of games to reach the ceiling is randomized, and the amusement of the game can be improved. If the lottery probability of the number of games reaching the ceiling is determined according to the set value such that the higher the set value is, the easier it is for a relatively small number of games (400 games) to be selected, and the lower the set value is, the easier it is for a relatively large number of games (800 games) to be selected. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with setting guessing factors depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling.

Further, instead of counting the number of games in a specific variation pattern selection mode, "the number of transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode" may be counted. In this case, when the number of transitions to a specific variation pattern selection mode (normal B mode in this example) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, a plurality of types of the number of transitions may be provided (for example, 7, 8, 9, 10, etc.), and any number of transitions may be determined by lottery (lottery for the number of transitions). In this case, if the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value such that a relatively small number of transitions (for example, 7 times) is likely to be selected as the set value is high, and a relatively large number of transitions (for example, 10 times) is likely to be selected as the set value is low, it is possible to easily provide the benefit of the ceiling privilege as the setting is high, and conversely, to easily provide the benefit of the ceiling privilege as the setting is low. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with setting guessing factors depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling.

<Grant form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of times of execution of the normal symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the normal symbol)" may be counted. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of normal symbol fluctuations" during a game state involving a low probability state (normal state and/or time saving state). For example, by counting the number of executions of the normal pattern variation display game in the normal mode (normal state), when a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, a ceiling privilege can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
In addition, (ε) the number of winning times of "small wins" in which the condition device does not operate is counted, and when the number of winning times reaches a predetermined number of times without winning a big win, a ceiling privilege can be given. For example, if the odds of winning a small win are set to 1/100 and the winning of a small win reaches 10 times, a ceiling privilege is given. In addition, instead of the number of times the "small win" is won, the number of times the special electric role is activated (the number of times the small win game is executed) when the small win is won may be counted. Further, a plurality of types of winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, and 10 times), and any number of times may be determined by lottery (ceiling shift winning times lottery). In this case, if the lottery probability of each number of winning times is determined according to the set value such that the higher the set value, the relatively smaller number of wins (for example, 7 times) is likely to be selected, and the lower the set value is, the more easily the number of wins (for example, 10 times) is likely to be selected. Also, depending on the number of games that reach the ceiling, it is possible to provide the player with a setting guess factor (the same applies to the "given form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
In addition, the number of winning times of (ζ) “subsidiary win” can be counted, and when a predetermined number of times of winning has been reached, a ceiling privilege can be provided. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of wins in the game state (normal state and/or latent probability state) with at least the auxiliary winning lottery probability low probability state (normal symbol probability variation function non-operation). It should be noted that instead of the winning times of the "subsidiary hit", it is possible to count the number of times of execution of the general electric open game.

The granting modes (.epsilon.) and (.zeta.) are characterized in that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege does not depend on the number of executions of the symbol variation display game (the number of symbol variations).

It should be noted that, in the above-described embodiment, granting mode (α) and granting mode (β), it was explained that a ceiling privilege is given when a predetermined number of games (ceiling game number) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game number may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling game number lottery) as in the above granting mode (γ). Specifically, a plurality of ceiling game numbers (for example, 500 games, 700 games, and 1000 games) can be provided, and any ceiling game number can be determined by lottery. Also in this case, the lottery probability of each ceiling game number can be determined according to the set value such that the higher the set value, the easier the selection of a relatively small number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier the selection of a relatively large number of games.

[Modified Example 2 of Privilege Grant Form (Divided Privilege Grant Form): Fig. 34]
In the above-described embodiment and Modified Example 1 of the privilege giving mode, the ceiling activation trigger is explained once (the ceiling privilege is given at the 1000th game), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of (at least two) privilege activation opportunities (minor privilege provision opportunities) are determined, and a large privilege (e.g., a profit equivalent to the ceiling privilege) can be provided by the small privilege granted by each privilege activation opportunity (divided privilege provision form). In this modified example 2, the purpose of "increasing the base during a specific game state (for example, normal state (normal mode))" is stronger than the purpose of "providing a privilege to save the player from being overly addicted" in that the privilege activation opportunity is used a plurality of times.

As a representative example of this modified example 2, for example, an upper limit is set for the number of times of time saving to be given between big hits, and the number of times of time saving of the upper limit is divided into a plurality of times and given. Specifically, the “large privilege (equivalent to the ceiling privilege)” of a limited time reduction of 100 times is divided into four times by a “small privilege” of a limited time reduction of 25 times (divided grant). Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of times of saving time to be granted (hereinafter referred to as “upper limit number of times of saving time”) is X times, the number of times of giving is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit number of times of saving time is divided (hereinafter referred to as “divided number of times of saving time”) is Zk times (k = 1 to Y: hereinafter simply referred to as “Z”).
"ΣZk=X k=1 to Y"...Equation (10)
meet. For example, when the upper limit number of times of shortening working hours X is 100 times and the number of times of dividing working hours Y is 4 times, the total number of times of shortening working hours (Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4) in the case of giving 4 times is set to 100 times (Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4=100) of the upper limit number of times of shortening working hours until the next big win is won. Note that the number of divided time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of divided time reductions, or may be at least one different number of divided time reductions. That is, the configuration may be such that the small benefits with the same or substantially the same benefit are divided and given, or the configuration is possible that different small benefits are divided and given. As an example of the former, for example, the number of times of saving time is divided into 4 times and the upper limit number of times of saving time is 100 times (the same number of times of saving time is given). As an example of the latter, for example, the number of times of saving time from the first time to the fourth time is set to "20 times, 20 times, 20 times, and 40 times" (partially different number of times of saving time), "15 times, 35 times, 20 times and 30 times" (each different number of times of saving time). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which gives a small privilege with a relatively high degree of profit, so that the number of addictive games becomes relatively large. For example, the number of divided time reductions from the first time to the fourth time can be "10 times, 20 times, 30 times and 40 times".

It should be noted that the upper limit number of times of shortening of working hours X, the number of times of giving Y, and the number of times of dividing shortening of hours Z can be determined as appropriate in consideration of game characteristics and the like. For example, the upper limit number of times of saving time X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship of "upper limit number of times of saving time X>maximum number of times of saving time by big hit". However, in order not to give excessive benefits, the upper limit number of times of saving time X is at least the relationship that satisfies "the maximum number of times of saving time X ≤ the maximum number of times of saving time by a big hit (100 times)" or the relationship that satisfies the "minimum number of times of saving time by a big hit (50 times) ≤ the number of times of saving time by the upper limit X < the maximum number of times of saving time by a big win (100 times)".

In addition, it is only necessary to have a plurality of triggers for activating the privilege (the number of times Y of granting), and for example, it is possible to appropriately determine "in which game to grant the privilege regardless of the game state or when to grant it in how many games", "in which game in a specific game state to grant", "in how many games in a specific gaming state to grant", etc.

In addition, after the number of times of shortening of working hours (great privilege) for the maximum number of times of shortening of working hours is given, no more shortening of working hours is given, and the privilege is not given until the next big hit. After giving the big privilege, it is considered that sufficient privilege has been given, in other words, the relief function has been fulfilled, and the privilege is not given until the next big win. However, a ceiling privilege (FIGS. 7 and 23) may be provided separately. For example, after finishing giving the split privilege, if the player has played 1000 predetermined games without winning the next jackpot, the ceiling privilege can be given. Further, it is possible to construct a setting suggesting effect to appear in at least one of a plurality of privilege activation opportunities. In this case, when the privilege activation opportunity (privilege granting game) arrives, setting suggestion information can be obtained in addition to privilege granting, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Moreover, here, although the structure which gives a finite reduction in working hours as a special privilege was demonstrated, it is needless to say that it can apply also to finite probability variation or finite probability. In this case, if the above-mentioned “time saving number” is replaced with “ST number”, and “time saving state” is appropriately read as “probability variable state” or “potential probability state”, it is obvious that the finite probability variation (great privilege) is split and granted (small privilege finite probability variation is given multiple times) or the finite probability (great privilege) is divided and granted (small privilege finite probability is granted multiple times). For example, the upper limit number of times of shortening of working hours X may be read as "upper limit number of times of ST", and the number of times of splitting of shortening of working hours Z as "number of splits of ST". As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be given (upper limit number of STs) is X times, the number of times to be given is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit number of STs is divided (divided ST number) is Zk times (k = 1 to Y).

(Specific example of modification 2: FIG. 34)
This modification (Modification 2) can be broadly classified into a “periodic award form” in which a privilege is given periodically (regularly), such as “a small privilege is given each time a predetermined number of games are played”, and an “aperiodic award form” in which a privilege is not divided and given periodically. First, the periodic application mode will be described with reference to FIG. 34 .

[Periodic application form]
<A. Specific example 1 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): FIG. 34 (a)>
FIG. 34(a) shows an example of the cyclic application form (application form (κ)). In FIG. 34 (A), every time a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) are executed (p1, p3, p5, p7 in the figure) during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of the power supply by the big hit (p0 in the figure), the small privilege “Limited time saving of 25 times of time saving (divided time saving of 25 times)” is given. Here, the number of grants is set to 4 times, and by granting a total of 4 small benefits, the major benefit, ``Limited time reduction of 100 times (maximum time reduction count of 100 times)'' is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the 100 games from the 1st to 100th games (p1) after the end of the power supply (p0) are controlled to the normal state (period without division), the first privilege activation opportunity (privilege grant opportunity) arrives in the 101st game, a limited time reduction of a small privilege (time reduction number of times 25 times) is granted, and the 25 games from the 101st to 125th games (p2) are controlled to the time reduction state (first time Control to reduce working hours with small benefits).
Then, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th game (p3) are controlled to the normal state again (period without division grant), the second privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 226th game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege (25 times) is given, and the 25 games from the 226th to the 250th game (p4) are controlled to the time saving state (controlled to the time saving state by the second small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 251st to the 350th game (p5) are again controlled to the normal state (period without division grant), and the third privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 351st game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege (25 times) is given, and the 351st to 375th games (p6) are controlled to the time saving state (controlled to the time saving state by the third small privilege).
Then, the 376 ~ 475th game (p7) is controlled again to the normal state, the final (4th) privilege activation opportunity arrives in the 476th game, the finite time reduction of the small privilege (25 times of the number of times of time reduction) is granted, and the 476th ~ 500th game (p8) is controlled to the time reduction state (controlled to the time reduction state by the fourth small privilege), and with the above, the grant of the large privilege "limited time reduction of 100 times of the number of times of time reduction" is given. complete. That is, a small benefit (25 times of time saving) is divided into 4 times and given periodically (every 100 games), and if you get addicted to 500 games after the end of the electric support, all of the upper limit of 100 times of time saving will be given. In other words, such a granting form is the same event as granting a maximum of four sets of ``100 games executed during normal state + 25 times of time saving'' as one set, and can be said to be a privilege granting function with a limiter function. Although illustration of the production mode is omitted, as in the above-described embodiment (FIGS. 6 and 7), if it is a normal state (normal mode), it is normal production mode, and if it is a time-saving state (time-saving mode), it may be configured to be controllable to shift to the production mode according to the game state, such as time-saving production mode (air battle mode).

(In the case of granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, the configuration for dividing and giving a finite reduction in working hours as a great benefit has been described, but the upper limit number of times of reducing working hours is infinite, that is, it can be configured to divide and give "infinite reduction in working hours". If the major privilege is "infinite reduction in working hours", for example, a predetermined number of divided times (small privilege) may be permanently given every 100 games until the next big hit is won. In addition, like FIG. 34 (a), the number of times of dividing time is given 25 times every 100 games, but in the 476th game (p7 of the last given time), an infinite number of times of time saving may be given as the number of times of division. In this case, the time saving state can be continued even after the 501st game. Of course, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an infinite probability change or an infinite probability with an infinite maximum number of STs is given in a divided manner. In this case, in the same manner as already described, the above-mentioned "number of times of time saving" should be appropriately replaced with "number of times of ST" and "time saving state" with "variable probability state" or "potential state".

<B. Specific example 2 of periodic application form (application form (κ)): Fig. 34 (b)>
In the above-described provision form (κ), a periodic provision form of "dividing and giving ceiling benefits" has been described. Next, as another cyclic granting form, the profit state "infinite short time", "limited time short", "infinite probability change", "finite probability change", "infinite probability", or "finite probability", etc. of the profit state granted by winning the jackpot will be divided and granted by multiple privilege activation opportunities (grant form (λ)).

In this example, benefits such as time-saving state (infinite time-saving, finite time-saving), probability variable state (infinite probability change, finite probability change), potential probability state (infinite probability, finite probability), etc. given by winning a jackpot are divided and given by multiple times of privilege activation opportunities. In other words, as in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 6 to 7, etc.), instead of immediately giving the total time reduction number and the total ST number after the big hit game, it is given in small amounts over a long game period. In this example, in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the number of times of time-saving given by the big hit corresponds to the "upper limit number of times of time-savings" (great privilege), and the number of times of time-savings given by division corresponds to the above-mentioned "divided number of times of time-savings" (small privilege). In addition, in the case of a variable probability big hit or a latent probability big hit, the number of ST given by the big hit corresponds to the ``upper limit number of ST'' (great privilege), and the number of ST given in division corresponds to the above-mentioned ``divided ST number'' (small privilege). FIG. 34(b) shows a specific example thereof.

FIG. 34 (b) shows a representative example of this example (given form (λ)), the time-saving jackpots α to γ (time-saving times 50 times finite time-saving jackpots, time-saving times 100 times finite time-saving jackpots, infinite time-saving jackpots) are illustrated. Figure (A) shows the case of normal granting without dividing the number of times of time saving when winning the time saving jackpot of 50 times (equivalent to time saving jackpot 2 in Figure 4). FIG. (C) shows a case in which, when winning a time-saving jackpot that gives an infinite (including a substantially infinite number of times) time-saving times, the number of times of time-savings is given 50 times for the first time, and an infinite number of times is given for the second time.

Referring to FIG. 34 (B), as shown in FIGS. (A) to (C), when any one of the time-saving jackpots α to γ is won, the time-saving number of times is first given 50 times regardless of which jackpot is won, and then different game transitions are followed according to the jackpot type won. Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the production mode is made common, it is possible to create the following game characteristics.

(Time-saving secret game)
When the time-saving jackpots α to γ are won, the jackpot types won in the performance during the pattern variation display game (announcement performance including the decoration stop pattern, etc.) and the performance during the winning are hidden. Then, the production mode after the big hit game is also a common time reduction production mode (air combat mode: see FIGS. 29 to 31) up to the first 50 times of time reduction (between 1 and 50 games) (section a0 to p0 in the figure). Therefore, the type of winning big win is hidden from the performance until the 150th game is over, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting to win the time-saving big win β or time-saving big win γ. Here, when the jackpot won this time is the short-time jackpot α, the normal presentation mode is continued even after the 151st game (p1 onwards), so at this point, it is found that the jackpot won this time was the short-time jackpot α. However, when the winning jackpot is the time-saving big win β or the time-saving big win γ, the time-saving state occurs in the 151st game and the mode is shifted to the time-saving performance mode again. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while hoping that the time-saving state will not end at 200 games (p2 in the figure) (expecting the winning of the time-saving jackpot γ). If the time-saving state continues after the 201st game, it is determined that the winning jackpot is the time-saving jackpot γ, ie, the infinite time-saving, and the player can proceed with the game under the high base state until the next big win with peace of mind. In this way, by gradually revealing the number of time-reduction times in the concealed state, it is possible to create game characteristics (time-reduction number-of-time concealment game) that arouse the player's expectation for the continuation of the power supply, the tension of the end of the power supply, and the exhilaration when the power supply continuation is found out. In the time-saving state after the 201st game where the infinite time-saving is known, the normal time-saving production mode (air combat mode) may be used, but as shown in the figure, a special time-saving production mode different from the normal time-saving production mode (for example, a background display (not shown) different from the air combat mode) may be displayed, and the infinite time-saving may be definitely notified.

In the above, the relationship between the three time-saving jackpots α to γ with different numbers of time-savings (limited time-savings jackpot with 50 times of time-savings, finite time-savings jackpot with 100 times of time-savings, and infinite time-savings jackpot) was explained. However, if at least two time-saving jackpots with different numbers of time-savings are used, the above-described time-savings secret game can be realized. In the example of FIG. 34 (b), time-saving jackpots α to γ with different numbers of times of saving time have been described, but multiple probability-variable jackpots with different ST numbers (for example, finite-probability variable jackpot α with ST number of 50 times, finite-probability variable jackpot β with ST number of 100 times, infinite-probability variable jackpot γ).

[Aperiodic application form]
<Grant form (μ)>
In the above-described award forms (κ) and (λ), a form in which a small privilege is given periodically has been described, but a form in which a small privilege is given aperiodically (aperiodic grant form) is also possible. For example, the privilege activation timing is the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, and the 800th game. In the case of an aperiodic granting form, a configuration in which a plurality of privilege activation triggers can be determined by lottery may be employed, or a plurality of privilege activation trigger scenarios (scenarios in which the number of a plurality of privilege activation trigger games is predetermined) may be provided and one of the privilege activation trigger scenarios can be determined by lottery. Other points (matters related to major benefits, minor benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-described granting modes (κ) and (λ), so detailed description is omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-mentioned form of giving a divided privilege, a mode has been described in which a small privilege is divided and given with the profit of a large privilege being the upper limit. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the profit of the special privilege is not set as the upper limit. For example, a "specific privilege" is given periodically or aperiodically, but the upper limit of the benefit to be given is not set. In short, the major privilege is an infinite privilege (infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation or infinite probability), and the minor privilege is a finite privilege (time reduction state of a predetermined number of times of shortening time, finite probability of a predetermined number of STs or finite probability of a predetermined number of STs), and the number of times Y of granting is not limited to the number of times Y of the minor privileges, and it is given periodically or aperiodically until the next big hit. In this example, there is no limit to the number Y of grants (infinite number of times), which is different from the "divided grant" which has an upper limit. For example, if this example is explained using FIG. 34 (b), the small privilege “Limited time reduction of 25 times” is periodically granted (given every 100 games in the normal state), but the grant is permanently granted until the next big hit without being completed at the point of p8 (4th time). In addition, for example, using FIG. 34 (B) and (C), at the time of p2, instead of switching the privilege to be granted to “infinite time reduction”, the small privilege “limited time reduction of 50 times” is periodically granted after p2 (granted every 100 games in the normal state). In addition, when the number of grants reaches a predetermined specified number of times or a specified number of games, the advantage (profit status) of the small privilege may be increased. For example, if it is explained using FIG. 34 (a), when the number of grants reaches 10 times, it is relatively more advantageous than the current small privilege "Limited time reduction of 25 times". A condition for switching from a small privilege to a medium privilege can be a case where a predetermined prescribed number of awards and/or a prescribed prescribed number of games have been reached.

The above embodiment can have the following configurations (1) to (6). Although parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) shooting means (shooting device 13, FIG. 3) capable of shooting game balls into the game area (game area 3a in FIG. 2);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 15) for performing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits, triggered by the detection of the game ball by the starting means (starting ports 34, 35);
Winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) for controlling the execution of a winning game when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win;
A gaming machine comprising symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a and 38b) for performing variable display of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the symbols,
A game state control means (S412 in FIG. 12, FIGS. 15, 18, 21, and 22) capable of controlling a low-probability game state accompanied by a low-probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is a predetermined normal probability, and a high-probability game state accompanied by a high-probability state in which the probability is higher than the normal probability;
After a predetermined start condition is satisfied, when the winning game is not generated by the winning game execution control means and the number of symbol variations executed in the low probability game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times), privilege game state control means (Fig. 7 (ceiling mode, heaven mode column)) for controlling to a privilege game state (ceiling privilege (Figs. 7 and 23)) more advantageous to the player than the normal state, S420 to S4 in Fig. 12 21, S412, FIGS. 13-15, 23, 33, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) Advantageous game state control means (FIG. 6 (column of time saving mode), S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 16A to FIG. 16B, FIG. 18, FIG.
The advantageous game state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous game state after the winning game,
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:
(3) The privilege gaming state and the advantageous gaming state have different advantages for the player (for example, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege and the number of time reductions due to the big hit are different),
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(4) The advantageous gaming state control means
According to the winning type won by the lottery means, at least a first advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving B) and a second advantageous gaming state having a higher advantage than the first advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving A) At least can be controlled,
The gaming machine according to (2) above, characterized in that:
(5) The privilege game state control means
Control to the first advantageous game state as the privilege game state (for example, the case where the number of times of time reduction due to the ceiling privilege is the same 50 times as the time reduction B),
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(6) The privilege game state control means
Control to the second advantageous game state as the privilege game state (for example, the case where the number of times of time reduction due to the ceiling privilege is the same 100 times as the time reduction A),
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that:
(7) further includes a production control means capable of controlling multiple types of production modes related to the game state (production control unit 24), the production mode according to the privilege game state and the production mode according to the advantageous game state are different production modes (for example, time-saving production mode (FIGS. 6 and 29), heaven production mode (FIG. 7)),
The game machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above, characterized by:

Further, the above-described embodiment and the application forms (application forms (α) to (μ): Figs. 33 to 34) relating to the modification thereof can be the following (structures A) to (structures G).
(Configuration A)
a launching means capable of shooting game balls into the game area;
A lottery means for executing a lottery for a winning when the starting means detects a game ball;
a symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of the symbol and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the symbol;
A gaming machine comprising profit state generation means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition,
The profit status generation means is
Winning game execution control means for controlling the execution of a winning game when the lottery by the lottery means is won;
a first profit state generating means for generating a first profit state after the winning game is over;
a second profit state generating means for generating a second profit state when a specific occurrence condition is established without executing the winning game after a predetermined start condition is established;
A gaming machine characterized by:
(Configuration B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
The game machine of the above configuration A characterized by:
(Configuration C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different profit states,
The game machine according to the above configuration A, characterized by:
(Configuration D)
a lower profit position in said second profit position than in said first profit position;
The game machine according to the above configuration A, characterized by:
(Configuration E)
The first profit state ends when a predetermined game period elapses after starting after the winning game ends,
After the second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, the second profit state is temporarily terminated when a predetermined game period elapses, and when the specific occurrence condition is established again, the second profit state is resumed.
The game machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration B, characterized by:
(Configuration F)
The first profit state ends when a predetermined number of games has elapsed after starting after the end of the winning game,
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, and continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration C, characterized by:
(Configuration G)
The first profit state ends when the first game period elapses after starting after the winning game ends,
After the second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is established, it ends when a second game period shorter than the first game period elapses, and when the specific occurrence condition is established again, the second profit state is resumed.
The gaming machine according to any one of the configuration A, the configuration C, and the configuration D, characterized by:

[Second embodiment]
<Ball output performance with electric sapo>
By the way, in recent years, due to legal requirements, it is required to moderately suppress arousal of gambling. In the time saving state or the probability variable state, it becomes a state with an electric sapo, and is controlled under a higher base state than the normal state (low base state without an electric sapo). This state with electric support (high base state) is a game state advantageous to the player, in which the player can aim for the next big win without reducing the number of balls in his possession more than in the normal state. However, if the base value (the so-called ball output rate: "safe ball number/out ball number"×100) is excessively lowered in order to suppress gambling, the speed at which the player's balls decrease while the electric sapo is present will not only reduce the player's desire to play, but also result in an increase in the amount spent by the player (consumption amount), thereby reducing the player's desire to play. In particular, when infinite time reduction or infinite probability variation is provided as a ceiling privilege, most of the players continue the game until the next big win is won, so the more the number of games until the next big win is won, the more the number of balls in possession is reduced. In other words, the player is greatly addicted to the game and faces a situation where the investment amount increases even during the ceiling privilege, and the player's desire to play the game is remarkably reduced. In this way, if the amount of money spent increases even if the player continues to play the game to receive the benefits of the special ceiling privilege, the significance of the ceiling function as a relief function for addiction is lost, and there is a problem that it may even arouse the gambling spirit.

Therefore, it is necessary to devise a method that does not drastically reduce the number of balls held. For example, it can be said that it is appropriate to set the ball payout rate (base value) in the high base state to at least "100%≦ball payout rate" from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's willingness to play and gambling. Preferably, "100%≦ball output rate≦120% to 130%". A specific configuration for achieving such a high base state ball payout rate will be described in detail below.

In the case of the present embodiment, as already explained, since it is possible to win either "left-handed" or "right-handed" depending on the game state, it is "left-handed" if there is no electric sapo. means) and the lower starting port 35 (second starting means) do not win. On the other hand, if it is in a state with an electric sapo, it will be "right-handed advantage", so there is a possibility of winning the general winning port 43e and the lower starting port 35 (special figure 2 starting port) belonging to the right downstream route 3c. In addition, in a general gaming machine, the ball payout rate (low base ball payout rate) without an electric sapo (normal state or latent probability state) is generally 30% to 40% (at least less than 100%, preferably less than 50%), and the ball payout rate (high base ball payout rate) with an electric sapo (shorter working time state or variable probability state) is generally 80% to 95%, both of which are less than 100% (when left on). If the game machine 1 is used to explain, the assumed design value of the ball payout rate is, for example, regarding the average number of prizes won per minute without the electric sapo, the general prize winning openings 43a to 43d (3 prize balls) are 2, 0.6, 0.4, and 1.04, respectively. Regarding the average number of prizes won per minute in the non-playing state, if the general prize winning opening 43e (three prize balls) is 12.5 and the lower start opening 35 (one prize ball) is 58.2, the ball payout rate at high base is 95.7%.

Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in which it is necessary to distinguish between "left-handed" and "right-handed" depending on the game state, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned high base ball output rate from being extremely reduced by devising the arrangement configuration of the general winning holes 43a to 43e (3 prize balls), the upper start hole 34 (4 prize balls), and the lower start hole 35 (1 prize ball) and the number of prize balls. Specifically, it can be realized by the following methods (A) to (H).

(A) Increase the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 43e and/or the lower starting opening 35 (starting opening on the side of the normal variable winning device 41 (starting opening with electric chew)). Specifically, the number of prize balls is determined to be larger in the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flowing path 3c than in the general winning opening belonging to the left flowing path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is determined to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning port belonging to the left downstream path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the right flowing path 3c and the lower starting opening 35 is determined to be larger than the number of winning balls of the general winning opening belonging to the left flowing path 3b. For example, the number of general winning openings 43e is four, or the number of lower starting openings 35 is two.

(B) At least increase the number of general winning holes 43e (increase the number of general winning holes belonging to the right-flowing path 3c from 1 to 2, and raise the number of winnings (number of winnings/minute) for the general winning holes when hitting to the right). Specifically, the number of general winning openings (installed number) belonging to the right downstream path 3c is larger than the number of general winning openings (installed number) belonging to the left downstream path 3b. In this embodiment, four general prize-winning openings (general prize-winning openings 43a to 43d) belonging to the left flow path 3b are arranged.

(C) At least increase the winning rate (ball entry rate) of the general winning hole 43e (for example, increase from 12.5 balls/minute to 20 balls/minute). When providing a plurality of general winning openings 43e, at least one winning rate is increased. Specifically, the ball-entering rate M of the general winning hole belonging to the right-flowing path 3c is determined to be higher than the ball-entering rate N of the general winning hole belonging to the left-flowing path 3b.
In addition, in the case of this embodiment, since a plurality of general prize winning openings 43a to 43d are arranged, the following configuration may be adopted. If the lowest ball-entering rate among the general prize-winning holes 43a to 43d is "Nmin" and the highest ball-entering rate is "Nmax", the following relational expression (Equation 1) or (Equation 2) can be satisfied.
(Formula 1) "Nmin<M"
(Formula 2) “Nmax<M”
Also, in the case of this embodiment, there is one general prize winning opening 43e, but if a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, the following configuration may be adopted. When the lowest ball-entering rate of the general prize-winning hole 43e among the plurality of general prize-winning holes 43e is "Mmin" and the highest ball-entering rate is "Mmax", any one of the following relational expressions (Formula 3) to (Formula 6) can be satisfied.
(Formula 3) "N<Mmin" (when there is one general prize-winning opening belonging to the left downstream route 3b)
(Formula 4) “Nmin<Mmin”
(Formula 5) “Nmax<Mmin”
(Formula 6) “Nmax<Mmax”

(D) Lengthen the start INT (interval time until the start of opening of the movable wing 47) and/or end INT (interval time until the end of the general electric open game after the opening operation of the movable wing 47) of the general electric open game (for example, increase the start INT and/or the end INT from 500 ms to 700 ms). In this case, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand (increase the ball output rate) by avoiding useless balls (dead balls) at the time of continuous hitting, so-called "stopping shots". For example, the ball payout rate (BA) can be about 95% in the case of continuous hitting, and the payout rate can be about 120% in the case of stopping shots. This stopping effect is particularly effective when the number of prize balls at the lower starting port 35 is large (for example, about 3 to 4).

(E) One or a plurality of small wins are provided to cause a small win game operation in which the number of balls released during the small win game does not increase or decreases (in this embodiment, the small win is provided at least on the side of the special figure 2). For example, it is a small winning game operation in which the opening time of the big winning opening is short (about 0.1 second to 1 second), and the closing period of the big winning opening "start INT and/or end INT (the total time of each INT may be sufficient)" is a long time in the second order (for example, about 1 second to 5 seconds). Such a small-win game has a low ball-out performance, and when the game balls are left unattended, the ball-out cannot be increased (the ball-out rate during the small-win game is 100%) or the ball-out can be reduced (the ball-out rate during the small-win game is less than 100%). In this case, as in the case of (D) above, by making full use of the "stopping shot" during the start INT and the end INT, it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand against the ball output performance during the small win game. Therefore, the ball output rate can be improved. In particular, if a small win is won with a high probability (increase the frequency of occurrence of a small win game), for example, at least about 1/5 to 1/20, the effect is further enhanced.

(F) The number of prize balls for the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the upper starting port 34 . If the number of prize balls on the side of the starting port that can frequently win prizes during the electric sapo is increased, the stopping effect will increase (the degree of technical intervention will increase), and there is a risk of inviting a sense of inequality among players. Therefore, it is preferable to use a winning opening other than the lower starting opening 35 (particularly, a general winning opening belonging to the right downstream path 3c) as a winning opening that greatly affects the ball payout rate.

(G) The number of prize balls for the lower starting opening 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the general winning opening belonging to the right downstream path 3c. By increasing the number of winning balls in a ``general winning opening (general winning opening 43e) belonging to a right flow path 3c'' in which a stopping shot does not cause a difference in winning rate than the number of winning balls in a ``lower starting opening 35'' in which a stopping shot causes a difference in winning rate, it is possible to reduce capture elements by stopping hitting.

(H) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning port belonging to the right downstream path 3c is at least two. When the number of prize balls at the lower starting port 35 is 1, even if the winning rate is 100%, the net increase in number is 0, and the number of balls possessed by the player does not increase no matter how the opening operation of the lower starting port 35 is aimed at and how the player makes full use of the stopping shot. Therefore, by setting the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 to 1 and the number of prize balls in the general prize winning port belonging to the right flow down path 3c to at least 2, it is possible to completely eliminate the capture element by the stop shot and to improve the ball output rate.

In the case of (D) or (E) described above, there is a risk of creating a sense of inequality in the profits earned between those who make full use of stopping shots and those who do not. Therefore, it is preferable to employ the configurations (A) to (C) and (F) to (H) described above regarding the general winning openings that do not have the stopping effect. In particular, the configurations of (B), (C), (F) to (H) described above are effective in reducing the stop shot effect and improving the payout rate. Further, the number of the general prize winning openings belonging to the left downstream path 3c and the general winning openings belonging to the right downstream path 3c can be one or more.

(Modified example of model type)
In this embodiment, the ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type, but may be a model in which the game state transition mode is determined as follows, for example, the following (machine 1) to (machine 3) models.

(machine 1) "V variable type"
A specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided in the big prize opening, and when one or more specific jackpots (for example, probability variable jackpots 1 to 7) are won, the game ball is configured to easily pass through the specific area (passable), while when other jackpots (for example, time-saving jackpots 1 and 2) are won, passage through the specific area is configured to be difficult or impossible, and only when the game ball passes through the specific area (so-called "V winning"), the special pattern probability variable. It may be a so-called "V probability variable type" model that activates the function and shifts to the probability variable state or the latent probability state.

(Machine 2) "Fall lottery type"
In the case of a game state with a high probability state (latent probability state or probability variable state), a so-called "falling lottery type" model may be used, such as performing a lottery (falling lottery) for transition from a high probability state to a low probability state with a predetermined fall probability in each game. In this falling lottery type, when the falling lottery is won, the winning game (falling game) is shifted to a low probability state (at least the special pattern probability variable function is set to OFF), and the big win lottery in the winning game is also drawn in a low probability state. There are the following cases (A) to (C) in the game state transition mode when winning the fall lottery. (A) probability variable state (ST mode) → time-saving state (time-saving mode), (B) probability variable state → normal state (normal mode), (C) potential probability state (potential probability mode) → normal state (normal mode). In such a falling lottery type, the falling game is shifted to a game state involving at least a low probability state. Therefore, when the execution game in the normal state or the time saving state is counted as the ceiling game, it is preferable to count the falling game as the first game. It should be noted that, excluding the falling game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type model explained in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) are mainly different in "presence or absence of fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "presence or absence of fall transition control (fall transition control means) based on the result of the fall lottery". Therefore, regarding the matters related to the game performance described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), before winning the drop lottery (in the case of a game state with a high probability state), it is applicable to the embodiment related to the ST mode.

By the way, the conventional drop lottery type has only one drop probability regardless of the jackpot type (type of winning pattern), and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks interest in the game. Therefore, a plurality of fall probabilities are provided according to the types of big hits. In this case, the fall probabilities may be different for each jackpot, or the fall probabilities may be partially the same or different. Assuming that the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment is of the "falling lottery type", for example, the falling probability is 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 for the variable probability jackpots 1 to 3 (special figure 1 side), and 1/240 for the variable probability jackpots 4 to 7 (special figure 2 side). I can. Further, as means for providing a plurality of fall probabilities, it is possible to determine fall probabilities corresponding to set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, at least the first setting value and the second setting value can be configured to have different fall probabilities. For example, it can be determined that the lower the set value is, the higher the fall probability is.

In addition, the number of STs may be the same number of STs for each big hit, may be different for each, or may be partially different. Also, the number of STs can include not only a finite number of times but also an infinite number of times. For example, like variable probability jackpots 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs may be 25, 75, or 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be 100 or infinite. However, in the case of the falling lottery type, if the falling lottery is won before the number of STs is consumed, the state is forcibly shifted to a low probability state (the number of STs is forcibly set to zero). Further, when the falling lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect (the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling) may be executed by the effect means. In this case, it is possible to determine the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect at the time of falling according to the set value.

Regarding the fall lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be used.
(T1)
Acquisition means for acquiring a plurality of types of game information including first game information (random number for judging a big hit) and second game information (random number for judging a fall) based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, S314 in FIG. 11: In this example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for a variation pattern, and a random number for judging a fall can be acquired);
Lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery for a plurality of types of wins based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) for performing a variable display operation of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of symbols;
Winning game execution control means (FIG. 17) for controlling the execution of a winning game when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a win);
probability variation control means (S412 in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 18, FIG. 21, FIG. 22) capable of controlling a high-probability state in which the lottery probability of winning by the lottery means is higher than a predetermined normal probability after the winning game is completed;
fall lottery means (main control unit 20) for executing a fall lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the high-probability state to the low-probability state based on the second game information (random value for fall determination) when the high-probability state is in progress;
A game machine T comprising drop transition control means (main control unit 20) for controlling the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
The falling lottery probability of the falling lottery means can be made different between when the first win is won (when the winning game is executed by the first win) and when the second win is won (when the winning game by the second win is executed).

(T2)
The game machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the big win lottery will be a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages. In this case, the setting values that can be changed in a plurality of steps include at least a first setting value and a second setting value, and the first setting value and the second setting value can be configured to have different fall probabilities.

(T3)
The game machine T is configured such that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit,
The setting values that can be changed in multiple stages include at least a first setting value and a second setting value,
The fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means is different between when the first win is won and when the second win is won,
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second win may not be included in the results of the lottery by the lottery means.

The game machine T can be configured to be able to control a plurality of types of game states (at least two game states including the variable probability state and/or the latent probability state among the variable probability state, the latent probability state, the time saving state and the normal state). Further, in ((T1) to (T3), setting suggestion performance executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance suggesting the current set value can be further provided when the drop lottery by the drop lottery means is won.

(Machine 3) "Limiter mounted type"
When a jackpot is won (or a specific jackpot is won), a so-called ``limiter-equipped type'' model having a limiter function for limiting the number of times of shifting to a high probability state by a probability variation control means to a predetermined upper limit number of times (limit number of times) may be used. This limiter-equipped type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301, and the like.

In the case of a limiter-equipped type, the game state after the end of the big win game is shifted to a game state (probability variable state or latent certainty state) accompanied by a high probability state until the number of winning times of the big win reaches a predetermined limit number of times (until the number of times of continuous operation of the condition device reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times). For example, when the limit number of times is 5, the game state after the big win game is controlled to a high probability state from the first big win to the fourth big win, and the benefit of the big win lottery under the high probability state can be received up to four big wins. However, when the fifth big win is won, the ``limiter function'' starts to operate (limiter function ON) assuming that the number of times of limit has been reached, and the game state after the big win game ends is shifted to a game state with a low probability state (time saving state or normal state). When a big win is won during the operation of the limiter function, the limiter function in operation is released (limiter function is turned off), and the game state after the end of the big win game is shifted to a game state accompanied by a high probability state until the number of limit times is reached again. In this respect, a limiter machine with a limit number of times of 5 is also called a "five-pack machine".

By the way, the conventional limiter machine has only one type of limit number, and the game tends to be monotonous and lacks interest in the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided according to the types of jackpots. In this case, the number of limit times may be different for each jackpot, or the number of limit times may be partially different.

For example, jackpots A to D may be provided, and the number of jackpots A to D may be limited to 2, 3, 4, or 5 times. Also, the symbol lottery rate for each big hit can be determined as appropriate. In addition, depending on which jackpot is won, it is possible to appropriately determine whether to shift to the variable probability state or to the latent probability state. For example, all of the jackpots A to C may be shifted to the variable probability state or the latent probability state, or only one or a plurality of specific jackpots may be shifted to the variable probability state (for example, when the jackpot A is won, the state is shifted to the probability variable state, and when the other jackpots B, C, and D are won, the state is shifted to the probability state). In addition, although the number of STs is preferably infinite, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, the number of STs may be different, or the number of STs may be partially different. When the number of times of ST is finite, even if the number of times of ST ends and the state is shifted to a normal state or a time saving state, the game state after the big winning game can be shifted again to a game state accompanied by a high probability state until the number of times of limit is reached. When a specific jackpot among jackpots A to D is won, it may be shifted to a game state accompanied by a low-probability state (time-saving state or normal state) without shifting to the high-probability state, and whether to shift to the time-saving state or the normal state can be appropriately determined.

In the case of the limiter machine as well, regarding the game properties described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34), the game state with a high probability state before reaching the limiter count can be applied to the ST mode embodiment, and the game state with a low probability state after reaching the limiter count can be applied to an embodiment regarding a normal state or a time saving state (game state after reaching the limit count).

(Appearance of gaming machine seen from the front: Fig. 35)
For easy understanding, the appearance of the gaming machine of the present invention when viewed from the front will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 35, a frame 1010 is the same as the front frame 2 arranged openable and closable on the front side of the outer frame 4 (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "frame"), and is composed of a frame upper part 1011, a frame middle part 1012, and a frame lower part 1013, and has a viewing window for viewing the game area. The frame 1010 here roughly depicts the shape and size visually recognized when the gaming machine is viewed from the front (front). Various shapes and sizes are used for the front frame 2, and it is free to adopt any shape and size. The frame 1010 here has an upper frame portion 1011 made of horizontal members located at the top, a frame middle portion 1012 made of vertical members located on both left and right sides, and a panel-shaped frame lower portion 1013 located on the lower side, and has a rectangular frame shape that forms a rectangular viewing window as a whole.

1020 is the game board described as the game board 3 in FIG. 2, and is mounted in a game board storage frame attached to the rear surface of the front frame 2 or in a game board storage frame (not shown) provided in the outer frame 4. That is, the game board is attached to the game board storage frame (hereinafter referred to as "main body frame") regardless of whether it is attached to the front frame 2 side or the outer frame 4 side. A game board 1020 mounted on the main body frame 1020 has a game area 1021 (game area 3a in FIG. 2) where game balls flow down inside the guardrail and a non-game area 1022 (four corners of the game board 3 in FIG. 2) outside the guardrail when the game machine is viewed from the front.

The game board 1020 is provided with a main liquid crystal display device 1031 (liquid crystal display device 36 in FIG. 2) in the center of the game area 1021 when viewed from the front, and a sub liquid crystal display device 1032 below the game area. 1023 denotes a starting opening (upper starting opening 34 in FIG. 2), and 1024 denotes a big winning opening (large winning opening 50 in FIG. 2).

The relationship between the game board 1020 and the frame 1010 is such that the frame 1010 is positioned in front of the game board 1020 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game board is partly covered with the frame 1010 . That is, the game board has a part that is covered by the upper part 1011, the middle part 1012, and the lower part 1013 of the frame and cannot be seen from the front side. The main liquid crystal display device 1031 has a rectangular display surface, and is provided so that the entire display surface can be seen from the front side through the viewing window. In other words, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 is provided in such a size, shape and arrangement that its display surface is not hidden by the frame 1010 . A sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 positioned below the main liquid crystal display device 1031 in the game board surface is provided in a state where the lower part of the display surface thereof is covered with a lower frame portion 1013 .

However, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 can also be provided such that a portion thereof is covered by a portion of the frame 1010 . Also, the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 can be provided so that the entire display surface can be seen through the viewing window, that is, no part of the display surface is covered by the lower frame portion 1013 . A liquid crystal display device 1030 including the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 functions as image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image. The sub liquid crystal display device 1032 can be omitted as appropriate.

The frame lower portion 1013 corresponds to the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is composed of an upper tray 1013a corresponding to the upper tray unit 8, a lower tray 1013b, and a base portion 1013c when viewed from the front. The upper tray 1013a is a front view of the upper receiving tray unit 8 in FIG. As the lower operation means 1041 of the operation means 1040 , the production button 13 is provided on the upper plate 1013 a , and the production button is provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame as the upper operation means 1042 .

A base portion 1013c of the lower frame portion 1013 corresponds to the lower portion of the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is provided with a handle 1050 (firing operation handle 15) when viewed from the front.

Pinball game machines display identification information consisting of letters, figures, symbols, three-dimensional shapes, combinations of these, or combinations of these with colors (marks under Article 2 of the Trademark Law) in places other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 36A shows an example in which the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is attached as identification information to the game board surface, more precisely, the game area 1021 of the game board, and FIG.

<Other Embodiments 1 to 4>
<1. Alternative Embodiment 1: Displaying Identification Information on LCD Screen>
(1-1: Conventional problems)
By the way, in recent gaming machines, there are various problems other than the problems that may impair the player's interest as explained above. This point will now be described in detail.

Compared to the game machines that were introduced to the market more than ten years ago, current game machines have various points of change. Up until now, we have seen an increase in liquid crystal size, board size, and operation devices (operating means such as buttons and levers), but the size of the game machine itself (in short, length x width size) did not change that much.

One of the reasons why the size of the main body of the gaming machine did not change significantly is that the space in which the gaming machine can be installed is limited (that is, the appropriate size is fixed). If the manufacturer of the game machine ignores this point and sets the size freely, there will be a problem that the machine will not fit in the installation space even if it is delivered to the game hall (pachinko hall) and installed.

Amusement arcades have facilities for installing game machines, and the number of machines to be installed in a line is determined taking into consideration the space between game machines. In addition, a data display machine (a display machine showing the number of big hits and the current number of revolutions, for example, the data counter DT shown in FIG. 3) is installed on the upper part of the gaming machine. Therefore, since it was believed that the size of the gaming machine could not be increased any further in the left-right direction and the upward direction, the size of the gaming machine main body did not change so much.

However, as mentioned above, the situation has changed in the last few years, and game machines have actually been launched on the market, such as the provision of sub-liquid crystals, operation devices, light emitting means, etc. on the left and right parts (especially the right side) of the game machine main body, and the provision of movable objects that protrude so as to cover the data display machine in the upper part of the game machine main body, or a structure that protrudes upward enough to hide the data display machine in the standby state.

All of these were made for the purpose of "increasing the decorative effect". And while it can be evaluated that the effect is actually manifested (there are a certain number of players who prefer luxuriously decorated gaming machines), there is also the view that the conventional unspoken rules such as ``Keep the data display machine visible to the player'' and ``Keep the left and right parts of the main body out of the way because the front door of the game machine opens and closes'' have been broken.

In this way, when a part or all of the gaming machine reaches a turning point, there are quite a few cases where the effects that have been achieved in the past are reduced or completely lost as compensation.

What I will explain next is, as mentioned above, a new configuration adopted to achieve a certain purpose (in the above-mentioned example, a configuration in which the size of the main body of the game machine is increased in order to enhance the decorative effect), in the case where the previously achieved effect (in the above-mentioned example, the data display machine was easily visible because the upper part of the game machine did not protrude) is lost. I will elaborate on that point.

First, as an adverse effect of the expansion trend of gaming machines, the reduction in the identification power of "identification information" will be cited as a problem, and the means for solving this problem will be described. Various types and purposes of identification information have conventionally been attached to game machines, as shown below.
(i) For example, "model name (model name)", "jackpot probability", "probability variable entry rate", "number of winning balls", etc. are written and attached on stickers outside the game area on the game board.
(ii) For example, outside the game area on the game board, "variation state of special symbols", "number of balls with special symbols activated (reserved number)", "variation state of normal symbols", "number of activated balls with normal symbols suspended", "number of jackpot rounds", etc. are displayed by a plurality of LEDs.
(iii) For example, within or outside the game area, identification information such as “model name (subject),” “model name (subtitle),” “face and name of characters appearing in the gaming machine,” “instructions such as hitting right or aiming,” and “game method (game explanation)” are arranged as structures (movable bodies, non-movable bodies), printed on the game board surface or game parts, or attached as stickers.

Conventionally, in a game machine, for example, a pinball game machine, when a ball is entered into a starting hole, an internal lottery for a big win is performed and a pattern variation display game is performed, and during the pattern variation display game, various advance notice effects reflecting the results of the internal lottery are displayed to entertain the game. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, there is also known a gaming machine in which the model name, manufacturer name, etc. are arranged on the frame or on the board for the purpose of exhibiting a trademark function (such as a function of identifying one's own and others' products) (for example, JP-A-2001-259169, JP-A-2018-175949).

However, due to the recent expansion of gaming machines and the excessive pursuit of decorative effects, it has become possible to arrange a large number of identification information, which has caused problems related to the display of identification information (for example, identification information may be overlooked, identification information may be misidentified as different identification information, and the purpose of displaying identification information may not be accurately conveyed to players, traders, or third parties).

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that solves the problem of displaying identification information.

A specific solution will be described later, but this makes it possible to provide a game that can solve the problem of displaying identification information.

Looking at the problem in more detail, in the past, for example, a logo representing the model name was often placed near the liquid crystal, and while it was effective as a "trademark" or "service mark" that indicated the model to players and traders, it also played a role as a "drawing means" by moving or emitting light at a predetermined timing (such as when a notice effect with high expectation of winning occurred).

However, in the example of the prior art document (for example, FIG. 1 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949), as a result of increasing the degree of freedom of placement, placing the logo in the frame (that is, displaying it larger at a higher position) has increased the effect as a trademark or service mark, but the distance from the display means has increased (that is, it has fallen out of the player's point of view), so the effect as a production means has decreased.

(Solution)
Other embodiments 1 to 4 are shown below as means for solving the above-described problems (problems). According to the different embodiments 1 to 4, it is possible to provide a game machine that has a performance effect by displaying the identification information in an appropriate display mode as necessary while securing the function as identification information having a display function to identify the own and other products, the source display function, and other performance and characteristic display functions.

(1-2: Specific example of another embodiment 1)
38 to 43A and 43B show examples in which various identification information is written on the gaming machine. For the sake of explanation, the diagrams are divided for each type of identification information, but in an actual game machine, different types of identification information may be mixed.

(Purpose of displaying identification information)
When a player who has entered a game parlor selects a table on which to play, what is the basis for selection differs between players. An example that may serve as a basis for selection is as follows.
(i) Amusement machines that have just been introduced or installed in amusement arcades,
(ii) a game machine that is a fan of the original work that is the motif;
(iii) A gaming machine that has a performance that one likes (hard to hit a big hit but a large number of jackpot balls, or a small number of jackpot balls to easily hit a jackpot, etc.). Of course, there are other reasons for choosing a game machine for each person.

There are various reasons why various kinds of identification information are attached to game machines. For example, when the type of identification information is "model name", one of the reasons why the identification information is attached is to improve the ability to identify to the player what kind of model the machine is. If the model name is not described, it is difficult for the player to find the desired gaming machine, or at least it is difficult to say that it is easy.

Further, when the type of identification information is "performance display", one of the reasons why the identification information is attached is to improve the ability to identify to the player what the performance of the model is. If the performance indication is not described, it is difficult, or at least not easy, to identify what kind of performance the model has.

In any case, when a player selects a gaming machine, he confirms some identification information displayed on the gaming machine to at least recognize whether or not it is the intended gaming machine, and also confirms whether any of the above conditions (selection grounds) are satisfied.

38 to 43A and 43B, the types of identification information and the display position, display size, etc. suitable for each identification information will be described below.

(1-2-1: Type/category of “identification information other than liquid crystal”)
(b) Model name First, the model name will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 38, in the upper part of the front frame 1010 of the gaming machine 1, a three-dimensional structure (model name logo: model name display object, logo accessory, etc.) 1090 with a model name “Fujimaru-kun” is placed. This logo function (model name logo) 1090 has each character framed with a plated member, light emitting means (full-color LED, etc.) inside each character, and a translucent member on the front side thereof. Each character has a display area of approximately 10 cm long by 10 cm wide. A first font (here, a POP font) is used as the font (character style) with the intention of giving a soft and friendly impression. As shown in the figure, the model name is written in a conspicuous position (upper part of the board surface, upper part of the frame 1011, etc.) in a conspicuous size (for example, a person with a visual acuity of 0.7 can recognize the characters even if they are several meters away).

The term "logo" (mark) as used herein is a concept that includes a "logotype" consisting of characters and a "logomark" consisting of symbols, patterns, etc., and may consist of only a logotype or a logomark, or may consist of both a logotype and a logomark. In addition, although the logotype refers to stylized or decorated characters or character strings, it also includes characters or character strings using very common fonts.

Further, the suitable arrangement and size differ depending on whether (a) it is desired to make it stand out from "a person who is selecting a gaming machine" or (b) to make it stand out from "a person who is currently playing a game". In the case of the former (a), it is easy to see from a distance if it is placed "upper", "in front", and "side" as much as possible.

Next, a sticker 1061 on which the model name is written is arranged at the bottom of the game board surface. More precisely, on one sticker,
(b) P: A mark indicating that the aircraft is compliant with the new regulations that came into effect in February 2019;
(B) Mr. Fujimaru: "Theme (main title)" in the model name,
(C) ~ Save Fujika-chan ~: "Subtitle" in the model name,
(d) [with 6 settings]: a description indicating that it has a 6-step setting function;
(e) jackpot probability: setting 1 to setting 6 (1/300 to 1/240): description indicating the jackpot probability at the lowest setting and the highest setting,
(f) Probable variable rush rate: 65%: description indicating the probable variable rush rate,
(g) Number of Prize Balls: 4 & 1 & 10 & 15: A description indicating the number of prize balls at the time of winning the starting hole 1 & starting hole 2 & other winning holes & large winning holes is added.

A player can know both the model name and the performance display by looking at this. On the other hand, there is also a drawback, since the display area (size of the sticker) is small, the contents cannot be identified unless you are very close.

It should be noted that if the display area is enlarged in order to solve the above-mentioned difficulties, the size of the sticker will increase, resulting in an increase in cost, and if the sticker with a large amount of information is enlarged, the place where it can be placed is limited. Since the notation by this sticker is not intended to give softness and friendliness to the player, the font of the characters adopts the second font (gothic type here).

Further, as shown in FIG. 43A, a liquid crystal display device 1030 (because this is a case of dealing with one liquid crystal display device, the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 will be simply referred to as the liquid crystal display device 1030. The same applies hereinafter) has a model name 1080 of "Fujimaru-kun ~ save Fujika-chan ~ [with six settings]" at a predetermined display timing (for example, "waiting for customers", "during a big hit game", and "specific notice"). during production", etc.). Liquid crystal displays have a certain degree of freedom of expression, such as changing colors, emitting light, and enlarging (or reducing) the display size. Here, the main title is displayed in the first font (POP type) like the logo accessory described above, and the subtitle is also displayed in the first font (POP type) accordingly. Information with settings is highlighted in red because it is important information for the player.

(b) Function name Next, the function name will be explained.
The “function” in the function name refers to the functions that make up the gaming machine in a broad sense, such as structural functions such as “handle”, “electric chew”, and “attacker (big prize opening)”, control functions such as “jackpot game”, “probability variable game”, and “small win rush”, and quality functions such as “3D sound” and “full color LED”. Furthermore, among these function names, terms that are widely used among those skilled in the art (generic names) may be used as general function names (regular function names and non-special function names are also acceptable), and those set with model-specific names (such as "Daikichi RUSH" and "DANGER SOUND" described later) may be separately called special function names. Reasons for setting a model-specific name include, for example,
(i) To impress the player with the model image,
(ii) In order to impress the player with the amount of benefits,
(iii) To make an impression of product features (selling points), and the like.

As shown in FIG. 39, on the game board surface 1020 of the game machine 1 is written a function name 1070 consisting of characters "MAX BONUS". Among the descriptions of ``5R'', ``7R'' and ``10R'' in the probability variable jackpots 1 to 7 and the short time jackpots 1 and 2 in the column of ``hit contents'' in FIG. However, there are cases where there are only "4R jackpot" and "8R jackpot" in other models. Therefore, even if "8R jackpot!" is displayed on a gaming machine that is seen for the first time, it is difficult to know whether or not that is the maximum advantage for that model.

Therefore, in this game machine, this 10R big win is called ``MAX BONUS'', and by emitting light during the 10R big win, the characters of ``MAX BONUS'' are made to recognize that this 10R big win is the maximum degree of advantage in this model, and a premium feeling (special feeling) is given to the player.

Subsequently, a function name 1070 consisting of characters "Great Good Luck RUSH" is written on the lower right of the game board surface 1020 . In this game machine, the variable probability state (ST mode) is called "Daiyoshi RUSH", and a light emitting means is provided so that the characters of Daikichi RUSH emit light during the variable probability state. The characters Daikichi RUSH are not designed to be individually lit one by one, and it is only necessary to distinguish between the lit state (or specific color lit state) and the non-lit state (or non-special color lit state). In this respect, it is different from the logo accessory 1090 indicating the model name. In addition, when the characters of Daikichi RUSH are controlled to be in the lighting state, they may be in the lighting state in all ST modes, or from the viewpoint of specially congratulating the player, either the ST75 mode or ST mode 100, which has a relatively high degree of advantage, or only the ST100 mode, which has the highest degree of advantage, may be controlled to be in the lighting state. Also, the LEDs may be lit in different colors depending on the ST mode.

Also, in the game machine, the ``probability variable state'' is displayed as a function name on the game board, but not limited to this, for example, a special function called ``small hit rush'' may be given a predetermined name. In any case, the purpose and effect are the functions of the gaming machine (big win game, small win game, time saving state (time saving game), probability variable state (probability variable game), small hit rush, AT (assist time) game, RT (replay time) game, ART (assist replay time) game, chance mode (advantageous state where AT game etc. are easy to win), and other privilege games that are advantageous to players)). When turned ON (a state in which a privilege game is given), the function ON can be indicated to the player by the light emission state (lighting/non-lighting, specific color lighting/non-specific color lighting, flashing/lighting or extinguishing = the former is function ON).

Next, in the lower part 1013 of the game machine frame 1010, a function name 1070 "DANGER SOUND" is arranged in a three-dimensional structure display mode. This is a function name displayed for the purpose of clearly conveying the function of the speaker to the player. The direct translation is "dangerous sound", but of course, the sound does not pose any danger to the human body, and it conveys that the deep bass that is often used for sound effects in so-called "horror movies" is easy to hear. In addition, the same frame is often used for several years in order to establish the manufacturer's image and to suppress cost increases. Therefore, the game machine frame used for the horror game and the game machine frame used for the romance drama game may be the same. Therefore, when a function name such as "DANGER SOUND" is displayed in a game machine frame, it is preferable to display it on the edge of the game machine (for example, the lower end as shown in the drawing) or the outer surface (top surface or left and right outer surfaces). As a result, even when "DANGER SOUND" is displayed on a model of a romantic drama, for example, it is difficult for the player to see it, so that the sense of discomfort is reduced. Similarly, the display color is less conspicuous than the model name, and "DANGER SOUND" has a color similar to the color of the gaming machine frame.

(C) Performance display (jackpot probability, ball output, presence or absence of setting function)
Next, the performance display will be explained.
Performance indications in gaming machines, especially pinball gaming machines, include "jackpot probability (low probability, high probability)", "number of prize balls", "number of counts", "probability variable entry rate & continuation rate", and "presence or absence of setting function". In other words, it is information that serves as an index when a player selects a gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, a performance display 1071 of “setting 1 to setting 6, 1/199 to 1/149” is displayed on the upper left outer surface of the gaming machine frame 1010 as a printed matter (cell sheet). In addition, a performance display 1071 reading "probability variable entry rate & continuation rate, 85%" is also displayed in the form of a printed matter (cell sheet) on the upper right outer surface of the gaming machine frame. All of them are written in large characters (the size of the display area is 10 cm long and 20 cm wide, and the size of the characters is the size that can be written in the entire display area) so as to be conspicuous to the player. In order to enhance the appeal to the player, the font is written in the first font (POP type), and only the numbers are red with a black border.

The purpose of displaying these performance displays 1071 in the gaming machine frame 1010 is to increase the possibility that the model will be selected by displaying the performance of the model in a more conspicuous position for a player who has not yet decided (has no idea) which model to play and who wants to play with a model having a specific performance (for example, a model with a high probability variable continuation rate, a model with a jackpot probability higher than 1/200 (middle spec or sweet digital type), etc.).

In addition, on the upper part of the gaming machine board surface 1020, a setting machine mark (mark) 1081 "with setting" is displayed as a sticker. This sticker can be used not only for the model concerned, but also for the next model (meaning the next model developed and sold by the relevant manufacturer) and later models, which can reduce waste in terms of cost. Furthermore, there is an advantage that the player can easily understand the meaning of the mark (that the machine is a model with settings) by using it for a long period of time. The font is the third font (Mincho typeface), assuming that it will be commonly used by multiple models.

Furthermore, as already described with reference to FIG. 38, a sticker 1061 on which the model name is written is arranged at the bottom of the game board surface. As mentioned above, this sticker not only lists the model name, but also details the performance of the model. Also, as already mentioned, the font of the characters is the second font (gothic).

Therefore, the game machine displays a performance display that appeals to the player who is selecting the game machine (a standing player) and a performance display that can be confirmed by the player who has decided on the game machine (a seated player) as necessary, and it can be seen that the display is performed in a position, size, and font suitable for achieving each purpose.

(d) Warning signs (warning signs, anti-fraud measures completed signs)
Next, warning display will be described.
Warning displays in gaming machines all have in common that they give attention to the person who sees the display, but they are roughly divided into two types depending on the target person. These two cases are a case where a player is targeted and a case where a store clerk (person involved in amusement arcade) is targeted. In the case of the latter clerk as the target person, examples of warning displays include the installation method (assembly method, etc.) of the game machine and the display warning of places where injuries are likely to occur (hands are likely to be pinched).

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of warning display for the player will be described. Warning displays for players can be further classified into several types. The first is ``warning display for matters affecting the player (in other words, ``attention display''), and the second is ``warning display for matters affecting the gaming machine (in other words, ``warning display''). The third is "warning display (in other words, "advisory display") for matters that affect the game".

At the top of the game board surface 1020, there are warning signs 1072 that read, ``Don't play continuously for a long time, take a proper break,'' and ``Be careful because the upper part of the board protrudes. Be careful of the (blowing) wind. Also, a warning display 1072 is displayed near the upper plate of the game machine frame, saying "Be careful not to pinch your hand in the (pop-up) button". These correspond to the above-mentioned "warning display".

Although we call attention to the lowest level of possible risk, if the text is too long to completely eliminate all risks, people will not read it. In addition, we do not describe all possible risks (hand pinching, pointing, dropping an object placed on a button, dropping a cigarette in surprise) with regard to warning signs for operation means, but at least considering the importance of risks such as those with a high probability of occurrence, or those with a low probability of occurrence but causing great damage if they occur, we only display the necessary warning signs. In addition, each of the warning displays has a display area of only about 2 to 4 cm in length and 3 to 10 cm in width, the font of the characters is the second font (gothic), and the color of the characters is black.

Subsequently, at the lower left of the game board surface 1020, there is displayed a warning display 1073 consisting of the characters "Equipped with fraud detection system!". This corresponds to the above-mentioned "warning display". Types of fraudulent use of game machines include "radio waves," "magnets," "dotsuki," and "large balls." Therefore, it indicates that anti-fraud measures have been taken in advance, and enhances the crime prevention effect.

Since this "warning display" is preferably a display conspicuous to the player (more precisely, a person who tries to cheat), in FIG. The base background color is yellow, the character color is red, and the base portion is bordered in black.

Finally, on the upper left side of the game machine frame 1010, it is described that ``the character can be stored by pressing the [release button] when the character is movable'', which corresponds to the ``advice display'' (advice display 1074). That is, even if the player is unaware of it, the player will not be injured or the gaming machine will not malfunction, but one option that the player can select is displayed.

(e) Intellectual property license (copyright, patent right, trademark right, etc.)
Next, the intellectual property license will be explained.
Most of the gaming machines of recent years are based on famous copyrights (for example, cartoons, animations, dramas, movies, novels, athletes, entertainers, etc.). In this case, there is an individual or corporation that manages the copyright, so when using it, development starts after signing a license agreement, and during development, the work of having the copyright owner, called an approval, confirm the product of the development process is repeated many times. The license agreement number and the license agreement (copyright license) indicate that the approval has been officially completed. In some cases, there is only a mark that indicates the copyright source, and in some cases, an identification number that is a combination of numbers and alphabets is attached.

In addition, when using music other than that, it is often the case that a license number is displayed after signing a contract with a corporation that comprehensively licenses the use of music.

Furthermore, if you want to separately use intellectual property rights (patent rights, trademark rights, etc.) that are not fully covered by the copyright holder, you will need to enter into a license agreement with the right holder.

42, a sticker (license certificate sticker) 1062 reading "JoyForJoy 'Interesting' Sai Iloilo. License 123456" is affixed to the lower right of the game board surface 1020, more precisely outside the game area (outside the outer rail) on the game board surface. This indicates that a company "JFJ" has issued a license certificate as the copyright holder of the gaming machine, and the license number is "123456". In addition, "'Funny' Sai Iloilo." indicates the corporate slogan of "JFJ."

Since this mark (license seal) 1062 is issued by the copyright holder, the font indicating the company name is displayed in a special font (fourth font: original font) specified by the company, and the portion indicating the license number is displayed in a general-purpose second font (gothic).

Subsequently, a sticker (property certificate sticker) 1063 "(C mark on circle) supervised by JFJ" is attached to the upper left of the game board surface 1020, more precisely outside the game area (outside the outer rail) on the game board surface. The aforementioned license certificate is proof that the use of the copyright has been granted comprehensively, and this proof of suitability seal is proof that the above-mentioned approval work has been properly completed. Since the certificate of fitness sticker is prepared by the developer side, the font is displayed in the general-purpose second font (Gothic typeface).

Further, on the liquid crystal display device 1030 as well, a suitability certificate display 1064 of "(C mark on circle) JFJ" is displayed at predetermined timings (for example, "waiting for customers (during "demonstration start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demonstration display)"), "during jackpot game (for example, during start INT, end INT)", "during specific notice effect (for example, during ready-to-win effect)", etc.). This indicates to the player that intellectual property rights have been appropriately handled in the gaming machine. As described above, stickers are displayed outside the game area, but since there is a possibility that they may not notice them due to the display position and display size, they are displayed at a predetermined timing as a reminder. The second font (Gothic) and the fourth font (company original font) are preferable, and at least fonts such as the first font (POP) that destroy the image of the company or give a wrong image are not preferable.

(f) Other indications (slogan, good and bad)
Finally, other displays will be explained.
It should be noted that "other display" means that the mark does not belong to the above-mentioned (a) model name to (d) warning display, and "other display" does not belong to the category to which the mark belongs.

As shown in FIG. 43A, above the gaming machine frame 1010, a catch phrase 1065 is displayed that reads, "It's funny!" This catchphrase 1065 does not indicate the model name, but rather the catchphrase of the company that developed the game machine. Assuming that the company that developed the game machine uses (continuously) multiple models and is recognized by the players to some extent, it is placed in a conspicuous position above the game machine frame. However, the display size is smaller than the model name. The font is the fourth font (original font).

Next, on the upper right of the gaming machine frame 1010 , “Fujimaru-kun” is arranged as a resin-molded figure (three-dimensional model) 1066 . Although there is no textual information, the mark (figure) is placed in a position that is easy to see even from a distance, so it is positioned as the "face" of the game machine.

Next, "Fujika-chan" is arranged as a movable accessory 1067 near the center of the game board. In the standby state (initial position, standby position), since the game ball overlaps the rollable stage, it is visible above the eyes, and the hand is also lowered (invisible state). When the predetermined effect is generated, the area below the mouth (the lower half of the face) can be seen by moving upward, and the hand jumps upward while making a peace sign.

Next, on the left side of the game board 1020 is printed an idiom display 1068 consisting of the characters "encourage good, punish bad." Since the game machine is based on the concept of Fujimaru-kun punishing evil, a four-letter idiom that clearly shows the concept is written on the game board. The display size is relatively large (compared to the copyright license seal and performance display seal), but smaller than the model name. Also, the font of the characters is the third font (Mincho).

Here, FIG. 43B shows an example in which substantially the same contents as those indicated by the marks shown in FIG. 43A are displayed on the display means (liquid crystal display device) 1030. FIG. A square frame in FIG. 43B represents the outer frame of the display means 1030 . The display means 1030 displays a catchphrase display 1065b, a character A (boy character) 1066b, a character B (girl character) 1067b, and an idiom display 1068b. The various marks displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame are at a certain distance (separate) from each other, but are displayed simultaneously and close to each other on the display means to form a single image. That is, the model is a "historical drama" based on the concept of "rewarding good and punishing evil" (phrase display 1068b), with a boy character (character A) and a girl character (character B) appearing as main characters (characters 1066b and 1067b), and an image that it is a "model that is a little different (differentiated from other models)" (a catchphrase display 1065b).

As described above, the content indicated by the mark in FIG. 43A and the displayed object displayed on the display means in FIG. 43B are related, but they have common points and differences. For example, the mark placed on the game board displays the four-letter idiom ``Kanshin Jaku Eku'', but the display on the display means adds the information ``Kanzen Jaku Eki Jidaigeki''. In addition, although the mark arranged in the game machine frame shows "Fujimaru-kun's face", the displayed object on the display means shows a character in which "Fujimaru-kun is deformed".

When displaying a mark on a game board surface or a game machine frame, there are impediments that prevent the pursuit of sophistication in all aspects, such as the display size and the reproducibility of the original (the appearance of the character and the touch of the picture). In that case, the minimum necessary display size (and/or information amount) and minimum necessary reproduction of the original are secured for the marks on the game board surface and the game machine frame, and by displaying them on the display means 1030 in a complementary manner, it is possible to convey to the player the original font, color tone, picture touch, accurate information, etc. of each mark.

(1-2-2: Arrangement of “identification information other than liquid crystal”)
The above is the description of the types of various marks (identification information). As explained above, it has become clear that the optimal display method (suitable display position, suitable display size, suitable font, etc.) differs depending on the type of mark. Next, the optimal display method based on the "display position" of the mark will be explained instead of the optimal display method based on the "type" of the mark.

(b) The mark is in the frame First, the mark in the frame can make the mark stand out (the first thing that catches the eye) when viewed from a distance (viewed from a position where the entire gaming machine can be seen). However, in order to satisfy the requirement, it is necessary to have a certain size (display size) or more, and as a single requirement, it is preferable to have at least a display size of 10 cm long x 10 cm wide. Also, as a composite requirement, it is preferable that the display size is at least equal to or larger than that of the mark placed outside the frame (that is, on the game board surface, etc.). This point will be described later in detail.

In addition, when the mark in the frame is used continuously over a plurality of models, the display position can be fixed and/or the display method (sticker, print, logo, and other display methods) can be shared, so that the effect of imprinting on the player can be expected, and the cost reduction effect can be expected.

In addition, since the mark on the frame has large unevenness compared to the game board surface, it is relatively difficult to secure a flat area when viewed from a close distance. Therefore, since it is difficult (or invisible) for a seated player to see, such as the upper end (upper surface, upper outer side), left and right outer sides, etc., which are flat areas, it is preferable to arrange the mark toward other than the seated player (for example, a player who is selecting a gaming machine, a game store staff, etc.).

(B-1) The mark is on the game board surface and within the game area First, the mark on the game board surface (game board 3) within the game area 3a (in a broad sense, the area inside the outer rail (outer rail) of the ball guide rail 5; in a narrow sense, the area inside the outer rail and where the game ball can roll) can make the mark stand out to the seated players. However, in order to satisfy the requirement, it is still necessary to have a certain size (display size), and as a single requirement, it is preferable to have at least a display size of 10 cm in length × 10 cm in width. Also, as a composite requirement, it is preferable to have a display size that is at least equal to or larger than that of the mark placed in the frame. This point will be described later in detail.

Also, the mark in the game area 3a can serve not only as a simple mark, but also as an effect means. However, in order to satisfy the requirements, a combination with light emitting means or a combination with display means such as a liquid crystal display device is required. In addition, if the role of the means of presentation is strengthened, there is a risk that the mark will not be able to fulfill its role sufficiently, so a balance is required. This point will be described later in detail.

(B-2) The mark is outside the game board surface and the game area First, the mark outside the game area on the game board surface (the area outside the outer rail) is characterized by being visible only to a seated player (or a person who intentionally brings his face close to the game board surface). In the first place, since the area outside the game area (non-game area) itself on the game board surface is not so large, it is difficult to arrange a mark of a large display size. The advantage of arranging in the non-game area is that the player cannot touch it (because of the presence of the glass door 6 (transparent glass)) and that the game ball does not rub against it because it is not an area where the game ball rolls. However, since the non-game area is rarely intentionally illuminated, the mark in the non-game area almost never doubles as the above-described effect means.

(C-1) The mark is immovable on the frame A mark that is immovable on the frame is basically a non-detachable attached logo, sticker, printed material, etc., so it is assumed that the degree of unevenness will be less than when it is a movable object. However, if it is a movable body, it is necessary to provide a mechanism to move it around, so the arrangement and size will be slightly restricted.

(C-2) The mark is immovable on the game board There are various possibilities for the mark to be immovable on the game board. Since the front surface is covered with glass, there is no possibility that it will be touched by a player, so the mounting strength need not be so high.

(D-1) The mark is a movable body on the frame A mark that is a movable body on the frame is expected to have a greater degree of unevenness (protruding upward, protruding forward, etc.) than non-removable attached logos or stickers. However, if it is a movable body, it is necessary to provide a mechanism to move it around, so the arrangement and size are somewhat limited. Also, since most of the items on the frame can be touched by the player, this point can be said to be one of the differences from the mark on the game board. If the player can touch it, there is a risk that it will be touched (hit) hard intentionally or accidentally, so strength is required. A movable body tends to be weaker in strength than a non-movable body, so it is necessary to consider this point when arranging.

(D-2) The mark is a movable object on the game board surface.
The marks on the game board as movable bodies are expected to play a role as means of presentation. That is, at the first timing (standby state), the role as a mark is emphasized, and at the second timing (drawing state), the role as a rendering means is emphasized. Care must be taken depending on how the movable body moves (whether the mark moves as a group or whether the mark moves in two or more parts). Details of this point will be described later.

(e) the mark is above or below the position displayed on the display means;
The mark positioned above the display means on the game board surface is close to the player's line of sight, so it is expected to play a role as a performance means or intended to convey a message such as calling attention. In addition, since the mark positioned below the display means on the game board surface is slightly out of line of sight of the player, it is not suitable to place the mark that would be overlooked.

Above the display means, a flat area (continuous area) of about 5 to 10 cm in length and 10 to 15 cm in width can be secured between the display means and the outer rail, but below the display means and the outer rail, it is difficult to secure a flat area because there are functional structures such as a starter opening, an electric tube, and a large winning opening between the display means and the outer rail. Therefore, when arranging a large mark as a group, it is preferable to place it above the display means.

(f) the mark is larger or smaller than that displayed on the display means;
A mark displayed on the game board surface and having a display size larger than that displayed by the display means is a mark having a higher display size among the marks displayed on the game machine. For example, model names and main character emblems fall under this category. Further, among the marks displayed on the game board, various marks correspond to the marks whose display size is smaller than the mark displayed by the display means. When displaying on the display means the same mark as the mark displayed on the game board (or a mark that is partly common, or a mark showing similar content), the mark need not always be conspicuous, but must be conspicuous at a predetermined timing. Specific examples of this include alert displays and performance displays.

(g) Behind the ball rolling surface of the game board.
FIGS. 44(a) and (b) show an example in which a mark (here, a movable body 4402 imitating a specific character) is on the back side of the game ball rolling surface on the game board. The movable body 4402 can be moved between a lower position on the front side of the lower part of the display means 1030 (FIG. 44(a)) and an upper position on the front side of the vertical middle part (FIG. 44(b)) while maintaining a substantially horizontal state, for example, by a pair of left and right movable body driving means a and b (not shown). The movable body 4402 has a lower position as an origin position, and can be displaced to an upper position at a predetermined timing (for example, "waiting for customers", "during a jackpot game", "during a specific advance notice effect (for example, at the end of the ready-to-win game)"). Also, when the movable body 4402 is displaced to the upper position during the pattern fluctuation, the decorative pattern during the fluctuation is retreated to a position not overlapping the movable body 4402, such as the upper right or upper left, and displayed small (retracted display) (FIG. 44(b)). It should be noted that the operation of the operation means by the player may be used as a trigger for the displacement of the movable body 4402 .

Also, in this embodiment, when the movable body 4402 is in the upper position, the entire face of the specific character indicated on the movable body is visible from the front side, but when the movable body 4402 is in the origin position (lower position), most of the face of the specific character is hidden behind the central display frame unit, and only a part of the upper side is visible from the front side.

In this way, the specific character indicated on the movable body 4402 can be switched between a completely visible state in which all of the main parts (the "face" in the above example) are visible, and an incompletely visible state in which at least a portion of the character is invisible (or difficult to visually recognize).

(h) Located in front of the ball rolling surface of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 44, a particular mark looks different between when it is in the first display mode (or first position) and when it is in the second display mode (or second position) (visible area changes, visible and invisible are switched, etc.).

Specifically, there is known a light guide plate (illumination panel) in which the front side of the display means 1030 and/or the front side of the nail is illuminated with light from a predetermined angle so that the predetermined mark can be easily recognized. By using this, it is possible to make the mark inconspicuous except when necessary.

(1-2-3: Luminous mode of various marks on the frame or game board)
Next, FIG. 45A shows an example in which various symbols (various identification information) displayed on the game machine frame 1010 or the game board 1020 change their light emitting modes in various colors.

(A) During design stop (during non-demonstration) - (F) Design fluctuation - stop (when design is stopped)
FIGS. 45A (a) and (b) both show display examples during symbol stoppage. The example of FIG. 45A (b) shows a state in which the decorative pattern 1033 is stopped (in the figure, it stops at "634" (discrete) corresponding to part of the losing pattern) immediately after the power is turned on (after the initial setting period is over) or after the player has finished playing the game. At this time, the model name logo 1090 is uniformly illuminated in a reddish color.

When this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), the display state shifts to the display state of FIG. At this time, the model name logo 1090 emphasizes the function as a part of the production means rather than appealing the model name 1080, and each character which is the constituent element 1081 of the model name 1080 blinks in different colors (here, each character of "Fujimaru-kun" is red, blue, green, and pink) in accordance with the demonstration production.

When a new player starts a game and a game ball enters the starting hole, the symbols start to change, and the display state shown in FIG. 45A (c) is obtained. At this time, the model name logo 1090 again blinks in a reddish color at a low speed (a light emission mode in which high-luminance light emission and low-luminance light emission are switched at a low speed). Because of the size (display size) of the model name logo 1090, if the lighting mode is changed rapidly, the user's eyes will be drawn to it. Recklessly flashing at high speed or emitting light in various colors may cause the player to misunderstand that "the probability of winning in this variation may be high". Therefore, during fluctuations, except when a specific advance notice is generated, it is preferable that the lighting mode is inconspicuous, such as lighting in the same system color, slow blinking, or turning off.

Next, FIG. 45A (d) shows a display example when a specific notice (here, "Fujimaru-kun's appearance notice") is generated while the symbols are changing. At this time, the entire base portion of the model name logo 1090 emits blue light to appeal the occurrence of the specific notice to the player. This specific notice includes, for example, a high-expectation notice effect, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting 6 confirmation suggestion), and the like.

FIG. 45A (e) represents a state in which a ready-to-win effect (for example, SP reach) is executed after the state of FIG. 45A (to-d). Here, a mobile artillery battery is displayed as an ally side, and a flying object (disk) is displayed as an enemy side (for example, a mobile artillery battery 911 and a disk 913 in FIG. 85(c), which will be described later). At this time, the model name logo 1090 indicates that the image color of the ally side (the color of the character of the ally side, the color of the wearable items, the color of the aura rising from the body, etc., so that the player can easily distinguish between the enemy and the ally side) is red, and the image color of the enemy side is blue.

It should be noted that, at an intermediate stage until the result is obtained, the dominant situation may be represented by a large ratio of light emission in red (the number of characters, the light emission area, etc.). In this case, conversely, if the rate of blue light emission is high, it may indicate that the teammate side is outnumbered, and the former light emission mode (light emission pattern) may indicate a higher winning expectation than the latter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45A (f), when the flying object is successfully shot down, the symbols are stop-displayed in a state in which the symbols are aligned (jackpot symbols). At this time, each character of the model name logo 1090 emits light in various colors, and the light emission mode is such that the overall color is rainbow.

In FIG. 45A, the luminescence mode of the model name logo 1090 during a so-called "non-jackpot" during symbol stoppage or during symbol variation was explained, but next, FIG.

(B) During the jackpot (start interval) ~ (F) During the jackpot (end interval 3)
FIG. 45B (a) shows an example of the display screen of the display means (liquid crystal display device) 1030 and the light emission pattern of the model name logo 1090 during the start INT (start interval) during the jackpot game.

During the start INT, that is, during the opening period, as shown in FIG. This function name logo image 4611 includes the same "MAX BONUS" characters as the emblem 3911 representing the function name 1070 shown in FIG.

Also, at this time, the electric decorations on the front side of the game machine frame 1010 and the front side of the game board 1020 and the model name logo 1090 are all lit in a specific color (for example, blue). Note that the shooting direction notification image 4612 may start to be displayed in the middle of the start INT. In this case, after the launch direction notification image 4612 starts to be displayed, for example, the lights on the front side of the game machine frame 1010 and the front side of the game board 1020 may emit light so as to flow rightward as indicated by the launch direction notification image 4612 .

During the jackpot round, as shown in FIG. 45B (b), a shooting direction notification image 4612, a round number notification image (not shown) indicating the round in progress, a won ball number notification image (not shown) indicating the number of balls won in the jackpot game, and a jackpot effect image 4613 such as a character are displayed on the display means 1030. At this time, the electric decorations on the front side of the game frame 1010 and on the front side of the game board 1020 emit light with rainbow color gradation (rainbow light emission). Also, at this time, the model name logo 1090 emits light in different colors (for example, red and blue) from the surroundings, switching sequentially so as to flow "wisteria", "circle", "ku", and "n". In addition to this, the same system color may be emitted substantially uniformly, or may be extinguished, or the game machine frame 1010, the game board 1020, and the model name logo 1090 may integrally emit rainbow light.

In addition, FIG. 45B (ha) is a model that has a function of “if you win a V prize, you will enter a probability change”, a so-called “one type and two types mixed type” model (for example, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236851). "1 type and 2 types mixed type" specifically means that a specific area (V area) through which game balls can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the big winning is won (when the big winning pattern is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device), the big winning game is played as "1 kind winning", and on the other hand, when winning the small winning (when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device), the big winning opening is opened for one round. This model is of a type in which when a game ball passes through the V area (V win) during this period, a "double win" occurs, a condition device and an accessory continuous operating device are operated, and a win game (V win game) similar to the win game of the first kind is performed. Here, three fighter planes are lined up in a V shape, and an image 4613a in which the letter V is superimposed is displayed, and the model name logo 1090 shows how the player is blessed with rainbow light emission.

Next, FIG. 45B (d) shows the end INT (end interval) period after the jackpot round is finished. Here, a winning ball number display image 4614 displaying the number of balls won in this big hit is shown, and the model name logo 1090 emits rainbow light.

Then, in FIG. 45B(e), a model name display 4615 representing the official name of this model is displayed on the display means 1030 as in the demonstration effect. The model name display 4615 (second mark) corresponds to the model name logo 1090 (first mark). The official name of this pachinko machine is "Fujimaru-kun ~ Save Fujika-chan~", and the model name display 4615 consists of a first component 4615a (Fujimaru-kun) and a second component 4615b (~Save Fujika-chan~), but the model name logo 1090 shows only the first component.

In this way, the model name display image (second mark) 4615 displayed on the display means 1030 has a configuration in which new information (here, the second mark (subtitle) "Save Fujika-chan") is added to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) displayed in the gaming machine frame 1010 (image 4614a + image 4614b). Insufficient information can be supplemented on the display means 1030 side accordingly. Note that "with setting", which is additional information indicating that the setting change function is installed, may be displayed together.

In the model name display image 4615, the characters of “Fujimaru-kun” (image 4614a) common to the model name logo 1090 are configured in the same first font as the model name logo 1090 (here, POP). In addition, the same first font as the model name logo 1090 is also used for “~Save Fujika-chan~” (image 4614b) other than “Fujimaru-kun” in the model name display image 4615 . However, the subtitle uses a smaller font size than the main title "Fujimaru-kun".

Of the model name display image 4615, it is preferable to display a common part (image 4614a) with the model name logo 1090 in common with the first font, and at least part of a different part (here, subtitle: image 4614b) in a font different from that of the model name logo 1090 (for example, Mincho font or semi-cursive font). The reason for doing this is that, as already mentioned, the common part "Fujimaru-kun" is a part (main title part in the series) that is used across multiple models (new and old models), and although it is a series model called "Fujimaru-kun", there is a possibility that "Fujimaru-kun 1 (previous model)", "Fujimaru-kun 2 (previous model)", and "Fujimaru-kun 3 (latest model)" are installed at the same time. In that case, the subtitle needs to stand out in order to differentiate. Therefore, differentiation can be realized by using a different font from the common part (one or more of the font used, the size of the characters, the color of the characters, etc. is different). In addition, there is an advantage when selling sequel models and remake models in the future.

Further, when the model name display image 4615 is displayed on the display means 1030, the model name logo 1090 on the front side of the gaming machine frame 1010 may be illuminated substantially uniformly in the same color as the display color of "Fujimaru-kun" in the model name display image 4615. In this case, it is desirable that the model name logo 1090 emit light in a color different from that of the illumination of the gaming machine frame 1010 and gaming board 1020 located in the vicinity.

In this way, by displaying the model name display image 4615 including ``Fujimaru-kun'', which is the same as the model name logo 1090, on the display means 1030 during the end INT (jackpot end interval), it is possible to make the emblem of ``Fujimaru-kun'' used in the model name logo 1090 effectively function as a performance means, even though the model name logo 1090 is positioned on the upper side of the game machine frame 1010, which is difficult for the player to see.

FIG. 45B (f) shows an example in which the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, normal state, etc.) that shifts after the end of the jackpot game is named as a function and displayed in the end interval period. It should be noted that, here, the "variable state" is referred to as "Fujimaru Time", which is a model-specific function name.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example (during waiting for customers) in which the "luminescence mode of the model name logo" changes according to the progress of the game. First, the "customer waiting period" will be described. When the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the pattern stop display is continued as (a) a demonstration start waiting performance period until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the figure) elapses after the pattern variation for the last number of operation reserve balls is completed and the pattern is stopped. During this period, the game machine cannot accurately grasp whether the player has finished playing the game, or is about to take out money from the wallet or light a cigarette, so it is a so-called judgment pending period.

(a) When the pre-customer waiting period continues for a predetermined period of time, the period shifts to (b) the customer waiting period. As shown in FIG. 46, the display means 1030 displays an effect display for lively purposes (in the figure, an effect display in which fighter planes cross), operation means (effect button 13, cross key 75), and a display to the effect that volume and light amount can be adjusted and a menu screen can be opened when operated. Further detailed game settings can be made by operating the button to open the menu screen.

(b) When the customer waiting period continues for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in the figure), the process shifts to (c) the demonstration effect period. The demonstration effect period is a period during which the player is considered to be away from the seat after the periods (a) and (b) have passed, and a demonstration effect is performed to attract new players. This demonstration presentation period can be subdivided into (C-1) demo movie period (model image presentation period), (C-2) model name display period, and (C-3) other display periods (company logo display, immersion prevention display, prepaid card reminder display, etc.).

After the (c) demonstration performance period is performed for a predetermined time (90 seconds in the figure), the process shifts to (b) the customer waiting period, and thereafter (b)→(c)→(b) . . . is repeated. Since it is assumed that the player has left the seat at the time the demonstration effect is performed, the transition is not made before (b) waiting for the customer. In FIG. 46, each period is defined as 15 seconds, 30 seconds, and 90 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, if the machine designer judges that the frequent repetition of the demonstration effect will cause trouble to the players playing on the adjacent machines, the customer waiting time may be set longer than the demonstration effect time, or at least substantially the same time or longer.

Furthermore, the transition timing of each state may be such that counting is started from the last symbol stop, and "transition to (B) after 15 seconds have elapsed", "transition to (C) after 45 seconds have elapsed", and "transition to (B) after 135 seconds have elapsed".

The conditions for resetting the counter are "when the handle touch sensor is turned ON", "when one of the plurality of operation means provided in the game machine frame is operated", "when a specific operation means provided in the game machine frame is operated (when a valid operation is performed)", "when a game ball is launched", "when any of the plurality of game ball detection means provided on the game board surface is turned ON", "a game ball detection means provided at the special figure start port". When is turned ON (when symbol variation starts)", any one or more conditions may be set.

As described above, even in the period of ``during symbol stoppage and non-jackpot game'', it can be divided into periods of (A), (B), (C), or further subdivided into periods of (A), (B), (Har 1), (Hur 2), and (Hur 3). Therefore, each can be specified as a first period, a second period, and a third period (which may be further subdivided). Based on this assumption, if we look at the luminescence mode of the title logo (Fujimaru-kun) of each period, (Har 1) is also the most distinctive, colorful and individual luminescence that matches the demo movie. In other periods, the color may be changed or the blinking cycle may be changed, but basically, the colors of "wisteria", "circle", "ku" and "n" are made to emit light in substantially the same color.

This is to prevent a player who sees the game machine from a slightly distant position from mistakenly thinking that the name of the game machine is 'Maru-kun' when he sees only a specific part (for example, 'Maru-kun') of the model name logo 1090 shining (or shining in a different color). It should be noted that since the demonstration movie is performed to attract the player in the first place, the player's line of sight is directed to the display means 1030 at the time of the demonstration movie production, and the title logo 1080 also plays a role as the production means at this timing.

In this way, the period in which the model name logo 1090 plays the role of indicating the model name (in Fig. 46 ((b) or (b) (b) b) (ha -2))) is the first period, and the period in which the title logo 1080 plays a role as a production means ((H) or (Ha -1)) in Figure 46. Depending on each period, the light emission form is different or the unified light (overall light emission) may be different.

(1-2-4: Various marks on the frame or game board are also displayed on the display means)
Specific examples of displaying various marks (various types of identification information) on the display means 1030 are shown below. It should be noted that the various marks shown below are based on the premise that marks having the same or similar content are displayed in places other than the display means 1030 (the game machine frame 1010 and each part of the game board 1020).

That is, the meaning (purpose, effect) of displaying various marks having the same or similar content on the display means 1030 at a predetermined timing even though they are always visible on the display means other than the display means 1030 will be explained.

(A) Timing and specific display mode for displaying various marks on the display means (Fig. 47).
(B) Model name FIG. 47A is an example in which the model name is displayed as an image on the display means 1030 . The display timing includes "Demonstration in progress", "During advance notice", "During big hit", and the like. As shown in the figure, a main title 4711 ("Fujimaru-kun"), a subtitle 4712 ("~Save Fujika-chan~"), and a mark indicating the presence or absence of a setting function (setting function display mark) 4713 ("with 6 settings") are displayed. Both the main title 4711 and the subtitle 4712 are displayed in substantially the same font as the model name logo 1090 . Note that the display size of the model name logo 1090 is larger.

(b) Function name FIG. 47(b) is an example in which the function name is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. FIG. The display timing (depending on what function name is displayed) includes "at the time of symbol stop (in the case of a big win)", "during a big win (start interval period)", and the like. As shown in the figure, a mark (second mark) 4714 indicating that the player has won a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (for example, a 10R probability variable jackpot) of ``MAX BONUS'' at the start of the jackpot is displayed in a second font (gothic font). Although not shown, other function names (for example, "Fujimaru time entry confirmed!") may be displayed at the same timing. In either case, the font is preferably substantially the same as the font displayed on the game board 1020 (the first emblem). This makes it easy for the player to grasp which function has been activated (appearance, activation, start, etc. are synonymous).

(C) Performance Display FIG. 47(C) is an example in which the performance display is displayed as an image on the display means 1030 . The display timing includes "Demonstration in progress", "During symbol change (information notice, etc.)", and the like. As for the display mode, the performance display 4731 (“probability variable rush rate 85%”) is displayed in a large size on the display means 1030 as shown in the figure. As for the display size, the performance display 4731 (second mark) displayed on the display means 1030 is larger than the performance display (first mark) displayed on the game board. However, this is an example of the case where the performance display can be a product feature (a selling point when returned), and another example is a mark that is obliged to display (for example, if it becomes necessary to display the real-time ball payout rate in the future, identification information that indicates the value) is not intended to appeal, so the minimum display size may be sufficient.

Based on the same idea, if the purpose of displaying the performance display 4731 (second mark) is to appeal to players, the second mark should have a font (font style, color, etc.) that stands out more than the first mark, and if the purpose is not to appeal to players, the font of the second mark and the first mark should be substantially the same. may be set or different.

(d) Warning Display FIG. 47(d) is an example in which the warning display 4741 is displayed as an image on the display means 1030 . The display timing includes "during demonstration effect", "when error occurs (when abnormality is detected)", and "during jackpot (end interval period)". As for the display mode, a large notice (warning display) is displayed on the display screen of the display means 1030 . Note that the warning displayed on the game board 1020 is "Equipped with fraud detection system!". In this way, when writing on the game board 1020, if all the information is to be packed, the character size becomes small, making it difficult to convey the content to be conveyed. Therefore, it is desirable to minimize the amount of information on the game board 1020, while increasing the amount of information when displaying on the display means 1030, enlarging the display size, and making the display colors and fonts stand out.

(E) Intellectual Property Right-Related Display FIG. 47(E) is an example in which an intellectual property-related display 4742 is displayed on the display means 1030 as an image. The display timing includes "during demonstration", "during jackpot (end interval period, etc.)", and the like. As for the display mode, the notation "(C mark on circle) JFJ" is displayed at the lower right of the display means 1030, as shown in the figure. It should be noted that the timing of displaying this intellectual property-related display (synonymous with copyright license, copyright license number, etc.) 4742 on display means 1030 is more preferably during a period during which the target indicated by the display is clear (at least during the period when the relevant music is playing if the copyright license number is related to music, and at least during the period during which the model name is displayed if the copyright license is a motif of the gaming machine).

(f) Other display FIG. 47(f) is an example of displaying the other display 4743 not included in the above (a) to (e) as an image on the display means 1030. FIG. Therefore, the display timing depends on the content to be displayed. For example, the illustrated "It's funny" is a corporate slogan of a manufacturer that manufactures and sells game machines, and the timing of display is mainly "demonstration in progress", "big hit", and the like. As shown in the figure, the mark (the second mark) that reads, "It's a strange 'funny'!"
When the same mark (first mark) is displayed on the gaming machine frame 1010, that is, when the mark is arranged as a molded product, changing the color of each character requires a considerable cost. Therefore, the first mark is a mark consisting of one color or at most two colors, and the second mark is displayed colorfully on the display means 1030, so that the player can be informed of the original color (meaning the correct color arrangement when used as a corporate catch copy).

<Embodiment in which the fonts of various marks displayed on the display means differ according to the progress of the game>
48A to 48D show an example in which a mark (second mark) 4811 including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030, and at least two or more display timings are provided, and at least one of the display size, display color, and font of the marks is made different from each other at the display timings.

In FIG. 48(a), the first model name display 4811 (second mark) is displayed in the "demonstration being performed". To be more specific, during the demo production, the original song of the model, "Soreike Fujimaru-kun," is played, and the chorus of the song has the lyrics "Oi, Fujimaru-kun." "Fujimarukun♪" is displayed on the display means 1030 in accordance with the lyrics. This includes the meaning of conveying the lyrics and the meaning of conveying the model name of the model. In this way, when conveying the model name (that is, displaying the one whose display intention overlaps with the first mark), if the notation font of the model name logo 1090 is displayed as it is, it is not possible to convey the lyrics. Therefore, when the first mark is displayed on the display means in accordance with the lyrics or for other purposes, the second mark may be displayed in a different font, size, arrangement, etc. from the first mark in accordance with those purposes.

In addition, in FIG. 48(b), a second model name display 4812 (third mark) is displayed as a preliminary effect during "symbol change". More specifically, the character display of Fujimaru-kun and the character name indicating that this character is Fujimaru-kun are displayed as a pseudo-continuous pattern (a pattern that makes it appear as if the fluctuation starts again from the beginning when the pattern stops, and the provision of the pseudo-continuous pattern itself is a well-known technique). Here, these two (character display + character name display) are collectively referred to as a second model name display 4812 (third emblem). This third mark includes the meaning of conveying the character name and the meaning of conveying the model name of the model. In this way, when conveying the model name (that is, displaying the one whose display intention overlaps with the first mark), if the notation font of the model name logo 1090 is displayed as it is, the fact that the character name is being conveyed cannot be conveyed. Therefore, in order to make it easier to understand that it is a character name, the third mark may be displayed in a different font, different size, different arrangement, etc. from the first mark, such as by displaying it near the object (character display) or adjusting its display size to match the object.

It should be noted that when the model name is used as the advance notice effect, it is almost useless (unusable) if the shape, arrangement, color scheme, etc. of the model name are used without disturbing them at all. For example, if it is used as a pseudo-continuous pattern, a circular or square shape is easier to use as a pattern, but if a horizontally long arrangement is used as it is, it is difficult to use it as a pattern.

In this way, when a mark that is the same as or similar to the mark (first mark) displayed on the gaming machine frame 1010 or the game board 1020 is displayed on the display means 1030 at two or more timings, it is preferable to use a font different from that of the first mark for at least one timing.

FIGS. 48(C) and (D) show an example in which the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is used as a jackpot name, and the function name "Fujimaru-kun BONUS" is provided.

FIG. 48(c) is an example used as the "next notice (high expectation notice)" during pattern variation. There are multiple patterns of variations in the "next notice", for example, "next time, XX reach" and "next time, intense heat!" The third model name display 4813 (fourth mark) of "next time, Fujimaru-kun BONUS" is positioned at the top and directly suggests a big hit. Since this is one of the happiest moments for players, this fourth mark is displayed colorfully (so-called rainbow). In this way, when displaying the model name logo 1090 as it is (for example, black characters are displayed in a single color) when displaying the model name logo 1090, the player cannot feel that he or she is blessed. Therefore, when a privilege is given, or when a privilege with a high degree of advantage is given among a plurality of privileges, etc., the fourth mark may be displayed in a different font, different size, different arrangement, etc. from the first mark according to the purpose.

FIG. 48(d) shows an example of displaying as the fourth model name display (fifth mark) when "Fujimaru-kun BONUS" described in FIG. 48(c) is about to start.

Here, the font is different from that of the first mark for the same purpose as in Fig. 48(c), but there is also a feature in that the fonts are different for the fourth and fifth marks even though they are the same mark (Fujimaru-kun BONUS).

The reason (intention, effect) is that the display size may be limited because there are pattern display, suspension display, background display, and other object display when the notice occurs during the pattern fluctuation, but there is no display at the start of the big win, so the display size is hardly limited. In addition, what is customary in the industry is to make the player aware that ``if a rainbow is displayed, it is as close to a big win as possible''. When used as a notice effect (Fig. 48 (c)), a rainbow display is fine, but when used at the start of a big hit (Fig. 48 (d)), if it is displayed with a rainbow, it has a different meaning (for example, it conveys that there is a further jackpot hidden in the hold, or that the pachinko with setting function is the highest setting). There is a risk that the display intention will be misunderstood. Therefore, even if the mark is the same, depending on the display timing, the second mark may be displayed in a different font, different size, different arrangement, etc. from the first mark, depending on the purpose.

Although not shown, other examples of different fonts are shown below.
For example, when the emblem of ``Fujimaru-kun'', which is the same as the model name logo 1090, is displayed as a preview preview image on the display means 1030 during the preview presentation, this preview preview image (second emblem) is arranged in a horizontal row with characters of ``Fujimaru-kun high probability zone'' including ``Fujimaru-kun'', which is the same as the model name logo 1090.例文帳に追加The characters of “Fujimaru-kun” in this pre-reading preview image may be composed of the same first font (here, POP font) as the model name logo 1090 and may be smaller than the model name logo 1090 . Note that the same first font as the model name logo 1090 is also used for the characters of the "high probability zone" other than "Fujimaru-kun" in the pre-reading preview image.

Then, among the preview preview images, the same first font as the model name logo 1090 is used for the "Fujimaru-kun high probability zone" bearing the same "Fujimaru-kun" as the model name logo 1090, and the other "normal high probability zones" use different fonts. Fonts may be made similar to notices bearing names identical or similar to 090.

For convenience of explanation, all the first marks are unified as "model name", but not limited to this, the first mark may be "function name", "performance indication", "warning indication", "intellectual property related indication", and "other indication". In this case, the display timing and display size of the 2nd to 5th marks can be changed accordingly, and at least the 1st mark and the 2nd to 5th marks should have different fonts.

<Example of changing the font according to the winning expectation>
FIGS. 49A to 49D show an example in which the font is changed according to the winning expectation when displaying the mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) on the display means 1030.

In FIGS. 49(a) and (d), when the same type of notice effect (pseudo consecutive notice effect here) is executed, depending on the degree of winning expectation, for example, when the degree of winning expectation is relatively high (here, 50%), a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, an original emphasized font) is used for the font of pseudo consecutive design 4911 (FIG. 49(a)), and when the degree of winning expectation is relatively low (here, 25%), pseudo consecutive design 4911 is used. A predetermined font (for example, Mincho) is used for the font of (Fig. 49(b)). Note that one of them may use the same first font (for example, POP font) as the model name logo 1090 .

49 (C) and (D), when executing a specific notice effect (here, the next notice effect), according to the probability change expectation for each notice effect, for example, in the case of a notice effect with a relatively high probability change expectation (here, 80%), a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, an original emphasized font) is used for the font of the next notice image 4911. A predetermined font (for example, Mincho) is used for the body (FIG. 49(b)). Note that one of them may use the same first font (for example, POP font) as the model name logo 1090 .

In this way, when the mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030, the character style may be changed according to the winning expectation. In the example of FIG. 49 as well, similar to FIG. 48, the first mark is used as the model name, but this is not the only option.

<Example of displaying the second mark according to the degree of advantage of the player>
FIG. 50 (I-1) to (I-2), (B-1) to (B-2) show an example in which when a mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030, whether or not to display the second mark is determined according to the player's degree of advantage.

FIG. 50(a-1) shows a function name display image 5011 such as "Fujimaru-kun bonus" including the characters "Fujimaru-kun" which is the same as the model name logo 1090 at the starting INT in the case of a 10R jackpot, which has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the 4R jackpot, and FIG. It shows an example of displaying a function name display image 5012 such as “regular bonus” that is not available.

In addition, FIG. 50 (B-1) displays a function name display image 5011 such as "Fujimaru-kun bonus" including the characters "Fujimaru-kun" which is the same as the model name logo 1090 at the start INT in the case of a probability-variable jackpot in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the non-variability-variable jackpot, for example, and FIG. This shows an example of displaying a function name display image 5012 such as “regular bonus” that does not include .

Thus, whether or not to display the mark (second mark) corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) on the display means 1030 may be changed according to the degree of advantage of the player.

<Example of displaying a second mark with information added to the first mark>
FIGS. 51(a) to (d) show an example configured to display a second mark with added information when a mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030.

FIG. 51(a) shows an example in which the second mark displayed on the display means 1030 uses the same font as the first mark for characters that are common to the first mark, but uses a different font for at least some of the characters that are not common to the first mark.

FIG. 51(b) shows an example of a model name display image 5121 (second mark) displayed on the display means 1030 in the demonstration effect. In the model name display image 5121 shown in FIG. 51B, the characters "P Fujimaru-kun" including "Fujimaru-kun", which is common to the model name logo 1090 (first mark), use the same first font (here, POP font) as the model name logo 1090, but the other characters, "~Save Fujika-chan~", use a second font (here, Gothic font) different from the model name logo 1090. It is also possible to use the same first font (in this case, POP typeface) as the model name logo 1090 only for the characters "Fujimaru-kun" that are common to the model name logo 1090, and use a different font from the model name logo 1090 for all the other characters "P" and "~Save Fujika-chan~".

<5. Another Embodiment 5>
(5-1: Appearance of game machine seen from the front: Fig. 35)
FIG. 35 shows the appearance of the gaming machine of the present invention when viewed from the front. In FIG. 35, a frame 1010 is the same as the front frame 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as “frame”) arranged openable and closable on the front side of the outer frame 4, and is composed of an upper frame 1011, a middle frame 1012, and a lower frame 1013, and has a visual window for visually recognizing the game area. The frame 1010 here roughly depicts the shape and size visually recognized when the gaming machine is viewed from the front (front). Various shapes and sizes are used for the front frame 2, and it is free to adopt any shape and size. Here, the frame 1010 has an upper frame portion 1011 made of a horizontal member located at the top, a frame middle portion 1012 made of vertical members located on both left and right sides, and a panel-shaped frame lower portion 1013 located on the lower side.

1020 is the game board described as the game board 3 in FIG. 2, and is mounted in a game board storage frame attached to the rear surface of the front frame 2, or mounted in a game board storage frame (not shown) provided in the outer frame 4. That is, the game board is attached to the game board storage frame (hereinafter referred to as "main body frame") regardless of whether it is attached to the front frame 2 side or the outer frame 4 side. A game board 1020 attached to the main body frame 1020 has a game area 1021 (game area 3a in FIG. 2) where game balls flow down inside the guardrail and a non-game area 1022 (four corners of the game board 3 in FIG. 2) outside the guardrail when the game machine is viewed from the front.

The game board 1020 is provided with a main liquid crystal display device 1031 (liquid crystal display device 36 in FIG. 2) in the center of the game area 1021 when viewed from the front, and a sub liquid crystal display device 1032 below the game area. 1023 denotes a starting opening (upper starting opening 34 in FIG. 2), and 1024 denotes a big winning opening (large winning opening 50 in FIG. 2).

The relationship between the game board 1020 and the frame 1010 is such that the frame 1010 is positioned in front of the game board 1020 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game board is partly covered with the frame 1010 . That is, the game board has a part that is covered by the upper part 1011, the middle part 1012, and the lower part 1013 of the frame and cannot be seen from the front side. The main liquid crystal display device 1031 has a rectangular display surface, and is provided so that the entire display surface can be seen from the front side through the viewing window. In other words, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 is provided in such a size, shape and arrangement that its display surface is not hidden by the frame 1010 . A sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 positioned below the main liquid crystal display device 1031 in the game board surface is provided in a state where the lower part of the display surface thereof is covered with a lower frame portion 1013 .

However, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 can also be provided such that a portion thereof is covered by a portion of the frame 1010 . Also, the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032 can be provided so that the entire display surface can be seen through the viewing window, that is, no part of the display surface is covered by the lower frame portion 1013 . A liquid crystal display device 1030 including the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 functions as image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image.

The frame lower portion 1013 corresponds to the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is composed of an upper tray 1013a corresponding to the upper tray unit 8, a lower tray 1013b, and a base portion 1013c when viewed from the front. The upper tray 1013a is a front view of the upper receiving tray unit 8 in FIG. As the lower operation means 1041 of the operation means 1040 , the production button 13 is provided on the upper plate 1013 a , and the production button is provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame as the upper operation means 1042 .

A base portion 1013c of the lower frame portion 1013 corresponds to the lower portion of the front operation panel 7 in FIG. 1, and is provided with a handle 1050 (firing operation handle 15) when viewed from the front.

FIG. 36A shows an example in which the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is attached as identification information to the game board surface, more precisely, the game area 1021 of the game board, and FIG.
(5-2: Conventional problems)
Conventionally, in a pinball game machine, identification information consisting of characters, graphics, symbols, three-dimensional shapes, combinations of these, or combinations of these and colors (marks of Article 2 of the Trademark Law) is displayed on a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device. For example, there was a case where the model name was placed as a logo on the frame or board. It is also known that the model name logo has various lighting modes corresponding to the advance notice effect and the ready-to-reach effect. Furthermore, there is also known a device in which a model name logo is movable (or deformed/combined) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949).

When displaying identification information composed of characters, graphics, symbols, etc. on a game machine, it is basically free to arrange the constituent elements of the identification information. In addition, recent game machines have an increased displayable area when viewed from the front, and accordingly, the degree of freedom in arranging identification information is also increased. As a result, there is a strong tendency to adopt a display mode that emphasizes the effect as a means of presentation, and the original function as identification information (for example, the function of trademark (such as the function of identifying one's own and others' products, the function of displaying the source derived from the right function, the function of quality assurance, the function of advertising, etc.)) has been reduced or lost. Also, depending on the mode of use, there is a risk of violating other laws such as the Unfair Competition Prevention Law.

Therefore, when displaying identification information in places other than the screen of the LCD display device of the bullet gaming machine, in separate embodiment 5, by devising the "arrangement" of an element that makes up the identification information, and in another embodiment 6, by devising the "light -shaped way" (such as a time -to -light condition, etc.), it is specified in the embodiment. This task is solved by devising the arrangement of the identification information and the non -specific identification information, and by devising the display form of specific identification information in the embodiment 8.

(5-3: About “Arrangement” of Elements Constituting Identification Information (Another Embodiment 5), FIGS. 52 and 53)
(Problems to be solved by the fifth embodiment)
The degree of identification power exhibited by the identification information differs depending on where it is arranged in the gaming machine. In addition, the identification information exerts its original identification power by being displayed in a display mode in which characters, figures, etc. are continuous, and there is a possibility that the intended identification power cannot be exhibited depending on the arrangement of the characters, etc. constituting the identification information and/or the lighting mode (including color). Conversely, depending on how the characters and the like that make up the identification information are arranged and/or how the lighting mode is added, there is a possibility that the display may be misidentified as displaying identification information different from the intended one.

The display form in which the identification information is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device is not very suitable as a location for arranging the identification information, because the identification information cannot effectively demonstrate its discriminating power unless it is displayed. Therefore, first, a display mode (another embodiment 5) in which the "arrangement" of the constituent elements constituting the identification information is appropriately arranged when the identification information is arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device will be described.

(5-4: Specific example of another embodiment 5)
FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b) exemplify a case where "Mr. Fujimaru" is arranged as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device (game board 1020 in this example). Of these, (a) is an example of a display mode in which the identification information is considered to exhibit the intended discriminating power, and (b) is an example of a display mode in which it is considered that the intended discriminating power cannot be exhibited.

In FIG. 52(a), each character of "Mr. Fujimaru" is arranged in one line as a series and displayed. Each character of "Mr. Fujimaru" is located at a position protruding forward from the game ball rolling surface of the game board when viewed in the front-rear direction of the game machine. Each character, which is the constituent element of "Mr. Fujimaru", has the same character size and the same font and is arranged at equal intervals. For this reason, "Fujimaru-kun sensei" is evaluated as a united and orderly one. Therefore, it is considered that FIG. 52(a) exhibits the discriminating power intended by the discriminating information "Mr. Fujimaru". In this sense, "OK" is written in FIG. 52(a).

On the other hand, in FIG. 52(b), "Fujimaru-kun teacher" is separated into two character strings, "Fujimaru-kun" and "Sensei", which are arranged in two stages. Moreover, the character string "Fujimaru-kun" in the upper row is arranged diagonally upward to the right, and the upper and lower character strings are not parallel to each other. For this reason, the character string "sensei" is in a state of being seen as completely "independent" from other character strings. In addition, the character string of "Sensei" is divided into single characters of "General" and "Army", and the character size of each character is increased. In addition, each character is at a position protruding forward from the game ball rolling surface of the game board when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the character string "sensei" is in a state of being able to be recognized as being completely separate from the character string "Fujimaru-kun".

Furthermore, the character string "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed as a printed matter (cell sheet) on the game board surface, and the character string "Sensei" is provided in the center case and displayed as a three-dimensional structure (logo) having a predetermined clearance and distance from the game board surface. Therefore, the character string "Sensei" and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" can be recognized as not being a continuous piece of identification information.

If the character string of "Fujimaru-kun" and the character string of "Sensei" are separated into a plurality of character strings as shown in FIG.
(i) The discriminating power of the whole "Mr. Fujimaru" is not functioning normally. For example, if this character string were identification information indicating the manufacturer or seller of the game machine, the trademark function would not function normally (the intended identification power could not be exhibited).
(ii) If there is another person's right (for example, legally stipulated intellectual property rights or rights related to legally protected interests) regarding "Fujimaru-kun" or "Sensei" alone, the possibility of infringement of those rights will increase, and the risk of sales, etc. will increase. Therefore, even if you are a person who has legitimate authority to use "Mr. Fujimaru-kun," for example, using a display format like that shown in Fig. 52(b) increases the risk that your product will infringe on the rights of others, and should be avoided as much as possible. In this sense, "NG" is indicated in FIG. 52(b).

From the above, the following can be said. (i) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, if its constituent elements are divided into two or more lines, it will be difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information (original identification information). (ii) Even with the intended specific identification information, if its components are divided into two or more lines and they are not parallel to each other, it will be difficult to evaluate the display of the intended original specific identification information. (iii) Therefore, in order to be evaluated as a display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information), it is preferable to write the components of the identification information in one line. If the identification information is displayed on more than one line, each string should be parallel to each other. In this way, it is preferable to adopt a display mode that takes the above points into consideration in order to prevent deterioration of distinguishability and infringement of rights of others.

FIG. 53 exemplifies a case where "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is arranged as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device (in this example, the upper part of the frame 1011). Of these, FIG. 53(a) is an example of a display mode in which it is considered that the identification information has the intended discriminating power, and FIG. 53(b) is a display mode example in which it is considered that the intended discriminating power cannot be exhibited.

In FIG. 53(a), each character of "AIUEO Fujimaru-kun" is displayed side by side in one line as a series. Each character, which is the constituent element of "Mr. Fujimaru", has the same character size and the same font and is arranged at equal intervals. For this reason, "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is evaluated as a united and orderly one. Therefore, it is considered that FIG. 53(a) demonstrates the intended identification power of the identification information "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun". In this sense, "OK" is written in FIG. 53(a).

On the other hand, FIG. 53(b) shows an example in which "aiueo Fujimaru-kun" seems to be separated into five character groups: "a", "i", "u", "e", and "o-Fujimaru-kun". The reason why it looks like that is that the spaces between the characters are not even, and the space between ``a'' and ``i'' is the longest, the space between ``i'' and ``u'' and between ``u'', ``e'' and ``ofujimaru-kun'' is the second longest, and the space between the characters that make up ``ofujimaru-kun'' is the shortest. Only the character "a" exists on the left side, and the characters "i", "u", "e", and "O-Fujimaru-kun" on the right side are recognized as a cohesive group. In other words, ``a'' is excluded from recognition items as something else, and ``Iueo Fujimaru-kun'' is read as a meaningful group.

In the display mode in which the character strings are arranged discretely as shown in FIG. 53(b), "Iueo Fujimaru-kun", which is relatively close to the characters, is evaluated as an orderly unity. Therefore, the evaluation of the display of "Iueo Fujimaru-kun" changes to an evaluation of something different from the identification power that was intended to be exhibited by the identification information of "AIUEO Fujimaru-kun". In this case, the intended identification power cannot be exhibited, resulting in an inappropriate display mode. Therefore, the display mode as shown in FIG. 53(b) should be avoided. In this sense, "NG" is indicated in FIG. 53(b).

The above explanation was about the case where the character spacing of the characters that make up the identification information is not equal, but if the character sizes of the characters that make up the identification information are not equal (for example, only "a" is twice as large as the other characters), if the fonts of the characters that make up the identification information are not unified (for example, only "a" is POP font and the others are gothic), and if the character colors are not unified (for example, only "a" is red and the others are blue), the intended distinguishing power will be exhibited in the same way. This results in an inappropriate display mode.

From the above, the following can be said. (i) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, it is difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information (original identification information) if the character spacing, which is a constituent element of the display, is not equal. (ii) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, it is difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information if the sizes of the characters that are its constituent elements are not equal. (iii) Even if the intended specific identification information is displayed, if the fonts of the constituent characters are not the same, it will be difficult to evaluate the display as the intended specific identification information. (iv) Therefore, in order to be evaluated as a display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information), the character spacing of the characters, which are the components of the identification information, should be uniform. Unify the size of characters for specific identification information. Unify the font of characters for specific identification information. It is preferable to use a display mode that takes these points into consideration.

As described above, when identification information consisting of letters, figures, symbols, etc. is attached to a place other than the liquid crystal display device, such as a game board or a frame, by devising the arrangement of the constituent elements of the identification information, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the identification information, that is, evaluation of the intended identification information as different identification information.

(5-3: Configuration Example 1 of Another Embodiment 5)
The fifth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53 can be configured as described in (1) to (14) below. In that case, either of the following features (i) or (v) can be included.
(i) A gaming machine in which first identification information representing at least part of the model name and second identification information representing at least part other than the model name are arranged at positions visible to the player,
The first identification information is arranged in a three-dimensional shape, and the second identification information is arranged in a planar shape.

As a result, when at least one of the character size, character spacing, and font is used as a judgment criterion for at least the first identification information, even if there is a slight difference, it is possible to expect an effect that the risk of reading the one piece of first identification information by dividing it into two or more pieces of identification information can be reduced by having a common point that the same type of decoration (molding, processing) of "three-dimensional shape" is given. As a premise, it is divided into "model name" and "other than model name", but the same effect can be expected even if the "model name (subject part)" is used as the first identification information and the "model name (subtitle part)" is used as the second identification information.
(ii) In the gaming machine, all of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information are arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns.
As a result, the second identification information can be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement, while reducing the risk of the first identification information being read by dividing it into two or more pieces of identification information.
(iii) In the gaming machine, the first identification information has substantially the same character spacing, and the second identification information has at least part of the character spacing different. As a result, the second identification information can be arranged more freely, while the first identification information can be divided into two or more pieces of identification information to reduce the risk of being read.
(iv) In the gaming machine, the first identification information has substantially the same character size, and the second identification information has at least part of the different character size.
As a result, the second identification information can be arranged more freely, while the first identification information can be divided into two or more pieces of identification information and the risk of being read can be reduced.
(v) In the gaming machine, the first identification information has substantially the same character font, and the second identification information has at least part of the character font different.
As a result, the degree of freedom of expression (variety of display modes) of the second identification information can be increased, and the risk of reading the first identification information as two or more pieces of identification information can be reduced.
As an effect common to the above (i) to (v), it is possible to maintain a high degree of freedom in arrangement and expression by using a different display mode (character size, character spacing, character color, etc.) for other identification information, while maintaining high identification power for "identification information with high importance (for identifying gaming machines)", "identification information with low expression freedom (due to copyrights, trademarks, etc.)", and "identification information with high visibility (from the player's point of view)".

Specifically, it can be configured as follows.
(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
with
In a gaming machine in which first identification information representing at least part of the model name and second identification information representing at least part of the performance of the gaming machine are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first identification information is information to be made more conspicuous than the second identification information,
The first identification information is arranged on the front frame,
The second identification information is arranged on the game board,
The first identification information is provided as a non-movable body (e.g., a logo) whose constituent elements are displayed in a row,
A gaming machine characterized by:
As a result, when at least one of the character size, character spacing, and font is used as a criterion for judgment, even if there is some difference, the first identification information has a common point that it is "continuously displayed (decorated, molded, processed)", so that it is possible to reduce the risk that one piece of first identification information is divided into two or more pieces of identification information and read.
(2) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged as a movable body (button or other gimmick) of the front frame.
As a result, at least the first identification information is displayed (decorated, molded, processed, printed) on the "same base body (in the above example, operation means, etc.)" even if there is a slight difference in the case where one or more of the character size, character spacing, and font is used as a judgment criterion, so that it is possible to reduce the risk that the one piece of first identification information is divided into two or more pieces of identification information and read.
(3) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged on the front frame in the form of a plane (for example, printed matter).
(4) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged three-dimensionally (for example, as a three-dimensional structure) with respect to the front frame. In the configuration of (4), the second identification information may be arranged in a plane (feature (i) above).
(5) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged (arranged with unevenness) on the projecting portion of the front frame in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein all of the constituent elements of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column. In the configuration of (6), the second identification information may be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (feature (ii) above).
As a common effect so far, at least the first identification information has a common point (three-dimensional/planar, molded/printed, written on the same base body, written in one row or one column).
(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, characterized in that the first identification information is an aligned arrangement (the top line and the bottom line of the component row are substantially parallel), and the second identification information is a non-aligned arrangement (the top line and the bottom line of the component row are non-parallel). In the configuration of (7), in relation to the above (6), all the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information is arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (feature (ii) above).
(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, wherein the first identification information has two or more lines, and the lines are arranged parallel to each other.
(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above, wherein the first identification information is unified so that the intervals between its constituent elements (the character intervals when the first identification information consists of character strings) are the same or substantially the same. In the configuration of (9), the second identification information may be configured such that at least some of the constituent elements have different intervals (feature (iii) above).
(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (9) above, wherein the first identification information is unified so that the size of its constituent elements (the character size when the first identification information consists of a character string) is the same or substantially the same. In the configuration of (10), the second identification information may have a configuration in which at least a part of the components of the second identification information have different sizes (feature (iv) above).
(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, characterized in that the first identification information is unified so that the attributes related to the shape, pattern, and color of its constituent elements (character size in the case of character strings, and colors and color schemes in the case of non-character strings) are the same or substantially the same. In the configuration of (11), the first identification information and the second identification information are composed of character strings, the first identification information may have substantially the same character font, and the second identification information may have at least a part of the character font different (feature (v) above).
(12) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, wherein the second identification information is common identification information at least partially common to the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means but is not displayed (arranged) on the game board.
(13) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, characterized in that the second identification information is common identification information at least partly in common with the first identification information in the arrangement of its constituent elements, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means but is not displayed (arranged) on the game board surface.
(14) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (13), wherein at least part of the arrangement of the constituent elements of the first identification information is arranged in the front frame as a movable body, and the constituent elements of the first identification information are in a grouped position during the first specific period (during the customer waiting demonstration production period), and can be moved to a position where the first identification information is separated during the second period (during the ready-to-win production and advance notice production).

(5-4: Configuration Example 2 of Another Embodiment 5)
In the configuration example 1 of the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the first identification information is arranged on the front frame, but the first identification information can be arranged on the center case (center decoration 48), that is, on the game board surface. This configuration is described as follows.

(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
with
In a gaming machine in which first identification information representing at least part of the model name and second identification information representing at least part of the performance of the gaming machine are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first identification information is information to be made more conspicuous than the second identification information,
The first identification information is arranged on the center case (game board surface),
The second identification information is arranged on the game board,
The first identification information is provided as a non-movable body (for example, a grounder) whose constituent elements are displayed in a row,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged as a movable body of the center case.
(3) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged two-dimensionally with respect to the center case (for example, the model name is printed).
(4) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged three-dimensionally (for example, as a three-dimensional structure) with respect to the center case. In the configuration of (4), the second identification information may be arranged in a plane (feature (i) above).
(5) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged on a projecting portion of the center case in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein all of the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information is arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns.
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein all of the constituent elements of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column. In the configuration of (6), the second identification information may be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (feature (ii) above).
(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, characterized in that the first identification information is an aligned arrangement (the top line and the bottom line of the component row are substantially parallel), and the second identification information is a non-aligned arrangement (the top line and the bottom line of the component row are non-parallel). In the configuration of (7), in relation to the above (6), all the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information is arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (feature (ii) above).
(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, wherein the first identification information has two or more lines, and the lines are arranged parallel to each other.
(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above, wherein the first identification information is unified so that the intervals between its constituent elements (the character intervals when the first identification information consists of character strings) are the same or substantially the same. In the configuration of (9), the second identification information may be configured such that at least some of the constituent elements have different intervals (feature (iii) above).
(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (9) above, wherein the first identification information is unified so that the size of its constituent elements (the character size when the first identification information consists of a character string) is the same or substantially the same. In the configuration of (10), the second identification information may have a configuration in which at least a part of the components of the second identification information have different sizes (feature (iv) above).
(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, characterized in that the first identification information is unified so that the attributes related to the shape, pattern, and color of its constituent elements (character size in the case of character strings, and colors and color schemes in the case of non-character strings) are the same or substantially the same. In the configuration of (11), the first identification information and the second identification information are composed of character strings, the first identification information may have substantially the same character font, and the second identification information may have at least a part of the character font different (feature (v) above).
(12) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, wherein the second identification information is common identification information at least partially common to the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means but is not displayed (arranged) on the game board.
(13) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, characterized in that the second identification information is common identification information at least partly in common with the first identification information in the arrangement of its constituent elements, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means but is not displayed (arranged) on the game board surface.
(14) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (13), wherein at least part of the arrangement of the constituent elements of the first identification information is arranged in the front frame as a movable body, and the constituent elements of the first identification information are in a grouped position during the first specific period (during the customer waiting demonstration production period), and can be moved to a position where the first identification information is separated during the second period (during the ready-to-win production and advance notice production).

<6. Another Embodiment 6>
(6-1: “How to Illuminate” Elements Constituting Identification Information (Another Embodiment 6), FIG. 54)
Next, a display mode (another embodiment 6) in which the "lighting method" of the constituent elements of the identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device will be described.

(6-2: Problems to be solved by another embodiment 6)
First, there is a problem to be solved by the sixth embodiment, but as described in the explanation of the fifth embodiment, the identification information exhibits its inherent discriminating power by being displayed in a display mode in which characters, graphics, etc. are continuous, and there is a possibility that the intended discriminating power cannot be exhibited depending on the arrangement of the characters and the like constituting the identification information and/or the light emission mode (including color). Conversely, depending on how the characters and the like that make up the identification information are arranged and/or how the lighting mode is added, there is a possibility that the display may be misidentified as displaying identification information different from the intended one.

In another embodiment 5, a means for solving the problem concerning the "arrangement" of the identification information has been described, but in another embodiment 6, a specific means for solving the problem concerning the "how to light" the identification information will be explained.

FIGS. 54A, 54B, and 54C are diagrams for explaining under what circumstances or conditions it is appropriate to illuminate some of the elements that make up the identification information when arranging "Mr. Fujimaru" as the identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device, and in a display mode in which a part of the elements constituting the identification information are illuminated. Here, "shining" does not only refer to cases in which light is emitted by itself, but may also be a concept that includes cases in which light is reflected and shines. The same applies to the expression "light up" by the light emission control means.

Furthermore, when a part of the elements constituting the identification information (e.g., the first element) is referred to as "lighting differently" from another element (e.g., the second element) that also constitutes the identification information (e.g., the element may be further subdivided and defined as the third element), it does not refer only to the state in which both are lit, such as one in the red light emission mode and the other in the white light emission mode, but may include the state in which one is emitting light and the other is extinguished.

Further, even when the first component and the second component in the above example are in the same system color (e.g., white) light emission mode, one of them has a higher luminance or illuminance than the other part. It may mean a state. Furthermore, when expressing the difference in how the first component and the second component shine by terms indicating brightness such as luminance, illuminance, and lightness, the difference in the number of LEDs used to express the light emission mode (N for the first component, M for the second component, N<M or N>M) or the difference in the type of LED used (the first component is a full-color LED, and the second component is a single-color LED).

As an example, when expressing that "the first component is made brighter than the second component by the light emission control means (or effect control means)", as a specific means, (i) the number of LEDs located on the back side of the first component (LEDs include bullet-shaped LEDs, surface-mounted LEDs, chip-on-board, etc., but in this case it refers to the number of LED chips) is greater than the number of LEDs located on the back side of the second component, (ii) the first component is a single-color (white) LED. and the second component is a full-color (RGB) LED.

Although the brightness depends on the difference in LED performance, if the LEDs are almost the same (same price), the luminous efficiency of white light is said to be "blue LED + yellow phosphor (= monochromatic LED)" > "red LED + green LED + blue LED (= full-color LED)" > "near-ultraviolet LED + three-color phosphor (= composite LED)". If the price difference is corrected as the penetration rate of LEDs changes in the future, it may be possible to appropriately select whether to use single-color LEDs or full-color LEDs as a method of "making bright light emission mode."

FIG. 54(a) is an example of a display mode in which the identification information is considered to exhibit the intended identification power, and has the same contents as in FIG. 52(a). That is, on the surface of the game board 1020, the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru" is displayed in a display mode in which the constituent characters are connected. However, FIG. 54(a) deals with the display of identification information performed during customer waiting (demonstration waiting for start of demonstration or "customer waiting presentation (demonstration display)", especially during customer waiting presentation (demonstration display)). That is, the pinball game machine shifts to the period of "demonstration display" on the condition that a certain period of time has passed since the symbols stopped. FIG. 54(a) differs from FIG. 52(a), which shows the display mode in the normal game state, in that it deals with the display after transitioning to this "demonstration display" period. However, the period of "demonstration display" is a period in which no game is played, and it is considered that the evaluation of the display of identification information is not much different from that in the normal game state. Considering the above points, FIG. 54(a) describes "(Demonstration) OK".

Next, FIG. 54(b) is a display example in which the identification information does not exhibit the intended identification power, in other words, it may be recognized as different identification information. FIG. 54(b) also deals with the display after shifting to the period of "demonstration display" as in FIG. 54(a). 54(a), the characters constituting the identification information ``Mr. However, in the case of FIG. 54(b), the character part of "sensei" in the character string forming "Mr. Fujimaru" emits light in a different emission color from the other character parts, and shines brighter than the other character parts. In this respect, it differs from FIG. 54(a).

There are various ways to brighten the "Sensei" part, but here, a character plate made of translucent synthetic resin ("Fujimaru-kun" character plate) is illuminated by a lamp (including the case of an LED) placed behind it. In addition, the example which employ|adopts LED is as having mentioned above.

The period during which the teacher's character portion is brighter than the Fujimaru-kun character portion is a period of "demonstration display", that is, a period in which the pattern is stopped without the game being played (non-game period), so it is relatively long. In addition, the period of "demonstration display" may be a period in which the transition is made several times in a day, that is, it is a period of high frequency.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54(b), when the character part of "teacher" in the character string of the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru" is displayed in a display mode that shines brighter than the other character parts, the character part of "teacher" is emphasized and recognized as existing alone. In other words, there is a strong possibility that the display of "teacher" will be judged and evaluated as "using it as a trademark." Considering that it is impossible to completely eliminate the possibility that others have rights to "teacher", the display mode as shown in FIG. 54(b) should be avoided. In this sense, "(Demonstrating) NG" is written in FIG. 54(b).

Next, the display example of FIG.54(c) is demonstrated. FIG. 54(c) is also the same as FIG. 54(b) in that the characters constituting the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru" are displayed as a "continuous" character string. 54(b) is also the same as that of the character string "Mr. However, the case of FIG. 54(d) is different from FIG. 54(b) in that the identification information consisting of the character string in which the part of ``Mr.

Consider a case in which a character string of ``Mr. Fujimaru-kun,'' in which the part of ``teacher'' is illuminated, is displayed around the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1030 so as to cover the upper side as a ``advance presentation'' during the ready-to-win presentation period. The purpose of displaying such a notice effect is to convey the "expectation of winning" to the player, and the main role of the notice effect is to implicitly notify the magnitude of the expectation of winning. Therefore, in the "notice production", it is more important than the meaning of "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" that (i) whether or not a character string with a shining part appeared, or whether a part of the character string was shining, or (ii) what color the shining part was (blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color, gold, or rainbow color). The former point (i), ``whether or not a character string with a shining part appears,'' regards the shining part of ``sensei'' as a mere light-emitting means. In addition, the latter (ii) ``What color was the shining part?'' is that the ``teacher'' part that emits light is regarded as a color notification means, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color, gold, and rainbow color.

In this way, even if a character string in which the part of ``teacher'' in ``Mr. Fujimaru'' is illuminated appears, the illuminated part is understood as indicating the degree of expectation for winning, and attention is directed to its existence and color. For this reason, even if a character string with a part of it glowing appears as a "notice effect", it is considered that the identification power of the character string will not become a problem. In this sense, FIG. 54(c) shows "(notice effect) OK".

From the above, the following can be said. (i) If only part of the specific identification information is lit or extinguished for a long time (or frequently), the part that is lit or extinguished will be emphasized, and will be evaluated as the identification information of only that part. (ii) Extinguishing only a part of the specific identification information or illuminating it in a different light-emitting mode during the demonstration (during the customer-waiting demonstration stage) is not much different from lighting or extinguishing for a long period of time (or frequently). For this reason, it is evaluated as identification information for only the relevant part, and the degree of evaluation as a trademark-like usage mode increases. Therefore, it should be avoided that only a part of the specific identification information is extinguished or illuminated in a different light-emitting manner during the "demonstration (during the period of the customer-waiting demonstration)". (iii) In order to evaluate that the display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information) is displayed during the "demonstration (during the customer waiting demonstration stage)", it is important to light (or turn off) all of the specific identification information in the same system color. (iv) Like cut-in notice during the ready-to-win effect period, under the condition that a specific effect occurs during pattern fluctuation, even if a part of the constituent elements of the specific identification information is individually illuminated, the risk of being seen as a mode of trademark use for that part is diminished. Therefore, under the condition that the specific effect is generated during the pattern variation, it is possible to individually light up some of the constituent elements of the specific identification information and display them. In addition, when the condition of when the specific effect occurs is eliminated, that is, when the specific effect does not occur, it is necessary to light (or turn off) all of the specific identification information in the same system color in order to be evaluated as the display of the specific identification information (original identification information) intended for the whole.

As described above, when identification information consisting of letters, figures, symbols, etc. is attached to a place other than a liquid crystal display device, such as a game board or a frame, and a display mode in which a part of the elements constituting the identification information is illuminated, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the identification information, that is, evaluation of the intended identification information as different identification information, by devising the "lighting method" in the sense of under what conditions.

(6-2: Configuration example of another embodiment 6)
Another embodiment 6 described in FIG. 54 can be configured to include the following features (i) or (ii).

(i) A gaming machine in which first identification information composed of two or more characters and representing at least part of the model name and other second identification information are arranged so as to be visible to the player,
The first identification information is
The visibility changes depending on the light emitting means,
At least in the first period during the non-gaming period, all of the first identification information is made visible in the same system color,
The second identification information is
Visibility is changed by the light emitting means,
Part of the second identification information is visible in a system color different from that of the second identification information, at least in the first period during the non-game period.

As a result, when the first identification information and the second identification information are configured to be able to change their light emitting modes, the second identification information mainly plays a role and effect as a "drawing means" at least in the first period, and the first identification information is strictly a "continuous" identification information. In addition, although the light emitting modes of the first identification information and the second identification information in the first period are shown above, the light emitting modes of the first identification information may be divided between the first period and the second period. For example, the first identification information, which is the model name, may be set to have individual lighting modes during the first period (e.g., during pattern variation) to serve mainly as a "drawing means", and to have a unified lighting mode during the second period (e.g., during design stoppage) to serve mainly as a "self-other product identification function". In addition, as a premise, the "model name" is used as the first identification information, but the "model name (only the subject part)" may be used as the first identification information, or the "function name" may be used as the first identification information.

(ii) in the gaming machine,
The first identification information is visible in the same system color during the reproduction of the first BGM,
At least a part of the second identification information is visible in a different system color during reproduction of the first BGM.

As a result, when the first identification information is configured to be able to change its light emission mode, it can be expected that the first identification information can reduce the risk that one piece of the first identification information is divided into two or more pieces of identification information and read, at least during the first period, while mainly playing a role and effect as a "drawing means" during at least the second period. In the above description, the light emission modes of the first identification information and the second identification information during the reproduction of the first BGM (first period) are shown, but the light emission modes of the first identification information may be divided between the reproduction of the first BGM (first period) and the non-reproduction of the first BGM (second period). For example, the first identification information, which is the model name, may be set to an individual lighting mode during the first period (e.g., when the theme music is playing while the pattern is changing, the lighting mode is synchronized with the music), thereby mainly serving as a "drawing means", and during the second period (for example, when the pattern is stopped), a unified lighting mode (lighting mode that is not synchronized with the music) may be used to mainly serve as a "self-other product identification function". In addition, as a premise, the "model name" is used as the first identification information, but the "model name (only the subject part)" may be used as the first identification information, or the "function name" may be used as the first identification information.

Specifically, in addition to the features of configuration example 1 or configuration example 2 of the fifth embodiment, or as independent features, the following configuration can be provided.
(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
and
Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when the starting means detects the game ball;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a winning game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of game symbols and notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a stopped display mode of the game symbols;
Variation pattern determination means for selectively determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including a reach variation pattern for specifying a reach effect for notifying the result of the lottery via a reach state based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
a symbol display control means for controlling the variation display operation of the game symbols in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means;
A gaming machine configured to be capable of executing and controlling the winning game after the game symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the symbol display means,
It has identification information arranged and visibly displayed on the front frame or the game board surface (center case),
having identification information light emitting means capable of lighting all or part of the constituent elements of the identification information;
The identification information light-emitting means causes the components of the identification information to illuminate in the same system color during a first period (during non-demonstration performance) during which the variable display operation of the game symbols is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) the identification information includes first identification information composed of two or more characters and representing at least part of a model name, and other second identification information;
The visibility of the first identification information is changed by the light emitting means, and all of the first identification information is visible in the same system color at least in the first period during the non-game period,
Visibility of the second identification information is changed by the light emitting means, and part of the second identification information is visible in a system color different from that of the second identification information at least in a first period during the non-game period (feature (i) above),
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:
(3) demo effect mode shift means for shifting the first period during which the symbols are stopped to the second period of the customer waiting demo effect mode to display the demo on the screen of the image display means on condition that the variable display operation of the game symbols is not performed for a predetermined period of time or longer;
The gaming machine according to (2) above, wherein the identification information light emitting means individually illuminates the constituent elements of the identification information, or individually illuminates one or a plurality of the constituent elements of the identification information, during the second period (during the customer waiting demonstration effect mode) during which the symbols are stopped.
(4) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), wherein the identification information light emitting means illuminates the components of the identification information in the same system color during a period other than the period during the ready-to-win effect (during the specific effect during the variation of the variable display operation of the game symbols) (for example, the period during the non-variable display operation).
(5) The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that the identification information light-emitting means individually illuminates one or a plurality of constituent elements of the identification information during the period of the ready-to-win effect (during the specific effect during the variation of the variable display operation of the game symbols).
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, characterized in that the identification information light-emitting means illuminates the components of the identification information in the same system color while the winning game is occurring.
(7) having sound effect means for reproducing a sound effect (BGM) under a predetermined condition during the winning game;
The gaming machine according to the above (1) to (6), wherein the identification information light emitting means lights the game symbols according to the melody of the sound presentation during reproduction of the sound presentation (BGM), and lights the constituent elements of the identification information in the same system color after the end of the sound presentation (BGM).
In the configuration of (7), the first identification information can be visually recognized in the same system color during reproduction of the first BGM, and at least a part of the second identification information can be visually recognized in a different system color during reproduction of the first BGM.

<7. Example of another embodiment 5, 6>
55 and 56 show examples (a) to (g) of the fifth and sixth embodiments in list form. FIGS. 57 to 62 and 63 are enlarged views of examples (a) to (g). In these, "Fujimaru-kun" is treated as an example of specific identification information (first specific identification information).

In Examples (a) to (g), three examples (a), (b), and (c) are shown by classifying them as "○", "△", and "×" from the viewpoint of whether or not they play a role as identification information. In case (a) in "○ column", "Fujimaru-kun" seems to play a role as identification information.

(7-1: Spacing (Embodiment (a), FIGS. 55 and 57)
Example (a) (see FIG. 57) illustrates how to set the "interval" between the characters of the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun".

In the embodiment (a), (a) shows the case where the characters of the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged at equal intervals (each character has the same size and font). Since the character spacing is the same, "Fujimaru-kun" in (a) is recognized as a continuous character string. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

FIG. 57(b) shows an example in which the character spacing between "Fujimaru" and "kun" is widened in the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun". This results in the same result as when ``fujimaru'' is set as the first display part and ``kun'' or ``ku'' is set as the second display portion, and is intentionally divided. It is no longer recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun", and "Fujimaru" is barely evaluated as meaningful.

FIG. 57(c) shows an example in which the character spacing between the characters "FUJIMARU-kun" and "Maru-kun" is widened in the character string that constitutes "FUJIMARU-kun". It is not recognized at all as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun". The result is the same as if "Fuji" was the first display part and "Maru-kun" was the second display part, and they were divided in a meaningless manner.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (a), when the components (character strings) of the specific identification information are divided into the first display portion and the second display portion, it is necessary to make the size (or the number of characters) of the display areas of the first display portion and the second display portion the same or substantially the same. Further, even when the first display part and the second display part are divided, it is necessary to make the character spacing of the first display part substantially the same as the character spacing of the second display part so that both are recognized as a united character string.

(7-2: Regarding how to divide when making two or more lines (Example (b), Fig. 55, Fig. 58)
Example (b) (see FIG. 58) exemplifies how to divide the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" into two or more lines.

In the embodiment (b), in (a), the character string constituting ``Fujimaru-kun'' is divided in the middle into ``Fujimaru'' and ``Kun'', which have the same number of characters, and are arranged in two upper and lower rows on the same game board (the size and font of each character are the same). Therefore, although "Fujimaru-kun" in (a) is arranged in two lines, it is recognized as a group of characters that are coherent as a whole. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

In FIG. 58(b), the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is divided into "Fujimaru" and "kun", and while "Fujimaru" is arranged in the front frame, "kun" is arranged on the game board. That is, the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged across the front frame and the game board surface. Therefore, "Fujimaru" and "kun" are emphasized as separate characters, and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" is not recognized as a united character string.

In FIG. 58(c), the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is divided into "Fujimaru-ku" and "N", and "Fujimaru-Ku" is arranged on the front frame and "N" is arranged on the game board. Since this is also an example in which the character strings constituting ``Fujimaru-kun'' are arranged across the front frame and the game board surface, ``Fujimaru-ku'' and ``N'' are emphasized as separate characters, and the character string ``Fujimaru-kun'' is not recognized as a coherent character string.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (b), when the component (character string) of the specific identification information is divided into the first display portion and the second display portion, it is necessary to arrange it so as not to straddle the front frame and the game board surface (place it on either one). If it is necessary to divide the elements (character strings) of the constant identification information into the first display part and the second display part and arrange them so as to straddle the front frame and the game board surface, it is necessary to make the size of the display area (or the number of characters) of the first display part and the second display part the same or substantially the same.

(7-3: Sense of distance when using two or more lines (Example (C), Figs. 55 and 59)
Example (c) (see FIG. 59) exemplifies the sense of distance when the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is made up of two or more lines.

In the embodiment (c), in (a), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "kun", which have the same number of characters, and are arranged in two upper and lower lines on the same game board (the size and font of each character are the same). Specifically, “Fujimaru” and “Kun” are placed above the same liquid crystal display device 1032 . Therefore, the distance between "fujimaru" and "kun" is relatively short, and the visual sense of distance is also recognized as coherent between the two lines. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

In FIG. 59(b), the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is divided into "Fujimaru" and "kun", and "Fujimaru" is arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1032, and "kun" is arranged within the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1032. Because they are placed in different materials, the sense of distance between "Fujimaru" and "Kun" is strengthened. Therefore, "Fujimaru" and "kun" are emphasized as separate characters, and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" is not recognized as a united character string.

In FIG. 59(c), the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is divided into "Fujimaru" and "kun", and "Fujimaru" is arranged above the liquid crystal display device 1032, and "kun" is arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1032. Since they are arranged apart from each other on both sides of the liquid crystal display device 1032, the sense of distance between "Fujimaru" and "kun" is very long. Therefore, it will not be recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun".

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (c), when the constituent elements (character strings) of the specific identification information are divided into the first display portion and the second display portion, the upper side and the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1032 (or the left side and the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1032) are not separated, but both are arranged on either side. In addition, in order to make it easier to recognize as a whole, it is not divided into two-dimensional notation (for example, printing on the surface, attachment of printed matter) and three-dimensional notation (structure), but unified into one of them.

(7-4: Parallel feeling when using two or more lines (Example (d), Fig. 56, Fig. 60)
Example (d) (see FIG. 60) exemplifies the sense of parallelism when the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" has two or more lines.

In the embodiment (d), in (a), the character string constituting ``Fujimaru-kun'' is divided into ``Fujimaru'' and ``Kun'', and ``Fujimaru'' is slanted on the same game board surface, and ``Kun'' is slanted in the same direction as 'Fujimaru' (the size and font of each character are the same). For this reason, the two character string portions of "Fujimaru" and "Kun" are recognized as being cohesive. Therefore, (a) is considered to play a role as identification information, so it belongs to the "○ column".

In FIG. 60(b), character strings forming "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged in an arch shape (along the arc of the launch rail) on the game board surface. Therefore, the degree to which ``Fujimaru'' and ``kun'' are recognized as separate characters is weakened, and the character string ``Fujimaru-kun'' is likely to be recognized as a coherent character string.

In FIG. 60(c), the character string forming ``Fujimaru-kun'' is divided into ``Fujimaru'' and ``Kun'', and ``Fujimaru'' is arranged on the same game board with an inclination, while ``Kun'' is arranged in a different direction from the inclination of ``Fujimaru''. Specifically, "Fujimaru" is arranged in an arched manner (along the arc of the launch rail) and inclined, and "Kun" is arranged laterally, that is, at an angle of inclination of zero. Therefore, the sense of parallelism between "Fujimaru" and "kun" is lost, and the character string "Fujimaru-kun" is not recognized as a united character string.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (d), when the components (character strings) of the specific identification information are divided into the first display section and the second display section, they need to be arranged in parallel with each other. In other words, when it is desired to arrange the device in an inclined manner, the first display portion is arranged in an inclined manner, and the second display portion is inclined in the same direction as the inclination of the first display portion. Alternatively, the first display portion and the second display portion may be inclined in an arch shape, that is, along concentric circles.

(7-5: Character Size (Embodiment (E), Figs. 56 and 61)
In FIG. 61(a), for "Fujimaru-kun" placed in the front frame, the size and spacing of the characters forming "Fujimaru-kun" are made the same to give a sense of unity.

In FIG. 61(b), the character size is gradually reduced in the order of "wisteria", "circle", and "kun", and the character spacing also changes from large to small in this order. Therefore, the sense of unity is weakened.

In FIG. 61(c), the character size of "Wisteria" is large, and the character size of "Maru-kun" is reduced to about 1/2 of "Wisteria" in vertical size. If the character sizes are extremely irregular like this, the character string "Fujimaru-kun" will not be recognized as a cohesive character string.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (e), it is necessary to unify the size of each component (character) that constitutes the specific identification information. Moreover, when changing the size of each component (character) which comprises specific identification information, they are made small or large at equal intervals.

(7-6: Regarding Character Fonts (Example (F), Figs. 56 and 62)
In FIG. 62(a), regarding "Fujimaru-kun" placed in the front frame, the font (character style) and color of the characters constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are made the same to give a sense of unity. Any font can be used, and for example, the one shown in FIG. 79 can be adopted.

FIG. 62(b) displays "Fujimaru-kun" in two lines by using a bold font for "Fujimaru" and a thin font for "kun". In other words, although the character style and color are not unified as in (a), a line (frame line) is provided around the entire two lines so that it can be seen that they are grouped together in order to give a sense of unity. A sense of unity can be produced by providing the enclosure in this way.

FIG. 62(c) displays "Fujimaru-kun" in one line by using a thin font for "wisteria", a bold font for "round", and a thin font for "n". As in (a), uniformity of character style and uniformity of color is not achieved. Also, there is no enclosing line (frame line) for giving a sense of unity.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (f), in order to create a sense of unity, it is necessary to unify the character style and color of each component (character) constituting the specific identification information. If the character style or color of some of the components (characters) that make up the specific identification information is different, it is necessary to (i) provide an enclosing line (including a solid line or a boundary line due to unevenness of the structure), (ii) use the same background color, (iii) use the same decoration (for example, each character is bordered by silver plating), etc.

(7-7: Regarding light emission mode (Example (G), Fig. 56, Fig. 63)
Example (g) (see FIG. 63) exemplifies the lighting mode when the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" is illuminated. The term "luminescence mode" used herein includes a form that emits light by itself and a form that is brightly illuminated from another source.

FIG. 63(a) deals with the display during the "normal game state" period or the "demonstration display" period. The identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed in the front frame as a continuous character string.

FIG. 63(b) deals with display during the period of "during advance notice effect" (during symbol fluctuation). That is, FIG. 63(b) illustrates a situation in which the character part of "kun" in "Fujimaru-kun" shines brighter than the other character part of "Fujimaru" during the period of "prediction effect in progress". The purpose of the notice effect is to convey the ``expectation of winning'' to the player, and when the character part of ``kun'' shines, attention is directed to the fact that it shines and the color, and the meaning of ``kun'' is not conscious. Therefore, there is no fear that it will be recognized as a trademark usage mode.

On the other hand, FIG. 63(c) deals with the display after shifting to the period of "standby", ie, "demonstration display" (symbols stopped ≠ jackpot). The character part of "kun" in "Fujimaru-kun" shines brighter than the other character part of "Fujimaru". Since this "demonstration display" period is a non-game period, there is a risk that the use of the character "kun" will be recognized as a trademark usage mode.

From the above, the following can be said. (i) At a predetermined timing, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the entire specific identification information emits light in the same system color. (ii) It is possible to adopt a display mode in which the entire specific identification information is lit (or extinguished) at a predetermined timing. Here, the "predetermined timing" refers to a timing with a certain width, which may be during symbol stoppage (not during the jackpot) or during symbol variation. That is, while the symbols are stopped (not during the jackpot), it refers to a period (that is, a timing with width) that occupies at least half of the time, and during symbol fluctuation), it refers to a period that occupies at least half of the time (that is, timing with a width). (iii) Specifically, the entire specific identification information can be uniformly lit while the symbols are stopped, and at least part of the specific identification information can be blinked (or lit in a different color) while the symbols are changing.

<8. Other Embodiments 7 and 8>
(8-1: Conventional problems)
Conventionally, in some pinball game machines, the model name is arranged as a logo on the front frame or the game board surface. It is also known that the model name logo has various lighting modes corresponding to the advance notice effect and the ready-to-reach effect. Furthermore, there is also known a device in which a model name logo is movable (or deformed/combined) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949).

When the identification information composed of characters, figures, symbols, etc. is displayed on the game machine, it is free to decide where to place the identification information, whether to place two or more pieces of identification information, and how to display it. In addition, in recent gaming machines, the displayable area when viewed from the front is increasing, and along with this, the degree of freedom in the arrangement position and the number of pieces of identification information is also increasing. As a result, depending on the arrangement location, the number of arrangements, or the display mode, the function as the original identification information may be weakened, and there is a risk of being misidentified as different identification information.

Therefore, in another embodiment 7, this problem is solved by highlighting the specific identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pinball game machine, and by making the non-specific identification information inconspicuous when there is non-specific identification information in addition to the specific identification information in another embodiment 8.

(8-2: Evaluation criteria)
First, let's talk about what can be the criteria for evaluation.

(Priority of location)
As shown in FIG. 36A, when the frame 1010 is viewed from the side, the frame upper portion 1011 bulges forward with respect to the frame middle portion 1012 and the frame lower portion 1013, and the frame upper front surface 1011a protrudes forward from the front surfaces of the frame middle portion 1012 and the frame lower portion 1013. As a result, the gaming machine strongly asserts the existence of its own gaming machine to the player by projecting the frame upper part 1011 and making the frame upper front face 1011a approach the player side.

FIG. 36(A) shows the height position A of the line of sight of the trader or the player when the trader or the player stands near the gaming machine, and FIG. When a trader purchases a game machine, it is common for the game machine to be placed in the test room in the same manner as the hall, and the game machine is selected while standing, and the player sits down to test the game. Similarly, when a player plays with a game machine in a hall, he/she selects a game table while standing and starts playing while sitting. Since the situation in this area is the same between the trader and the player, the explanation below will focus on the case where the game machine is seen from the player's point of view.

When a player searches for a gaming machine in a hall, the player observes and confirms the gaming machine while standing. At this time, the player's line of sight is at position A in FIG. 36(A). This line-of-sight height position A is particularly close to the frame upper portion 1011 of the frame 1010 of the gaming machine. Therefore, when looking at the game machine in a "standing state", the degree of stimulus that stimulates the eyes of the player is the highest since the frame 1010, which is easily visible even from a distance, especially the upper part of the frame 1011 is easily noticeable. In addition to this point, in the case of the frame upper part 1011 shown in FIG. 36(A), the frame upper part front face 1011a is structured to protrude to the front side. In the case of a game machine with this structure, the frame upper front face 1011a, which projects forward, is particularly noticeable among the front faces. Therefore, the upper frame portion 1011 having a structure in which the upper frame front portion 1011a protrudes has a higher degree of stimulation than the upper frame portion 1011 having a structure in which the frame upper portion front portion 1011a does not protrude.

When viewed from the line-of-sight height position A, the next eye-catching part is the frame middle part 1012, and it is presumed that it will go to the area of the game board 1020, which is the inner part surrounded by the frame 1010, and the display surfaces of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032.

Next, when the player sits down, the player's line of sight is at height position B (FIG. 36(B)) facing the game board 1020 . At this time, the frame upper front face 1011a becomes invisible. The part that attracts attention is the middle of the front of the game machine, and the display area of the frame middle part 1012 and the area of the game board 1020 that is the inner part surrounded by the frame 1010, that is, the game area 1021 and the non-game area 1022, are easy to see. It is assumed that the face of means 1042 is more visible.

On the other hand, there are cases where it is desired to arrange or display identification information consisting of letters, graphics, or symbols so as to stand out on the gaming machine. This includes not only the display of the "model name, manufacturer name, etc." of the game machine, which is considered to be closely related to the product identification indication and the indication of origin, but also the case of displaying "the name of the premium character or the main character of the story, etc.", which is not considered to be so closely related to the indication of origin, etc., and the case where the display mode can be seen as a design for decorating goods.

If the parts of the game machine suitable as the "arrangement position (arrangement or display place)" of such identification information are classified according to whether they are easy to see at the line-of-sight height position A in the standing position (the degree of stimulation that stimulates the player's eyes), (1) frame 1010 (frame upper part 1011, frame middle part 1012, frame lower part 1013), (2) game board 1020 (game area 1021, non-game area 1022), (3) liquid crystal display. There are devices 1030 (main liquid crystal display device 1031, sub-liquid crystal display device 1032), (4) operation means 1040 (lower operation means (effect button) 1041, upper operation means 1042), and the "identification information transmission power (power corresponding to the index power of a trademark)" increases in the order of (1), (2), (3), and (4). In other words, in the order of frame>game board>liquid crystal display device>operation means, the ability to transmit the identification information becomes stronger, and the "predominance" as the arrangement position becomes higher.

(order of magnitude)
Next, consider from the viewpoint of the “size” of the identification information, that is, the display size. The identification power or information transmission effect of identification information (the degree of self-appeal of identification information) becomes stronger as the identification information is displayed in a larger size. Therefore, regarding "size", the larger the size, the higher the "predominance". For example, if the size is classified into three categories of "large", "medium", and "small", the identification information has stronger identification power as the size is described earlier. That is, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information increases in the order of small<medium<large size, and the "predominance" in determining the display mode increases.

(Priority of display period)
Next, consider from the viewpoint of the "display period" during which the identification information is displayed. Considering the degree of discriminating power or information transmission effect (self-appeal of identification information) of the identification information in terms of the length of the "display period", the longer the display period, the stronger the self-appeal of the identification information. Therefore, when determining the display mode with respect to the "display period", the longer the displayed period is, the more advantageous it is, that is, the higher the "predominance".

In the case of a gaming machine, there are two modes of displaying identification information: one in which the identification information is displayed "always" for a display period, and the other in which the identification information is displayed "temporarily" under specific conditions. Comparing the two, the degree of identification is stronger when the identification information is displayed "always" than when it is displayed "temporarily".

The former case of "constant" display includes a static display mode and a dynamic display mode as follows. (a) a “static display mode” in which the identification information is drawn two-dimensionally or three-dimensionally so that it exists constantly; (b) a “static display mode” in which the identification information is illuminated by a built-in lamp or by self-luminescence, and the identification information is continuously brightly displayed (continuously lit);

In the latter case where identification information is displayed "temporarily" under specific conditions, there is a case where identification information is displayed on the screen of image display device 1030 for a predetermined period under predetermined conditions. For example, there are cases where (a) the identification information is displayed as a specific effect with an extremely high probability of winning during the ready-to-win effect, provided that the lottery is won during the ready-to-win effect, (b) the identification information is displayed on the demo screen generated by the image display device 1030 on the condition that no game is played for a certain period of time, or (c) the identification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 1030 during the opening period or ending period during the jackpot game.

As for the "display period" of the identification information, the degree of "temporary" display, that is, the higher the display frequency, the stronger the degree of self-appeal of the identification information. In other words, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information becomes stronger when the degree of "temporary" display is higher than when it is displayed less frequently, and the degree of self-appeal of the identification information becomes strongest when it is displayed "always". Therefore, regarding the “display period” of the identification information, the order of precedence is always>temporary (high frequency)>temporary (low frequency).

In the case of "temporary" display by the image display device 1030, the identification information is displayed as an image on the screen, so the identification information does not necessarily have to maintain the same display mode during the displayed period. For example, when the identification information consists of a plurality of characters, it may be a ``static display mode'' in which the characters are displayed ``temporarily'' while maintaining a certain size, arrangement, or shape, or a ``dynamic display mode,'' in which the size, shape, etc., change during display, although the display is ``temporary''.

In short, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information is stronger when it is displayed "always" than when it is displayed "temporarily". As for the period during which the identification information is displayed, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information becomes stronger as the degree of "temporary" display (display frequency) increases, and the self-appeal of the identification information becomes the strongest when the identification information is displayed "always".

(Summary of evaluation criteria)
To summarize the above arrangement location, size, and display period, when it is desired to provide identification information on a gaming machine to make it stand out, the following three evaluation criteria (judgment scales) 1 to 3 are considered regarding the priority of the display mode, which is effective and advantageous where and how to display the identification information (see the description at the bottom of FIG. 36 (A)).
(Evaluation Criteria 1: Location)
As for the "arrangement location" of the identification information, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information increases in the order of frame>game board>liquid crystal display>operation means, and the priority also increases in this order. This order of precedence is followed when determining the display mode of the "arrangement location".
(Evaluation Criteria 2: Size)
As for the "size" of the identification information, when the display size is classified into "large", "medium", and "small", the degree of self-appeal of the identification information increases in the order of large>medium>small. Therefore, when determining the display mode for the "size" of the identification information, this order of precedence is followed.
(Evaluation criteria 3: display period)
As for the "display period" of the identification information, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information becomes stronger as the degree of display increases, and becomes the strongest when the identification information is displayed "always". Therefore, regarding the "display period" of the identification information, since the degree of self-appeal increases in the order of always>temporary (high frequency)>temporary (low frequency), the order of priority is followed when determining the display mode.

(8-3: Embodiment in Which Specific Identification Information Arranged in a Place Other Than the Screen of the Liquid Crystal Display Appears Conspicuous (Another Embodiment 7), FIGS. 64 and 65)
A display mode (another embodiment 5) in which identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device is conspicuous by appropriately arranging the information will be described. This section deals with specific identification information (low trademark risk) and non-specific identification information (high trademark risk or unknown trademark risk). Trademark risk refers to the degree of fear of trademark infringement due to being evaluated as trademark use. Both specific identification information and non-specific identification information are types of identification marks, and the only difference is the trademark risk. Therefore, "specific identification information and non-specific identification information" can also be referred to as "first specific identification information and second specific identification information".

In the example of FIG. 64, for ease of understanding, the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is used as the first specific identification information, and the subtitle "Kanshin-juku" is used as the second specific identification information. However, due to the difference in trademark risk, it is also possible to treat the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" as specific identification information and the subtitle "Kanshin-juku" as non-specific identification information.

In FIG. 64(a), the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", which is the first specific identification information, is arranged in the upper part of the frame 1011, and the subtitle "Practice and punishment", which is the second specific identification information, is arranged on the game board. The subtitle "Rewarding the Good and Punishing the Bad" is arranged below the liquid crystal display device 1032 by dividing it into "Rewarding the Good" and "Rewarding the Bad". In the example of FIG. 64(a), the model name ``Fujimaru-kun'' is above the subtitle ``Kanshin-juku'', and the size of ``Fujimaru-kun'' is larger than that of ``Kanzen-kun''.

On the other hand, in FIG. 64(b), the arrangement relationship of the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information is reversed, and the subtitle of the second specific identification information, ie, ``Kudos and Punishment,'' is arranged in the upper frame 1011, and the model name of ``Mr. In addition, since the size of "Mr. Fujimaru" is smaller than that of "Kanshin Jaku", it is difficult to recognize "Mr. Fujimaru" as a model name.

Therefore, when arranging the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information, it is necessary to display the first specific identification information to be conspicuous above and larger than the second specific identification information. Also, when arranging the identification information and the second specific identification information, it is necessary to display the first specific identification information to be conspicuous above and larger than the second specific identification information.

In FIG. 65(a), the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", which is the first specific identification information, is arranged in the upper frame 1011, and the non-specific identification information "fate" is arranged on the game ball rolling surface of the game board. Then, the second specific identification information ``Horror of Hell Hell God'' is arranged on the front side of the non-specific identification information ``fate'' by arranging it on a three-dimensional surface of the game board surface that bulges to the front side. The frame that surrounds the 'Horror of the Hell Demon God' indicates that it bulges out toward the front. The font sizes are in the following relationship: "Mr. Fujimaru" > "The Phantom of Hell Hell" > "Fate", with "Mr. Fujimaru" having the largest size. Therefore, "Mr. Fujimaru" is likely to be recognized as the model name.

On the other hand, in FIG. 65(b), the arrangement relationship of the first specific identification information, the second specific identification information, and the non-specific identification information is the same as in FIG. 65(a), but the character sizes are in the relationship of "Mr. The non-specific identification information "fate" is formed on a three-dimensional surface protruding forward, as indicated by a frame, and the second specific identification information is arranged closer to the front. Therefore, if it is one of the identification information, it is difficult for the second specific identification information, "Horror of Hell", to be recognized as identification information.

Therefore, when arranging the first specific identification information, the second specific identification information, and the non-specific identification information, that is, in order for both the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information to be recognized as identification information, it is necessary to make the second specific identification information larger than the non-specific identification information, or to arrange the second specific identification information closer to the side than the non-specific identification information (for example, three-dimensionally).

(8-4: Embodiment in which non-specific identification information is not conspicuous (another embodiment 8), FIG. 66)
A display mode (another embodiment 8) in which non-specific identification information is made inconspicuous for identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device will be described. Here, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is treated as specific identification information (those with low trademark risk), and the manufacturer's logo (combination of the symbol mark and characters, symbol mark only, or characters only) is treated as non-specific identification information (high trademark risk or unknown trademark risk). The logo used here is a combination of the characters "dot mark" and "FUJI" shown in FIG. 66, but is abbreviated as "FUJI" for convenience of explanation.

FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b) exemplify a form in which the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", which is the identification information, is arranged above the crystal display device 1032 on the game board surface, and the logo "FUJI" of the non-specific identification information appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1032. Family crests and logos of manufacturing companies are often registered as trademarks or other registrations, and if they are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1032 for a long time, it seems that the registered trademarks are being used. In particular, as shown in FIG. 66(c), when these non-specific identification information are larger than a certain size (for example, 5 cm or more in diameter) and always visible, or when the non-specific identification information is arranged on the front frame or represented as a three-dimensional structure as shown in FIG.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the logo "FUJI" is normally displayed in such a manner that only a portion of it is visible. Then, if necessary, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the area where the logo "FUJI" appears in the screen temporarily increases, and finally the entire logo "FUJI" can be visually recognized. If the display of non-identifying information is temporary in this way, even a logo is less likely to be seen as a trademark usage mode.

Therefore, when dealing with specific identification information with low trademark risk and non-specific identification information with high trademark risk, the non-specific identification information should be made inconspicuous. For that purpose, (i) the non-specific identification information is not arranged in the front frame, (ii) the non-specific identification information is arranged in a planar display mode instead of a three-dimensional structure on the game board surface, (iii) the non-specific identification information is arranged in a certain size or less on the game board surface, (iv) the non-specific identification information is not always displayed in a display mode (arranged as a three-dimensional structure), but is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1032, It is necessary to make it visible as a complete product.

(9: Configuration Examples of Alternative Embodiments 7 and 8)
The seventh and eighth alternative embodiments described in FIGS. 64, 65, and 66 can be specifically configured as follows.

(1) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
It has specific identification information (first identification information) and non-specific identification information (second identification information) that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged in the front frame,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) The game machine according to (1) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(3) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged on the game board,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(4) The game machine according to (3) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(5) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is configured to be displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(6) The game machine according to (5) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(7) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
an effect control means for generating an effect on the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is always visibly displayed, and the non-specific identification information is displayed during the performance generated by the performance control means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(8) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged in the front frame,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(9) The game machine according to (8) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(10) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged on the game board,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(11) The game machine according to (9) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(12) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a center case provided on the game board surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
the non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display means;
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(13) The game machine according to (12) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(14) a body frame that holds a game board having a game area provided on its front surface;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
an effect control means for generating an effect on the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information,
The specific identification information is always visibly displayed, and the non-specific identification information is displayed during the performance generated by the performance control means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(15) a main body frame holding a game board having a game area provided on the front surface thereof;
a front frame provided on the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable and having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image;
A gaming machine comprising
having specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visibly displayed on the gaming machine,
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged in a place other than the front frame,
The specific identification information is displayed on the image display means above the non-specific identification information,
The non-specific identification information is arranged smaller than the specific identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by:
(16) The game machine according to (15) above, wherein the non-specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body.

<10. Example 1 of Alternative Embodiments 7 and 8, FIGS. 67 to 70>
Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 67 to 70) shows the case where the first identification information is arranged in the "front frame".

In this example, the "model name (Fujimaru-kun)" of the gaming machine is treated as the identification information (first identification information) that should be most conspicuous. At the same time, identification information other than the model name (manufacturer name, etc.) is also handled. Since it is assumed that the identification information that you want to display most conspicuously is the model name (Fujimaru-kun), make sure that the "model name" stands out more than any other identification information (for example, "manufacturer name"). Therefore, in light of the evaluation criteria (evaluation scales) 1 to 3, the one with the highest priority is adopted for each of the model name "arrangement location", "size" and "display period". Specifically, "frame" is selected for "arrangement position" of the model name, "large" is selected for "size", and "always" is selected for "display period".

As a result of this selection, in the examples of FIGS. 35(B) and 36(A), characters "Fujimaru-kun" are three-dimensionally provided as the model name 1080 on the upper frame 1011, more precisely, on the upper front face 1011a of the frame (evaluation criterion 1: placement location "frame"). In addition, the size of the model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the first identification information, is set to a size that fills the vertical width of the frame upper front face 1011a or protrudes beyond it, that is, the maximum size (evaluation criterion 2: size "large"). In addition, the character "Fujimaru-kun" is provided as a physical structure by uneven notation (protruding or recessed), that is, it is provided so as to always exist in the upper front face 1011a of the frame (evaluation criterion 3: display period "always"). As a result, the characters "Fujimaru-kun" are displayed in the most conspicuous manner, and the fact that the model name of the gaming machine is "Fujimaru-kun" is appealing to the player as much as possible.

FIG. 67 is a list of display modes in the case where the "model name" is attached to the gaming machine as the first identification information and the information "other than the model name" is attached as the second identification information. The left-hand column of FIG. 67 shows an example of the display mode of how "Fujimaru-kun" of the "model name", which is the first identification information, is attached. Also, in the right column of FIG. 67, various display modes of how the identification information (second identification information) "other than the model name" is attached are summarized as a list.

The model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the first identification information in the "left column" of FIG. 67, is displayed in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. Also in the list in the "right column" of FIG. 67, it is assumed that the first identification information is the same model name "Fujimaru-kun" as that shown in the left column, and the display mode is the same. 35(B) and 36(A), it is provided in the frame upper front 1011a of the frame 1010 (arrangement location: “frame”) in the maximum size (size: “large”) and in a shape that is always visible (display period: “always”).

In this list (on the right side of FIG. 67), "manufacturer name" is handled as identification information (second identification information) of "other than model name". Regarding the method of displaying the "manufacturer name" of the second identification information, there are differences in the location and size with respect to the first identification information, which are characterized as a combination for "Fujimaru-kun" in the first identification information. Therefore, these differences are classified by a combination of (a), (b), and (c) rows (horizontal groups) indicating where in the game machine the "arrangement location" of the second identification information is and (alpha), (beta), and (gamma) columns (vertical groups) indicating how the "size" of the second identification information is to be set, thereby clarifying the characteristics of the display mode.

More specifically, the "placement location" for displaying the name of the manufacturer of the second identification information is divided into three lines: (a) frame, (b) game board surface, and (c) liquid crystal display. The "size" of the manufacturer name of the second identification information is divided into three columns: (α) "first identification information (model name) < second identification information (other than model name)", (β) "first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)", and (γ) "first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name)". Also, whether the "display period" is set to "normal" or "temporary" is also divided by the division numbers 1 to 6.

In the above list (on the right side of FIG. 67), display examples a, b, and c belong to the horizontal group (a) in which the second identification information (other than the model name) is provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame, display examples d, e, and f belong to the horizontal group (b) in which the second identification information (other than the model name) is provided on the game board surface (game board 1020), and display examples g, h, and i belong to the second identification information (other than the model name) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1030. belongs to the horizontal group (c). Display examples a, d, and g belong to the vertical group of (α) “first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)”, display examples b, e, and h belong to the vertical group of (β) “first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)”, and display examples c, f, and i belong to the vertical group of (γ) “first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name)”.

Display examples a to i will be individually described below.

(10-1: Display example a, Fig. 68)
FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of display examples a, b, and c belonging to the group in the right column (a) row of FIG.

In the display example a of FIG. 68 (row A, column α in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), and the manufacturing company name, which is the second identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fujishoji Co., Ltd." on the surface of the middle frame 1012. The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged at the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), and the characters of "Fujimaru-kun" of the second identification information are provided in a size larger than that of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information. In this display example a, the second identification information “Fujishoji Co., Ltd.” has a size that slightly protrudes from the width of the middle portion 1012 of the frame. However, the sizes of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji Co., Ltd.” can be either a size that fits within the width of the frame upper portion 1011 or the frame middle portion 1012, or a size that protrudes from the width, as long as the relationship of (α) the first identification information (model name) < the second identification information (other than the model name) is maintained.

In this display example a, the size of the identification information has a relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name) < second identification information (other than model name)" (Fig. 67 α column), and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji Co., Ltd." is larger than the model name "Fujimaru-kun". However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (the upper frame front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). That is, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is higher than the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji Co., Ltd.". Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” is higher than that of the manufacturer name “Fujishoji Co., Ltd.” provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example a is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship. In addition, the first identification information can be arranged as a non-movable object, and the second constant identification information can be arranged as a movable object.

(10-2: Display example b, Fig. 68)
In the display example b of FIG. 68 (row A, column β in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the "frame upper part 1011" (frame upper front face 1011a), and the second identification information is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the "middle part 1012". Since the letters ``Co., Ltd.'' are omitted from the manufacturing company name ``Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd.'' and only ``Fuji Shoji'' is left, it is difficult to understand whether it is the indication of the manufacturing company name, and that much is closer to the trademark usage mode. However, it is the same as the display example a in that the name of the manufacturer is considered to be displayed. Therefore, in the following description, for the sake of convenience, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" will be described as representing the company name.

However, in display example b, the size has a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)", and the size of "Fujishoji" of the second identification information is relatively the same as the size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information. The display of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji” does not necessarily have to fit within the horizontal width of the frame upper part 1011 or the frame middle part 1012 as long as the relationship “(β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)” is maintained, and any size that protrudes from the horizontal width can be adopted.

In this display example b, there is a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)", and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" are almost the same size. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example b is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-3: Display example c, Fig. 68)
In the display example c of FIG. 68 (row A, column γ in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the upper frame portion 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), and the manufacturing company name, which is the second identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the middle frame portion 1012. The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged at the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame portion 1011 (the upper frame front surface 1011a). Also, the second identification information "Fujishoji" is provided in a smaller size than the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". That is, the relationship is "(γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name)". This differs from display example b in that the display size of "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is smaller than that of the model name "Fujimaru-kun".

In this display example c, the second identification information “Fuji Shoji” is within the width of the middle portion 1012 of the frame. However, as long as the relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name) is maintained, the sizes of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” and the second identification information “Fujishoji” can be either within the horizontal width of the frame upper portion 1011 or the frame middle portion 1012, or the size protruding from the horizontal width.

In this display example c, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface (frame upper front face 1011a) of the upper frame 1011, which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). In addition, there is a relationship of first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name), and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the middle part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example c is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-4: Display example d, Fig. 69)
In the display example d in FIG. 69 (row α column in FIG. 67 ), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters “Fujimaru-kun” on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (upper frame front 1011a), and the characters “Fujishoji” as the manufacturer name, which is the second identification information, are provided on the game board (game area 1021) at a position lower than the liquid crystal display device. As a method for providing the characters of "Fuji Shoji" on the game board surface in this way, there is a method of providing the characters of "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the game board 1020 by projecting or recessing them, a method of providing the characters of "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the game board 1020 without steps or with steps, and a normally transparent liquid crystal display sheet (electronic paper) is provided so as to cover the entire surface of the game board 1020, and if necessary, the liquid crystal display sheet is provided. Any method of displaying characters of "Fuji Shoji" may be used.

The electronic paper is provided as a transmissive display device between the front frame 2 and the game board 3 so that the game area 3a of the game board can be seen through from the front side. There are various methods of electronic paper, and any one of a microcapsule method, an electronic liquid powder method, a liquid crystal method, and an electrowetting method can be used. Since these methods are known at present, detailed description of these methods will be omitted.

The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged at the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), and the second identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is provided in a larger size than the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". In addition, the characters of “FUJI” are arranged so as to surround the main liquid crystal display device 1031 without forming a straight line. However, the sizes of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fujishoji" do not need to fit within the game board surface (game area 1021) and be visible from the front as long as the relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)" is maintained.

In this display example d, the relationship is "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)", and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" is larger than the model name "Fujimaru-kun". However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface (frame upper front 1011a) of the upper frame 1011, which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority), that is, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is higher than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". In this sense, the display example d is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-5: Display example e, Fig. 69)
In the display example e of FIG. 69 (row β column of FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), and the characters "Fujishoji" are provided on the game board (game area 1021) as the manufacturing company name, which is the second identification information. This point is the same as the display example d.

However, display example e is different from display example d in that the second identification information, name of the manufacturing company "Fujishoji", is provided in the upper part of the game board surface (game area 1021), more precisely, above the main liquid crystal display device 1032.

Also, in display example e, the size has a relationship of (β) the first identification information (model name)≈the second identification information (other than the model name), and the size of the second identification information "Fujishoji" is relatively the same as the size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information. In this display example e, the display of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fujishoji" does not need to be entirely visible from the front within the game board surface (game area 1021) as long as the relationship of (β) the first identification information (model name)≈the second identification information (other than the model name) is maintained. I can.

In this display example e, there is a relationship of (β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name), and the model name “Fujimaru-kun” and the manufacturer name “Fujishoji” are almost the same size. In addition, the manufacturer name "Fujishoji", which is the second identification information, is provided above the game board surface (game area 1021). However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” is higher than that of the manufacturer name “Fujishoji” provided in the game area 1021 . In this sense, the display example e is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-6: Display example f, Fig. 69)
In the display example f in FIG. 69 (row γ column in FIG. 67 ), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters “Fujimaru-kun” on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), and the manufacturing company name, which is the second identification information, is provided on the upper part of the game board (game area 1021), more precisely, above the main liquid crystal display device 1032. This point is the same as the display example e.

However, in display example f, the size has a relationship of "(γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name)", and the size of "Fujishoji" in the second identification information is relatively smaller than the size of "Fujimaru-kun" in the first identification information. In the case of display example f, the display of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fujishoji" does not have to be entirely visible from the front within the game board surface (game area 1021) as long as the relationship of "(γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name)" is maintained. You can also

In this display example f, the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji", which is the second identification information, is provided above the game board surface (game area 1021). However, there is a relationship of "(γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name)", and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a) which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority), that is, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun” is higher than that of the manufacturer name “Fujishoji” provided in the game area 1021 . In this sense, the display example f is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-7: Display example g, Fig. 70)
In the display example g of FIG. 70 (row C, column α in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (upper frame front 1011a), and the characters "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031.

Here, it is assumed that the characters ``Fuji Shoji'' are displayed on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 1032. For example, the characters ``Fuji Shoji'' are displayed as a specific effect with an extremely high expectation of winning during the ready-to-win effect, the characters ``Fuji Shoji'' are displayed on the demo screen generated on the image display device 1030 when the game is not being played, and the characters ``Fuji Shoji'' are displayed on the screen during the jackpot game. and the like. In either case, the characters "Fuji Shoji" are "temporarily" displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device.

This display example g, together with display examples h and i described later, belongs to the horizontal group (c) as a display example in which the characters "Fuji Shoji" are "temporarily" displayed. This horizontal group (C) is distinguished from horizontal groups (A) and (B) in which the characters "Fuji Shoji" are "always" displayed (display examples a to f) in that the characters "Fuji Shoji" are "temporarily" displayed.

The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged in the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the upper frame 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), and the second identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is provided in a larger size than the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". Then, the entire arrangement of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits within the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entirety can be seen from the front.

However, as long as the relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)" is maintained, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not have to fit within the liquid crystal screen and be displayed in a state where the whole can be seen from the front. Also, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fujishoji" does not always have to be the same size, and can be changed as required, and may be displayed so that each character has a different size.

In this display example g, the relationship is "(α) first identification information (model name)<second identification information (other than model name)", and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" is larger than the model name "Fujimaru-kun". However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is only temporarily displayed. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of "Fujishoji" of the second identification information displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In this sense, the display example g is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-8: display example h, Fig. 70)
In the display example h of FIG. 70 (row C, column β in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing the characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (front front 1011a of the frame), and the characters "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031. This point is the same as the display example g.

However, in display example h, the size has a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≈ second identification information (other than model name)", and the size of "Fujishoji" in the second identification information is almost the same as the size of "Fujimaru-kun" in the first identification information. Then, the entire arrangement of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits within the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entirety can be seen from the front.

However, even in the case of this display example h, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not need to fit within the liquid crystal screen and be displayed in a state where the whole can be seen from the front as long as the relationship of "(β) the first identification information (model name) ≈ the second identification information (other than the model name)" is maintained. Also, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not always have to be the same size, and it is possible to change the size as necessary, and the size of each character may be displayed differently.

In this display example h, there is a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name)≈second identification information (other than model name)", and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" are almost the same size. Also, the manufacturer name “Fuji Shoji”, which is the second identification information, is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032 . However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority). Also, the second identification information, name of the manufacturing company "Fujishoji", is temporarily displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032, and is not always displayed. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the main liquid crystal display device 1032 . In this sense, the display example h is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-9: display example i, Fig. 70)
In the display example i in FIG. 70 (row C, γ column in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, is provided by protruding or recessing characters "Fujimaru-kun" on the surface of the upper frame 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a). This point is the same as in display examples g and h.

However, in display example i, the size has a relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than model name), and the size of the second identification information “Fujimaru-kun” is relatively smaller than the size of the first identification information “Fujimaru-kun”. Then, the entire arrangement of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits within the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entirety can be seen from the front.

In the case of this display example i, the size of the second identification information "Fujishoji" does not have to fit within the liquid crystal screen and be displayed in a state where the whole can be seen from the front, as long as the relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than the model name) is maintained. Also, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not always have to be the same size, and it is possible to change the size as necessary, and the size of each character may be displayed differently.

In this display example i, there is a relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)>second identification information (other than the model name), and the second identification information, name of the manufacturing company “Fujishoji”, is displayed in a small size on the lower main liquid crystal display device 1032. In other words, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" has a larger relationship than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". Also, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front face 1011a) which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest priority), that is, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is at a higher position than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji". Also, the second identification information, name of the manufacturing company "Fujishoji", is temporarily displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032, and is not always displayed. Therefore, the degree of self-appeal of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is higher than that of the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" provided in the main liquid crystal display device 1032 . In this sense, the display example i is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-10: display period)
The “display period” column in FIG. 67 indicates that in the above display examples a to i, there are cases where the display period is “always” (cases of classification numbers 1, 3, and 5) and cases of “temporary” (cases of classification numbers 2, 4, and 6).

In the case where the second identification information is arranged in the “frame” (horizontal group (a)), one display period is “always” (section number 1), which means that the first identification information and the second identification information are always displayed without disappearing, which is the same as described above. The other display period being “temporary” (section number 2) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may appear and be displayed temporarily. For this, for example, an LED, a liquid crystal display device, or the like is provided in a convex shape, a concave shape, or a sheet shape with respect to the frame 1010, thereby forming a character display device, and one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information are lit by the character display device as necessary.

Classification numbers 3 and 4 indicate that in the above display examples d to f, there are cases where the display period is "always" (case of division number 3) and "temporary" (case of division number 4). When the location of the second identification information is "game board surface" (horizontal group (b)), one display period is "always" (division number 3), which means that the first identification information and the second identification information are always displayed without disappearing, which is the same as described above. The other display period being “temporary” (section number 4) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may appear and be displayed temporarily. For example, this can be configured as follows for the second identification information. An LED or liquid crystal display device is provided directly on the surface of the game board 1020 (game area 1021, non-game area 1022) in a convex or concave shape or in a sheet form, or a transparent liquid crystal sheet is provided in parallel with the game board surface in a state of floating from the game board surface, thereby constituting a character display device, and the second identification information is lit and displayed as necessary. The form of temporarily displaying the first identification information in this section number 4 may be constructed in the same manner as in the case of section number 2 specifically.

Classification numbers 5 and 6 indicate that in the above display examples g to i, there are cases where the display period is "always" (case of division number 5) and "temporary" (case of division number 6). When the location of the second identification information is "liquid crystal display device" (horizontal group (c)), one display period is "always" (classification number 5), which means that the first identification information and the second identification information are always displayed without disappearing, which is the same as described above. The other display period being "temporary" (section number 6) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may appear and be displayed temporarily. For example, in the liquid crystal display device 1030 (the main liquid crystal display device 1031 or the sub liquid crystal display device 1032), there is a form in which the image display of the second identification information is started at a predetermined timing and continuously displayed, a form in which the image display of the second identification information is displayed for a certain period of time, and a form in which the image display of the second identification information is displayed across a plurality of liquid crystal display devices (not shown). The form of temporarily displaying the first identification information in this section number 6 may be configured in the same manner as in the case of section numbers 2 and 3 specifically.

(10-11: Effect of Another Embodiment)
According to the above display examples a to i, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" of the first game information desired to be conspicuous is displayed in a more conspicuous manner (placement, size, display period) than the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" of the second game information.

(10-12: Summary)
In the above description, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is used as an example of the first identification information. In this way, when there is identification information to be most conspicuous, such as the model name "Fujimaru-kun", by treating it in the same manner as the above-mentioned first identification information, that is, by displaying it in a place with the highest "predominance" in light of the evaluation criteria of evaluation criteria 1 to 3 (arrangement location, size, display period), the message possessed by the identification information can be most effectively transmitted from the game machine to the player. The highest "predominance" means that the first identification information is displayed more conspicuously than the second identification information.

When some kind of identification information is displayed (e.g., character notation) in a game machine, it must exhibit a specific identification power and should be compared as ``second identification information'', then ``second identification information'' will exist for the first time, and relative comparison between this second identification information and first identification information will determine ``whether or not it is conspicuous'', and the ``most conspicuous place'' is not always decided as a physical fixed place on the game machine.

In addition, as long as it has a message to be transmitted, it is free to treat what as the first identification information, for example, the manufacturer name ``Fujishoji'' is the one to be most conspicuous, and when it is desired to give priority to the model name ``Fujimaru-kun'', the manufacturer name ``Fujishoji'' is the first identification information to be most conspicuous. Other identification information such as the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is treated as the second identification information. Therefore, in the display examples a to i of FIG. 67, the display locations of the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fujishoji" are switched.

(10-13: Modification)
In the above another embodiment, it is assumed that the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" arranged in the frame 1010 and the second identification information "Fujishoji" arranged on the game board are displayed in a non-deformable display mode. However, both or one of the first identification information and the second identification information may be displayed in a changing display mode. For example, it is possible to change the size of the characters from small to large, change the shape of the characters, or change only a part of the characters so that the characters are arranged in a non-uniform manner.

<11. Example 2 of Alternative Embodiments 7 and 8, FIGS. 71 to 74>
The second embodiment (FIGS. 71 to 74) shows the case where the first identification information is arranged on the "game board surface".

(11-1: (a) When the second identification information is in the “front frame”, FIGS. 71 and 72)
FIG. 71(A) (see FIG. 72) is an example in which the second identification information "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." or "Fuji Shoji" is arranged in the "front frame" in the configuration where the first identification information is arranged on the "game board". A has "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." in the upper part of the frame, b has "Fuji Shoji" in the upper part of the frame, and c has "Fuji Shoji" in the middle part of the frame, and the character size is gradually reduced in this order. The upper part of the frame is an inappropriate example because it is positionally superior to the game board. ``Fujishoji'' in c is provided in the middle part of the frame, and since it is lower than ``Fujimaru-kun'' and is smaller in size, the degree of inappropriateness is reduced.

In short, when the first identification information (model name) is arranged on the game board surface and the second identification information (other than the model name) is arranged in the front frame, the first identification information (model name) is larger than the second identification information (other than the model name), and the first identification information (model name) is arranged above.

(11-2: (b) When the second identification information is on the "game board", Figs. 71 and 73)
FIG. 71(b) (see FIG. 73) is an example in which the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is arranged on the "game board" in the configuration where the first identification information is arranged on the "game board". In each of a, b, and c, "Fuji Shoji" is provided on the game board below the liquid crystal display device 1032, and the character size is gradually reduced in the order of a, b, and c. In a, "Fujimaru-kun" is located above "Fujishoji", but the size is smaller than "Fujishoji", so this is an inappropriate example. In b, since the character size of "Fuji Shoji" is small, the mismatch is reduced. In c, since the character size of "Fujishoji" is very small, the mismatch is hardly felt.

In short, when the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are arranged on the game board surface, the first identification information (model name) is larger than the second identification information (other than the model name), and the first identification information (model name) is placed above. The first identification information can be arranged as a non-movable object and the second identification information can be arranged as a movable object.

(11-3: (C) When the second identification information is displayed on the “liquid crystal display device”, FIGS. 71 and 74)
FIG. 71(C) (see FIG. 74) is an example in which the second identification information "Fujishoji" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in a configuration in which the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged above the liquid crystal display device on the game board surface. The first identification information is located above the second identification information "Fujishoji", and the character sizes are smaller in the order of g, h, and i. Since "Fujimaru-kun" is located above "Fujimaru-kun", it is considered that "Fujimaru-kun" is recognized as the model name regardless of the character size.

In short, when the first identification information (model name) is arranged on the game board surface and the second identification information (other than the model name) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the first identification information (model name) is larger than the second identification information (other than the model name) and the first identification information (model name) is positioned above. The first identification information may not be movable (deformed), and the second identification information may be movable (deformed). Also, the first identification information (model name) may be displayed at all times, and the second identification information (other than the model name) may be displayed during presentation.

<12. Contrasting Embodiments 7 and 8, FIGS. 75 to 78>
(A), (B), and (C) shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 are obtained by changing the arrangement location of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" from "game board surface" to "liquid crystal display device screen" while keeping the arrangement location of the second identification information (Fujishoji Co., Ltd. or Fujishoji Co., Ltd.) the same (front frame, game board, liquid crystal display screen) in (A), (B), and (C) of FIGS. Since the liquid crystal display screen has a low degree of superiority in evaluation criterion 1, it is difficult to make "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information stand out as long as it is displayed here. However, for example i in which the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fujishoji" are displayed on the same liquid crystal display screen, by setting the size to "Fujimaru-kun">"Fujishoji", it is possible to make them stand out slightly.

(13. Other configuration examples)
As other configuration examples for solving the problems of the above-described different embodiments 1 to 8, the configurations and their effects will be described below.

(1) Approximately the same content as the identification information arranged on the board is also displayed on display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
(1-1)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning (attention) display" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged above and/or below the display means,
While the symbols are stopped, substantially the same content as the warning display is displayed on the display means.

Thus, even though the attention calling display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so as not to impede the degree of freedom of arrangement, and furthermore, by performing the attention calling display on the display means during the demonstration performance or during the big win (at the end of the big win, etc.), the player can be urged to call attention (warning) more strongly. It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

(1-2)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which "function name display" is arranged at a position visible to the player,
The function name display is arranged in the game area,
A display indicating that the function indicated by the function name is enabled is displayed on the display means.

As a result, the game board and/or the game machine frame have "XX mode (probability change, small win rush, etc.)" written on it, so that the player can recognize that the game machine has the function (probability change, small win rush, etc.), and furthermore, the display of "entering XX mode (probability change, small win rush)" is displayed on the display means. Play.

(1-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "performance display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The performance display is a performance display indicating that it has a setting function,
The performance display is displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing.

As a result, while the performance display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom in layout is not extremely hindered. Furthermore, by displaying the performance on the display means at a predetermined timing (for example, during a demonstration effect, during a pattern change, during a big hit, etc.), the performance (the performance display indicating that the game has a setting function) can be easily communicated to the player.

When displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the performance display is more detailed than the performance display arranged outside the display means. For example, when only "with setting function" is displayed on other than the display means, "with 6 levels of setting function" is displayed on the display means.

Furthermore, when "with a setting function" is directly displayed on a display means other than the display means, the display means may indirectly convey that "with a setting function" by displaying information such as "increase the expectation of high setting when a specific notice appears". In either case of direct or indirect display, the effect of the above configuration is that the player first notices that the game machine has the relevant performance when he sees the display on the display means, and then notices the performance display arranged on the game board, or checks the model guide provided in the store or the pamphlet created and distributed by the game machine manufacturer.

(1-4)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property-related indication is an indication regarding the use of the music, and
The display related to intellectual property is displayed on the display means at least at the timing when the corresponding music is played.

As a result, while displaying the intellectual property-related display on the game board surface or the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered. Furthermore, by displaying the relevant intellectual property-related display on the display means at the timing when the corresponding music is played (not only during reproduction but also immediately before and/or immediately after reproduction), it becomes easier for the player to know that the right processing is properly performed.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, when only "license number 123456" is displayed on other than the display means, the display means may display "music name AIUEO, license number 123456" or other lyricist information or composer information. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display arranged on the game board is.

If the content of the intellectual property-related display is not a license for one song but a comprehensive license for two or more songs, displaying the intellectual property-related display on the display means when all the songs are played back may result in an excessive amount of information (the player may feel uncomfortable), so it may be displayed at a predetermined timing (during a demonstration performance, for example, at the start of a big win) as a representative.

(2) Display substantially the same content as the identification information arranged on the board in substantially the same font on the liquid crystal.
(2-1)
comprising display means,
In a game machine where the "model name display" is placed at a position where the player can see it,
The model name display is arranged above the display means,
Approximately the same content as the model name display is displayed on the display means in approximately the same font.

As a result, the title logo and the font for displaying the model name displayed on the display means are the same, so that the model name (especially the image recalled from the model name) can be unified (a unified image can be conveyed). If this is not done, the player may not be able to grasp what kind of image the model has, for example, the title logo is a pop and fun image, and the model name display by the display means is a rotten and about to collapse image.

(2-2)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which "function name display" is arranged at a position visible to the player,
The function name display is arranged in the game area,
The fact that the function indicated by the function name is enabled is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, the game board and/or the game machine frame have "XX mode (probability change, small win rush, etc.)" written on it, so that the player can recognize that the game machine has the function (probability change, small win rush, etc.), and furthermore, the display of "entering XX mode (probability change, small win rush)" is displayed on the display means. play. In addition to this effect, it is possible to unify the function names (particularly, the images evoked from the function names) (the unified image can be conveyed).

(2-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property-related display is arranged within the gaming area, and
The intellectual property-related display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, while displaying the intellectual property-related display on the game board surface or the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered. In addition, since the game board surface and/or the game machine frame have an indication related to intellectual property (for example, "license number 123456"), the player can recognize that the relevant game machine is being properly processed.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, when only "license number 123456" is displayed on other than the display means, the display means may display "music name AIUEO, license number 123456" or other lyricist information or composer information. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display arranged on the game board is.

If the license is not for one song but is for two or more songs comprehensively, there is a risk that the intellectual property-related display will be displayed on the display means when all the songs are played back (the player will feel uncomfortable).

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the intellectual property-related indications arranged outside the display means and the intellectual property-related indications displayed on the display means, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and that the objects indicate the same thing.

(2-4)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning display (attention display)" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged in the game area,
The warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the warning display arranged outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and that the objects indicate the same thing.

(2-5)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
A first warning content common to the first warning display and a second warning content common to the second warning display are displayed on the display means at different timings and in approximately the same font as each warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the warning display arranged outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and that the objects indicate the same thing.

(2-6)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
displaying a first warning content common to the first warning display on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display;
A second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font as the second warning display when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by using the same font for the warning display arranged outside the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and that the objects indicate the same thing.

(3) Display substantially the same content as the identification information arranged on the board in a different font on the liquid crystal.
(3-1)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property related display is arranged above and/or below the display means,
On the display means, substantially the same contents as the intellectual property-related display are displayed in a different font.

As a result, while displaying the display related to intellectual property on the game board surface and the frame of the game machine so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered, and further, by displaying the attention-calling display on the display means during the demonstration performance or during the big win (at the end of the big win, etc.), a clear intention can be expressed to the player (an intention to the effect that appropriate intellectual property processing is being performed). In addition, by using a different font when displaying by the display means, it is possible to display in so-called standard characters when displaying on a game board or the like, while emphasizing the display on the display means or satisfying the request of the intellectual property right holder (display in a designated font). On the contrary, it is also possible to display the time of display by the display means in standard characters.

(3-2)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning (attention) display" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged above and/or below the display means,
A warning content common to the warning display is displayed on the display means in a font different from that of the warning display.

As a result, even though the warning display (attention display) is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is kept to a minimum so that the degree of freedom in arrangement is not extremely hindered. In addition, by using a different font when displaying by the display means, it is possible to display in so-called standard characters when displaying on a game board or the like, while emphasizing the display on the display means or satisfying the request of the intellectual property right holder (display in a designated font). On the contrary, it may be displayed in standard characters at the time of display by the display means.

(3-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
At least the warning content common to the first warning display is displayed on the display means in a font different from that of the first warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, it is possible to perform the display emphatically for the player on the display means.

In addition, when all the warning displays are displayed on the display means, the player may feel that the warning display is more than necessary, but in the above configuration, the necessary warning display is performed, so that the player does not feel unnecessarily uncomfortable.

(3-3)
comprising display means,
In a game machine in which a ``first warning display'' and a ``second warning display'' are arranged at positions visible to a player, at least warning contents common to the first warning display are displayed on the display means in a font different from that of the warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, it is possible to perform the display emphatically for the player on the display means.

(3-4)
comprising display means,
In a game machine in which a ``first warning display'' and a ``second warning display'' are arranged at positions visible to a player, the first warning content common to the first warning display and the second warning content common to the second warning display are displayed on the display means at mutually different timings in substantially the same font as each warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

Since the content of the first warning and the content of the second warning are displayed at different timings, the player can be notified at the timing corresponding to the content of the warning, so that more appropriate attention can be given. It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, it is possible to perform the display emphatically for the player on the display means.

(3-5)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
displaying a first warning content common to the first warning display on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display;
A second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font as the second warning display when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

While the first warning content displays a warning display at a predetermined timing, the second warning content is not displayed unless a predetermined condition is established (unless a fraudulent act or the like corresponding to the warning content is performed), so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnecessarily uncomfortable by displaying the warning display more than necessary.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by using different fonts for the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means, it is possible to perform the display emphatically for the player on the display means.

(4) Displaying substantially the same content as the identification information arranged on the board in substantially the same arrangement on the liquid crystal.
(4-1)
comprising display means,
In a game machine where the "model name display" is placed at a position where the player can see it,
The model name display is arranged above the display means,
Approximately the same content as the model name display is displayed on the display means in approximately the same arrangement.

Since the arrangement of the title logo and the display of the model name displayed on the display means is the same, the model name (especially the image recalled from the model name) can be unified (a unified image can be conveyed). If this is not done, the title logo is written horizontally in one line, and the model name display on the display means is written vertically in two columns.

(4-2)
comprising display means,
In a game machine where "other display (company catchphrase, etc.)" is placed in a position visible to the player,
The other display is arranged in the game area,
On the display means, substantially the same content as the other display (company catch phrase, etc.) is displayed in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, the arrangement of the corporate catchphrase displayed on the game board surface and/or the game machine frame and the corporate catchphrase displayed on the display means are the same, so that the corporate catchphrase (especially the image recalled from the model name) can be unified (a unified image can be conveyed). If this is not done, there is a risk that the company's catchphrase on the board side (frame side) will have a pop and fun image, and the display by the display means will have a rotten and imminent image of collapse, so that the player may not be able to accurately convey what kind of image the company has.

(4-3)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to a player,
The intellectual property-related display is arranged within the gaming area, and
The intellectual property-related display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, while displaying the intellectual property-related display on the game board surface or the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is kept to a minimum, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered. In addition, since the game board surface and/or the game machine frame have an indication related to intellectual property (for example, "license number 123456"), the player can recognize that the relevant game machine is being properly processed.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, when only "license number 123456" is displayed on other than the display means, the display means may display "music name AIUEO, license number 123456" or other lyricist information or composer information. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display arranged on the game board is.

If the license is not for one song but is for two or more songs comprehensively, there is a risk that the intellectual property-related display will be displayed on the display means when all the songs are played back (the player will feel uncomfortable).

In performing these displays, by arranging the intellectual property-related display arranged outside the display means and the intellectual property-related display displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and that the object indicates the same thing.

(2-4)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "warning display (attention display)" is placed at a position visible to the player,
The warning display is arranged in the game area,
The warning display is displayed in substantially the same arrangement on the display means.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by arranging the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and indicate the same object.

(2-5)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
A first warning content common to the first warning display and a second warning content common to the second warning display are displayed on the display means at different timings and in substantially the same arrangement as the respective warning displays.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by arranging the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and indicate the same object.

(2-6)
comprising display means,
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to a player,
displaying a first warning content common to the first warning display on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display;
A second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement as the second warning display when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, while the warning display is displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame so as to be visible at all times, the display size is minimized so that the degree of freedom of arrangement is not extremely hindered.

It should be noted that when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the symbols are not changing as much as possible so as not to spoil the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (detected by the detection sensor), the warning display may be displayed on the display means even during the pattern fluctuation.

In performing these displays, by arranging the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means in the same arrangement, it is easy to convey that both are marks of the same type and indicate the same object.

(5) Do not arrange principal marks indiscriminately.
(5-1)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (warning display) are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first mark is displayed in one line without wrapping, and the second mark is wrapped and displayed in two or more lines.

As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the image by folding back a mark, such as a model name, in which a fixed image is fixed, in a strange place, and to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement by folding back a mark without a fixed image, such as a warning display.

(5-2)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name as a structure) and a second mark (model name as a printed matter) are arranged at positions visible to a player,
The first mark is placed in parallel when viewed from the front, and the second mark is placed obliquely when viewed from the front.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a wrong image from being given when a mark with a large display size is arranged obliquely or in a zigzag manner, and at the same time, even if the mark has the same content (the model name in the above example), the mark with a small display size can be displayed obliquely to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement.

(6) Do not illuminate the main mark separately.
(6-1)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (other than the model name) are arranged at positions visible to the player,
At least the first mark is configured such that the luminescence mode can be changed,
At least during the first period (when the symbols are stopped and the demonstration effect is not generated), the entire first mark is made to emit light in the same system color (in the second period, the light may be emitted separately).

Thus, at the timing when the player is likely to be away from the seat when the pattern is stopped (in other words, at the timing when the player who is looking for the game machine sees it), the model name is made into a lighting mode with a sense of uniformity, so that the model name does not look like part of the model name is missing (turning off, lighting in a different color, blinking in a different pattern), so that the risk of giving a wrong impression or wrong information to the player can be reduced. On the other hand, as for the mark which is not the model name, it is possible to enhance the effect of attracting the player by prioritizing the performance function as the light emitting means over the identification function as the mark.

(6-2)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (other than the model name) are arranged at positions visible to the player,
At least the first mark is configured such that the luminescence mode can be changed,
At least the first period (during the suspension of the low-probability state symbol) is set to the first system color, and the second period (during the suspension of the high-probability state symbol) is set to the second system color, so that the entire first mark is illuminated in the same system color.

As a result, the model name does not look like a part of the model name is missing (turns off, lights in a different color, or blinks in a different pattern) by setting the model name to a lighting mode with a sense of unity at least during the stop of the pattern in any of the normal game and the variable probability game, thereby reducing the risk of giving a wrong impression or wrong information to the player. Furthermore, by using different lighting modes during the normal game and during the variable probability game, the player or the store clerk can easily determine the game state.

(7) Prominence of principal marks.
(7-1)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (main title of the model name) and a second mark (subtitle of the model name) are arranged at positions visible to the player,
The first mark was a three-dimensional mark (logo accessories, etc.), and the second mark was a two-dimensional mark (printed matter, etc.).

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark stands out more than the second mark, so the risk of the player misunderstanding that the second mark is a mark with a special meaning (the subject of the model name in the above example) can be reduced.

(7-2)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (model name) and a second mark (function name) are arranged at positions visible to a player,
For the second mark, it is possible to emit light as a whole, but it is impossible to emit individual light that makes only one character shine,
For the first mark, it is possible to emit light as a whole, and it is also possible to emit individual light that makes only one character shine. (The first mark may be separated by letters and the second mark may not be separated by letters.)

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark stands out more than the second mark, so the risk of the player misunderstanding that the second mark is a mark with a special meaning (the subject of the model name in the above example) can be reduced.

(8) Do not conspicuous the caution mark.
(8-1)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (a mark that would be problematic if judged to fall under trademark use) and a second mark (a mark that could be judged to fall under trademark use) are placed at positions visible to the player,
The first mark is configured to be transitionable between an easily visible state (or visible state) and a difficult visible state (or non-visible state), and at least while the pattern is stopped, the proportion of the invisible state is higher.

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark stands out more than the second mark, so the risk of the player misunderstanding that the second mark is a mark with a special meaning (the subject of the model name in the above example) can be reduced.

(8-2)
In a gaming machine in which a first mark (a mark that would be problematic if judged to fall under trademark use) and a second mark (a mark that could be judged to fall under trademark use) are placed at positions visible to the player,
The first mark is placed in at least a smaller display size than the second mark, and
At a predetermined timing, it is displayed on the display means in a size larger than the size arranged on the board.

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark stands out more than the second mark, so the risk of the player misunderstanding that the second mark is a mark with a special meaning (the subject of the model name in the above example) can be reduced.

In the configuration examples described above in "(5-3: Configuration example 1 of another embodiment 5)", "(5-4: Configuration example 2 of another embodiment 5)", "(6-2: Configuration example of another embodiment 6)", "(9: Configuration examples of different embodiments 7 and 8)", and "(13. Information about setting suggestions may be displayed as at least part of the information (regardless of whether the information is different).
In the case where each character of "Fujimaru-kun" constituting the model name logo 1090 is illuminated or blinking in the same color or different colors, if at least some of the constituent elements of interest among the characters of "Fujimaru-kun" (e.g., "maru" and "kun") develop a specific color, for example, blue indicates setting 6 confirmation suggestion, red indicates high setting (setting 4 or higher) confirmation suggestion, and green indicates setting 1 negative suggestion, whereby the first identification information and/or the second identification information are set. It may also serve as a suggestive production. It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect may be displayed in such a manner as to be written together with the first identification information and/or the second identification information (simultaneously, overlappingly, superimposedly, or compositely displayed during a certain time scale (specific game period: during symbol changes, during a big win game, or while waiting for customers, etc.).

<13. Another Embodiment 9, FIGS. 80 to 81>
(13-1: Background)

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, various game machines such as a pinball game machine, a reel-type game machine, an arrange ball game machine, and a mahjong game machine are widely known. Various game machines are manufactured by multiple manufacturers, and are provided with series model names that have been given to multiple models for many years, such as "Mr.

Some of these gaming machines are known to have a so-called “setting function” capable of setting the expected value of the profit to be given to the player in multiple stages (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-26756). In the current hall, there are a mixture of ball game machines equipped with this "setting function" and game machines without it. Therefore, it is important for players to know the "model name" of the gaming machine as a clue to determine whether or not it is a ball game machine equipped with the "setting function" in the hall.

As a method of giving the model name of the pinball game machine to the game machine so that it can be seen by the player, for example, as described in the above another embodiment, a form in which "Fujimaru-kun" is provided on the front frame 1010 (FIGS. 35B, 69 to 72), and a form in which "Fujimaru-kun", "○○ teacher", etc. are provided on the game board surface (FIGS. 35C, 66 to 67, 73) can be taken.

However, since there are many model names for each type of pinball game machine, it may be difficult to determine from the model name alone whether or not the ball game machine is equipped with the "setting function". For this reason, when searching for a game machine with a desired model name in the hall, including determining whether or not it is equipped with a "setting function", it takes time to find the target game machine, and it is not uncommon to search around the hall. In addition, even if the player once remembers the installation location of the desired game machine in the hall, when the game machine is rearranged, it takes time to find the game machine with the desired model name again.

Therefore, it is desired to provide a gaming machine which, when installed in a hall, can easily identify whether or not the gaming machine is equipped with a "setting function", and which facilitates finding a desired gaming machine.

(13-2: Attachment of setting machine information, FIGS. 80 to 81)
FIG. 80 exemplifies an embodiment in which setting machine information 1081 is given to a gaming machine. Here, "setting machine information" is information for identifying whether or not a game machine is equipped with a setting function, and is identification information consisting of characters, figures, symbols, three-dimensional shapes, combinations of these, or combinations of these and colors (marks of Article 2 of the Trademark Law).

In FIG. 80, "composite identification information" obtained by adding setting machine information 1081 to model name 1080 is handled. Specifically, as shown in an enlarged view of FIG. 81(a), this composite identification information is composed of the last character "n" in the character string forming "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name 1080, followed by the setting machine mark 1081a "."

In FIG. 80, this composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun." However, it may be provided at other locations on the front frame 1010, or may be provided on the game board surface.

Referring to FIG. 81(a), the composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun." includes model name information and setting machine information, but the setting machine information is the setting machine mark ".", which is smaller in size than "Fujimaru-kun" in the model name information, and is added only at the end of the character string of "Fujimaru-kun." Therefore, the player can recognize "Fujimaru-kun" as the model name. Also, a person who knows that "." is a setting machine mark indicating that the game machine is equipped with the setting function can identify that the game machine is equipped with the setting function by adding the setting machine mark "." to the model name.

FIG. 81(b) shows an example in which a setting machine mark 1081b consisting of a logo (hereinafter abbreviated as "F") formed by arranging six circle-shaped dots in an F shape as the setting machine information 1081 is added following the last character "n" in the character string constituting the model name 1080 "Fujimaru-kun", and the entirety is configured as composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun F". The size of the logo "F" is the same as the character string of the model name "Fujimaru-kun", but it is composed of a stylized F, that is, a symbol instead of a letter, and at a glance the two can be recognized as different components. Due to this difference, the player can understand that "Fujimaru-kun" is the model name. A person who knows that the logo 'F' is a setting machine mark indicating that the game machine is equipped with the setting function can identify the game machine as having the setting function by adding the logo 'F' of the setting machine mark 1081b to the model name.

In the example shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), in the composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun F", the setting machine marks 1081a and 1081b are composed of white dots, but they may be displayed in the same color as the model name 1080.

(Confirmation of setting suggestion effect: Fig. 82 to Fig. 91)
Next, various setting suggestion effects will be described. We have already explained what the "setting suggestion effect" is, but below we will explain it with more specific examples. Although any of the various effect means described in "<6. Effect means>" can be used as the effect means for executing the setting suggestion, here, the setting suggestion effect using the display means and the light emitting means, which are closely related to the present invention, will be mainly described.

In addition, it is fully conceivable that the "first mark (for example, the model name, figures and illustrations of main characters, etc.)" provided on the game board surface and/or the game machine frame, and the second mark displayed on the display means (a mark that is the same as or similar to the first mark, or a completely different mark) may also be used for setting suggestive effects. Therefore, in the following, while explaining the setting-suggestion effect, we will also explain the relationship between the setting-suggestion effect and various marks.

(Theme)
Most of the timing at which the setting suggesting performance is executed is during a game (during a pattern variation display game or a winning game), and when the setting suggesting performance appears, it is naturally the player playing the game on the table who can first confirm (recognize) it. However, the following problems may occur if only setting-suggesting effects appear during the game.

(1) As a first problem, pachinko game machines (ball game machines) differ from slot machines in that the progress of the game is not carried out at the player's own pace, but is controlled by the game machine side. More specifically, in the case of a slot machine, the game is started by hitting the start lever at the convenience of the player, and thereafter the player freely presses the stop button to end the game, so that one game can be finished at the convenience of the player. On the other hand, in the case of a pinball game machine, a variation pattern is selected when a prize is won at a start hole, and the variation time associated with the variation pattern is determined as the execution time of one game, so the player side cannot intervene in the period from the start to the end of the game, and everything is entrusted to the game machine side. That is, in the case of a pinball game machine, unlike a slot machine, the game cannot be terminated at the convenience of the player, and the time schedule relating to the progress of the game is controlled by the game machine. What this means is that the start timing and end timing of appearance (execution) of many of the setting suggestion effects are controlled by the gaming machine side. Therefore, it is quite conceivable that, for example, the setting suggestion effect ends while the player is distracted by the effect on the next table and looks away, or while the player is fiddling with the cellular phone.

(2) As a second problem, a player who starts a game after execution of the setting suggestion performance is finished, for example, a player (successor) who starts the game after the predecessor who was playing when the setting suggestion performance is executed finishes the game, has no way of knowing the contents of the setting suggestion performance issued by the predecessor.

(Solution)
As a means for solving the above problem (problem), there is an "extension (addition) of the appearance period of advantageous information" called setting suggestion effect (information about set values). This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85. FIG.

(A) to (C) of FIG. 82 show an example of effects during a certain symbol variation display game, (D) to (F) show an example of effects during the next symbol variation display game, and (G) to (K) show an example of effects during waiting after the end of the symbol variation display game ("demo start waiting effect", "customer waiting effect (demonstration effect (demo screen))"). Note that in FIG. 82, a background effect and a plurality of advance notice effects related to the effect mode actually appear, but are omitted for convenience of explanation. Also, for convenience of explanation, the "symbol variation display game" may be abbreviated as "symbol variation display" or "symbol variation".

Referring to FIG. 82, after the current (first) symbol variation display is started (Figure (A)), a specific character (Fujimaru-kun) 901 appears together with a halo effect (halo effect) 902 during the symbol variation display (Fig. (B): "Halo effect 902+Specific character 901"). Here, this effect will be described as "setting 6 (highest setting) fixed effect" belonging to the above "setting N fixed effect". After that, the symbol variation display game execution period (variation time) has passed, and the decorative symbol is stopped at "357" indicating a lost symbol (Fig. (C)).

Subsequently, the operation pending ball is digested, and the next (second) symbol variation display is started (Fig. (D)). In this example, at the start of the next symbol variation display, the "halo effect 902" that appeared in the previous symbol variation and a small specific character 901a on the upper right of the screen are displayed. This specific character 901a is, for example, the specific character 901 that appeared in the previous pattern variation display game reduced in size (so-called chibi character, super-deformed (registered trademark), etc.), and is displayed as an image related to the specific character 901 (an effect display that appears in response to the appearance of a specific setting suggestion effect).

Such a halo effect 902 and the specific character 901a act as a "specific effect (execution confirmation effect)" capable of recognizing (confirming) the execution of the setting suggesting effect. Here, as shown in FIGS. (E) to (F), the halo effect 902 is immediately finished, but the display of the specific character 901a on the upper right of the screen continues during the symbol variation display and when the symbol variation is stopped. That is, when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation display, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is recognizable (confirmable) after completion of the symbol variation display. In addition, when the setting suggestion performance is executed during the symbol variation display, the display mode is such that the execution of the setting suggestion performance can be recognized after the symbol variation display is finished and during the symbol variation stoppage.

After that, as shown in FIG. (F), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at a random number of "634", and the result of the symbol variation display game is "Loss". In this example, it is assumed that all the existing balls with pending operation are digested and the balls with pending operation become zero (see the pending icon in the pending display area 76 in FIGS. (A), (E) to (F)), and the table becomes empty as it is.

(Regarding the display of specific characters in the menu screen: Fig. 82 (G) (H) (I))
When the decorative pattern "634" is lost and the pattern is stopped (remains in the state of waiting for the demonstration start), the table becomes empty, and the gaming table is left for a while (a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the pattern was stopped, and/or a predetermined time has passed while the pattern is stopped and the game ball is not fired (touch sensor non-detected state)). As shown in FIG. A possible notification effect 905 appears, and when the effect button 13 is operated, the notification that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened is started. When the player operates the effect button 13 in this state, a "menu screen" as shown in FIG. That is, if a predetermined operation is performed by the operation means by the player under a predetermined condition (for example, during the period in which the pattern fluctuation is stopped (during the production before the start of customer waiting or during the customer waiting production, etc.), the specific effect is not executed (hidden, non-notified), and the execution of the setting suggestion effect becomes unrecognizable (unconfirmable). In short, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is recognizable during the symbol change stop, when the predetermined operation is performed by the operation means, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is made unrecognizable. .This is because if the specific effect is displayed indiscriminately, the display may become a hindrance.In addition, the period and game situation in which the execution of the setting suggestive effect cannot be confirmed (the specific effect is temporarily not executed) are often different depending on the game characteristics, so they can be determined as appropriate.

The "menu screen" shown in FIG. (H) shows an example of the menu items displayed on the game setting screen in which various game environment settings ((for example, volume setting, light amount setting, effect mode setting) can be selected as desired by the player using the operating means (effect button 13 and cross key 75). Here, as an example of the menu screen, "character selection", "volume adjustment", "light amount adjustment", and "BG" for selecting an enemy character to appear in the current effect mode are shown. An example is shown in which various items such as "Select M" and "Return (end of menu screen)" are displayed.On this menu screen, the cursor (arrow, index) 907 is moved up and down by operating the direction keys 75, and the menu item that the player wants to set can be selected.When the player presses the effect button 13 while the cursor 905 is pointing to the menu item, the menu item can be determined.

For example, when the item "character selection" in the menu screen shown in FIG. (H) is selected, the "character selection screen" shown in FIG. (I) is displayed. On this character selection screen, a plurality of aliens 903 (characters unrelated to the setting suggesting effect) and an icon image 901b related to the specific character 901 or 901a (a specific image (one of the specific effects) related to the executed setting suggesting effect) are displayed, and the player who opens the menu screen can also know the execution of the setting suggesting effect, the type of the executed setting suggesting effect, its set value information, and the like. Here, the specific character 901a displayed in a small size at the upper right of the screen is displayed as an "icon", which is "a small picture that makes it easy to specify and distinguish the target". By seeing the icon image 901b, the player can know the fact that the setting suggesting performance of ``setting 6 (highest setting) fixed performance'' has appeared, that is, the player can know that the set value of the game machine is setting 6 of the highest setting.

Further, by moving the cursor 907 to the icon image 901b while the menu screen is displayed (here, the character selection screen), specific game information related to the state of appearance of the setting suggestion effect may be notified. As the "specific game information", for example, "numerical information (appearance frequency information)" indicating how many times the setting suggestion effect has appeared since the power was turned on on the current day, or information related to the setting suggestion effect such as what the icon image means, that is, "setting value information (suggestion information)" may be configured so as to be confirmable. For example, the player can display the above-mentioned numerical information and suggestive information by displaying balloons on the right side of the liquid crystal screen, or by selecting and determining an icon image by means of the operating means in the same way as selecting and determining a menu item, and displaying another screen (setting suggestive effect information screen). Further, it may be possible to select display and non-display (continuation of display/end of display) of the icon image by operating the operation means in a predetermined procedure in the menu screen. As for the suggested information to be displayed (announced), the suggested content of "set 6 is confirmed" suggested by the setting suggestion effect (here, setting 6 confirmed effect) may be displayed itself, or ambiguous information, for example, information such as setting 4 or higher that is likely to be selected (easily appears) or setting 4 or higher may be displayed. Also, in the illustration, only the specific character is iconized and emphatically displayed as an image (icon image 901b) related to the setting suggesting effect, but the alien character 903 may also be iconized and displayed.

In addition, FIG. (I) shows an example in which only one icon image 901b as a specific effect is displayed in the liquid crystal screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display "a plurality of types of specific effects (specific images)" according to the type of setting suggestion effect that appears. In other words, the display mode can be such that "a plurality of setting-suggesting effects that have appeared in the past simultaneously appear" (more precisely, specific effects related to the setting-suggesting effects that have appeared in the past appear at the same time) (the same applies to FIGS. 83 and 84 described later).

Such a display can be said to be a useful display mode when a player guesses settings or selects a gaming machine. However, since the display area is limited, when many types of display are provided, for example, a specific image that cannot be displayed on the screen (a specific image in a non-display state) may be displayed by a display method such as scroll display using an operation means, or a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device for displaying a menu screen) may be provided and displayed (the display method is not particularly limited). Further, although the specific character 901b is displayed as an icon, its display mode is not particularly limited, and for example, the same or similar to the specific character 901a may be displayed. Also, in this example, the specific character is displayed in the character selection screen, but it may be configured to be displayed in one or more other menu items. In addition, the display of multiple types of specific images (specific effects) is not limited to the specific menu items (character selection screen) shown in FIG. In this case as well, it is possible to use a scroll display or a sub-liquid crystal display device to display a plurality of types of specific effects (the same applies to FIGS. 83 to 85, which will be described later).

In addition, FIG. (G) shows an example in which the specific character 901a is continuously displayed even after the second symbol variation display is completed. However, when the number of the operation pending balls is zero, the specific character 901a may be temporarily erased from the screen after the symbol variation display is completed. Examples of the erasing timing include the end of the pattern variation display, a predetermined timing before the start of the customer waiting effect (during the demonstration start waiting effect) (for example, the start of the menu display possible notification effect 905), and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the state before the customer waiting effect is started. In this case, the specific character 901a can be displayed (redisplayed) on the menu screen (FIG. (H)), when a specific menu item is selected (FIG. (I)), or during a customer waiting effect (demonstration screen) shown in FIGS. (J) and (K) to be described later.

(Regarding the display of a specific character in the demo screen (during the customer waiting effect): Fig. 82 (G) (J) (K))
Returning to the description of FIG. 82(G), if left as is in the symbol stop state (after the symbol variation display game is over), as already explained, a "demo screen (demo movie)" is started assuming that a predetermined condition (for example, "a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) has passed since the symbol stop" and/or "a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed while the symbol is stopped and the state is not detected by the touch sensor"). FIG. (J) illustrates a part of the first half of the demo movie, and FIG. (K) illustrates a part of the second half of the demo movie. During the demo screen period, the series of demo movies of FIGS. In FIG. (J), the name display of the game machine (“CR Fujimaru-kun Senki”) and an effect in which a plurality of fighter planes (demonstration screen characters) fly around in the sky are displayed, and a specific character 901a is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in FIG. (K), the name of the gaming machine is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and a specific character 901a is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In other words, it is possible to recognize the execution of the setting suggestion effect during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect (demonstration effect).

Here, the characteristic point is that the display of the specific character 901a is continued even after the demonstration screen display is started, and the display of the demonstration screen characters (for example, the group of fighter planes shown in FIG. (J)) appearing in the demonstration screen display (for example, a production in which a plurality of fighter planes fly in the sky) is not disturbed as much as possible (specific image evacuation display means). The appearance of the specific effect on the demo screen in this way is suitable for the player who is selecting a game machine because it is a situation in which useful information (advantageous information) for choosing a game machine is notified.

In the previous example (FIGS. 82(D) to (F)), "character display + backlight display (specific character A)" is performed during the pattern variation display, and "character display only (specific effect A)" is performed during the demonstration screen display. However, it is not necessarily limited to this display mode. For example, when ``specific character A'' or ``specific character B (character display + character display)'' or the like is displayed as setting suggestion performance during symbol variation display, individual specific performance (specific performance A for specific character A, specific performance B for specific character B) may be executed at the start of the next pattern variation or at a predetermined timing during the next pattern variation display, or in both cases, ``common specific performance'' (common specific performance C for both specific character A and specific character B) may be performed.

In the case of the above-mentioned "common specific effect", it is preferable that the contents suggested by the setting suggesting effects are similar at a certain level or more. For example, if there is a "setting suggestive effect A" that is likely to be setting 1 (lowest setting) and a "setting suggestive effect B" that is likely to be setting 6 (highest setting), after one of the setting suggesting effects is executed, if a common specific effect (specific character) is executed, it is not possible to know at all whether the setting value is "high or low". . In that case, there is no point in performing a specific effect (execution confirmation effect).

Therefore, for example, it is possible to narrow down to ``determined setting suggestion performance'' such as ``setting 6 confirmation'' setting suggestion performance (setting N determination performance) or ``setting 4 or more determination'' setting suggestion performance (specific range suggestion performance), and then execute a specific performance (execution confirmation performance). Specifically, among the setting suggestion effects of the definite system, the setting suggestion effects in which the intermediate setting range (setting values 3, 4) or higher may be determined may be narrowed down, or preferably the setting suggestion effects in which the high setting range is determined (for example, setting N or more is determined (N=4, 5) or setting N is determined (N=4, 5, 6)), and then a specific effect is executed. do. Moreover, focusing on the viewpoint of machine division, it is also possible to narrow down to those for which set values exceeding 100% of machine division are fixed.

When narrowing down to a specific setting suggestion effect as described above, there are two effects. The first effect is the simplification of the display contents due to the aggregation of information. If a specific image is displayed indiscriminately according to the type of executed setting suggesting performance to individually show the appearance of many setting suggesting performances, the display area will be insufficient, and the displayed objects will become complicated and unnecessarily difficult to understand. However, by appropriately consolidating and displaying the information, not only does the appearance become neater, but also setting suggestion effects of the same level are aggregated, so there is an effect of increasing the accuracy of the information.

The second effect is obscuring of suggested settings due to aggregation of information. This "vagueness of setting suggestions" seems to go against the first effect of the former (increase in accuracy of information), but that is not the case. Details are given below.

For example, it is assumed that ``performance of setting 4 or more fixed'' appears in the first setting suggesting performance, ``performance with high possibility of setting 5'' appears in the second setting suggesting performance, and ``performance denying setting 1 (setting 2 or higher fixed performance)'' appears in the third setting suggesting performance. In this case, an ``icon (specific performance) indicating the appearance of a performance with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher'' is displayed as a specific performance in which the appearance of the first setting suggesting performance and the second setting suggesting performance are aggregated as performances of the same level, and it is possible to know that it has appeared twice on the menu screen.

However, since the third setting suggesting effect "'effect denying setting 1'" is not at the same level, it is not aggregated. As the first effect, "accuracy of information is increased" is the portion of "appearing twice" with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher. Naturally, appearance twice rather than appearance once increases credibility as a setting speculation element.

The second effect is ``ambiguity of setting suggestion content'', which is the part where the icon ``high possibility of setting 4 or more'' is displayed as a specific effect, even though the ``setting 4 or more confirmed effect'' is displayed in the first setting suggestion effect.

As a result, it is possible to provide a difference in the amount of information such that a player (predecessor) who has actually confirmed the first setting suggesting performance can recognize that ``the setting is 4 or more confirmed'', whereas a player (successor) who has not confirmed the first setting suggesting performance can only grasp that ``the setting is likely to be 4 or more''. In other words, the player who can confirm the setting suggestion effect (first advantageous information) with a high setting guess element (in the above case, the predecessor who confirmed the setting of 4 or more is confirmed) can carry the game advantageously because the setting value can be clearly confirmed.

On the other hand, other players (in the above case, the successor who has not confirmed the setting of 4 or more but has a high possibility of setting 4 or more (second advantageous information whose value as game information is lower than the first advantageous information)) may enjoy the game with more anxiety than the predecessor. This means that a player who can confirm a setting suggestive effect with a high setting speculation element can have useful information that only he or she can know, and other players are given useful information to a certain extent without giving information of equivalent value as long as they cannot actually confirm the setting suggestive effect. By such "vagueness of suggested setting content", it is possible to provide a difference in the amount of information between the former and the latter, so as not to give a sense of inequality or dissatisfaction.

It should be noted that, if the above-mentioned "setting 6 finalization effect" for definitively informing the maximum setting 6 appears even once, the "icon indicating setting 6 finalization" is displayed as a specific effect, and after that, other icons may not be displayed (counting is performed but not displayed, or counting is not performed in the first place). This is because, when the maximum setting of 6 is determined, there is no meaning in displaying other specific effects.

In addition, from the viewpoint of "ambiguity of setting suggestion content" as described above, for "setting 6 finalized effect", instead of displaying "icon indicating setting 6 finalized", for example, an icon indicating "high possibility of setting 5" or "setting 4 (or 5) or more confirmed" may be displayed so that only the player who can actually confirm the setting 6 finalized effect can know that setting 6 is the effect.

Also, it is not necessary to execute a corresponding specific effect (execution confirmation effect) after execution of all setting suggestion effects. As described above, when an ambiguous setting suggestion or a setting suggestion effect that a low setting is more likely to be selected appears, performing a specific effect after that will have the opposite effect (reduced desire to play). In addition, in a game machine in which setting suggestion performances are executed at a plurality of timings, preparing specific performances for all of them leads to a control burden, so it can be said that it is preferable to select and execute specific performances targeting either one or two setting suggestion performances.

In addition, the start timing (specific effect start condition) of the specific effect (execution confirmation effect) can be appropriately determined according to the nature of the game. Typically, it is during the symbol variation display game after the next time, during the menu screen, during the demo screen, etc., as described with reference to FIG. The meaning of this ``symbol variation display game after the next time'' includes displaying in the game next to the game in which the setting suggestion effect has appeared (at the start of the variation, at a predetermined timing during the variation, at the end of the variation, etc.), and also in the concept of displaying after a plurality of games without displaying in the next game and without appearing in the next game in which the setting suggestion effect appears.

Also, the period (specific effect end condition) in which the specific effect (execution confirmation effect) can be confirmed can be appropriately determined. Typically, for example, one or a plurality of periods (A) to (K) below can be employed. (Α) until the next or multiple hits (start or end of the jackpot) (specific jackpots may be counted), (Β) until the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times N (1≦N), (Γ-1) until a predetermined time elapses from a specific timing (end timing is managed by RTC), (Δ) until a specific time (end timing is managed by RTC), (Ε) until the number of times the menu screen is displayed reaches a predetermined number of times M (1≦M) , (Ζ) until the demo screen (demo movie) is displayed a predetermined number of times X (1≦X), (Η) until a predetermined time (eg, 30 minutes to 1 hour) has passed since the demo screen (demo movie) was displayed, (Ι) until the number of out balls (the number of out balls in normal conditions and/or the number of out balls in all states) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000) (the number of hit balls controls the display end timing), (Κ) until the power to the gaming machine is turned off, (Λ) the set value. is changed (including replacement of the same setting), etc. (The same applies to examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, which will be described later).

As for the specific effect (execution confirmation effect), not only the image display effect is used, but also one or a plurality of effect means may be used among the light effect (lighting the LED with a specific light emission pattern), the sound effect (outputting a specific sound effect, changing from the normal BGM to a specific BGM, etc.), and the movable body accessory (moving according to a specific action pattern). For example, when using the light effect, a specific LED (or a dedicated LED) can emit light in blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow color, etc. according to the type of setting suggestion effect that appears (the same applies to the effect example in FIG. 83 described later).

It is also conceivable to use a mark displayed on the game board surface and/or the game machine frame as the specific effect. In this case, the effect of displaying in the same display mode, the effect of displaying in a different display mode, etc. are as described above.

Further, with respect to the specific effect (execution confirmation effect), it is preferable to make the effect mode easy for the player to understand, such as what kind of effect mode the setting suggesting effect that has appeared in the past is and what the content of the set value information (suggestive information) is. For example, when a character-based setting suggestive effect including "specific character 901 (Fujimaru-kun)" shown in FIG. In addition, it is preferable to make the character information related to the appearing setting suggesting effect appear as the specific effect in terms of the effect mode that is easy for the player to understand. For example, if the appearing setting suggesting effect suggests "setting of 4 or more is confirmed", character information of "setting of 4 or more is confirmed!"

Of course, it does not have to be an easy-to-understand presentation mode, and characters (for example, lover character Fujika-chan, nemesis character) or items related to Fujimaru-kun may be displayed (for example, lover character Fujika-chan, arch-nemesis character) with some kind of relationship (for example, conceptual relationship, design relationship, etc.) with Mr. Fujimaru-kun.

Also, a display mode (for example, a display mode with different colors and/or shapes) may be used according to the type of setting suggestion effect or its suggested content (the same applies to the specific effect shown in FIG. 83 described later). For example, an item image colored blue (blue magatama) when a fixed effect of setting 2 or more appears, a yellow magatama when a fixed effect of setting 3 or more appears, a green magatama when a fixed effect of setting 4 or more appears, and a rainbow-colored magatama when a fixed effect of setting 6 appears (the same applies to other setting suggesting effects (even number setting suggesting effect, odd number setting suggesting effect, low setting suggesting effect, high setting suggesting effect, etc.).

In addition, the setting suggesting effect appearing during the symbol variation display may belong to the setting suggesting non-announcement effect during variation, or may belong to the setting suggesting notice effect during variation (the same applies to the setting suggesting effect in FIG. 83 to be described later).

(Production example 2: Fig. 83)
FIG. 83 shows a case in which the setting suggestion effect appears during a specific advance notice effect (for example, during the ready-to-win effect) as another effect example in which the setting suggesting effect appears during the symbol variation display.

In the production example of FIG. 83, after the symbol variable display is started (FIG. (A)), the reach performance is started at a predetermined timing during the variable display (FIG. (B)). In this reach production, as shown in FIG. (C), a mobile battery 911 appears as an ally character and a disk 913 as an enemy character, and a battle unfolds between the mobile battery 911 and the disk 913, creating a story-like production. When the ready-to-win performance is started, a mission ``Shoot down the disk!'' is displayed, and when the disk 913 can be shot down by the attack of the mobile battery 911, ``Mission success'' is displayed, and a big win pattern (a set of patterns) is displayed to inform that the game result of this time is a big win. However, if the disc 913 cannot be shot down, it becomes "Mission failed", and a lost pattern is displayed to notify that the current game result is lost.

The place where the production branches after FIG. (C) indicates that there are multiple types of ready-to-win production scenarios. In this example, representatively, two scenarios are shown, namely, an effect scenario in which the effect on the (D1) side is developed and an effect scenario in which the effect on the (E1) side is developed. Which scenario is to be executed is determined by a predetermined effect lottery based on variation pattern information and set value information.

In the production scenario shown in the above diagram (D1), "fighter plane 917 (normal support character)" appears during the battle as reinforcements for the allied character, and with the fighter plane 917 supporting, the mobile artillery battery 911 attacks. On the other hand, in the production scenario on the side of FIG. (E1), a “specific character 919 (special support character)” appears as reinforcements for the allied characters, and the specific character 919 (hereafter referred to as “Fujimaru-kun 919”) assists the attack by the mobile artillery battery 911.

Here, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs depending on the characters appearing in the reinforcements, and in this example, "fighter plane 917 (normal character)<Fujimaru-kun 919 (specific character)", but in this example, the game result is "losing" (see figure (D2) or figure (E2)). It is possible that the fighter 917 will be selected with all settings 1 to 6, but Fujimaru-kun 919 will only be selected with settings 4 or higher, that is, the setting suggestion effect of "setting 4 or higher is confirmed". Therefore, in the production scenario on the side of (E1), although the result of this game is "losing", it becomes clear that the setting is "4 or higher" when Fujimaru-kun 919 appears.

In the example of FIG. 83, the four sides of the liquid crystal display device 36 are displayed as if they were framed by the specific image, as shown in FIG. In this example, as the specific image, a rainbow-colored effect image 920 is displayed in the form of a frame, with four sides highlighted. This rainbow-colored effect image 920 functions as a specific effect (execution confirmation effect) in the same manner as the specific character 901 described in FIGS.

FIG. (E3) shows an example in which the effect image 920 is continuously displayed even after the current symbol variation display game is over (for example, during the next and subsequent symbol variation display games (not shown)). Here, the display of "Menu screen display ⇒ + button image" shown in FIG. As the condition for ending the display of this effect image 920, for example, one or more of (A) to (Λ) described above with reference to FIG. 82 can be adopted.

Therefore, even if the player misses the appearance of Mr. Fujimaru 919 for some reason, he or she can notice it by the effect image 920, and even if he/she quits due to time constraints, the subsequent player (successor) can quickly recognize this situation (the situation where it is found that the setting is 4 or higher). Note that the specific image (effect image 920) described above is merely an example, and with respect to the specific image (specific effect), if it is possible to confirm (recognize) the fact that the setting suggestion effect has appeared, the effect mode can be determined as appropriate.

Instead of (or in addition to) the effect image 920, "Monochrome Fujimaru-kun 919b" may be displayed. In this case, for example, if "Color Fujimaru-kun 919a" is displayed, setting 6 is confirmed, and if "Monochrome Fujimaru-kun 919b" is displayed, setting 4 or higher may be confirmed. In this way, when marks (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) created based on the same mark (Illustration image of Mr. Fujimaru) are displayed on the display means, it is possible to vary the setting suggestion degree by making the colors, sizes, fonts, etc. different from each other.

(Production example 3: Fig. 84)
FIG. 84 shows, as another example of the effect, a case in which the setting suggesting effect appears during the jackpot game. Here, as a representative example, an example in which the above-mentioned "variable V probability type" is adopted will be described. FIG. 84(B1) and FIG. 84(C1) exemplify a V-winning performance (blessing performance) that appears when a V-winning is achieved during a big hit.

FIG. (A1) shows a performance during a round during a big win, and here, it is assumed that a specific area (V winning area) in a big winning opening is opened in the 6th round and a game ball wins in the V winning area.

In the case of a V prize, normally, the "V display (V image 931) only" (normal V prize effect (effect not accompanied by a setting suggestion effect)) shown in FIG. A prize effect (a effect accompanied by a setting suggestion effect) is displayed. When this "V display + specific character" appears, as shown in Fig. (C2), even after the big win is over and the next game is started, the specific character (disk 932) relating to the setting suggesting performance is displayed in a reduced form (disk 932a in the drawing) on the upper right of the liquid crystal screen. The specific character may be displayed only in the next game (that is, the first game after the end of the big win), or may be displayed until the next big win. Alternatively, it may be time management such as 3 minutes, or management of the number of hit balls such as 300 total out balls. In addition, as the display end condition, for example, one or more of the conditions (A) to (Λ) described in FIG. 82 can be adopted.

In this example, the V probability variable type gaming machine has been described as an example, but the model of the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as the gaming machine is capable of displaying the setting suggestion effect during the big win. For example, it may be a so-called ``mixed type of 1 type and 2 types'' in which a character continuous actuating device is activated when passing through a specific area during a small hit (when winning a V prize), or a so-called ``simultaneous variation type'' in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be variably displayed in parallel. Moreover, it may be a game machine such as the above-described "ST type", "falling lottery type", or "general probability variable type". Further, the setting suggestion performance appearing during the big win game may belong to the non-fluctuation setting suggestion non-announcement performance or the non-fluctuation setting suggestion non-announcement performance.

(Interconnected setting suggestion production)
82 to 84 (such as the specific character 901a in FIG. 82, the effect image 920 in FIG. 83, and the disc 932a in FIG. 84), for example, a specific effect (execution confirmation effect) related to the appearance of a certain setting suggestion effect, or a setting suggestion effect spanning multiple rotations ("setting suggestion effect + setting suggestion effect" or "setting suggestion effect + specific effect (execution confirmation effect)"). In addition to lengthening the appearance period, the player may have an expectation that the setting suggesting effect will continue after this. For example, it is possible to adopt a "linked setting suggestive effect" in which the first set suggestive effect is the "master" and the second set suggestive effect (the specific effect (execution confirmation effect)) is the "subordinate", such as "on condition that one set suggestive effect is executed, another setting suggestive effect is executed". When such a ``linkage type setting suggesting performance'' appears, for example, (I) a first lottery for determining whether or not to appear the first setting suggesting performance is executed, and when the first lottery is won, that is, when the first setting suggesting performance is to appear, a second lottery for determining whether to appear the second setting suggesting performance is executed. Then, when the second lottery is won, the second setting suggestion effect can be displayed. In addition, for example, (II) setting suggesting effect is not displayed, only the first setting suggesting effect is displayed, first setting suggesting effect and second setting suggesting effect are displayed, and setting suggesting effect is not displayed, and one of these can be determined by lottery.

Further, when the ``linkage type setting suggestion effect'' appears, it is preferable to set a prohibition rule regarding the suggestion information so that the setting value information (suggestion information) suggested by the first setting suggestion effect is more useful than the setting value information (suggestion information) suggested by the first setting suggestion effect. This is because if the first setting suggesting performance appearing earlier suggests, for example, ``fixing the setting of 4 or more'' and the second setting suggesting effect appearing later suggests ``fixing the setting of 2 or more'', useless set value information is provided to the player. Of course, it is not necessary to provide the prohibition rule mentioned above. This is because the greater the number of appearances of the setting suggestion effect, the more accurate the information as the setting guess element can be. For example, when the first setting suggesting performance suggests ``even number setting'' and the second setting suggesting performance also suggests ``even number setting'' (when the setting suggesting performance of the same level appears), the information that ``the possibility of setting even number has increased'' can be obtained with one appearance of the linked setting suggesting performance. At least a part of the first setting suggesting performance and the second setting suggesting performance may be made to have different performance modes, and the set value information corresponding to the performance mode of the second setting suggesting performance which comes later may be notified.

When distinguishing setting suggestive effects (effects determined by referring to set values) and effects that do not correspond to them (effects determined without referring to set values), not only specific names such as "set suggestive effects and non-set suggestive effects" are attached, but also numbers such as "first effect and second effect (either can be the first set suggestive effects)" or terms such as "special effects and normal effects (either can be special effects)" may be used. In addition, alphabets, symbols, hiragana, katakana, kanji, Roman numerals, etc. may be used, and any code may be used as long as it is a code for distinguishing between them.

Also, as described above, there can be multiple types of setting suggestive effects (this does not mean that there are always multiple setting suggestive effects in one gaming machine, but that there are multiple setting suggestive effects as options that can be installed in the gaming machine). Therefore, when multiple setting suggestive effects are installed in one gaming machine, any one of them is designated as the "first setting suggestive effect", and the different setting suggestive effects are "second setting suggestive effect", "third setting suggestive effect", and "fourth setting suggestive effect" (hereinafter referred to as "suggestive setting effect"). ), or if there are three setting suggestion effects, for example, any one of them may be individually referred to as a ``first setting suggestion effect'' and the others may be collectively referred to as a ``second setting suggestion effect''. Also, any one of them may be individually referred to as a "second setting suggestion effect", and the others may be collectively referred to as a "first setting suggestion effect".

Also, the setting suggesting performances having at least one common point among the setting suggesting performances may be divided into categories, and each category may be defined as ``first setting suggesting performance'', ``second setting suggesting performance'', and ``third setting suggesting performance'' (hereinafter continued). Examples of categories include (1) those classified by the effect means (for example, display means, movable objects, LEDs, speakers, etc.) used for setting suggestions, (2) those classified by the timing at which setting suggestions are made (for example, when symbols are stopped/during symbol variation display/during a big hit, and those classified by further subdividing the symbol variation display (for example, before reach, during reach, after reach), (3) concreteness of setting suggestions (for example, selection rates are different, but can appear in all settings / setting 4 or more) (4) categorized according to setting suggestion rendering time (for example, less than 5 seconds/5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds/15 seconds or more, etc.).

In addition, the setting suggesting effect and the specific effect have been described in the above example as being "displayed" in an easy-to-understand manner, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggesting performance using at least one of the sound performance, the light performance, the movable body performance, and the image display performance is as already explained, and the specific performance may also use at least one of the performances. Examples of an alternative to the icon display (for example, the icon display character 901a shown in FIG. 82(I)) may be a specific sound from a dedicated or dual-purpose speaker, or a specific light emission from a dedicated or dual-purpose lamp (such as a performance LED). Both the setting suggesting effect and the specific effect may be performed independently or in combination (simultaneously) by each effect means (liquid crystal display device 36, speaker 46, decorative lamp (LED) 45, movable accessories 80 and 90, other display means, etc.).

[Another specific example of setting suggestion effect]
<Concrete Example 1 of Setting Suggestion Rendering: Mode of Setting Suggestion by Color of Light Emitting Means (LED): FIGS. 85 to 87>
A specific example 1 of the setting suggesting performance is to cause an LED (light emitting means) arranged so as to be visible to the player to emit light in a setting suggesting color display mode (setting suggesting color), thereby executing the setting suggesting performance. The setting suggesting effect by the LED as in this example is also referred to as "LED setting suggesting effect". Here, the LED is a full-color LED (single LED) in which three primary colors of red, green, and blue are packaged (single LED), or a planar light source (hereinafter referred to as a planar LED) consisting of an aggregate of these LEDs and a diffusion plate. If necessary, the default (no suggestion) is white, purple (even number suggested), blue (odd number suggested), yellow (setting 2 or more (setting 1 negative)), green (4 or more confirmed), red (5, 6 confirmed), rainbow (6 confirmed) It is assumed that it emits light in colors such as The types of colors that these LEDs emit include those common to blue, green, red, D patterns, and rainbow colors used in the pending change notice, those common to blue, black, green, gold, and rainbow as the background color of a predetermined image during the jackpot game (for example, the display image related to the ending effect (end INT) (image notifying the end of the jackpot)), etc., and the specific character that appears during the pattern variation (for example, a character such as an alien or UFO related to a specific notice effect). Colors common to copper, silver, gold and rainbow can be used. In addition, it is possible to appropriately determine which color indicates what set value.

The LED (LED used for setting suggestion) according to the present example may be either a performance LED already provided in the game machine or a dedicated LED (setting suggestion dedicated LED) provided for setting suggestion, and it is free to decide which place the LED is to be used or in which place the setting suggestion dedicated LED is provided, and it is also possible to make the LED already placed somewhere for presentation emit light in a setting suggestion light emission mode (combined with notice performance). First, the LED according to this example will be described in detail.

For example, at least a portion (at least a portion of the surrounding LEDs) of a decorative lamp 45 (hereinafter also referred to as "surrounding LEDs 45") formed by providing a plurality of decorative LEDs in the circumferential direction around the front frame edge of the glass door 6 can be used for the setting suggesting effect. However, instead of using the decorative lamps 45 provided outside the glass door 6, LEDs provided inside the glass door 6 can also be used. For example, an LED (LED provided on the game board) for the number sector (reference numeral 85a shown in FIG. 85: hereinafter referred to as "number display section 85a") of the clock board section 81, or an LED provided at a certain location on the center ornament 48.

FIG. 85 shows a configuration in which planar LEDs 83b are arranged on the rear wall of the upper starting port 34 and the lower starting port 35 below the center ornament 48 of the game board 3, and the setting suggestion effect is performed by the light emission mode of the planar LEDs 83b. This configuration shows a configuration in which the setting suggesting effect is formed at a position where the player can easily check it while playing the game normally. Further, FIG. 86 shows a configuration in which the setting suggesting effect is performed using the number sector portion provided in the number display portion 85a. The form using the number display part 85a includes a form using only the number sector part at a specific position (FIG. 86(a)) and a form in which the lighting position changes (FIG. 86(b)).

Specifically, the former configuration shown in FIG. 86(a) is a “light-emitting point fixed type” in which the light-emitting point is fixed regardless of setting suggestion content (setting suggestion color). On the other hand, the latter configuration shown in FIG. 86(b) is a "light-emitting point variation type" in which the light-emitting point increases as the setting suggestion content (setting-suggesting color) with a relatively high degree of expectation for the high setting. In other words, it is a type in which the usage area of the setting suggestion effect varies according to the setting suggestion content (setting suggestion color). Regarding FIG. 86 (a) or (b), when performing a specific setting suggestion effect (for example, setting 6 confirmation suggestion), the entire number sector may be colored in rainbow color, the clock hand 82 may indicate a predetermined time (for example, 6 o'clock), or an effect (for example, glow, light, shadow, flare, gradation, etc.) may be applied.

Further, FIG. 87 shows a configuration example in which the surrounding LEDs 45 are used to perform setting suggestion effects. FIG. 87(a) shows a configuration in which a part of the surrounding LEDs 45 is used to perform the setting suggestion effect, and FIG. FIG. 87(a) shows four configuration examples. The two configuration examples (a-1) and (a-2) on the left side of the front show a small usage area in which one or several places of the surrounding LEDs 45 of the setting suggestion effect are used, and the two configuration examples on the right side of the front (a-3) and (a-4) show a large usage area of the LEDs, in which the upper half and the lower half of the use area of the surrounding LEDs 45 for the setting suggestion effect are used.

The configuration shown in FIG. 87(a) can be a "light emission point variation type" shown in FIG. 86(b). Note that if the setting suggestion effect is to be continued for a long period of time after the setting suggestion effect is once executed by the LEDs (see "1-2. Duration of the LED setting suggestion effect" described later), as shown in FIG. For example, in the case of the default without setting suggestion, the surrounding LEDs 45 as a whole function as LEDs for notice effect until some setting suggestion is made and the color changes to a color other than the default. However, after some setting suggestion is made and the color is changed to a color other than the default, at least a part of the surrounding LEDs 45 is made to function as a setting suggestion effect LED. When not used as an advance notice effect, control may be performed so that light is emitted in a default color (for example, white or off) (if the default is off, the light is off).

In FIGS. 86 and 87, at least part of "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) (part or all of the component 1081) may be caused to emit light according to the emission of the number sector provided in the number display part 85a or the peripheral LED 45. For example, for "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name 1080 associated with the model name logo 1090, "Fujimaru-kun" is lit up in FIG. 87(i-1), "Fuji" and "Maru" are lit up in FIG. In this case, corresponding to the emission colors of the surrounding LEDs 45 (suggested setting colors: here, white, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.), the characters of the model name logo 1090 (the character string of "Fujimaru-kun", each character) may emit light in the same suggested colors or in a color different from the emission colors of the surrounding LEDs 45. In any case, at least a part of "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name logo 1090 can be configured to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the lighting and blinking state of the surrounding LEDs 45 .

Contrary to the "setting suggestion priority type" in FIG. 87(a), the setting suggestion effect is performed when the surrounding LEDs 45 are not used for the notice effect, but when the surrounding LEDs 45 are used for the notice effect, a "setting suggestion non-priority type" may be configured in which the light effect of the notice effect is given priority over the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 87(d)).

In the case of waiting for customers (especially during the demonstration screen), it may be configured as a ``setting suggestion priority type'' that prioritizes the setting suggestion effect over the light effect related to the demonstration screen, so that the setting suggestion effect can be notified to the surroundings even during the standby screen, or conversely, it may be a ``setting suggestion non-priority type'' that prioritizes the light effect related to the demonstration screen. In the former case, even when the pachinko hall is waiting for customers, it is possible to appeal that the pachinko hall has introduced a high setting at the time of an event, etc., so that the operating rate can be improved. On the other hand, however, if it is reported to the surroundings, there may arise a problem that players will scramble for the high setting platform. Therefore, it suffices to appropriately decide which type to adopt.

It should be noted that any of the above-mentioned "light-emitting point fixed type", "light-emitting point variable type", "setting suggestion priority type", and "setting suggestion non-priority type" may be adopted as the configuration for performing setting suggestion effects using LEDs. In addition, any combination of these configurations, specifically, a “fixed light emitting location type” and “setting suggestion priority type” configuration, a “light emitting location fixed type” and “setting suggestion non-priority type” configuration, a “light emitting location variation type” and “setting suggestion priority type” configuration, and a “light emitting location variation type” and “setting suggestion non-priority type” configuration, may be freely adopted.

(Setting suggestion production using LEDs provided on movable body accessories: Fig. 85)
Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may be performed using an LED provided on the movable accessory. For example, the rear LED of the first movable body 91 (the corolla A1 or the corolla A2) can be used. In addition, for example, when a pseudo-continuation is performed, a character plate (movable character) such as "NEXT" provided at an appropriate place in the game machine can be moved to deterministically notify that the next pseudo-continuation will occur. For example, the logo plate 85 (usually hidden behind the center decoration 48) indicated by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 85 is configured to drop and move when the pseudo-ream is generated, and part or all of the letters "NEXT" (not shown) displayed on this logo plate 85 are illuminated in the suggested colors (white, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow).

(LEDs dedicated to suggesting settings: LEDs 83a, 84a, 84b, 84c in FIG. 85)
As described above, if the LED of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED of the advance notice effect are also used for the setting suggestion effect, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the color display mode of the normal decoration effect and the notice effect. Therefore, in the case of providing a setting suggestion dedicated LED, there are the following forms.

For example, as shown in FIG. 85, a planar LED 83a may be provided around the performance button 13 (exhilarating button 70), and this planar LED 83a may be used as a setting suggestion dedicated LED. The reason why the LED outside the performance button 13 is used is to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the notification during the operation effective period (button effective period) or the setting suggestion performance is used when the button LED 13b inside the performance button 13 is used. As another example, FIG. 85 shows an example in which LEDs 84a, 84b, and 84c are provided in the game board as LEDs dedicated to suggesting settings. These LEDs dedicated to the setting suggestion effect are provided at locations visible to the player, like the planar LEDs 83b described above.

The LED 84a is provided in the upper left part of the center decoration 48 of the game board, and the LED 84b is provided in the lower part of the center of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device, that is, in the front mounting plate 48a of the center decoration 48. These are examples of formation at positions where the player can easily confirm the setting suggesting effect while the player is playing the game normally, like the planar LED 83b. However, the LED 84c is provided so as to be adjacent to the various function display portions in the non-game area in the upper right corner of the game board, and is formed at a position where the player hardly sees it during a normal game. That is, in the case of the LED 84c, compared with the other LEDs 84a and 84b arranged in the game area 3a, it is formed at a position where it is easy to distinguish whether or not it is an effect LED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether it is the light effect by the notice effect or the LED setting suggesting effect. In particular, when the setting suggestion dedicated LED is formed in the non-game area, the player can easily confirm the contents of the setting suggestion effect without being confused with the light effect of the advance notice effect.

If the LED used for the advance notice performance such as the decoration lamp 45 is also used for the setting suggestion performance, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the color display mode in the normal decoration effect and the notice performance.

(1-1. Specific example of LED setting suggestion effect)
Next, an example of a configuration for suggesting settings by means of the LEDs will be described, paying particular attention to the display mode including the time of occurrence (opportunity for execution) and its duration.

The setting suggestion by the LED (LED setting suggestion effect) is performed by changing the LED from the default white to any one of the setting suggestion colors "purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow", for example, but the timing (execution trigger) for changing to the setting suggestion color is roughly classified into various timings such as "during the jackpot game", "during the symbol variation display game", and "waiting for customers (during demonstration start waiting effect or demonstration screen: see FIG. 82 (G) (J))".

First, a specific example of the trigger for executing the LED setting suggestion effect will be described. When an execution opportunity arrives, the LED setting suggestion performance may be executed without fail, or when a predetermined execution lottery is won, the LED setting suggestion performance may be executed, and when there are a plurality of execution opportunities, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to perform the execution lottery according to the execution opportunity.

(Execution opportunity related to jackpot game)
As an execution opportunity during the big win game, for example, when the big win is finished, specifically, there is a prescribed timing during the end INT (ending performance period), but the LED setting suggesting performance can be made to appear at the prescribed timing from the start to the end of the big win game. For example, during the start INT (opening performance period), during the round game of a specific number of rounds (specific round performance period), and during the INT between R of the specific number of rounds (INT performance period between rounds) and end INT (ending performance period), the LED setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined timing of at least one period.

Further, when the LED setting suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot game, for example, the following conditions (a1) to (a4) may be attached.
(a1) When winning a specific jackpot. For example, when winning the jackpot with the highest advantage (16R long open probability variable in this embodiment) or the jackpot with the lowest advantage (for example, 4R long open time short), the LED setting suggestion performance can be executed during the jackpot game.
(a2) When the number of jackpot winnings (specific jackpots may be counted) reaches a predetermined number of times, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
(a3) When the number of consecutive big wins (specific big wins during consecutive games may be counted) reaches a predetermined number of times, an LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
In addition, after executing the setting suggesting performance in the current big win, in the above (b1), every time the number of winning times of the big win reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the execution opportunity arrives every two times), and in the above (c1), every time the number of consecutive big wins reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the execution opportunity arrives in the two-time cycle of consecutive games (2 times, 4 times, 6 times, etc.)).

(a4) In addition, when a specific effect is executed during the jackpot game, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed. For example, when a predetermined image during the big win game (for example, a display image (image for notifying the end of the big win) during the ending performance (end INT)) is displayed (the predetermined image may function as a setting suggesting performance), the LED setting suggesting performance is executed. The LED setting suggesting effect in this case can be said to belong to the above-mentioned "linked setting suggesting effect" in that the execution of the predetermined image (specific effect) is a condition (here, the display effect of the predetermined image is the "master", and the setting suggesting effect by the LED in this example is the "subordinate"). However, even when the predetermined image (specific effect) and the LED setting suggesting effect are executed simultaneously or redundantly, if the LED setting suggesting effect does not set the execution of the predetermined image as a condition, the specific effect and the setting suggesting effect by the LED are effects executed independently and do not belong to the above-mentioned "linked setting suggesting effect".

(Execution opportunity related to symbol variation display game)
Further, the following (b1) to (b4) can be used as execution triggers related to the symbol variation display game, for example.
(b1) Every time the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variations) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 times) after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
(b2) When the number of pattern variations from the current big win reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the number of times of addiction to the next big win reaches a predetermined number, the LED setting suggesting performance can be executed.
(b3) When a specific notice effect is executed during the symbol variation display game, an LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. Specific advance notice effects include high-expectation advance notice effects such as SP reach and pseudo-reunion three times, but the specific notice effects are not particularly limited and can be determined as appropriate. In addition, when a specific pre-reading notice (for example, a pre-reading notice of a specific winning expectation level or more (red hold or more)) occurs, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.
(b4) In addition, it is possible to execute the LED setting suggesting effect at an appropriate timing related to the symbol variation display game shown in specific examples 2 and 3 which will be described later.

(Execution opportunity related to waiting for customers)
In addition, the following (c1) to (c3) can be used as an execution trigger for waiting for a customer (during the demonstration start waiting effect or during the demonstration screen).
(c1) At a predetermined timing during the demonstration start waiting effect (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the demonstration start waiting effect, or when the demonstration start waiting effect ends (demonstration screen starts), etc.), the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. In this case, the condition may be the time when the number of times of display during the demonstration start waiting effect reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, a plurality of times). By configuring the LED setting suggestion performance to be executable when the operation reserve balls are exhausted, even when the operation reserve balls are interrupted and the game cannot be started easily, a chance to execute the setting suggestion performance can be given to alleviate the player's frustration.
(c2) The LED setting suggesting effect can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the demo screen starts, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the demo screen, etc.) in the demo screen (demo movie (demonstration display)). In this case, the condition may be that the demo screen has been displayed a predetermined number of times.

(Other triggers)
Other execution triggers include, for example, the following (d1) to (d4).
(d1) When a predetermined time elapses after the gaming machine is powered on, or each time a predetermined time elapses, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed (a mode in which the timing of the execution trigger is managed by an RTC or a software counter).
(d2) When a predetermined time elapses from a specific timing (for example, start/end of a jackpot game, start/end of a specific game state, etc.), an LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. Note that the specific timing can be determined as appropriate.
(d2) When specific times (for example, 11:00 am, 3:00 pm, and 7:00 pm) arrive, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed (a mode in which the timing of the execution opportunity is managed by the time information of the RTC).
(d3) When the number of out balls (for example, the number of out balls in normal state or the number of out balls in all states) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 shots), or each time the predetermined number is reached, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed (a mode in which the execution trigger is managed by the number of hit balls).

A plurality of execution triggers of (a1) to (d3) described above may be combined. In particular, when the execution opportunity comes only once in a day's game, such as when a predetermined time elapses after turning on the power of the game machine in (d1), it is preferable to combine with other execution opportunities and make the execution opportunity of the LED setting suggesting effect come a plurality of times.

(1-2. Concerning the duration of the LED setting suggestion effect)
When the above timing (execution opportunity) is reached, the LED setting suggesting performance can be executed, but when the LED setting suggesting performance is executed, the setting suggesting can be continuously performed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.

Specifically, when a certain execution opportunity arrives, a setting suggestion effect is started in which the LED is illuminated in a setting suggestion color, and thereafter, the current setting suggestion color of the LED is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. (At the occurrence of SP reach, at the time of appearance of three pseudo-runs, etc.)", a predetermined timing during waiting for customers such as "Demonstration waiting for start of demonstration" or "during demo screen", or "until power cut off", and the end condition can be a predetermined timing during a pattern variation display game, during a jackpot game, or during waiting for customers.

One of the characteristic points of this example is that unlike the setting suggestion performance that appears only during the performance time (finishes in a relatively short time) such as ``appears only during the period in which the big win end screen is displayed'', the current LED setting suggestion performance can continue to appear over a plurality of game periods (for a long time). For example, it is possible to continuously appear over a plurality of game periods, or to continue appearing during a customer waiting waiting effect, one or a plurality of game periods, and a jackpot game period. Taking advantage of the fact that the LED setting suggestion effect is executed continuously for such a long period of time, a configuration having the following characteristics can be obtained.

(A-1) Configuration example 1
For example, if the case where the LED setting suggestion effect is executed at the end of the big win will be described as a representative example, the condition for ending the LED setting suggestion effect this time is ``when the next execution opportunity arrives and the LED setting suggestion effect is executed again''. This is a case in which information less useful than setting suggestion information is not notified, in other words, a case of "no downfall (only promotion if changed)". For example, white (no suggestion: default), purple (even number suggested), blue (odd number suggested), yellow (setting 2 or more confirmed), green (4 or more confirmed), red (setting 5 or more confirmed), rainbow (setting 6 confirmed) When emitting light, "white →" purple ⇔ blue (there is no advantageous or disadvantageous relationship between the even number setting suggestion and the odd number setting suggestion, treated as equivalent suggested color (suggestion content). Same below) → yellow → green → red → rainbow color unidirectional color change. For example, as shown in Fig. 86(a) and (b), this is a case in which there is no set-suggestion color descent.Therefore, in this LED setting-suggestion effect, if "rainbow color" with setting 6 confirmed appears, the "rainbow color" will be maintained thereafter, and the setting-suggestion effect will not change to red or green. In this way, by setting "only promotion in case of change", it is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that makes it easy to understand and confirm the event. In addition, by setting the changing color to ``promoted color only'', the more the number of games increases and the LED setting suggesting performance is executed (the more the setting suggesting promotion chance is encountered), that is, the more the player hits, the higher the accuracy of guessing the set value.

However, it is not limited to the case of promotion, and a case of ``there is a downfall (if it changes, there is a demotion)'' such that the rainbow color of the set 6 is confirmed at the first big hit, but can be changed to a color such as blue that suggests a low rank can also be configured to exist. In this case, even if the ``rainbow color'' appears this time, there is a case where a different setting suggestion color appears next time, but even if a useful setting suggestion color appears, a game period can be created in which only the player who makes the setting suggestion appear can secretly confirm it. Therefore, the chance that another player who plays the game later can confirm the setting suggesting information without any effort is reduced, and the feeling of inequality between the player who made the setting suggesting color appear with difficulty and the other player can be prevented. Regarding the configuration for performing the setting suggesting performance using the LED, it is possible to appropriately determine whether the above ``no succession (only promotion if changed)'' or ``possibility of succession (if changed, there is demotion)''.

A preferable configuration example in the above-described "specific example 1 of setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion by LED color)" is as follows. Note that the parentheses indicate corresponding elements in this configuration example, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) shooting means (shooting operation handle 15, shooting device 32) capable of shooting game balls toward the game area;
Lottery means capable of executing a jackpot lottery (lottery related to the jackpot) (S410 during special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 12);
Pattern display means (liquid crystal display device 36 or special pattern display devices 38a, 38b) capable of variable display of patterns;
production means capable of executing production (for example, an optical display device 45a including lamps and LEDs (decorative lamps 45), a liquid crystal display device 36, a vibrating device, a wind pressure device, a sound generator 46a, movable accessories 80 and 90, etc.);
Production control means (production control unit 24) capable of executing and controlling production by the production means,
When the result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined result, a special game execution means (special electric role product management process S095 in FIG. 9) for executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player,
In a gaming machine in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in a predetermined result differs according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The production control means is
A setting suggestion effect execution means (production control unit 24, FIG. 32, FIG. 82 to FIG. 86, etc.) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value,
The setting suggestion effect execution means includes:
At least a first setting suggestion effect for changing the effect mode of the effect means from a first effect mode (for example, first set suggested color: for example, white) to a second effect mode (second set suggested color: for example, purple, blue, yellow, green, red), and a second set suggested effect for changing the effect mode of the effect means from the second effect mode to a third effect mode (second set suggested color: for example, rainbow color) are executable,
When the rendering mode of the rendering means is changed to the second rendering mode by the first setting suggesting rendering, the second rendering mode is continued until the second setting suggesting rendering is executed (the second suggesting setting color is continued until a color change occurs due to the next setting suggesting rendering).
A gaming machine characterized by:

The configuration example related to (1) corresponds to the configuration example in which the first setting suggestion effect is continued after the first setting suggestion effect is executed until the second setting suggestion effect is executed next time, out of the above "(A-1) configuration example 1" in which the setting is suggested by the color of the LED. In terms of expression, it is simply "the effect mode of the effect means", but in the case of the LED, it is strongly conscious of the "LED effect mode of the effect means". In detail, the ``lottery means'' is ``lottery means capable of executing a lottery related to a big win when the starting means detects a game ball'', and the ``symbol display means'' in detail is ``symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of patterns and notifying the result of the lottery by the aforementioned lottery means in a stopped display mode of the symbols''. Also, the "special game executing means" is configured to be capable of executing a winning game according to the winning type (win type: for example, winning type shown in FIG. 4).

(2) the production control means,
setting suggestion effect execution lottery means for performing a lottery for execution of a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value at least based on the current set value under a predetermined condition;
The second rendering modes include a plurality of second rendering modes (for example, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) associated with set values,
The setting suggestion effect execution means includes:
executing any one of the plurality of second effect modes when winning a lottery by the setting suggestion effect execution lottery means;
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that:

In the configuration example related to (2), there are luminous colors (set suggestion colors) such as purple, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow related to the set value as the setting suggestion performance, and when winning a predetermined setting suggestion performance execution lottery, the configuration example changes to the color related to the current set value. In the lottery here, for example, the current set value is associated with a plurality of suggested setting colors, and the selection rate of which suggested setting color should be determined.

(3) The directing means
Including a plurality of effect means including a first effect means and a second effect means different from the first effect means,
The setting suggestion effect execution means includes:
configured to be able to execute the first setting suggesting effect by using at least the first effecting means and the second effecting means among the plurality of effecting means (for example, executing the setting suggesting effect using an LED and a liquid crystal display device 36);
The second effect mode by the first effect means (LED) is continued until the second setting suggestion effect is executed, and the second effect mode by the second effect means (liquid crystal display device 36) is terminated before the second setting suggestion effect is executed.
The game machine according to (1) or (2) above, characterized in that:

<Concrete Example 2 of Setting Suggestion Rendering: A Form in Which the Completed Shape of the Character is Different Depending on the Set Value: FIGS. 88 to 89>
Next, using FIGS. 88 and 89, a specific example 2 of setting suggestion effect will be described. In this example, setting suggestion is performed by changing (differentiating) the completed form of the character (completed form as a performance) according to the set value.

The trigger for execution of the setting suggestion performance (the trigger for completion of the character product) according to this example is a predetermined timing during a specific advance notice performance, for example, when the occurrence of a specific event with a high degree of interest to the player or the possibility of occurrence thereof is announced, suggested, or confirmed. in particular,
(a) When a high expectation notice occurs (for example, when SP reach develops, when pseudo series occurs 3 times),
(b) When a premium effect (probability effect) occurs during pattern fluctuation,
(c) At the time of winning/losing notification during pattern fluctuation (at the time of the above promotion effect or revival effect),
(d) When announcing winning a high-advantage jackpot such as a variable jackpot,
(e) At the time of holding continuous notification during a big hit game (during execution of holding continuous notification effect).

The above-mentioned (e) "suspended continuous notification effect" is a performance mode in which, when there is an activated suspended ball related to a jackpot winning (an on-hold winning retained ball) among the activated retained balls that existed at least at the start of the jackpot game, at a predetermined timing during the winning performance, such as the opening performance, the performance during a specific number of rounds, the interval performance between rounds after a specific number of rounds, or the ending performance, it is a performance mode in which it is notified that the existing balls with pending winning are present in the existing suspended balls. It is also notified which of the operation pending balls is the intra-hold winning pending ball (for example, the fact that the third operating pending ball is the intra-hold winning pending ball). It should be noted that whether or not there is an elected-reserved ball within the reservation, or whether or not any of the operation-retained balls is the elected-reserved ball within the reservation, can be grasped by the performance control part 24 side by receiving the above-mentioned reservation addition command (pre-reading determination information). In addition, the operation-reserving balls to be the target of the continuous-holding notification performance can be not only the operation-reserving balls existing before the start of the big win game, but also the operation-reserving balls generated before the execution timing of the continuous-holding notification performance after the start of the big win game.

Regarding the completed form of the role, there are cases where it is a ``prediction production form'' related to the ``winning expectation level'' such as a jackpot hit notice, winning/losing notification, and pending continuous notification, and a ``setting suggestion form'' related to the ``setting value''. For example, if there are a triangle (△) and a star (☆) in the final form of the role, both of them are a winning announcement with a winning expectation of 100% (the winning expectation and the content of the notice are the same). Further, the complete form here means the form that the movable accessory takes when it moves to a predetermined final position or in the process of moving.

(δ1) The accessory used in this example is, for example, a “united accessory” (for example, flower-shaped accessory 90) in which a plurality of movable accessories, such as the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower-shaped accessory (second movable body accessory) 90, cooperate to form one design (flower shape) by decorations applied to them. By using such a united accessory, (δ1-1) the degree of completion of a design formed by a plurality of movable accessories formed at a united position is differentiated according to the set value, or (δ1-2) a different unique design (significant unique design) is formed according to the set value. An example is shown in FIG.

(Setting suggestion production using united role: Fig. 88)
FIG. 88 shows a united character appearing in the form of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal. The illustrated movable accessory includes a combined decoration 501 (see Fig. (E)) that can form a unique design with the first decorative frame 501a and the second decorative frame 501b, and a gimmick-type combined accessory that can be moved (final position) to approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen (approximately the center of the combined frame 501). These are according to the settings. It is a united accessory that can configure different overall shapes. Note that although the process of uniting the role objects 511, 513, 515, and 517 is omitted, the state in which a plurality of movable bodies are united is shown.

FIG. 88(A) shows the default completed form A (default form). In this default form, only the first decorative frame 501a appears and the decorative body 501 is incomplete. Also, a circular accessory 511 appears as a gimmick-type united accessory.
FIG. 88(B) shows the complete form B that appears when setting 2 or more is suggested. The completed form B has the same ornament 501 as the default form, but an oblique cross-shaped accessory 513 appears as a gimmick-type combined accessory. The reason why the decorative body 501 is an incomplete form is that the completed form B shown in FIG. (B) is more likely to be selected in the low setting range (settings 1 to 3) than in the high setting range (settings 4 to 6).

When the high setting area is suggested, the first decorative frame 501a and the second decorative frame 501b are united vertically to form the decorative body 501, and the finished form including the decorative body 501 is obtained.
FIG. 88(C) shows a completed form C including the decoration 501, which appears when setting 4 or higher, which is a high setting range, is suggested. In the completed form C, a cross-shaped accessory 515 appears as a gimmick-type combined accessory.

Then, when it is suggested that setting 6, which is the highest setting, be established, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a decorative body 501 and an accessory 517 having a star-shaped polygon (in the illustrated example, an octagonal star) appear as a gimmick-type integrated accessory, so that a lively and flashy performance appears. In addition, at least the gimmick-type united accessories 511 to 517 have planar LEDs formed inside them, and when performing a movable body presentation, the center part glows beautifully in rainbow colors. Incidentally, when the completed forms A to C appear, the gimmick-type united accessories 511, 513, and 517 may be configured to be colored in accordance with the setting suggestions. For example, the final form A (default form) in FIG. (A) is white, the final form B is yellow, the final form C is red, and the final form D is rainbow.

(Setting-suggestion production using a separate role: Fig. 89)
It should be noted that, rather than a united accessory in which a plurality of movable accessories are combined to form a unique design, each of the plurality of movable accessories is formed as a unique unique design. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, in the default case, only one human-shaped gimmick role 521 (Fujimaru-kun's role) appears in FIG. In the case of suggesting that setting 5 or more is confirmed, human-shaped gimmick roles 521 and 523 (Fujimaru-kun's role and Fujika-chan's role) and a background role 525 consisting of a "heart-shaped role + logo plate" appear as shown in FIG. Also, it is also possible to adopt a group of movable bodies that simply belong to the same category (weapons), such as a group of movable bodies that have some relationship between the bodies, for example, a body that imitates a tank, a body B that imitates a fighter plane, and a body C that imitates a warship, that is, a group of movable bodies that imitate weapons.

In addition, there are the following (δ2) to (δ5) as modes for changing the completed form (final form) of the accessory depending on the set value.

(δ2) "Depending on the set value, the number of characters that operate or the combination of characters differs."
In this embodiment, the number of characters or the combination of characters that reach the final position differs depending on the setting value (the number of characters or the combination of characters that form the completed form differs). In other words, a plurality of types of accessories are prepared in advance, and the completed forms of the accessories are differentiated depending on how many movable accessories among the plurality of types of accessories have reached the final position, or which combination of the plurality of types of accessories has been completed when the accessories have reached the final position. This includes, for example, the following forms (A) and (B). Here, three types of accessories A to C are prepared, and an explanation will be given as a united accessory in which decorations applied to each are combined to form a significant unique design, but the accessories A to C may be the separated type accessories. In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the united role and the separated type are not particularly distinguished and will be referred to as a “united role” for explanation.

(A: The number of characters that operate varies depending on the setting value)
For example, it is a form suggesting that the setting value is relatively high as the number of characters to be operated is relatively large. Specifically, "only role A" or "only B" (default: no setting suggestion), "role A + role B" (setting 2 or higher confirmed), "role A + role B + role C" (setting 4 or higher confirmed), and the like. For example, it corresponds to the configuration example of FIG.

(B: The combination of characters (one or more combinations) differs depending on the set value)
For example, the default content is that only "accessory A" moves (one significant design is incomplete) and that there is no setting suggestion. Then, depending on the number of movable body accessories that have reached the final position or the combination thereof, for example, "only role B" = even number setting suggestion, "only role C" = odd number setting suggestion, "person A + role B" = setting 2 or more confirmed, "character A + role C" = setting 4 or more confirmed, "character B + role C" = setting 5 or more confirmed, "character A + role B + role C" = setting 6 or more confirmed, and so on. In this case, when "accessory A+accessory B+accessory C" (one significant design is completed), "setting 6 finalized" is announced.

(δ3) “The character moves differently depending on the set value”
In this embodiment, the movement of the character moving to the final position is varied according to the set value. In other words, if the default motion of the role object is, for example, "falling motion", other motions, such as vibration and reciprocating motion, are added to this. Specifically, in the default case, the movement of the character is "falling only", and there is no setting suggestion based on this, but if vibration or reciprocating motion is added, some setting suggestion is made. For example, “drop + small reciprocating motion” (even number setting suggested), “drop + mid reciprocating motion” (odd number setting suggested), “fall + large reciprocating motion” (setting 2 or more confirmed), “drop + vibration” (setting 4 or more confirmed), “drop + vibration + small reciprocating motion” (setting 5 or more confirmed), “fall + vibration + large reciprocating motion” (setting 6 or more confirmed). Further, as for the "vibration", instead of the vibration of the movable body accessory itself provided on the game board 3, the stimulus source means for the player may be used. For example, it may be vibration by a vibrating device provided on the shooting operation handle 15 (provides vibration to the operating hand), or wind pressure by a wind pressure device provided on the shooting operation handle 15 or the game machine (applies wind pressure to the player).

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "combined accessory", it can be configured as follows. For example, the higher the set value, the longer the preparatory motion from the original position A to the first position B (starting position for waiting to start moving) for one or all of the movable parts. As a result, it is possible to have a ``setting suggestive presentation form'' related to the set value by making a form in which the arrival at the first position B (start position) is delayed and the timing at which the second position C (final position) is reached is different. In the case of a united role, setting suggestions can be made by making at least one of the movable roles behave differently according to the set value, and leading to a complete form with the different action patterns.

(δ4) “The action ratio of the character is different”
This embodiment is a form in which the ratio (operation ratio) at which the role object operates (actuates) differs according to the set value. Specifically, when the role A operates at a certain timing, conventionally, the role A operates or does not operate according to the degree of expectation for winning, but in the case of this embodiment, the setting suggestion is performed by changing the operation ratio (operation probability) according to the set value. Specifically, regarding the action probability that the role object A will act, the higher the set value, the higher or lower the action probability can be. For example, in the former case, "5% for setting 1, 8% for setting 2, 10% for setting 3, 12% for setting 4, 15% for setting 5, 18% for setting 6", and vice versa for the latter, "18% for setting 1, 15% for setting 2, 12% for setting 3, 10% for setting 4, 8% for setting 5, 5% for setting 6". As a modification, when using the above-mentioned "combined accessory", the ratio of forming the completed form can be changed according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher or lower the probability of completion.

(δ5) “Different effects associated with characters”
In this embodiment, assuming that the movement of the accessory is, for example, a "falling motion", an effect (effect rendering) is executed in association with the falling motion, for example, to make the user guess the set value. This form can have the following configuration according to the type of effect presentation.

For example, in the case of effect presentation by light production, "fall + white" (no suggestion: default), "fall + purple" (even number setting suggested), "fall + blue" (odd number setting suggestion), "fall + yellow" (setting 2 or more confirmed), "fall + green" (setting 4 or more confirmed), "fall + red" (setting 5 or more confirmed), "fall + rainbow color" (setting 6 or more confirmed). As for the light effect, an LED provided on the accessory may be used, or an effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 may be used.

In addition, in the case of effect production by sound production, there are “fall + no sound effect” (no suggestion: default), “fall + first sound effect” (even number setting suggested), “fall + second sound effect” (odd number setting suggestion), “fall + third sound effect” (setting 2 or more confirmed), “fall + fourth sound effect” (setting 4 or more confirmed), “fall + fifth sound effect” (setting 5 or more confirmed), “fall + sixth sound effect” (setting 6 or more confirmed). The first to sixth sound effects are different sound effects, but the effect duration may be the same or different, and can be determined as appropriate. In addition, at least the sixth sound effect with setting 6 fixed is preferably a flashy effect sound with a relatively longer effect time width or a relatively louder volume than the other sound effects in the sense of a congratulatory effect.

Also, an effect production by image display (for example, character or item image) may be employed. For example, "fall + no background" (no suggestion: default), "fall + tank A" (even setting suggested), "fall + tank B" (odd number setting suggested), "fall + tank C" (setting 2 or more confirmed), "fall + tank D" (setting 4 or more confirmed), "fall + tank E" (setting 5 or more confirmed), "fall + tank F" (setting 6 or more confirmed).

In the form of (δ5), the action of the character itself is the same regardless of the set value, but by attaching a different performance mode (effect performance) according to the set value, it can function as a setting suggestion performance. This effect production can also be applied to (δ1) to (δ4) described above. For example, in the above embodiment of "(A) of (δ2)", "character A + character B + character C" was explained as suggesting "set 4 or more confirmed", but when the effect production of this example is applied, "character A + character B + character C + green" is "set 4 or more confirmed", "role A + character B + character C + red" is "set 5 or more confirmed", and "character A + character B + character C + rainbow" is "set 4 or more confirmed". As in "setting 6 confirmed", even if the number of action accessories is the same, a plurality of types of suggested setting contents can be determined by adding an effect presentation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of setting suggestions.

<Concrete Example 3 of Setting Suggestion Rendering: Form of Performing Setting Suggestion Rendering Through Operation of Operating Means: Fig. 90>
A specific example 3 of this setting suggestion effect is a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed through the operation of the operation means such as the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 .

For example, referring to FIG. 90, first, a state is shown in which a button valid period for accepting button operations (during button operation instruction) is entered during a predetermined advance notice effect (here, during SP reach) (FIG. 90(A)). In order to notify that the button valid period has started, the button LED 13b is switched from white to yellow lighting color, for example, as a pre-operation presentation, and a button notice presentation (operation instruction presentation) is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and an operation instruction image 155 consisting of a message "Press!", a timer image 156 indicating the remaining time of the button operation valid period, and a button image 157 simulating the presentation button 13 are displayed.

Then, when the effect button 13 is operated during the button valid period, setting suggesting effects shown in FIGS. (B) and (C) appear as post-operation effects. Fig. (B) shows, as an example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting "setting 4 or more confirmed" by the appearance of a disk image suggesting "setting 4 or more confirmed" and a message "class 1 close encounter", and Fig. (C) shows a setting suggestion production suggesting "setting 5 or more confirmed" by the appearance of an alien image and a message "class 3 close encounter". Incidentally, this setting suggestion effect may be irrelevant to the content of the advance notice effect, or may be related to the content of the notice effect (for example, see FIG. 83). Figures (D) and (E) illustrate the state in which the LED setting suggestion effect is displayed in a color related to the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion content) executed during the symbol change during or after the setting suggestion effect (figure (B) or (C)) is being executed (including after the pattern change is finished) during the symbol change.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect is performed through the operation of the operation means, but there are various opportunities for the execution. As already described, the input of the operating means is validated during a predetermined operation valid acceptance period (button valid period). Therefore, the target of this example is a configuration that enables execution of the setting suggestion effect when the button operation is performed during the button valid period. The button valid period (period during which execution of the setting suggestion effect is permitted based on the operation of the operating means) includes the following periods.

(.zeta.1) A period of waiting for a customer. Specifically, the valid period for switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). When the menu screen (for example, FIG. 82(H)) is displayed, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed. In this case, the LED setting suggesting effect may be executed when the player performs a switching operation to the menu screen, or the LED setting suggesting effect may be executed when the menu item is selected.

(.zeta.2) Predetermined period during symbol variation (during symbol variation display game). Specifically, a predetermined period during a specific advance notice effect (for example, notice effect including player participation type effect). For example, the example shown in FIG. 90 corresponds to this example.

(.zeta.3) A predetermined period during a specific symbol variation display game. The specific symbol variation display game is, for example, a game with a predetermined number of rotations after the power is turned on, or a game with a predetermined number of rotations or less, or a game with a predetermined number of rotations after the end of the big win game (after the end of the big win game of a specific big win).

(ζ4) Predetermined period during jackpot game. For example, a predetermined period during at least one of the opening effect, the effect during a specific number of rounds, the interval effect between rounds after a specific number of rounds, and the effect during the ending effect. In addition, this (.zeta.4) jackpot game may be only a jackpot game by a specific jackpot, or may be a jackpot game when the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number. Also, it may be the big win game of the first big win won after the power is turned on, or if the big win won after the power is turned on is the predetermined number of big wins, that big win game may be used.

(ζ5) All or part of the period during which the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. Specifically, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed when the operating means is operated during all or part of the period during which the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. For example, when the button effective period comes while the end interval screen change (FIGS. 52 and 53) is being executed and the effect button 13 is pressed during the effective period, the LED setting suggesting effect can be executed.

It should be noted that (ζ6) any of the embodiments described in the above specific examples 1 to 3 can be configured such that the setting suggestion effect is executed based on a predetermined operation of the operating means.

In addition, (ζ7) in the above-mentioned “Specific Example 2 of Setting Suggestion Effect”, when the player operates the operating means within the button effective period or when the button effective period has passed, this can be used as an execution trigger to operate the accessory. However, in this case, when the player does not operate the operating means and the button valid period has passed, that is, when the player does not participate in the button operation presentation related to the action of the role, the action of the role can be configured to perform a ``default action'' without any suggestion of setting. In other words, when the player does not actively operate the button, the action is controlled so as to perform only the action mode of informing "no setting suggestion" as a penalty. In this way, by creating a situation in which "setting suggestion information cannot be obtained without button operation", the player will actively perform button operations. As a result, the button operation effect (player-participation type effect) can be given great significance, and variations of the effect can be enriched.

As described above, regarding the execution of all the setting suggestion performances described in this specification, the setting suggestion performance may be executed (appeared) without fail when the execution opportunity arrives, or when the execution opportunity arrives, it may be determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance based on a predetermined execution condition. The latter form includes, for example, (I) a form in which a predetermined execution lottery is performed and whether or not to execute a setting-suggestion effect is determined based on the result of the lottery, (II) a form in which it is determined whether or not a setting-suggestion effect is to be displayed based on the operation result of one or a plurality of operating means, and (III) a form in which the setting-suggestion effect is executed when at least the first execution condition and the second execution condition are satisfied. This is a form having a plurality of conditions as conditions for executing the target setting suggestion effect. For example, when a predetermined execution lottery is won and operation means is operated, or when a specific effect is executed and a predetermined execution lottery or operation means is operated.

One or more of all the embodiments described above (including all of the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) may be combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are not limited to individual embodiments.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pinball game machine using game balls as the game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the pinball game machine. For example, it may be an arrange ball machine or a mahjong game machine, and other game media may be a game machine that uses game medals (rotary type game machine) or a management game machine that manages game media using electromagnetic recording means.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 game machine,
2 front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 main control unit (main control board),
24 production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 payout control board,
34, 34a upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a normal symbol start opening, normal symbol start opening sensor,
38a, 38b special pattern display device,
39a normal pattern display device,
50, 52a large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c normal fluctuation winning device, normal electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c special variable winning device, big winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 liquid crystal displays, decorative lamps, speakers,
49 out port,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 setting change completion switch,
97 setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 production control CPU, production control ROM, production control RAM.

Claims (2)

an operation means that can be operated by a player;
display means capable of displaying various effects including demonstration effects;
a display control means capable of controlling display by the display means;
a first mark that is composed of a plurality of individual elements and is arranged at a position visible to the player and that indicates the model name;
a first lighting control means capable of controlling lighting of the first mark;
an operation valid period control means capable of setting an operation valid period for the operation means;
a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is established;
In a gaming machine configured to be able to transition from a gaming state to a non-gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
The display control means is
When a specific condition is satisfied after the transition to the non-gaming state, the demonstration effect can be executed and controlled,
The non-gaming state includes a non-demonstration effect period in which the demonstration effect is not performed and a demonstration effect period in which the demonstration effect is performed,
The demo production period isto the display meansa first period in which the model name is not displayed;to the display meansincluding at least a second period in which the model name is displayed,
The first lighting control means is
During the non-demonstration production period and during the second period of the demonstration production period, all the individual elements of the first mark are lit in the same system color or all the individual elements are extinguished.
During the first period of the demonstration effect period, only a part of the individual elements of the first mark are lit, or all the individual elements of the first mark are lit so as not to be the same system color.
The first mark is configured such that the period of the first mode in the non-gaming state is longer than the period of the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
Provided with a measuring means capable of measuring the elapsed time from the transition to the non-gaming state,
The specific condition that triggers the execution of the demonstration effect includes at least the value measured by the measuring means reaching a predetermined value,
The measuring means resets the measured value when the player operates the operating means before the measured value reaches the predetermined value,
With the above configuration,
The period during which the first mark is in the second mode in the non-playing state when the operation means is operated is configured to be shorter than the period when the operation means is not operated,
2. The game machine according to claim 1, characterized by:

Images